Loading...
HomeMy Public PortalAboutORD13358 BILL NO. 2001-181 _ SPONSORED BY COUNCILMAN _—Jackson ORDINANCE NO, AN ORDINANCE OF THE CITY OF JEFFERSON, MISSOURI, AUTHORIZING THE MAYOR AND CITY CLERK TO EXECUTE AN AGREEMENT WITH GBH BUILDERS, INC. FOR CITY HALL REMODELING PROJECT, WHEREAS, GBH Builders, Inc. has become the apparent lowest and best bidder on the City Hall Remodeling Project; NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ENACTED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF JEFFERSON, MISSOURI, AS FOLLOWS: Section 1. The bid of GBH Builders, Inc. is declared to be the lowest and best bid and is hereby accepted. Section 2. The Mayor and City Clerk are hereby authorized to execute an agreement with GBH Builders, Inc. for City Hall Remodeling Project. Section 3. The agreement shall be substantially the same in form and content as that agreement attached hereto as Exhibit A. Section 4. This Ordinance shall be in full force and effect from and after the date of its passage and approval. Passed: 1' 1 _ Approved: Presiding Officer Mayor ATTEST: APPROVED AS TO FORM: City Clerk y C uride ~/ FINANCE I)1?I'AItTMENT 1'URCI-IASINC DI'V'ISION 5U 13.1E`Ct': Bid No, 1988 Interior Lower bevel Renovations, C'onlnllltlit\' Dcvelopnlent Opened un 19. 2002 BIDS Rl C1-1IVF.t): Base Biel Alt I (Delete) GBH 13uilcicrs, .Icflcrson City, X40 S 337,000.00 15,200.00 Wisch & Vaughan Construction C'o, .lel tcrson City. IM0 $ 351.400.00 -.` 20,000.00 Curtiss-\M,lllCS-Schulte, tile., F.ICIMI- N'10 $ 362.354.00 -$ 20,736.00 Scptrlgon CollStl•Lletloll CO.. lnc.. .lel'lersdn City. \10 `s 366,7=1.1.00 20.000.00 VCI'SIUCS Construction Co.. 111C.. .ICITel•S011 Cit\•. 1\10 S 379.((10.00 -$ 26.650.00 l Webert Builders. Inc.. C'ulunlhin. N10 y 381.400.00 -$ 9,900.00 United I-IIZ13 Gencral Contractors. Inc. .Icflerson City. i\110 S -118.400.00 36.500.00 A total ol'49 specilication and plan sets were dist►-ibuted by Architects Alliance. FISCAL NOTE- 1000-1800-7000-0030 Purchase/Improve 13uildifI&L'Ind 2001-2002 Budget $ 294.000.00 2000-2001 Reappropriation $ 225.440,00 Available fiends $ 519.440.00 Obligated `>; 91.189.00 Bid No. 1958 $ 337.000.00 Bid No. 1989 S 147.428.00 13ala11 cc (- $ 56.177.00) A supplemental appropriation is being rccluested to cover the rlcuativc balance. PAST PE?RFORNIANC'F.: The City has no recent experience with this vendor: however. staff believes that GBI-1 13uildCrs ol'Jefferson City, tilissouri will complete the project as specilicd and bid. RECOMNIE, I)ATION: It is the reconllllendation ol'stal'I'to award this project to the low bidder. (1131.1 Builders, lnc. ol',lefferson City, Missou►-i in the amount ol'.`�337.000.00. A'I"l'AC'I-I.MF',N'I"S - SUPPORTING DO(:'l!M ;NTATION Tabulation of Bids. Departmental Recommendation Signaluce _ LL�(� Purehasi ►:wifent f)ircctor. ('c 1 nunity lh�velo)mcnl I Me To: Terry Stephenson, Purchasing Agent From: Patrick E. Sullivan, P.E., Director Department of Community Develo 5ent Date: February 22, 2002 Subject: Bid No. 1988 Interior Lower Level Renovations The Department of Community Development has completed the evaluation of the bids for the Lower Level Renovations. We agree with the recommendation from Architects Alliance, Inc. to award the contract to GBH Builders, Inc. with their bid of $337,000.00 which was the low bidder for the project. The cost should come out of the 2001-2002 Capital Purchases Land Improvements, ® Account Number 1000-1800. If additional funding is required, the City Administrator will make the arrangements. r mmz � � b m N rn 0 � -r 0 0 -- m CAf� � �C cn m ADDENDUM 1 o � n C" = m BID SECURITY v � A. r z ou 3 .,.I W � < s -- cn Q ° O ° 4 0 z f!) a -� M, m a 0 0 '`� = z SIN c- c v O O o 0 0 In � zm - rn D I � `N Thomim P. Rockers 0.CL of Jefferson Mayor Departinant of Community Development Patrick E.Sullivan,P.E.,Diroctor 320 East McCarty Street - Phone:573.634.6410 Jefferson City,Missouri 65101 7 Fax:573.034.6457 March 7, 2002 GBH Builders, Inc. Steven D. Beck, President 3441 N. Ten Mile Dr. P.O. Box 945 Jefferson City, MO 65102 RE: John G. Christy Municipal Building - Interior Lower Level Renovations Project No. 0033 Dear Mr. Beck: Enclosed please find three (3) copies of the contract for the above referenced project. Please execute the contracts and return them by 5:00 p.m. Monday, March 18, 2002, along with the Performance and Payment Bond(s), Certificate of Insurance, and Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Policy Binder. The Certificate of Insurance must be issued by the company affording coverage. Certification from a local agent is not acceptable without necessary documentation empowering and authorizing the agent to !:ign the surety's name. In addition, if an aggregate amount is specified, a statement of the amount of that aggregate available to ® date must also be included. The ordinance authorizing the contract was introduced at the March 4, 2002 City Council meeting and should be approved by the Council at their March 18, 2002 meeting. Once the contract is approved and signed by the Mayor and City Clerk, the Department of Community Development will issue a Notice to Proceed on the project. You must submit the above documents in correct form before you begin work. Should you require additional information, please contact the Department of Community Development at (573) 634-6410. 8f Aick Paullivan, PE Director PES:bw Enclosures cc: arty Brose �hyllis Powell Central Files Project Manual lot ,��,'i�► � Specifications 'C9 JO�� G. C�RIST� City of Jefferson 320 East McCarty t ii ;r ji i �± y MUNICIPAL B[JII.�OINO . Jefferson City, Missouri INTERIOR LOWER LEVEL January 11 , 2002 RENOVATIONS PROJECT; 0033 7K s :r iairm- lnc, 631 West Main Street Jefferson City, Missouri 65101: Phone, (573)636-5000 Fax: (573)636-6133 :k Email architects @mail.ultraweb.net y7, . . �', ,. . 111S-1 i 't I - t�- ,,� i �:�, I �, ! :,, I, I I . � ",1,., , 1 - . ::.� I . .1 I I",.1 -—11 1 , �, , .. ... , `: ,t ,z �. ' �� I., 1,- �. I� 1.I I� I . I I I ,� � . ,� � I � �I I I I . I . , , 1., I I � � . I I I � . � � I � � � I . � I � � I � , , .. �.,:� II -, :� .:. . � � I I I � I I I 1, ; . �,� - � I : : I I -- - : , I . - . I :, 1 � I- I� I�, . - � ,. � . � , � I 1, �I I I� I I� I � I . � I � I . I . ;f ��I 1 — 11 - .11111 I I - . . I .I � I - I � I . � I � 11 I� � � � :: , � ��. .� ,��19::1.:�,��l � - I I ,. -:�-���� � �': ,:, -- I :. " : , :,,� I . � �, -I I I � 1. - �,. I ;. ,, ; �.� I I : ,, � . I I � � � I��11 I , I I I . � ��. :1.. :,:�1.:,, ,�,�- ,,,, , �,. I I I I �� I. I I� I I, I �� I - I I I :I �� I I I I . I I ,� I .1 ".�I I ,t . I I;�l ��' — -l-, � t, - � _ . I I I I -11 .., I q I.,� t.`t� ,- I.1 , ..: I� � � � I I . � I I ; - : �� , ,� � �l I� , I , .. 11 " I � I � � - � �, � . . I. ,,, � I , I I I I. �� �- - , -, �I�t 1 I . - I �: - � :",, ,, ,I- . - I � I �, I I �I � I I � 4� I :. :.�, , �,.,� �: � � I ,�� � I 11 . I� . . I I � � I I � ,� , , i I� I" ,I.�I. ., -1.,,I I � I ,�,� I � I I I I I � . :. ��,, � :, �,� I. 1, . �I 11�I I-.1� I I � I ��:., , ,, I I� , I I I I I I � � , , ,­ I I�I I .I�, ., * . . 11,;,.;���� �,� I � I I I� I . . %, � .:c �� I I � I �� I ���l I� I I� I I I� I I�I I.I I� I I I I .�. � I.�", �,I �, I: *�-,� .-� ,, � I� ,, ,, . , :1��... , . I TNIS PAGE INT.ENTIONALLY LEFT"BLANK ,, . u: ,� . ■ .: ,tl, I I - I �.I I � I I I I - ". I I � : � t � ,. ,. t . ?.� t t r. : t y f 5 - } �� s }s :)' v V t t a ( I7 k I.., .. ... : �. .. .-_ ,i: .. . t� �T �l� r s,. 1 z .. ... ' j t. . . ;i; 2000 Edition - Electronic Format AIA Document G701— 2000 Change Order PROJECT: CHANGE ORDER NUMBER: ONE OWNER Q (Hann am/a t/drrss) DATE: March 20, 2002 ARCHITECT EX INTERIOR LOWER LEVEL RENOVATIONS John G. Christy Municipal Building ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NUMBER: 0033 CONTRACTOR (� 320 E. McCarty St.,Jefferson City, MO u TO CONTRACTOR: CONTRACT DATE: March 20, 2002 FIELD F_I (Nann an(h hlress) CONTRACT FOR: OTHER GBH Builders, Inc. Interior Renovation 3441 N.Ten Mile Drive, PO Box 945 Jefferson City, Missouri 65102 THE CONTRACT IS CHANGED AS FOLLOWS: (/nc-lade, AUTHENTICATION OF THIS The Contractor agrees to Substantially Complete the revised Phase I Area (Office Area ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA North of Entry 128 & Corridor 131, previously described as Phase 2 & part of Phase 1) of DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING the project within Sixty-Nine (69)calendar days'or June 7, 2002 and all the remaining Work AiA DOCUMENT D401. of the Project, revised Phase II (previously described as Phases 3, 4, 5 & part of Phase 1) within One Hundred Fifty-Two(152)calendar days or August 29, 2002 and further agrees to pay to,or allow the Owner as liquidated damages,and not as a penalty of forfeiture,the sum f Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00)for each calendar day occurring thereafter that the entire W/he ork or each Phase of the Work is not Substantially Complete. revised construction schedule is as follows: Phase Begin Construction March 30, 2002 Substantially Complete Construction June 7, 2002 Complete Furniture Installation June 13, 2002 Complete Owner Move June 17, 2002 Phase II Begin Construction June 17, 2002 .... Substantially Complete Construction August 29, 2002 Complete Furniture Installation Sept. 10, 2002 J� Complete Owner Move Sept. 16, 2002 Final Project& Punch List items 100% Complete Sept. 26, 2002 The original(Contract Sum) W4t mnieedMaxin Lim-h+iee}was s 337.,000.00 The net change by previously authorized Change Orders s 0.00 a�A DO AIAa The(Contract Suns)(Gittif *1+_ect-A�ki�+ttmfm PriEe)prior to this Change Order was s 337,000.00 AIA DOCUMENT G701-2000 The (Contract Sum) (-GURFOweed-Maxitiim i-l4i�}will be(4t i,efi-;-(tleetrasery(unchanged) by CHANGE ORDER The American Institute of this Change Order.iit-4k"tmetmt eki Architects The new (Contract Sum) (Qlaraiiteect-A4d*4ii*m-PFiee4 including; this Change Order will be s 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. 337,000.00 Washington, D.C.20006-5292 The Contract Time will be(itiereased) (decreased) 112 )calendar clays. The date of Substantial Completion as of the dale of this Change Order therefore is June 7, 2002 for Phase I and August 29, 2002 for Phase II &entire construction renovation project. (D 2000 The At can Institute ot Architects, Repro uct on of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and III subject the violator to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying; violates U,S. copyright ws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution, This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below, expiration as noted below. User Document. G701 CHANGE ORDER NO. ONE--3/18/2002.AIA License Number 1007329, which expires on 8/31/2002, 1 NOTE: This Ch:t igo Order does trot include ch+utl,cs in ilie C:rattrao 511111, Contract 'Tillie or Guarnitteed Maximum Price which have been authorized by Construclioll Change Directive for which the cost or time are in dispute its described in 5ubparnl,ruph 7,3.8 or AIA Document Aznt. Not valid until signed by the Architect, Contractor and owner. The Architocts Allianco GBH Builders, Inc. City of Jefferson ARCHITECT CONT CTO R i ,���tc'11c A, rte J i rdlure f ~� l tii;n;rlurr) Larru 1) 1�r a'4 61 �l-k A, A—La BY BY DATE DATE DATE ry The American institute at Architects, Reproduction ot the material erein or su stant a quotat an of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S, copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution, This document was electronically produced with a., permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date.of expiration as noted below, expiration as noted below, User Document: G701 CHANGE ORDER NO. ONE--3/18/2002.AIA License Number 1007329, which expires on 8/31/2002. 2 PROJECT MANUAL and SPECIFICATIONS INTERIOR LOWER LEVEL RENOVATIONS JOHN G. CHRISTY MUNICIPAL. BUILDING 320 EAST MCCARTY STREET JEFFERSON CITY, MISSOURI Project Number: 0033 January 11, 2002 For CITY OF JEFFERSON 320 East McCarty Street Jefferson City, Missouri 65101 Prepared by: THE ARCHITECTS ALLIANCE, INC. 631 West Main Street Jefferson City, MO 65101-1531 Telephone (573) 636-5000 Fax (573) 636-6133 r � .. I I I I I I � I �. . I I . I � � I I ." 1 . I I �I �I I . �'. 1 :'ll, . � . 1 I � . .I'll I 111 . 11 I . I 11 11 1. 11 � I ' ' I . I � 11 1. 11 - . I I I � I I I I - - I - I � � I . �I � I . I I " I'll . I "`5. �.1.. :I. :,. .., ..1.' � L � ':1. ., � � � : . %, � , ' ':�-i; :1- �,::_ � I i,: .` , I I I I I- I � � . ,, - . . ,� I :,: . � ., : ,, � :, , i � ; I �I . � , : � m: ,��.,,. .I .: �-�. I !� I� ,"I i�,� I I� .� , .��I I I I ':'� � , "� " ,� I � . :, I I � 1 . �. � I I� �. I , , , . : �. � � � I �I I ��� �. .� � � I I �11 "� .A . . I I : �� ::, i, , I :: I,' .a P: : .: I I I �'I- I : ,t ,1 .. I :- .I.� . .1 � I m �� .:' . I 11 I I I I I � � I I I . � I � - � I 11 - � - I I.- , �:: ,, ��� I � I I I I� . I I I .. I .1 I .. .. '. �I I � �I I �I I�� . 11 � . 1 . -r - .1. - ' I - - I � .: 1! 11 -11� I .��' t ' ' I 1. 11�. . I'i - - ��'' I '' 1 - . 11 � I -,1 .11 � � 111-1. 11 -1- � � : . 1 I I li: ' �� , ,"�� : I I , � , . I I .�I I. . .I I.I � I I � . � I... �.. -: ��-.i,� �.� I ... I: 11 : � �I I � � .- ��I I�I I 11 .I � . . � I I I I � � I- � - � I I ! I I I 11 . I ,I,: .': I. .,I ' , THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK . .. ":f 11. . . I .1 � - . �. -'� I � I ,, , t � .. s. �i 0 5 i.. f' .' +t,a I �, I . I I 11.�I I I , .1 I �����: '��;.i:1 1 4 i. .. .. .:' ..:` } 7 d i Y.11 i Tf "' '1 �� i.. ,:: 4 is : ' { x�%5 i , r ., :: ;.: PROJECT MANUAL and SPECIFICATIONS INTERIOR LOWER LEVEL RENOVATIONS JOHN G. CHRISTY MUNICIPAL BUILDING CITY OF JEFFERSON 320 East McCarty Street Jefferson City, Missouri Project Number 0033 Schedule of Drawings 1 Page Notice to Contractors 1 Page Instructions to Bidders 1 Page Proposal Form 5 Pages Wage Rates 15 Pages Affidavit of Compliance 1 Page Construction Contract w/General Conditions 4 Pages Supplementary General Conditions 2 Pages DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 Summary 4 Pages 01140 Work Restrictions 2 Pages 01250 Contract Modification Procedures 3 Pages 01270 Unit Prices 2 Pages 01290 Payment Procedures 4 Pages 01310 Project Management and Coordination 4 Pages 01330 Submittal Procedures 7 Pages 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 5 Pages 01731 Cutting and Patching 4 Pages 01732 Selective Demolition 7 Pages 01770 Closeout Procedures 6 Pages DIVISION 2—SITE CONSTRUCTION Not Applicable DIVISION 3- CONCRETE Not Applicable DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04720 Cast Stone 4 Pages 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies 9 Pages DIVISION 5 - METALS Not_ADplicable DIVISION 6-WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 4 Pages 06402 Interior Architectural Woodwork 7 Pages TABLE OF CONTENTS 0033 TOC - 1 DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07920 Joint Sealants 6 Pages DIVISION 8 - pQORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 4 Pages 08211 Flush Wood Doors 5 Pages 08334 Overhead toiling Grilles 5 Pages 08711 Dour Haruware 11 Pages 08800 Glazing 7 Pages DIVISIO VL9 - FINISHES 09260 Gypsurn Board Assemblies 9 Pages 09310 Ceramic 'rile 7 Pages 09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 6 Pages 09651 Resilient Floor Tile 5 Pages 09653 Resilient Wall Base and Accessories 5 Pages 09680 Carpet 5 Pages 09911 Painting 10 Pages DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10101 Visual Display Surfaces 7 Pages DIVISION 11 — EQUIPMENT Not Applicable DIVISION 12—FURNISHINGS Not Applicable DIVISION 13 & 14 Not Applicable r DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL 15000 Mechanical and Electrical General Conditions 17 Pages 15010 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 4 Pages 15020 Mechanical — General 1 Page 15150 Refrigeration Piping 11 Pages 15500 Fire Protection 6 Pages 15600 Mechanical Equipment 1 Page 15610 Air Handlers and Coils 2 Pages 15650 Terminal Units 4 Pages 15740 HVAC Water Coils 1 Page 15790 Condensing Units and Condensers 3 Pages 15810 Electric Heat 1 Page 15900 Air Distribution 11 Pages 15910 Start-up, Cleaning and Testing 4 Pages 15930 Balancing 4 Pages 15960 Temperature Control 2 Pages TABLE OF CONTENTS 0033 TUC - 2 Davis N 16 -ELECTRICAL 16010 General Provisions 6 Pages 16110 Raceways and Fittings Pages 8 16120 Conductors 3 Pages 16143 Wiring Devices 3` Pages 16452 Grounding System 2 Pages 16470 Paneiboards and Safety Switches - 6 Pages 16477 Fuses 2 Pages 16480 Motors and Motor Controls 4.' Pages 16500 Lighting Fixtures 3 ' Pages 16721 Fire Alarm System 12 Pages 16741 Telephone and Data Systems 1 Page r a.. �I TABLE OF CONTENTS , 0033 TOC 3 I. I I �. I . .,� I I .1 I I I I : Itl �,-— I � 11 � . I I I � I � I I � I I I � �. � . . �� ,�,. . I :1 I. I .. . �, , � . , � . I � I 1,I � I . I I I I I � � � . , � , ��, :,, .. I:, ,:� ,,� , .�. I 1:, ,'', I . I . . I — I I � I � I � — 1. � I 1 c 11. 1 ' , .. I I I 11 , � 1. I I — . � — . . 1 I � � . 11 , I � 1 . 1 . � - — 1:i,,� � �, . � — I � � � . � .I �� �.: I I � 11 I I�, I I I - - I .: . I .I� .— I -I ;� :.1�� �1 .', �� � I I .� I�.I I I I . I -I I I d,. I I . I ,� I 1 -,��� .11 �1, 1 � 1 . - I 1. . , ::`'; ;. k 1.. i, - �t' r s ..:. , , , I I I : :. t.� �� , , , i ",��::, ;— .: �� I 2 ,. , - -, -4.1,. ,�""�:!i ,� :�� ,1 11 ,�.:,;.��, �,� . ,, , ,��,,�* ,:,� -: :�, � � , . ,� �.,i:: , � � , �I I I � �, ,�, � I. , . I,��,,- ,��-,��, i �,-*,, - ��,,, , � , I� � �.: -,:: 1, , , ",,: � ,�,, - � � � .0 ��� : , � � , �, — — . I S . .`: .. i 4 .'t ,. - :�t t. ... t:t . .. ; ,�}}: Z I i, "I . � I r. .. "� , r . . . . r. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK �, . is , ti . I . —1 : , .. k .. I ., , ' ... .. ,�, -,s� i" !,,,;.,*I.. ,,,-�, , .,,_ -�,�. , . . . .:.,. ,,. .. . t.. . . , ., . .: :: .qJ 5 .iw t '3- 7 _t,' f , i t� Y c f2; td �3 i '1 L .. ft' �r " t'x i d :�'{ }11 F . . 1 st , �d l r, - '< E 11 A d ..k i tz , j t ;�}z^ SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS GENERAL G101 COVER SHEET/DRAWING INDEX/PROJECT INFO.NICINITY MAP N ARCHITECTURAL D101 LOWER LEVEL DEMOLITION PLAN A101 LOWER LEVEL FLOOR PLAN, WALL TYPES & DETAILS A201 NOT USED A301 NOT USED 1 A401 NOT USED A501 DOOR SCHEDULE, FRAMES, DOOR TYPES & BLDG. SECTION A601 FINISH SCHEDULE & CASEWORK A602 CASEWORK A603 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A701 LOWER LEVEL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN F101 L.L. FURNITURE LAYOUT (Reference Only) MECHANICAUELECTRICAUPLUMBING ; M-1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION PLAN - DUCTWORK M-2 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION PLAN - PIPING M-3 MECHANICAL RENOVATION PLAN - DUCTWORK M-4 MECHANICAL RENOVATION PLAN — PIPING M-5 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES AND DETAILS E-1 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION E-2 ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN E-3 ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLAN SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS 0033 Pagel NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS Sealed bids for Interior Lower Level Renovation, John G. Christy Municipal Building, 320 East McCarty Street, Jefferson City, Missouri until 3:00 p.m., February 19. 2002, at the Office of the Purchasing Agent, City of Jefferson, John G. Christy Municipal Building, 320 East McCarty Street, Jefferson City, Missouri 65101, at which time they will be publicly opened and read aloud in the City Council Chambers. A certified or cashiers check or bid bond executed by the bidder and an approved Surety Company in the amount of five percent (5%) of the bid shall be submitted with each bid. Plans and specifications can be obtained from The Architects Alliance, 631 West Main Street, Jefferson City, Missouri 65101-1531 upon deposit of $100.00 per set, company or cashier's check payable to City of Jefferson. Deposit will be refunded upon return of the documents in good condition within twenty-one (21) days following receipt of bids. A Pre-Bid Conference and Site Tour is scheduled for 3:00 p.m., February 7, 2002 at the City Council Chamber, Upper Floor Level, John G. Christy Municipal Building, 320 East McCarty Street, Jefferson City, Missouri. All bidders are urged to attend. The Contractor shall pay not less than the prevailing hourly rate of wages for work of a similar character in the locality in which the work is performed, as determined by the Department of Labor and Industrial Relations, Division of Labor Standards, State of Missouri, as set out in the Project Manual. Payroll records will be required from the contractor by the Owner. The Contractor shall be required to furnish a performance bond and labor and material payment bond in an amount equal to 100% of the contract price, with a duly authorized surety company satisfactory to the Owner, per the project manual. The City of Jefferson reserves the right to reject any and all bids and to waive any and all informalities in such bids. Likewise, the City of Jefferson reserves the right to select the lowest and best bid which is in the best interest of the City. No bid may be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days subsequent to the specified time for receipt of bids. Equal Opportunity Employer NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS 0033 NTC - 1 t INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS A. Bidders Representations: 1. The Contractor shall pay not less than the prevailing hourly rate of wages for work similar character in the locality in which the work is performed, as determined by the Department of Labor and Industrial Relations, Division of Labor Standards,State of Missouri, as set out in the Project Manual. 2. City of Jefferson, Missouri is exempt from Taxation pursuant to Missouri statutes, purchase of materials and equipment for Work of this contract is exempt from Missouri Sales and Use Tax. Contractors, subcontractors, and suppliers shall comply with all provisions of Missouri Law including properly documenting and maintaining records of applicable sales. B. Bidding Procedures: This Project Manual includes a complete set of bidding forms, These are for the convenience only of Bidders and subbidders and are not to be detached from the Project Manual, filled out or executed. A set of blank forms will be furnished to Bidders. One (1) fully executed and signed set shall be submitted in a sealed and clearly marked envelope identifying the project and the Bidder. C. Bid Security: A Bid Bond (AIA Document A310, Bid Bond) payable to the Owner executed by the Bidder and an approved surety company, in the amount of five percent (5%) of the Bid shall be submitted with each bid. D. Performance Bond and Payment Bond: 1. The successful Bidder shall furnish a performance bond and labor and material payment bond with the Owner named Obligee, in an amount at least equal to 100%of the contract price as security for the payment of all persons performing labor on the project and furnishing materials in connection therewith under his contract as set forth in the standard of performance and payment bonds. The Surety on each bond shall be a duly authorized surety company satisfactory to the Owner. 2. The Bonds required herein shall be written on a form approved by the Owner, equal to AIA Document A312, Performance Bond and Payment Bond. Bidder shall furnish at no cost to Owner, if requested, a properly certified copy of the current Certificate of Authority to transact business in the State of Missouri for the surety Company executing the required performance bond, such certificate to remain on file with the Owner. END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 0033 IB- 1 j r PROPOSALFORM (REVISED 2/13102) BID TIME: 3:OOpm BID DAIg._ZaQOZ r FROM: GBH Builders, Inc. hereinafter called the Bidder TO: CITY OF JEFFERSON 320 East McCarty Jefferson City, Missouri 65101 hereinafter called the Owner FOR: INTERIOR LOWER LEVEL RENOVATIONS JOHN G. CHRISTY MUNICIPAL BUILDING 320 East McCarty Street Jefferson City, Missouri Architect's Project No. 0033 hereinafter called the"Work" i 1. The undersigned, having examined and being familiar with the local conditions affecting the Work and with the t contract documents including the drawings, Notice to Contractors, Instruction to Bidders, City of Jefferson Construction Contract with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 General Requirements and the body of technical specifications, including raddenda number 1 :through 1 inclusive, as issued by The Architects Alliance, Inc., 631 West Main Street, Jefferson City Missouri, hereby propose to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, services, etc., required for the performance and completion of the aforementioned Work as follows: 1 BASE BID : The sum of -� 4,.�..:^Mt ljr,�: C� .�.,• -L.Nu�k -,� Dollars ($ _`)3 i (NOTE: This project is exempt from Missouri Sales and Use Tax) PROPOSAL FORM 0033 PF- 1 OF 6 r 2. ALTERNATES (Reference Section 01230 —Alternates for fuilher description): State the amount to btu added or deducted from the Base Bid If the Owner accepts any or all the following Alternates. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all of the Alternates and to select alternates in any order. ALTERNATE NO. 1: DELETE PHASING OF THE PROJECT. ff DEDUCT from Contract,the sum of "'°°" The Contractor agrees to Su stantially Complete the Wyk under a single phase project, if the deduct alternate is accepted, within ...�i.�.n: 4,�,�Y �,V (L�u� (, _;cf ) calendar days, or allow liquidated damage as specified. ! 3. UNIT PRICES UNIT P.RIICCE NO. A— Replacement of Existing Mechanical HVAC Terminal Unit, 300 CFM UNIT SIZE: // �'rvr���rrle Avrt r,�1'G -1 iS011ars ($_ 92- ) per each unit. UNIT PRICE NO. B— Replacement of Existing Mechanical HVAC Terminal Unit, 500 CFM UNIT SIZE: dollars ($`j 2.00 } per each unit. , UNIT PR�ItC NO. C—Replacement of Existing Mechanical HVAC Terminal Unit, 750 CFM UNIT SIZE: Xv r -c dollars ($_ /� C� ) per each unit. UNIT PRICE NO. D—Replacement of Existing Mechanical HVAC Terminal Unit, 1000 CFM UNIT SIZE: 17C �fCtf/SGr�rr� j /e e �yn n4_1� dollars ($ /� �s C�C� ) per each unit. UNIT PRICE NO. E— Replacement of Existing Mechanical HVAC Terminal Unit, 1500 CFM UNIT SIZE: �/1t fcp�;'<�n� r�� /LI�n�Y ✓ dollars ($ r{ 30, 0 _) per each unit. UNIT PRICE NO. F — Replacement of Existing Mechanical HVAC Terminal Unit, THERMOSTAT, including all wiring for complete operation: f-i✓e W11W1 dollars ($ :50eI ) per each thermostat. 4. PREVAILING WAGE LAW: The Bidder agrees to pay not less than the hourly rate of wages as determined by the Department of Labor and industrial Relations, State of Missouri, in accordance with Section 290.210 to 290.340 as amended RSMo. 1978, 5. PROGRESS AND COMPLETION: The Contractor agrees to Substantially Complete lete all the Work within Two Hundred Sixty-Four(264) calendar days and further agrees to pay to, or allow the City of Jefferson, as liquidated ' damages, and not as a penalty or forfeiture, the sum of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) for each Calendar day occurring thereafter that the entire work or each Phase of Work is not substantially complete per the construction schedule included under section 01100-SUMMARY. ' 6. Accompanying this bid is a Certified Check or Cashier's Check in the amount of Five Percent dollars ($ 5% ). or a 5% bid bond payable without condition to City of Jefferson, which it is agreed shall be retained as liquidated damages for the delay and extra expense caused the Owner if the undersigned fails to execute the contract and furnish the bond required by the contract documents. ' PROPOSAL FORM 0033 PF -2 OF 5 7, SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS: The Bidder hereby certifies that the following subcontractors and suppliers will be used in the performance of the Work: Name and Address of Subcontractor or Supplier: Work to be Performed: Gypsum Dr),wall I,c� t 1 �Z--7 4) �w/�,� `.GWe. Acoustical Ceilings 1 r �.�•�-- .S• �t.s.,t 1''�?"lk.�s Painting 1 _ e,44 Carpet and Resilient Flooring Z3�. 41A-111 f' Ceramic Tile Flooring 1 � � 1 f: Architectural Woodwork(Casework) Mechanical HVAC C fU,,hC/ Electrical 8. In submitting this bid, it is understood that the right is reserved by the Owner to reject any and all bids and it is 1 agreed that the bids may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty days from the specified time for receiving bids. 1 9. THE BIDDER HEREBY CERTIFIES: That this Proposal is genuine and is not made in the interest of or behalf of any undisclosed person,firm or corporation and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any group, association or corporation; 1 That he has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham proposal; That he has not solicited or induced any person, firm or corporation to refrain from bidding; and, 1 That he has not sought by collusion or otherwise to obtain for himself any advantage over any other bidder or over the Owner. ' That he not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employrrrent because of race, creed, color or national origin in connection with the performance of work. ' Dated this 19th _day of Feb r.uar-y 20 02 PROPOSAL FORM 0033 PF-3 OF 5 r FAN INDIVIDUAL Name of Individual Telephone Number Firm name (if any) _ ' Address for Communications Signature 1 ' IF A PARTNERSHIP (State Names and Residence Address of all Partners) Name of Partnership Partner _ Residence Address Partner Residence Address Address for Communication Federal Tax I.D. Number rTelephone Number _ Signature of Either Partner r r PROPOSAL FORM 0033 PF-4 OF 5 1 IF A CORPORATION GBH IIui.J.ders, Inc. Incorporated under the laws of the Stale of: Name of Corporation Missouri. Steven D. Beck, President Corporate license No. 00490275 Name and Title of Officer (If a corporation organized in a state other than Missouri, attach Certificate of Authority to do business in the State of Missouri) Signature of Officer 3441 N. Ten Mile Drive PO Box 945 Jefferson City, MO 65102 Address for Communication 573-893-2277 43-1907601 Telephone Number Federal Tax I.D. Number (Attest) (Seal) Se et ry Jake get (Each bidder must complete the Proposal Form by signing In the proper signature line above and by supplying the required information called foe in connection with the signature. r PROPOSAL FORM 0033 PF 5 OF 5 Bond No. BID I3ID BOND The American Institute of Architects, AIA L)ocument No. A310 (February, 1970 Edition) ' GBI I BUILDERS INC. 3441 ORT -I T� J KNOW ALL MEN I31� 'I I1LSL PRESENTS,1 S, that we N 1 1:1 MILE DRIVE,JEFFEItS_ON CITY MO 65102 as Principal hereinafter called the Principal, and FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto CITY OF JEFFERSON, 320 EAST McCARTY STUET, JEFFERSON CITY MO 65101 as Obligcc, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of FIVE PEItCENT OF BID AMOUNT------------------------ ' Dollars ($""--""'°5°�o-"'" ), for the payment of which sum well and truly to he made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns,jointly and severally, fiirtnly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for CITY HALL INTERIOR LOWER LEVEL RENOVATIONS. NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terns of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof', or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference riot to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this 19TH day of FEBRUARY 2002 / GBH BUILDERS, INC. / ,� ? _ !Ct.C�.L%'�� Principal-� • � iil (Seal) Witne ' By: 5'ec;�. Name/Title FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND Surety (Seal) / Witness I3y: John Ii. Williams Attorney-in-Fact Power of Attorney FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND HOME OFFICE: 3910 KESWICK ROAD, BALTIMORE, MD 21211 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, a corporation of the State of Maryland, by PAUL C. ROGERS, Vice President, and J. G. HAMILTON, Assistant Secretary, in pursuance of authority granted by Article VI, Section 2, of the By-Lajas of said Company, which are set forth on the reverse side hereof and are hereby certified to be in Nil force and effect on the date hereof, does hereby nominate, constitute and appoint John FI. WILLIAMS and Jane CONOVER, both of Quince, ll nois, EACH its true and lawful agent and Attorney-in-Fact, to make, execute, seal Ind deliver, for, and,'; tt its behalf*'��urety, and as its act and decd: any and all bonds and undertakings and the execution of such bonds,�pYrJr ticrtakin rsuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon said Company, as fully and amply, to all intents apip4�6oscs, as<E2%Z had been duly executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of the Company at its offiQ I3altimor6gq , in their own proper persons. The said Assistant Secrctar� does hereby certify d� t i xtnct set!ort1S on the revenc side hereof is a true copy of Article Vi, Section 2,of the BY-Laws of said Company,turd is r { lforce. iN WITNESS WI-IER.EOF, the said ViceTr��nt and AsS�st��nt Secretary have hereunto subscribed their names and affixed the Corporate Seal of the said FID AND D�,P�r,'),SIT COMPANY Of- MARYLAND, this ist day of October, A.D.2001. C•� - v AT TEST: FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND �'� � '�� D E P O•S/i �C �4�- e � G. llamilton :Issistant Secrolary Paul C. Rogers mice President State of Maryland Countv of Harford f ss: On this 1st day of October, A.D. 2001, before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, duly commissioned and qualified, came PAUL C. ROGERS, Vice President, and J. G. HAMILTON, Assistant Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers described in and who executed the preceding instrument, and they each acknowledged the execution of the same, and being by me duly sworn,severally and each for himself deposeth and saith, that they are the said officers of the Company aforesaid, and that the seal affixed to the preceding instrument is the Corporate Seal of said Company, and that the said Corporate Seal and their signatures as such officers were duly affixed and Subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporation. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF', I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal the day and year first above written. �P A.TRQ,,� ri (VOTARY PUBLIC 1 DO a Pau•icia.9. 7ranbetti A'otaty Public My Commission Expires: October 9, 2002 ' POA-F 079-0009 EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice-President, or any of the Senior Vice-Presidents or Vice-Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice-Presidents, Assistant Vice-Presidents and Attorneys-in-Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertaking, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature of mortgagcs....and to affix the seal of the Company thereto." ' CERTIFICATE I, the undersi;ned, Assistant Secretary of F1DEL,fTY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, do hereby certify that the original Power of Attorney of which the foregoing is a full, true and correct copy, is in full force and effect on the date of this certificate; and I do further certify that the Vice-President who executed the said Power of Attorney was one of the additional Vice-Presidents specially authorized by the Board of Directors to appoint any Attorney-in-Fact as provided in Article V1, Section 2, of the By-Laws of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND. This Power of Attomey and Certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolution of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY A14D DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at a meeting duly called and held on the loth day of May, 1990. RESOLVED: "That the facsimile or mechanically reproduced seal of the company and facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any Vice-President, Secretary, or Assistant Secretary of the Company, whether made heretofore or ' hereafter, wherever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as thou-h manually affixed." IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, 1 have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seal of the said Company, this 19t it day of' Fe1,,ruary 2002 tssistant.Cecretar), Missoun D ivision of Labor ndards WACH"' AND HOUR SC(:TION / { - y O `n titml `. ••:(lliVl.l 54{•M 1!... .,O BOB HO1..DEN, Govenior Annual Wage Order '1*"*-l'o ,. 8 Section 026 COLE COUNTY In accordance with Section 290,262 RSMo 19'_),1, within thirty (30) days after a certified copy of this Annual Wage Order* has been filed with the Secretary of Statc as indicated below, any person who may be affected by this Arrnti�rl Wagc Carder 111ay abject by filing an objection in triplicate with the Labor and Industrial Relations Conunission, 11.0. Box 599, ,Jefferson City, MO 65102.0599• Such objections 1111st set forth in writing thc spcc:ific: grounds of objection, Each objection shall certify that it copy has be cn furnisher) to the Division of Labor Standards, P.O, Box 449, Jefferson City, MO 65102-04/19 pursuant to 8 CSR 20.5.0 t 0( 1). A certified copy of the Annual Wage Order has been filed with the Secretary of Stale of Missouri. RECEIVED & FILED 4ff.T& MAR U 9 2001 C ollcen A. Balwr, Director Division of labor Standards Filed With Secretary of' State: SECRETAnY OF STATE — Last Date Objections May Be tiled: _ APR 0 9 2001 Prepared by Missouri Department of Labor and Industrial relations Building Construction Rates for REPLACEMENT PAGE Section 026 COLE County s:l~fiecUv�" �3as i(' 0v6r- OCCUPATIONAL TITLE Data of Hourly Time Holiday Total F'ringn Benefits _ Increase Rates Rates Rates Asbestos Worker _ _ 10,'01_ $27.91 Boilermaker _ !3101 $24.G6 57_ Bricklayers-Stone Mason 9/01^ $2.2.10 )9 7 $5.80 Carpenter -- $18.1_3 60 15- $6.26 Cement Mason �.._� _ $18.61 9 3µ $5.65 Electrician(Inside Wiremen) w� _$21.43 28 l � _ � � $7.66 + 13%o Communication Technician _ USE ELECTRICIAN(INSIDE W_I_REMAN) RA'i E Elevator Constructor M 7101 a $28.655 �2Ei 54 _ S8.t 1S `- Operating Engineer _ _. Group i 5/01 _ $?_1.67 86 - 6G $11.64 Group ti 5/01 $21.67 86 66 - _� $11.64 Group III 5/01 $20.42 86 _ 66 $11.64 _ Group 111-A 5/01 $21.67 86 _66_ $11.64 Group IV V 5101 $22.37 86 66 $11,64_ Group V 5/01 $23.67 86 _ 66 _ $11.64 Pipe Fitter 7/01 b $27.75 91 69 _ $11,83 - Glazier $13.00 FED $1.89 Laborer(Building): _ General $15.35 110 7 _ $5.85 First Semi-Skilled _ $16.20 110 7 $5.85 Second Semi-Skilled $16.20 110 7 $5.85 Lather _ USE CARPENTER RATE Linoleum Layer&Cutter USE CARPENTER RATE Marble Mason 9101 $22.10 59 7 $5.80 Millwright $19.13 60 15 $6.26 Iron Worker _ 8/01 $_20.56 11 8 _ $11.29 Painter 4/01 $16.94 18 �7~ $4.83 -- Plasterer $17.68 94 5 $5.39 Plumber $20.75 FED $2.26 Pile Driver $19.13 60 15 $6.26 Roofer 9101 $22.50 12 4 $6.49 Sheet Metal Worker 7101 _ $21.61 40 23 _$7.36 Sprinkler Fitter $27.69 33 19 $7.45 Terrazzo Worker r 9/01 _ _$22.10 59 7 $5.80 r Tile Setter 9/01 $2'2.10 59 7 $5.80 Truck Driver-Teamster _ _ _ Grou I ^_ 4101 $18.05 101 _ 5 $4.25 Group ll _ 4101 $18.75 101 5 $4.25 ~� Group 111 4101 $18.45 101 5 _ $4.25 Group IV 4101 _ $18.75 101 5 $4.25 _ Traffic Control Service Driver __ - $14.15 46 _ 49 _ $2.44 Well Driller _ USE BLDG CONST, ENGINEER GROUP II RATE Welders-Acetylene& Electric -_ Fringe Benefit Percentage is of the Basic Hourly Rate Attention Workers: If you are not being paid the appropriate waye rate and fringe bonefits contact the Division of Labor Standards at 1-800-475-2130. "Annual Incremental Increase 'SEE FOOTNOTE PAGE ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO.8 10101 Building Construction Rates for REPLACEMENT PAGE Section 026 COLE County Footnotes Effectiv-d- Basic Over- OCCUPATIONAL TITLE Date of Hourly Time Holiday Total Fringe Benefit Increase Rates Rates Rates Velders receive rate prescribed for the occupational title performing operation to which welding is incidental. •e Building Construction Rates on Building(s)and All Immediate Attachments. Use Heavy Construction es for remainder of project. For the occupational titles not listed in Heavy Construction Sheets, use Rates shown Building Construction Rate Sheet. Vacation: Employees over 5 years - 8%; Employees under 5 years - 6% All work over $3.5 Million Total Mechanical Contract- $27.75, Fringes - $11.83 All work under$3.5 Million Total Mechanical Contract - $26.41, Fringes -$10.08 *Annual Incremental Increase ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 8 7101% COLE COUN'T1'OWF:12'1'IME H/VI S-- Ill IILDING CONS'1'llI IC VION FED: Minimwn requirement per hair Labor Standards Act means time and one-halt (1 ,z) shall be paid for all work in excess of forty (40) hours per work week. NO. 9: Means the regular workday starting time of 8:00 a,m. (and resulting quitting time of 4:30 p.m,) may be moved forward to 6:00 a.m. or delayed one hour to 9:00 a.m. All work performed in excess of the regular work day and on Saturday shall be compensated at one and ono-half(1'/2) times the regular pay. In the event time is lost during the work wwck due to weather conditions, the Employer may schedule work on the following Saturday at straight time. All work accomplished on Sunday and holidays shall be compensated for at double the regular rate of wages. The work week shall be Monday through Friday, except for midweek holidays. NO. 11: Means eight (8) hours shall constitute a day's work, with the starting time to be established between 7:00 a.m. quid 8:00 a.m, from Monday to Friday. Time and ones-half(1%z) shall be paid for first two (2) hours of'overtime Monday through Friday and the first eight (8) hours on Saturday, All other overtime hours Monday through Saturday shall be paid at double (2) time rate. Double (2) time shall be paid for all time on Sunday and recognized holidays or the days observed in lieu of these holidays. NO. 12: Means the work week shall commence on Monday at 12:01 a.m. and shall continue through the following Friday, inclusive of each week. All work performed by employees anywhere in excess of forty (40) hours in one (1) work week, shall be paid for at the rate of one and ono-half (1%z) times the regular hourly wage scale. All work performed within the regular working hours which shall consist of a ten (10) hour work day except in emergency situations. Overtime work and Saturday work shall be paid at one and one-half (1'/2) times the regular hourly rate. Work on recognized holidays and Sundays shall be paid at two (2) times the regular hourly rate. NO. 18: Means the regular work day shall be eight (8) hours. Working hours are from six (6) hours before Noon (12:00) to six (6) hours after Noon (12:00). The regular work week shall be forty (40) hours, beginning between 6:00 a.m. and 12:00 Noon on Monday and ending between 1:00 p.m. and 6:00 p.m. on Friday. Saturday will be paid at time and one-half(1'/2). Sunday and Holidays shall be paid at double (2) time. Saturday can be a mako-up clay if the weather has forced a day off, but only in the week of the day being lost. Any time before six(6) hours before Noon or six (6) hours after Noon will be paid at time and one-half(i'/z). NO. 26: Means that the regular working day shall consist of eight 8 hours worked between 6:00 6 g Y 6 ( ) a.m., and 5:00 p.m., five (5) days per week, Monday to Friday, inclusive. Hours of work at each jobsite shall be those established by the general contractor and worked by the majority of trades. (the above working hours may be changed by mutual Agreement). Work performed on Construction Work on Saturdays, Sundays and before and after the regular working day on Monday to Friday, inclusive, shall be classified as overtime, and paid for at double (2) the rate of single time. The rate of pay for all work performed on holidays shall be at two times (2) the single time rate of pay. ANNUAL, WAGE ORDER NO.8 Aw8026 oTdoc Page I orb Pages GOLF COUNTY OVERTIME RATES ••• BUIi,DING CONSTRUCTION NO. 28: Means eight (8) hours between 7:00 a.m. and 5:30 p.m. shall constitute a day's work five (5) days a week, Monday through Friday inclusive, shall constitute a work week. The Employer has the option fora workday/workweek of four (4) ten (10) hour days (4-10's) provided: -The project must be for a minimum of four (4) consecutive days. -Starting time may be within one (1) hour either side of 8:00 a.m. -Work week must begin on either a Monday or Tuesday: If'a holiday falls within that week it shall be a consecutive work day. (Alternate: if n holiday fiiils in the middle of a week, then the regular eight (8) hour schedule may be implemented). -Any time worked in excess of any ten (I 10) hour work day (in it 4-10 hour work week) shall be at the appropriate overtime rate. All work outside of the regular working hours as provided, Monday through Saturday, shall be paid at one & one-half(I 1A) times the employee's regular rate of pay. All wort: performed from 12:00 a.m. Sunday through 8:00 a.m. Monday and recognized holidays shall be paid at double (2) the straight time hourly rate of pay. NO. 33: Means the standard work day shall be eight (8) consecutive flours of work between the hours of 6:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m., excluding the lunch period, or shall conform to the practice on the ' job site. Four (4) days at ten (10) hours a day may be worked at straight time, Monday through Friday and need not be consecutive. All overtime, except for Sundays and holidays shall be at file rate of time and one-half(1.'/2). Overtime worked on Sundays and holidays shall be at double (2) time. NO. 35: Means the normal work week shall consist of five (5) eight (8) hour days for a total forty (40) hours, starting on Monday at 8:00 a.m. and ending oil Friday at 4:30 p.m. The starting time can be flexible between 6:00 a.m. and 8:00 a.m., and ending at 2:30 p.m. respectively. All work before designated starting time and after quitting time shall be paid at the rate of time and ono-half (1'/z). All work 111 the excess of Light (8) hours per day, or forty (40) hours per week Monday through Friday, shall be paid for at the rate of time and ono-half (11/2). All hours worked on Saturdays, Sundays, or Holidays shall be paid at the double(2) time rate. NO. 40: Means the regular working week shall consist of five (5) consecutive (8) hour days' labor on file job beginning with Monday and ending with Friday of each week. Four (4) 10-hour days may constitute the regular work week. "1`llc regular working day shall consist of eight (8) hours labor on file job beginning as early as 7:00 a.m. and ending as late as 5:30 p.m. All full or part time labor performed during such hours shall be recognized as regular working hours and paid f'or at the regular hourly rate. All hours worked on Saturday and all hours worked in excess of eight (8) hours but not more than twelve (12) hours during the regular working week shall be paid for at time and one-halft H/2) the regular hourly rate. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays and all hours worked in excess of twelve (12) hours during the regular working day shall be paid at two (2) times , the regular hourly rate. In the event of rain, snow, cold or excessively windy weather oii a regular working day, Saturday may be designated as a "mako-up" day Saturday may also be designated as a "make-up" day, for an employee who has nlissed a day of'work for personal or other reasons. Pay for "make-up" days shall be at regular rates. ANNUAL,WAGE ORDER NO. 8 A W9026 OTAOC Page 2 of 6 Pages ' C01. COCN-IN OV1,10-IYIE RATES III I-ILDING CONSTRUCTION NO. 48: Means the regularly scheduled work week shill be five; (5) consecutive days, Monday through Friday or 'i'ucsday throtlf;}1 Saturday. Eight (8) hours shall constitute a day's work. Starting time shall not be earlier than 7:00 a.m. nor later than 10:00 a.m. Forty (40) hours shall constitute a week's work. Overtime at the rate of time and one-half(l 1/2) will be paid for all work in excess of forty (40) hours in any one work week. On the Monday through Friday schedule, all work perf'ornled on Saturday will be: time acid cane-half(1 6) toeless time: has been lost during the week, in which case. Saturday will be a slake up day to the extent of the lost time. On the Tuesday through Saturday schedule, all work perfornlCd on Monday Will he time and WIC-half(i !') unless time has heen lost during the week, in which case Monday will he a make-up day to the extent of the lost time. Any work performed on Sunday will he double (')) time. if employees work on ruly of the recognized holidays, they shall be paid tinge and one-half(1 !,4) their regular rate: elf pay for all hours worked. NO. 55: Means the regular work day shall be eight(8) hours between 6:00 a.ni, and 4:30 p.rn. The first two (2) hours of work perfilrmed in excess of the eight (8) hour work day, Monday through Friday, and the first ten (10) hours of work on Saturday, shall he paid at one & onerhalf(i%z) times the straight tinge rate. All work perlornlccl em Sunday, observed holidays and in excess of ten (10) hours a day, Monday through Saturday, shall be paid at double (2) the straight time rate, NO. 57: Means eight (8) hours per day shall constitute a day's work and forty (40) hours per week, Monday through Friday, shall constitute a week's work. The regular starting time shall be 8:00 a.m. The above may be changed by mutual consent of authorized personnel. When circumstances warrant, the Employer may change the regular workweek to four (4) ten-hour days at the regular time rate of pay. It being understood that all other pertinent information must be adjusted accordingly. All time worked before and after the established workday of eight (8) hours, Monday through Friday, all time worked on Saturday, shall be paid at the rate of time and ono-half(1 ''/Z) except in cases where work is part of an eniployce's regular Friday shill. All time worked on Sunday and recognized holidays shall be paid at the double (2) time rate ofpely. NO. 59: tileans that except as herein provided, eight (8) hours a clay (which may begin as early as 6:00 a.m.) shall constitute a standard work day, and lorty (40) hours per week shall constitute a week's work. All time worked outside of' the standard eight (8) hour work day and on Saturday shall be classified as overtime anti paid tile rate of time and one-half All time worked on Sunday and holidays shall be classified as overtime and paid at the rate of double (2) time;. The Employer has the option of' working either five (5) eight hour days or four (4) ten hour days to constitute a rionnal forty (40) hour work week. Where the four (4) ten-hour work week is in effect, the standard work day shall be consecutive ten (10) hour periods between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 6:30 p,m. Forty (40) hours per week shall constitute a weeks work, Monday through Thursday, inclusive, In the event the job is down for any reason beyond the Employer's control, then Friday and/or Saturday may, at the option of the Employer, be worked as a make-up day; straight time not to exceed ten (10) hours or forty (40) hours per week. When the five day (8) hour work week is in ' effect, forty (40) hours per week shall constitute a week's work, Monday through Friday, inclusive. In the event the job is down for any reason heyond the; Employer's control, then Saturday may, at the option ref the Employer, be worked as a rn;rkctup day: strail,ht time not to exceed eight (8) hours or forty (40) hours per week. ANNUAL.NVA(-F ORDER N0. 8 AW8026 QT Joc Page 3 of 6 rages COLT: COUNTY OV E.RITNIF: RA'Z'ES --BUILDING CONSTRUCI•ION NO. 60: Means the Employer shall have the option of working five 8-hour days or four 10-hour days Monday through Friday. If' an 1?mployer elects to work five &hour days during any work week, hours worked more than eight (8) per day or forty (40) per week shall be paid at time and one-half (1%) the hourly wage rate plus fringe benefits Monday through Friday. SATURDAY MAKE-UP DAY: if' an Employer is prevented from working tarty (40) hours, Monday through Friday, or any part thereof by reason of incictilent weather (rain or tnud), Saturday or any part thereof may be worked as a make-up day at the straight tittle rate. It is agreed by the parties that the make-up day is not to be used to make up time lost due to recognized holidays. if an Employer elects to work four 10-hour days, between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 6:30 p.m. in any week, work performed more than ten (10) hours per clay or forty (40) hours per week shall be paid at time and one half(1%) the hourly wage rate plus 1i•inge benefits Monday through Friday. Ifan Employer is working 10-hour days and loses a day due to inclement wcather, the Employer may work ten (10) hours on Friday at straight time. Friday niust be scheduled for no more than ten (10) hours at the straight time rate, but all hours worked over the forty (40) hours Monday through Friday will be paid at time and one-half (1 '/4) the hourly wage rate plus fringe benefits. All Millwright work performed in excess of the regular work day and on Saturday shall be compensated for at time and one-half (1'/z) the regular Millwright hourly wage rate plus fringe benefits. The regular work day starting of 8:00 a.m. (and resulting quitting time of 4:30 p.m.) may be moved forward to 6:00 a.m. or delayed one (1) hour to 9:00 a.m. All work accomplished on Sundays and recognized holidays, or days observed as recognized holidays, shall be compensated for at double (2) the regular hourly e rate of wages plus fringe benefits. NOIT: All overtime is computed on the hourly wage rate plus an amount equal to the fringe benefits. NO. 86: Means the regular work week shall consist of five (5) days, Monday through Friday, beginning at 8:00 a.m. and ending at 4:30 p.m. The regular work day beginning time may be advanced one or two hours or delayed by one hour. All overtime work performed on Monday through Saturday shall be paid at tirne and ones-half(11/2) of the hourly rate plus an mnount equal to one-half(%) of the hourly Total Indicated Fringe Benefits. All work performed on Sundays and recognized holidays shall be paid at double (2) the hourly rate plus an amount equal to the hourly Total Indicated Fringe Benefits. NO. 91: Means eight (8) hours shall constitute a day's work commencing at 8:00 a.m. and ending at 4:30 p.m., allowing one-lrtlf (1i2) hour (or lunch. The option exists for the Employer to use a flexible starting time between the hours of 6:00 a.m. and 9:00 a.m. The regular work week shall consist of forty (40) hours of t ive (5) work days, Monday through Friday. The work week may consist of four (4) ten (10) hour days from Monday through "Thursday, with Friday as a make-up day. If the make-up day is a holiday, the employee shall be paid at tilt: double (2) time rate. The 1 employees shall be paid double (2) time for work performed before the regular starting time or after the regular quitting time or over eight (8) hours per work week (unless working a 10-hour work day, then double (2) time is paid for work performed over ten (10) hours a day) or over forty (40) hours per work week. Work perfornied on Saturdays, Sundays and recognized holidays shall be paid at the double (2) time rate of'pay. ANNUAL WACF: ORDER No. N AW8026 07 Aoc Page 4 orb Pagca r COLE:C:OUNIN OVi?R'i IME,. RATES- BUiLDING CONSTRUCTION NO. 94: Mauls eight (8) hours Shall constitute a hays work between the hours of*8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. The regular workday starting time of'8:00 a,m, (and resulting quitting time ol'4:30 pail,) may b(: moved lorward to 6:00 a.m. or delayed one (1) hour to 9:00 ami, All work performed in excess of the regular work day and on Saturday shall be compensated at one and ono-half (11/2) times the regular pay. In the event time is lost during the work week dlk: to weather conditions, the Employer may schedule work on the following Saturday at straight time. All work accomplished ' on Sunday and holidays shall be compensated at double the regular rate of wades. NO. 101: Means eight (8) hours a day shall constitute a standard wink day, and forty (40) hours per week shall constitute a week's work, which shall begin on Monday and end on I-ridgy. All time worked outside of the standard work day and on Saturday shall be classified as overtime mid paid the rate of time cold one-half (1'/.) (excclit as heron provided). All time worked on Sunday gild recognized holidays shall be paid at the rate of double (3) time. The regular starting time (and resulting quitting time) may be moved forward two (2) hours to 6:00 a.rn, or the starting time (and resulting quitting time) may be delayed one (1) hour to 9:00 a.m. The Employer has the option of working either five (5) eight-hour days or• lour (4) ten-hour days to constitute a normal forty (40) hour work week. When a four (4) ten-hour day work week is in effect, the standard work day shall be consecutive ten (10) hour periods between the hours of'6:30 a.m. and 6:30 p.m. Forty (40) hours per week shall constitute a week's work Monday through 'Thursday, inclusive. In the event the job is down for any reason beyond the Employer's control, then Friday mid/or Saturday may, at the option of the Employer, be worked as a make-up day; straight time not to exceed ten (10) hours per day or forty (40) hours per week. All work over ten (10) limirs in one day or dirty (40) hours in a 4- 10's work week shall be paid at the overtime rate of time and one-half'(1 '/1). When using a five (5) day eight (8) hour work week, cold the job is down fur any reason beyond the Employer's control, then Saturday may, at the option of the Employer, be worked as a make-up day; straight time not to exceed eight (8) hours per day or forty (40) hours per week. Make-up days shall not be utilized for days lost due to holidays. ANNUAL WAGE: ORDER No , H Aw8026 Stip OT-doc Pape 5 orb Pages 'OHl' ( OUN,IN M4,14 ITME RA ITS ItI III 1)1,N( J)N'S'I Rl:(1V YN lfl.'PLAUENIFNT PAGE, NO. I .10: Mcalls cl,vllt (S) hotlr� hem'Cen llw hours of 8:00 ;1.111. eIlld 4-130 p.m. shall constitute a work day. The starting time play be advanced one (I ) or two (2) hours. I-I'lliployce's have a 1LIIICIl I)c'riod ofthirly (30) minutes. Tile l.'I'llifloYer may provide a lunch period ofolle (I ) hour, and in that cvcnt., the workday shall commence at NWO a•111. and end at 5:00 p.m. The workweek shall C0111111clicc ill 8:00 11.111. 011 Monday and shall vild '11 4:30 Imo. on Friday (or 5:00 p.m. on Friday it' the I"Illplover grants ;I IIIIICII period (11'olle ( I ) 11011r) or as adjtIStCLI by starting! tillic Challue as stated above. All work I)CI-161-111C(I hCt0IV S:00 11.111, alld -'tile)' 4:30 I • Il, Wr 5,00 11,111. wIICIV 011C ( I) Ilmll, IL1IC11 Is granted ki• Imich) ()I' il� ild.JUSICLI by ';IartiMl tillic chilmic ;v, stated above (,)I- oil Saturday, except 'I'i herein provided, Shull be C0IjI1,)CIlSjItC(I at (,)IJC and 01IC-hall( I tllll(:.S the I-CLIUlar h0l.lrl�' rate of pay for t1w work peil,•1-Illed. All work performed on Sunday and on recognized holidays S11,111 he COMI)CIISaWd ;it LIMIMC (:'_) the regular hourly nitc of Imy I'm- the work po-fin-med. I f all 1-111plover is pl-CvcIlled from workillu, lortv (40) IIMII'S, Monday t.1111-01.11.1111 Friday. or any part thercot by reason of' inclement weather (rain and riled), Saturday or any part thercoF may lie \vorked as it make-up day at the straight llille rate. Tile I-Ailploycr shall have the option of'working fivc eight (8) hour days or Blur tell ( 10) hour days Monday diroiwh Friday. if an L.'Anplover elects to work five (5) eight (8) hour days during any work Week. hours worked more than eight (8) per day or fbi-ty (40) hours per week shall be paid at time and ollc-half( I i"2) the 1101,11-1V rate Monday through Frick ly. If all E.niplover elects to work (Mir (4) tell (10) hour days in any k\!cck,, work pci-f'orilled more than tell (10) hours per day or Foily (40) hours per week sliall he paid at time and one-Ilaif (1 '/2) the 1101.11-IN' rate Monday through Friday. if an 1:111ploycr is working tell ( It)) II0Ur days and loses a day dLIC to inclement weather, they Ilia'v work tell (10) 1101.11-S Friday at straight time. I"riday must be scheduled Im at least eight (8) hours and no more than tell (10) hours at the straight time rate, but all hours wt..irked over the 1611y (40) II0LIrS M011daV through Friday will be paid at time and one-half overtime rate. ANNUAL WAGF, ORDFIR NO. M AWM26 Slip Film COLE CO JN'11' 1101,11)AY RA'1'1, BUILDING CON STR UC'11ON NO. 3: All work done on New Year's Day, Uccoration Day, July 4th, Labor Day, Veteran's Day, Thanksgiving Day ruld Christmas Day shall he Maid at the double time rate of pay. Whenever any such holidays fall on a Sunday, the following Monday shall be observal as a holiday. NO, 4: All work done on New Year's Day, Memorial Day, independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. 1 f any of t11e above holidays fall on Sunday, Monday will be observed as the rmognited holiday. if any of the above holidays fall on Saturday, Friday will be observed as the recognized holiday. NO. 5: All work that shall be done oil New Ycar's Day, Memorial Day, Fourth of'July, Labor Day, Veteran's Day,`I'lianksgiving Day, and Christ.nhas Day shall be paid at the double (2) time rate of pay. NO. 7: All work done on New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veteran's Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. If a holiday falls on a Sunday, it shall be observed on the Monday. If a holiday falls on a Saturday, it shall be observed on the preceding Friday. NO. 8: All work done on New Year's Day, Memorial Day, independence Day, Labor Day, Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day, wid Christmas Day, or days observed a5 such, shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. The Friday following'I hanksgiving will be worked at the Employer's option, If worked, it will be at the regular hourly rate of pay. NO. 15: All work accomplished on the recognized holidays of New Yeats Day, Decoration Day (Memorial Day), Independence Day (Fourth of July),Labor Day, Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving ' Day and Christmas Day, or days observed as these narned holidays, shall be compensated for at double (2) the regular hourly rate of wages plus fringe benefits. If a holiday falls on Saturday, it shall be observed on the preceding Friday. If a holiday falls on a Sunday, it shall be observed on the following Monday. No work shall be performed on Labor Day, Christmas Day, Decoration Day or Independence Day except to preserve life or property. NO. 19: All work done on New Year's Day, Memorial Day, July 4th, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. The employee may take off Friday following Thanksgiving Day. However, the employee shall notify his or her Foreman, General Foreman or Superintendent on die Wednesday preceding Thanksgiving Day. When one of the above holidays falls on Sunday, die following Monday shall be considered the holiday and all work performed on said day shall be at the double(2) time rate. When one of the holidays falls on Saturday, the preceding Friday shall be considered the holiday and all work performed on said day shall be at the double(2) time rate. 1\O. 23: All work done on New Year's Day, Memorial I_)ay, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veteran's Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day wid Sundays shall be recognized holidays and shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. When a holiday falls on Sunday, the following Monday shall be considered a holiday. ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 8 AW8026 hdv,doc Page I of 2 Pages COLE COUNTV HOLIDAY RATE SCHEDULE — BUILDING CONSTRUCTION NO. 49: 11le following days shall be observed as legal holidays: New 'Year's Day, Decoration Day, July 4th, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Daly, Christmas Day, Employee's birthday and two (2) personal days. The observance of one (1) of the personal days to be limited to the time between December 1 and March i of the. following year. if any of these holidays fall on Sunday, the following Monday will be observed as the holiday and ifauiy of these holidays fall on Saturday, die preceding Friday will be observed as the holiday. If employees work on any of these holidays they shall be paid time & one-half(1 %) their regular rate of pity for all hours worked. NO. 54: All work done on New Year's, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday a rfler'I'hanksgivinF; Day, and C"hristnlas Day shall be paid at the double (2) time rate of pay. When a holiday falls on Saturday, it shall be observed on Friday. When a holiday falls on Sunday, it shall be observed on Monday. NO. 60: All work performed oil New S'ear's Day, Armistice Day (Vetcran's Day), Decoration Day (Memorial Day), Independence Day (Fourth of July), Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. No work shall be performed on Labor Day except when triple (3) time is paid. When a holiday falls oil Saturday, Friday will be observed as the holiday. When a holiday falls on Sunday, the following Monday shall be observed as the holiday. NO. 66: All work performed on Sundays and the following recognized holidays, or the days observed as such, of New Year's Day, Decoration Day, Fourth of July, Labor Day, Veteran's Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day, shall be paid at double (2) the hourly rate plus an amount equal to the hourly'Total Indicated Fringe Benefit,;. Whenever my such holidays fall on a Sunday, the following Monday shall be observed as a holiday. NO. 69: All work performed on New Year's Day, Decoration Day, July Fourth, Labor Day, Veteran's Day, Thanksgiving Day or Christmas Day shall be compensated at double (2) their straight-time hourly rate of pay. Friday after Thanksgiving and the day before Christmas will also ' be holidays, but if the employer chooses to work these days, the employee will be paid at straight- time rate of pay. If a holiday falls on a Sunday in a particular year, the holiday will be observed on the following Monday. NO. 71: All work performed on the following recognized holidays shall be paid at the double (2) title rate of pay: New Year's Day, Presidents Day, Good Friday, Memorial Day, July the Fourth, Labor Day, Veterans Day, "Thanksgiving Day, tray after Thanksgiving and Christmas Day. If t holiday falls on Sunday, it shall be celebrated on Monday. If holiday falls on Saturday, it shall be celebrated on the Friday preceding such Saturday. 1 ANNUAL:WAGE ORDER NO. 8 AW8026 hdy,doc Page 2 of 2 Pages ' Heavy Construction Rates for REPLACEMENT PAGE Section 026 COLE County ftcctive basic ver- OCCUPATIONAL TITLE Date of Hourly Time Holiday Total Fringe Benefits Increase Rates Rates Rates CARPENTER _ Journeymen 5/01 $23.13-- -. 7_ 16 $6.24 Millwright 5/01 $23.13 �7 16 $6.24 Pile Driver Worker ^^5/01 $23.13 T--16 _ $6.24 OPERATING ENGINEER Group 1 5/01 $2.0.7.5 21 5 $11.61 Group II 5/01 $20.40 5 $11.61 Group ill 5/01 $20.20 _ 21 5 $11.61 Group IV 5/01 « $16.55 21 5 $11.61 Oiler-Driver 5/01 $16.55 _ 21 5 $11.61 LABORER General Laborer 5/01 $1975 2 4 $6.10 Skilled Laborer 5/01 $20.35 2 4 $6.10 TRUCK DRIVER-TEAMSTER Group 1 5/01 $21.72 2 4 $5.25 Group II 5/01 $21.88 2 , 4 $5.25 Group 111 5/01 $21.87 2 4 _ $5.25 Group IV 5/01 $21.99 2-14 � $5.25 For the occupational titles not listed on the Heavy Construction Rate Sheet, use Rates shown on the Building Construction Rate Sheet. 'Annual Incremental Increase ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 8 7/01 COVE COUNTY 0 V114"RT1 N I E' RATE SCilE1)111,E, -- !1l:AVl' t'ON�"I'1Zllt"1'fON NO. 2: Means a regular work week of forty (40) hours will start on Monday wid end on Friday. The regular work day shall be either eight (8) or ten (1 0) hours. if a crew is prevented from working forty (40) hours Monday through Friday, or any part thereof, by reason of inclement weather, Saturday or any part thereof may be worked as a make-up ' day at the straight time rate to complete forty (40) hours of work in a week. IImployecs who are part ofa regular crew on a make-up day, notwithsta iding the fact that they may not have been employed the entire week, shall work Saturday at the straight time rate. ' 'Time & one-half(i',) shall he paid for all hours in excess ofeight (8) hours per day (if working 5-8's) or ten (10) hours per day (if working 4-i 0's), or forty (40) hours per week, Monday through Friday. For all time worked on Saturday (unless Saturday or any portion ofsaid day is worked as make-up to c•oniplete forty hours), tints and one-half (i '/2) shall be paid. NO. 7: Means the regular work week shall start on Monday and end on Friday, except where the Employer elects to work Monday throu1;11 Thursday, ten (10) hours per day. All work over ten (10) hours in a clay or forty (40) hours in a week shall be at the overtime rate of one and one-half(I'/) times the regular hourly rate. The regular work day shall be either eight (8) or ten (10) hours. I f a job can't work forty (40) hours Monday through Friday because of inclement weather or other conditions beyond the control of the Employer, Friday or Saturday may he worked as a make-up day at straight time (if working 4-10's). Saturday may be worked as a make-up day at straight time (if working 5-8's). Make-up days shall not be utilized for days lost from holidays. Except as worked as a make-up day, time on Saturday shall be worked at one and one-half() i1:) times the regular rate. Work performed on Sunday shall be paid at two (2) times the regular rate. Work performed on recognized holidays or days observed as such, ,hall also be paid at the double (2) time rate of lay. NO. 21: Means the regular work week shall consist of five (5) eight (8) hour days, Monday through Friday. The regular work day ,or which employees shall be compensated at straight time hourly rate ol'pay shall begin at 8:00 a.m. and end at 4:30 p.m. However, the project starting time may be advanced or delayed at the discretion of the Employer. At the discretion of the i"niployer, when working a five (5) day eight (8) hour schedule, Saturday may be used fir a make-up clay. The Employer may have the option to schedule his work lro n Monday through 'Thursday at ten (10) hours per day at the straight time rate of'pay with all hours in excess often (10) hours in any one day to be paid at the overtime rate of time & nne-half(1 !/2). If the Employer elects to work from ;Monday through "Thursday and is stopped due to circumstances beyond his control, lie ® shall have the option to work Friday or Saturday at the straight time rate of pay to !�I complete his forty (40) hours per work week. Workmen shall be paid one & one-half(1 'h) times the regular rate of wages for' all hours worked in excess of eight (8) hours per Iday (if working 5-8's), or ten (10) hours per day (if working 4-10's), or forty (40) hours per work week Monday through Friday (if'working 5-8's) or Monday through Thursday (if working 4-10's). Unless used as make-up days to complete forty (40) hours per work week, time and one-half(1 '/2) shrill he paid on Saturday (when working; 5-8's) and on Friday or Saturday (when working 4-10's). Sundays and holidays shall be paid at the rate ofdouble (2) time the regular rate of'pay. AW8626 hvyoi doc ANNUAL WAGE' OE DID. NO. 8 Page I of I COLE COUNTY NHOLIDAY RATIr",, SCHEDULE - HEAVY CONSTRUCTION NO. 4: All work performed on New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day, or days observed as such, shall be paid at the double time rate ofpay. When a holiday falls on a Sunday, Monday shall be observed. NO. 5: The following days are recognized as holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Fourth of July, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day. If a holiday falls on a Sunday, it shall be observed on the following Monday. If a holiday falls oil a Saturday, it shall be observed on the preceding Friday. No work shall be performed on Labor Day except in case of jeopardy to work under construction. This rule is applied to protect Labor Day. When a holiday falls during the normal work week, Monday through Friday, it shall be counted as eight (8) hours toward a forty (40) hour week; however, no reimbursement for this eight (8) hours is to be paid the workman unless worked. If workmen are required to work the above recognized holidays or days observed as such, or Sundays, they shall receive double (2) the regular rate ofpay for such work. The above shall apply to the four 10's Monday through Thursday work week. The ten (10) hours shall be applied to the forty (40) hour work week. NO. 16: The following days are recognized as holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Fourth of July, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day. If a holiday falls on Sunday, it shall ' be observed on the following Monday. If a holiday falls on Saturday, it shall be observed on the preceding Friday. No work shall be performed on Labor Day except in case of jeopardy to work under construction. This rule is applied to protect Labor Day. When a holiday falls during the normal work week, Monday through Friday, it shall be counted as eight (8) hours toward the forty (40) hour week; however, no reimbursement for this eight (8) hours is to be paid to the worker unless worked. If workers are required to work the above recognized holidays or days ' observed as such, they shall receive double (2) the regular rate of pay for such work. 1 AW8026 hvy hol doc ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 8 Page 1 of OUTSIDE. ELECTRICIAN REPLACEMENT PACIE These rates are to be used for the following counties: Adair, Audrain, Boone, Callaway, Ctunden, Carter, Chariton, Clark, Cole, Cooper, Crawford, Dent, Franklin, Gasconade, ]-Toward, hfowcll, Iron, Jefferson, Knox, L eMs, Lincoln, Linn, Macon, Maries, Marion, Miller, Monitcau, Monroe, Montgomcry, Morgan, Oregon, Osage, ferry, Phclps, Pike, Pulaski, Putnam, Ralls, Randolph, Reynolds, Ripley, St. Charles, St. Francois, St. Luis City, St. Louis County, Ste. Genevieve, Schuyler, Scotland, Shannon, Shelby, Sullivan, Texas, WalTen, ® and Washington I� CONIME112CIAL, WORK uieman.Operator __----_.—S_TZT-F-420T___.-._._-- rc3—manM__ — U'T'ILITY WORK ccupatronaIT-fle t --- —_T ate *Journeyman Lineman" ------SZ�-�T_.� —�52-.2U i6 *Lineman Operator __. _____.___—.__.-Z.Z :�.--- --- " SZ.20 4-38 u-- rounncan OVERTIME,,RATE: Eight(g) hours shall constitute a work day between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 4:30 p.m. Forty(40)hours within five(5)days, Monday through Friday inclusive, shall constitute the work week. Work performed in the 9th and 10th hour, Monday through Friday, shall be paid at time and one-half(I%) the regular straight time rate of pay. Contractor has the option to pay two(2) hours per day at the time curd one-half(1'/2)the regular straight time rite of pay between the hours of 6:00 a.m. and 5:30 p.m.,Monday through Friday. Work performed outside the regularly scheduled�wrkinb hours and on Saturdays, Sundays and recognized legal holidays, or days celebrated as such,shall be paid for at the rate of double(2) time. ' HOLIDAY RA'rE: All work performed on New Year's Day, Memorial Day, I-ourlh of July, Labor Day, Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day,Christmas Day,or clays celebrated as such,shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. When one of the foregoing holidays falls on Sunday, it shall be celebrated on the following Monday. ' 'Incremental Increase ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 8 9/01 t . M IFS UU HI )( RTMENT OF (ABO(T AN) (N )UST RIAL K-LATIONS DIVISION OF LABOn STANDARDS • ;" AFFIDAVIT COMPLIANCE WITH THE PREVAILING WAGE LAW Before me. the undersigned Notary Public, in and for the County of State of _—_ personally came and appeared (name and title) of the (name of company)_ (a corporation) (a partner�.ilip) (a proprietorship) and after being duly sworn did depose and say that all provisions and requirements set out in Chapter 290, Sections 290.210 through and including 290.340, Revised Statutes of Missouri, perlaining to the payment of wages to workers employed on public works ' projects have been fully satisfied. There has been no exception to the full and complete compliance with said provisions and requirements with Annual Wage Order No. Section issued by the Division of Labor Standards (name of project) _ located at (name of institution) _ In _ __County, Missouri, and completed on the day of Signature Subscribed and sworn to ma this _day of My commission expires Notary Public r furnished hereunder. The total amount of this contract shall not exceed Three hundred, thirty seven thousand ($337,000.00) Dollars. 12. Contract Documents_ The contract documents shall consist of the following: a. This Contract f. General Provisions b. Addenda g. Special Provisions c. Information for Bidders h. Technical Specifications d. Notice to Bidders i. Drawings and/or sketches e. Signed Copy of Bid ' This contract and the other documents enumerated in this paragraph, form the Contract between the parties. These documents are as fully a part of the contract as if attached hereto or repeated herein, 13. Nondiscrimination. The Contractor agrees in the performance of this contract not to discriminate on the ground or because of race, creed, color, national origin or ancestry, sex, religion, handicap, age, or political opinion or affiliation, against any ' employee of Contractor or applicant for employment and shall include a similar provision in all subcontracts let or awarded hereunder, 14. Notices. All notices required to be in writing may be given by first class mail addressed to the City of Jefferson, c/o Director of Community Development, 320 East McCarty, Jefferson City, Missouri 65101, and Contractor at 3441 N. Ten Mile Drive, P.O. Box 945, Jefferson City, Missouri 65102. The date of delivery of any notice shall be the second full day after the day of its mailing. 15. Jurisdiction. This agreement and every question arising hereunder shall be interpreted according to the laws and statutes of the State of Missouri. IN WITNES HEREOF, the parties hereto have set their hands and seals this day of , � 20 1 CITY OF JEFFERSON CONTRACTOR r Z�� �- 1� ------------------ Ma r Title: ��-uv�•� G(T �.�,f r ATTE T: ,- ATTEST __---_________--_._-- City Clerk Titlr 7 J 1 APPR VED A,S 013 City Couns or Page 4 of 4 1 to unforeseeable causes beyond Contractor's control and without fault or negligence on Contractor's part or the part of its agents, 6, Termination. The City reserves the right to terminate this contract by giving at least five (5) days prior written notice to Contractor, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the City should Contractor be adjudged a bankrupt, or if Contractor should make a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors, or if a receiver should be appointed for Contractor or for any of its property, or if Contractor should persistently or repeatedly refuse or fail to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper material, or if Contractor should refuse or fail to make prompt payment to any person supplying labor or materials for the work under the contract, or persistently disregard instructions of the City or fail to observe or perform any provisions of the contract. a7, City's Right to Proceed. In the event this contract is terminated pursuant to Paragraph 6, then the City may take over the work and prosecute the same to completion, by contract or otherwise, and Contractor and its sureties shall be liable to the City for any costs over the amount of this contract thereby occasioned by the City. In any such case the City may take possession of, and utilize in completing the work, such materials, appliances and structures as may be on the work site and are necessary for completion of the work. The foregoing provisions are in addition to, and not in limitation of, the rights of the City under any other provisions of the contract, city ordinances, and state and federal laws. 8. Indemnity. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the City, its elected and appointed officials, employees, and agents, from and against all claims, damages, and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees arising out or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, damage, loss or expense attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than Work itself) including the loss of use resulting therefrom and is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for those acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or otherwise reduce any other right or obligation of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to any party or person described in this Paragraph. 9. Payment for Labor and Materials. The Contractor agrees and binds itself to pay for all labor done, and for all the materials used in the construction of the work to be ' completed pursuant to this contract. Contractor shall furnish to the City a bond to insure the payment of all materials and labor used in the performance of this contract. 10. aqR Ip ies, The Contractor is hereby authorized and directed to utilize the City's ' sales tax exemption in the purchase of goods and materials for the project as set out in Section 144.062 RSMo 1994 as amended. Contractor shall keep and maintain records and invoices of all such purchases which shall be submitted to the City. ' 11. Payment. The City hereby agrees to pay the Contractor for the work done pursuant to this contract according to the payment schedule set forth in the Contract Documents upon acceptance of said work by the Director of Community Development and in accordance with the rates and/or amounts stated in the bid of Contractor dated February 19, 2002 which are by reference made a part hereof, No partial payment to the Contractor shall operate as approval or acceptance of work done or materials Page 3 of 4 CITY OF JEFFERSON CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT THIS CONTRACT, made and entered into this day of _J ��rr1 c'A— , 2002, by and between GBH Builders, Inc. hereinafter referred to as "Contractor", and the City of Jefferson, Missouri, a municipal corporation of the State of Missouri, hereinafter referred to as"City". WITNESSETH: That Whereas, the Contractor has become, the lowest responsible bidder for furnishing the supervision, labor, tools, equipment, materials and supplies and for constructing the following City improvements. Project No. 0033, Interior Lower Level Renovations, John G. Christy Municipal Building. NOW THEREFORE, the parties to this contract agree to the,:- following: 1. Manner and time for Completion. Contractor agrees with the City to furnish all supervision, labor, tools, equipment, materials and supplies necessary to perform said work at Contractor's own expense in accordance with the contract documents and any applicable City ordinances and state and federal laws, within 264 calendar clays frorn the date Contractor is ordered to proceed, which order shall be issued by the Director of Community Development within ten (10) days after the date of this contract. 2. Prevailing Wades. To the extent that the work performed by Contractor is subject to prevailing wage law, Contractor shall pay a wage of no less than the "prevailing hourly rate of wages" for work of a similar character in this locality, as established by Department of Labor and Industrial Relations of the State of Missouri, and as established by the Federal Employment Standards of the Department of Labor. Contractor acknowledges that Contractor knows the prevailing hourly rate of wages for this project because Contractor has obtained the prevailing hourly rate of wages from the contents of the current Annual Wage Order No. 8, Section 026, Cole County in which the rate of wages is set forth. The Contractor further agrees that Contractor will keep an accurate record showing the names and occupations of all workmen employed in connection with the work to be performed under the terms of this contract. The record shall show the actual wages paid to the workmen in connection with the work to be performed under the terms of this contract. A copy of the record shall be delivered to the Director of Community Development each week. In accordance with Section 290.250 RSMo, Contractor shall forfeit to the City 'Ten Dollars ($10.00) for each workman employee, for each calc�ndar day or portion thereof that the workman is paid less than the stipulated rates for any work clone under this contract, by the Contractor or any subcontractor under the Contractor 3. Insurance. Contractor shall procure and maintain at il:, own expense during the life of this contract: ' (a) Workknen's_,CoW-nsation_ II15UrcanCe for call of its employees to be engaged in work under this contract. ' (b) Contractor's_ public Liability_.._ Insurpnce in an amount not less than $2,000,000 for all claims arising out of a single occurrence and $300,000 for any one person in a single accident or occurrence, except for those claims governed by the provisions of the Missouri Workmen's Compensation Law, Chapter 287, RSMo., and Nip 1 of 4 Contractor's Property Damage Insurance in an amount not less than $2,000,000 for all claims arising out of a single accident or occurrence and $300,000 for any one person in a single accident or occurrence. (c) Lutomobile Liability Insurance in an amount not less than $2,000,000 for all claims arising out of a single accident or occurrence and $300,000 for any one ' person in a single accident or occurrence, (d) Owner's Protective Ligbili Insurance - The Contractor shall also obtain ' at its own expense and deliver to the City an Owner's Protective Liability Insurance Policy naming the City and the City as the insured, in an amount not less than $2,000,000 for all claims arising out of a single accident or occurrence and $300,000 for any one person in a single accident or occurrence, except for those claims governed by the provisions of the Missouri Workmen's Compensation Law, Chapter 287, RSMo. No policy will be accepted which excludes liability for damage to underground structures or by reason of blasting, explosion or collapse. (e) Subcontracts - In case any or all of this work is sublet, the Contractor shall require the Subcontractor to procure and maintain all insurance required in Subparagraphs (a), (b), and (c) hereof and in like amounts. (fj Scope of_, Insurance and Special Hazard,_ The insurance required under Sub-paragraphs (b) and (c) hereof shall provide adequate protection for the Contractor and its subcontractors, respectively, against damage claims which may arise from operations under this contract, whether such operations be by the insured or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by it, and also against any special hazards which may be encountered in the performance of this contract. NOTE: Paragraph (f) is construed to require the procurement of Contractor's protective insurance (or contingent public liability and contingent property damage policies) by a general contractor whose subcontractor has employees working on the project, unless the general public liability and property damage policy (or rider attached thereto) of the general contractor provides adequate protection against claims arising from operations by anyone directly or indirectly employed by the Contractor. 4, Contractor's_Responsibility for Subcontractors. It is further agreed that Contractor shall be as fully responsible to the City for the acts and omissions of its subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them, as Contractor is for the acts and omissions of persons it directly employs Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relating to this work, to bind all subcontractors to Contractor by all the terms herein set forth, insofar as applicable to the work of subcontractors and to give Contractor the same power regarding termination of any subcontract as the City may exercise over Contractor under any provisions of this contract. Nothing contained in this contract shall create ' any contractual relations between any subcontractor and the City or between any subcontractors. ' 5. Licfuidated Darnag es_ The City may deduct $500 per calendar day from any amount otherwise due under this contract for every calendar day the Contractor fails or refuses to prosecute the work, or any separable part thereof, with such diligence as will insure the completion by the time above specified, or any extension thereof, or ' fails to complete the work by such time, as long as the City does not terminate the right of Contractor to proceed. It is further provided that Contractor shall not be charged with liquidated damages because of delays in the completion of the work due Page 2 of 4 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS I A. CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS: 1. The Contractor will be furnished free of charge twenty (20) sets of Drawings and Project Manuals for the project. Additional sets will be furnished as quantity allows from previously printed documents. B. TAX EXEMPTION: 1. City of Jefferson, Missouri is exempt from taxation pursuant to Missouri Statutes, All purchases of tangible personal ro ert and materials to be incorporated into or consumed in the construction of this project shall be made by contractors and subcontractors on a tax-exempt basis. a. The Owner will furnish to the Contractor, and the Contractor shall distribute to all subcontractors, an executed and signed copy of a Misso-iri Project Exemption Certificate for this project, along with a copy of the Owner's MO Tax Exemption Letter. b. Contractors and subcontractors purchasing materials for this project shall present copies of such documents to all suppliers as authorization to purchase, on behalf of the Owner, all tangible personal property and materials to be incorporated into or consumed in the construction of this 2roject. c. Suppliers shall obtain a completed copy of the exemption certificate, along with the MO Tax Exemption Letter, from the contractor or subcontractor making purchases of tangible personal property for use in this project and retain for audit purposes. Invoices issued for such purchases must reflect the name of City of Jefferson, Missouri and the project number for this project to be assigned by the Owner. d. All parties purchasing or supplying materials and equipment for this project shall comply with Missouri Law and maintain required documents for a period of rive years. The Owner's Missouri Tax Exemption Letter and Missouri Project Exemption Certificate will be issued to the Contractor awarded the Contract for Construction. C. COMPLETION TIME: 1, The Contractor agrees to Substantially Complete the Work within Two Hundred Eighty-Five (285) calendar days, and further agrees to pay to, or allow the Owner as liquidated damages, and not as a penalty of forfeiture, the sum of Five Hundred_Dollars ($500.00 for each calendar day occurring thereafter that the entire Work is riot Substantially Complete. D. PAYMENTS: 1, In making progress payments, the Owner shall pay ninety percent (90%) of the earned sum, less the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner, until the project is totally complete. E. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 1. The duty of the Architect/Engineer and Owner to conduct periodic construction observation of the Contractor's performance is not intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractor's safety measures in or near the construction site. 'rhe Contractor is solely responsible for the safe SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 0033 SGC - 1 installation, maintenance and use of all shoring, scaffolding, barricades, etc, and for supervising the wearing of appropriate safety clothing and other protective devices. F, INSURANCE AND BONDS: 1. The Contractor shall at his/her expense, procure and maintain insurance on all of its Operations, in companies acceptable to the Owner as included in the Construction Contract, 2, Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond and tabor and Material Payment Bond with the Owner named as Obligee in an amount at least equal to 100 0,10 of the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance of his contract and for the payment of all persons performing labor on the project and furnishing materials in connection therewith under his contract. The Surety on each bond shall be satisfactory to the Owner and shell be a duly authorized surety company with a current certificate of Authority to transact business in Missouri. if requested by the Owner, the Surety shall furnish a certified copy of the certificate of Authority. G. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS: 1. The Contractor shall pay not less than the prevailing hourly rate of wages for work of a similar character in Cole County, as determined by the Department of Labor and Industrial Relations, Division of Labor Standards, State of Missouri. END OF SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS i r r � SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 0033 SGC-2' SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Project consists of Interior Lower Level Renovations of the John G. Christy Municipal Building. 1. Project Location: John G. Christy Municipal Building, 320 E. McCarty Street, Jefferson City, Missouri 65101. 2. Owner: City of Jefferson, 320 E. McCarty Street, Jefferson City, Missouri 65101. B. Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, dated ,January 11, 2002, were prepared for the Project by The Architects Alliance, Inc., 631 West Main Street, Jefferson City, Missouri 65101-1531. C. The Work consists of interior renovation of the existing lower floor level, office & access areas of the John G. Christy Municipal Building (City Hall Building) containing approximately 12,000 sq. ft., in several phases. The work includes removal of existing office partitions & finishes, modifications to existing mechanical hvac & electrical systems and installation of new office areas, all new finishes, all new lighting fixtures, new electrical panel, wiring & circuiting, mechanical, etc. 1. The Work includes, but riot limited to, temporary partitions to separate construction activity and dust from occupied areas of the building, temporary modifications to mechanical and electrical systems to keep occupied areas active and dust free during construction, cutting and patching, selective demolition, some minimal masonry, rough carpentry, interior architectural woodwork (casework), joint sealants, steel doors & frames, wood doors, overhead coiling grilles, door hardware, interior glazing, gypsum board assemblies, ceramic tile, acoustical panel ceilings, resilient flooring, carpeting, painting, visual display boards, mechanical heating ventilating & air conditioning, electrical, lighting, final cleaning before occupancy, etc. 1.3 CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract issued by the City of Jefferson. 1.4 WORK SEQUENCE & PHASES A. The Work shall be conducted in several separate phases, as described below and shown on the Phasing Plan of the drawings. SUMMARY 0033 01100 - 1 B. Each phase of work shall be substantially complete and allow for installation and moving of furnishings and personnel by the Owners before proceeding with the next. phase of work. The phases shown are a general concept of the proposed phases, to accommodate the Owner, however may require some slight modification after review and coordination with the Contractor. A firm and final schedule/sequence of phases of the Work, within the contract completion time, will be required by the Contractor at time of award; in order to schedule final furniture delivery and moving dates. (Tentative calendar dates below assume final Council approval March 18, 2002 and Notice to Proceed March 27, 2002.) Temporary partitions separating construction areas from occupied areas will be required before starting each phase of work. 1. Phase 1: The work in this phase shall include work at the existing private offices, along the exterior South wall, and two roorns at the North of the lower floor level, as shown on construction phase plan in the contract drawings. 'The Work in these areas mostly requires new finishes to the existing rooms. Work of this phase shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy within forty- two (42) calendar days of Contract Notice to Proceed aril seventeen (17) calendar days from start of construction at the site (April 22, 2002). (Tentative completion date is May 8, 2002.) 2, Phase 2: The work in this phase shall include work at the northeast corner of the lower floor level, which is partially unoccupied at this time, as shown of construction phase plan in the contract drawings. . Upon substantial completion of Phase I, furnishings and personnel will be relocated out of this area, allowing start of construction work in the phase 2 area. Work of this phase shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy within one hundred fourteen (114) calendar days of notice to proceed and sixty-nine (69) calendar days from start of construction on this phase (May 13, 2002), after the Owner moves out of this area. (Tentative completion date is July 19,2002.) 3. Phase 3: The work in this phase shall include work at the southwest corner of the lower floor level, as shown of construction phase plan in the contract drawings. Upon substantial completion of Phase 2, furnishings and personnel will be relocated out of this area, allowing start of construction work in the phase 3 area. Work of this phase shell be substantially complete and ready for occupancy within one hundred ninety-one (191) calendar days of notice to proceed and sixty-eight (68) calendar days from start of construction on this phase (July 29, 2002), after the Owner moves out of this area. (Tentative completion date is October 4, 2002.) 4. Phase 4: The work in this phase shall include work at the southeast corner of the lower floor level, as shown on construction phase plan in the contract drawings. Upon substantial COITipletlOn Of Piles(! 3, furnishings and personnel will be relocated out of this area, allowing start Of GOnstruction work in this area. Work of this phase shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy within two hundred sixty-eight (268) calendar days of notice to proceed and sixty-eight (68)calendar days from start of construction on this phase (October 14, 2002), after the Owner moves out of this area. (Tentative completion date is December 20, 2002.) 5. Phase., 5: The work in this phase shalt include work at the central Lobby and east entrance corridor of the lower floor level, not already completed in previous phases of work, as shown on Construction phase plan in the contract drawings. This phase area of work may require more public access during construction, than the other phases. Any SUMMARY 0033 01100 - 2 work in this phase that can be completed as part of a previous phase, would be beneficial to the contractor. Work of this phase and the entire project shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy within two hundred eighty-five (285) calendar days of notice to proceed. (Tentative completion date for this and the entire project is January 6, 2002.) 1.5 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. Separate Contract: Owner will award a separate contract to provide office modules and I furniture work to be performed at the site, within each Work area, upon Substantial Completion of each Phase. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of preparatory work under this Contract. 1. Work under this Contract will need to be coordinated closely with the work of the separate contract for office modular and furniture, including location and connections of electrical power, data, wiring, voice wiring, etc. 2. Work under the separate contract will require installation at the end of each phase of the work under this contract. Some installation under the separate contract may require starting installation before full completion of each phase of this contract, in order to expedite completion of the entire project. 1.6 WORK BY OWNER OR SEPARATE CONTRACTS A. Owner Contract: Owner will be installing themselves or under a separate contract, data and voice wiring to offices and office modules and furniture. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of work under this Contract. 1. Therefore, work under this Contract will need to be coordinated closely with the work of the Owner or separate contract for installation of electrical data & voice wiring, devices, equipment, etc. 1.7 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MaslerFormat" numbering system. 1. Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help cross- referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract Documents. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations, These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Languago used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but riot stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words SUMMARY 0033 01100 - 3 shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with,"depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:} is used within a sentence or phrase. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) a : PART 3 - EXECUTION END OF SECTION 01100 SUMMARY 0033 01100 -4 1 r SECTION 01 110 - WORK RESTRICTIONS PART GENERAL r 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. N1.2 USE OF PREMISES A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do riot disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated without prior notification and arrangements with Owner and Architect. 1. Limits: Confine construction operations to area designated for that phase of construction. 2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of site and use by the public. 3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. B. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout construction period, Repair damage caused by consUuction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period. 1.3 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Full Owner Occupancy- Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as riot to interfere with Owner's operations. B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner reserves the nght to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner occupancy. 3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be operational for that area or phase, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. 4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building. WORK RESTRICTIONS 0033 01140 - 1 f' 2 PRODUCTS Not Used AI2 t`< PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01140 , l r t, - WORK RESTRICTIONS :` 0033.; 011.40 -2 t SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAI 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initialed Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change, 2. Within 7 (seven) days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. I17GIUde a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. C. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship, Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor nlay propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change; on the Contract Sum and the Contract Mime. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 0033 01250 - 1 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eiiminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. A. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time, 5. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. G. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document 6709 for Proposal Requests. 1.5 ALLOWANCES A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change Order proposal on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins. 1. Include installation costs in purchase arnount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed. B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within ten (10) days of receipt of the Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted later than ten (10) days after such authorization. 1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. 2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower- priced materials or systems of the same scope acid nature as originally indicated. 1.6 CONTRACTOR'S MARK-UP (Overh(-.,ad and Profit) A. For all contract modification, including Change Orders and Work Authorizations, the overhead and profit for the contractor or subcontractor actually performing the work shall not exceed twelve percent (12%), When one or more tiers of subcontractors are used, in no event shall any contractor or subcontractor receive as overhead and profit more than eight percent (8%) of the cost of the work performed by any of his subcontractors. In no case shall the total overhead and profit paid by the Owner on any change exceed twenty-one percent (21%) of the cost of materials, labor and equipment necessary to put the change work in place, B. Contractor's Proposal shall be submitted with detailed breakdown including itemized labor, materials, overhead and profit. 1.7 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 0033 01250 - 2 natures si Order for a A. On owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change 0 of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. PART 2 - PRODUCTS,(Not Used) : d PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF.SECTION 01250 ` t R : pia CONTRACT IO MODIFICATN PROCEDURES 0033 01250 3 S } t SECTION 11110 , UNIT PRICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, slated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit. B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement for unit prices are specified in those Sections. C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor. D. List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LIST OF UNIT PRICES A. UNIT PRICE NO. A — Replacement of Existing Mechanical HVAC Terminal Unit, 300 CFM UNIT SIZE . 1. Description: Removal existing mechanical HVAC terminal unit and replace with new terminal unit, including all required mechanical ductwork, piping, electrical connections, UNIT PRICES 0033 01270 - 1 etc. for a complete opoiatind irnit and syr;tarn. More or Less new units than shown on the nuu;hanu:al drawings and included in the Base Chid 2. Unit Of nnrasurement: Each (one) tnechanicai HVAC terrTrinal unit. B. UNIT PRICE NO. B - Replaceinumt of Existing Mechanical HVAC Terminal Unit, 500 CFM UNIT SITE . 1. Description: Removal existing mechanical HVAC terminal emit and replace with new terminal unit, including all required mechanical ductwork, piping, electrical connections, M etc. for a complete operating unit and system. More or Less new units than shown on the mechanical drawings rand included in the Base Bid 2. Unit of rneasurenient: Each (one) mechanical HVAC terminal unit C. UNIT PRICE NO. C - Replacement of Existing Mechanical HVAC Terminal Unit, 750 CFM UNIT SIZE . 1 Description: Removal existing mechanical t-IVAC terminal unit and replace with new terminal unit, including all required mechanical ductwork, piping, electrical connections, etc. for a complete operating unit and system. More or Less new units than shown on the mechanical drawings and included in the Base Bid, 2. Unit of measurement: Each (one) mechanical HVAC terminal unit. D. UNIT PRICE NO. D - Replacement of Existing Mechanical HVAC Terminal Unit, 1000 CFM UNIT" SIZE . 1, Description: Removal existing mechanical HVAC terminal unit and replace with new terminal unit, including all required mechanical ductwork, piping, electrical connections, etc, for a complete operating unit arid system. More or Less new units than shown on the mechanical drawings and included in the Base Bid, 2. Unit of measurement: Each (one) mechanical HVAC terminal unit. E. UNIT PRICE NO. E -- Replacement of Existing Mechanical HVAC Terminal Unit, 1500 CFM UNIT SIZE . 1. Description: Removal existing mechanical HVAC terminal unit and replace with new terminal unit, including all required mechanical ductwork, piping, electrical connections, etc. for a complete operating unit and system. More or Less new units than shown on the mechanical drawings and included in the Base Bid, 2. Unit of measureffient: Each (one) mechanical HVAC terminal unit. F. UNIT PRICE NO. F -- Replacement of Existing Mechanical HVAC Terminal Unit THERMOSTAT, including all wiring for complete operation . 1. Description: Removal existing mechanical HVAC tcxminal unit thermostat and wiring and replace with new thermostat and wiring as required for a complete operating system, More or Less new thermostat systems than shown on the mechanical drawings and included in the Base Bid. 2. Unit of reasurement: Each (one) mechanical HVAC terminal unit thermostat sytem. END OF SECTION 01270 UNIT PRICES 003;1 01270 - 2 SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing handling and processing of allowances. 2. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing use of unit prices. 3. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. lb 4. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress DOCUmentatlon" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate prepat ation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule, 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms rand schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than fourteen days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 3. Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide Subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 0033 01290 - 1 B. F=ormat and Confenl Use the Project Manual lnhtc, of contents as a cfuide to establish line itenv; for the Schedule of Values Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section, unless approved otherwise by Architect. t. Identification: Include the following Prrltecf rdentifrcntion Oil tide Schedule of Values: a. Project name and locolron. b. Name of Architect Architect's protect number df Contractor's name and address. , e Date of submittal. 2. Arrange the ;schedule of Value.,; in trabular form with separate: columns to indicate the following for each item listed, a. related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. G. Name of subcontractor d, Name of manufacturer or fobncator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect valun-, g. Dollar value. 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum In enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. 4. Round arnounts to nearest whole dollar, total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line; item ui the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment naay include, materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site, Include ' evidence of Insurance or bcmcled warctrousrng it stored off-site. 6. Provide separate line; items In the, Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each Subsequent slcute of completion, and for total Installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Allowances. Provide a sepaarate line (tern In the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cast allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity Use information Indicatod In the Contract Documents to determine (Iuantities. 8 Each itern in the Scheduic of VI)IL11 s and Applications for Payment shall be complete. INCIude total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other iTlafor cost iterns that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate lint, items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 9. Schedule Updating: Update, and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Surrr. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 003:.3 01290 - 2 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for' Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at tune of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. e S. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress application is the 10th day of each month. The period covered by each Application for Payment starts on the day following the end of the preceding period and ends on Ihfa last day of e lch month C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA DOCUment G702 and AIA Document 6703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Execute by a person authorized to sign iegal documents on behalf of Contractor Architect may return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. Al least one copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested. 2. When an application shows completion of art item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate; which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with Contractor's waiver of mechanic's lien for caistruclion period covered by the application. a. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by file application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms furnished by the Owner or executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. 6. Transmit each set of waivers of lien with a transmittal form showing breakdown of each waiver of lien submitted and it's payment amount and a list of items not included in submitted lien waivers. Total sum of breakdown amounts shall equal amount of previous application payment, before certification of this payment application. G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: PAYMENT PROCEDURES 0033 01290 -3 I List of subcontractors, 2 Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 5. Copies of building permits. 6. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 7, Initial progress report, 8. Report of preconstruction conference. 9. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 10. Performance and payment bonds. 11. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required. H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial ' Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work c?aimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1, Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 3. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 4. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 5. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 6. Evidence that claims have been settled. 7. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement, if project exceeded contract completion date. 8. Affidavit of Compliance with the Prevailing Wage Law. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) r PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 0033 01290 - 4 SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Sperification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but riot limited to, the following: 1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Conservation. 3. Coordination Drawings. 4. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 5. Project meetings. B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility will be assigned to a specific contractor. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequenre required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. i. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work, Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's Cori struction Schedule. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0033 01310 - 1 2 Preparation of the Sctwdule of Valkw:; 3. Installation and removal of temporary fatalities and controls, d. Delivery and processing of submittals, 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation cotifererlces. 7. Project closeout activities. D. Conservation: Coordinate constra.iclion ractivilies to ensure that operations are carried out with ' consideration given to conservation of enorgy, water, and materials. 1.4 SUBMI"TTALS A. Coordination Drnwuags. Prolmm Coordination Drawings if Im -6ted space .availability nLCessitrllrs iaraximunl ulifitalion of simce for officiont installation of different components or if coordination is n:cauired for wstriflnhorl of products and materials fabricated by separate entilies. 1, Indicato rc;lolionship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. 2. Indicate r(�cfcured installation sequences. 3. Refor to Division 15 Section "Basic, Mcc,hanical Materials and Methods" and Division 16 Section "Basil; Electrical Materials and Methods" for specific Coordination Drawing requirenu;nts for muchanical and eledncal installations. B. Staff Names: Within 15 drys of starting construction gperabons, submit a list of principal staff assignments, including supermtend(mnt and other personnel in attendance at Project site, Identify individuals and their duties acid responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office te1(3pt,onc; nurrlbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list at temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. 1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Contractor shall ;ched(ile clod conduct meetings and conferences at Project site. 1. Attender�s Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of dale, and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and time.,. 2. Agcndn Preprar; the meeting wlenda. DISIribUle the agenda to all invited attendees. 3 Minutes, Record significant discussions and ag('00ments ,achieved. Distribute the meeting nunules to everyone: concerned, including Owner and Architect, within ten (10) days of the meeting. B. Preconstructiun Conference. C(;ntr;lctor shall sclicdule a preconslruction conference: before starting construction, al a tune convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of in(,, Agreement. Hold tho conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review rosponsibililies and personnel assignments. 1. Attendees: A(rthorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its ::uperintondunt; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference All participants at the conference , stall be farnifiar with Project and Ciuthorized to conclude rnattors relating to the Work. 2. Agenda- Discuss items of significance. Illot could affect progress, including the following: PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0033 01310 - 2 j a, Tentative construction schedule, b, Phasing, C. Critical work sequencing. d. Designation of responsible personnel, e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders, f, Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. g. Distribution of the Contract Documents. h. Submittal procedures, i, Preparation of Record Documents. j, Use of the premises. k. Responsibility for temporary facilities rind controls. 1. Parking availability. M. Office, work, and slorage areas. n. Equipment deliveries and priorities. o. First aid. p, Security. q, Progress cleaning. r. Working hours. C. Progress Meetings: Contractor shall conduct progress meetings at monthly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings will) preparation of payment requests. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2, Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project, a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule, Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedrle revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interfaco requirements. 2) Sequence Of operations. 3) Status Of Submittals. 4) Deliveries. `i) Off-site fabrication. G) Temporary facilities and controls. 7) Work huurs. 8) Hazards and risks, 9) Progress cleaning. ' 10) Quality arid work standards. 11) Change Orders. 12) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have beeia present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meo-tinq and report. ' PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0033 01310 - 3 a. Schodulc Updating l7rwisrr C:<rnUrlcttrr'�. (:;csnt;irrrrhon Schedule oller ollmh progress rneohno whole reVIS OM; to thO siC:hedlllra 11, 1 1)(1011 made or Iocognimid. Issue revised s(4mldule concurrently with thy! rr-port of ench meeting D. Coordination Meetings. ContraGior sh,ltf conduct farolcct roorc+rnratlon rneelings as construction work necemlales. V'rorect coordrnalron mootings ,ire in addition to speacific meetings heal(] for othor purposes, such as progress moratulo,., in(I preuaslnllation ronforoncvs -1. Attendees: In addition to ropro ionlativos of Owner ,ind Architect, each contractor, subconlractor, supplier, and olher entity concerned with current progress or involved in plannuag, coordination, or perfornarinve, of future artivities shall be ropy.scnted at thraso meetings. All participants nt they ronferenco Flmll be familiar with Project rind authorized to cancludc malturs re,.Inlind to the Work 2. Agenda: Review items oI signlirrranc:e that could affec:l progress. include, topics for diSCLISSi0n all appropri,at+a to stillus of Prc.lj0d 3. Reporting: Record rnr:eting msults ;end drstnbuto copies to overyone in attendance and to others affected by de-cisions or actions resulting fro;ri each nmotrng. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0033 01310 -4 SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 • GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMC.NT'S A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, R7rluding (-onoral and Suppienlentary Conditions tend other Division 1 Specification Sections, .apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes nor ini stratrve and procedural resquare►nents for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Dnln, Sarnplos, ;end other miscoN<anco(rs sul.arn+lials. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Subnlittals Writ ton arid graphic inforrntalaon that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational SUtarTlittral5: Writfor in for rnatiora that does riot require (approval. Subraailtals may be rejocled for not complying with requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTAL. PROCEDURES A. General: Electronic copuas of CAC) Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. B. Coordination: Coordinato prop<aration and processing of submittals with performance of construction ;.activitir;s. 1, Coordinate rich submittal with fabrication, purchasing testing, (delivery, other submittals, and related activilies that require scrquenti i activity ' 2, Coordinrato lions;mittral of different typos of submittals for rotated parts of the Work so processing will not be dolrayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coon(Jill❑lion rr, Archalort reserves the right to withhold action on la sul)IIaitlal requiring coordination Willi olh(1r subr7)rlttals until rolaled submittals aro receivod. C. Processing 'Prue:: Allow on(:,u11h 1117)(1 for subnntial rovaow, irl(.►uding time for resubrnittals, as follows. Time for reviow shall commoner, on Architect's receipt of submittal. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal, Allow additional time if prricessang must be delayed to ponnit coordination with subsequent submittals. 2. Concurront Rovaew: Where concuracant review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties Is required, callow 21 dray, for initial roviow of clach submittal, ' 3. If intormedarate submittal as necessary, process if in same rnannor tat; Initial submittal. 4. Allow 15 drays for procossing cacti reaubmittral. 5. No axtrnsion of the Contract Tinao will bo,, acrthorrzod becaarse of failure; to transmit submittals enough in advance of tho Work to permit processing, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 0033 01330 - 1 f7 ldvflllfu:alron. i'lrlc;r ,i Ilcrrrn;lnc,nt label of lilli! block on each subniltUll for tdentificrltuxl. 1. Indicate mirile of firm or entity lhr.11 prepate-d ouch :submittal on babel of title block. 2. Include tho following information cell label for processing and recording action taken. ra. Prolec;l name b. Dale.,. c. Name rind adclruss cif Archilect. d. Name arld r:adetrescs of Contractor. e. Nalne and address of subcontractor. f Name and address of supplier. rf. Name of manufacturer. h. Unl(IINe RJON1111`10r, iWJLJ(Jine) reVISlon n0illber, 1. Number and title, of npproprinto Spoclficalion Section. I f. rowing number and detail references, ns appropriate. k, Other necessary identification. E. Devlations� I lu)tllighl, encirde, or othorwlse idonllfy deviritions from the Contract Documents on subnuttrils. F, Additional Copies Unless "iddiflonal coples tire; required for final submiltal, and tinles, Architect observes nonronapllancc; with prc�vi!mms of the Contract Documents, iniUrll submittal may serve as final SLJbr1111ta1. 1. Submit one copy of submittal to c;oncurrenl reviewer In addition to specified number of copies to Architect. G. Transmittal. Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling, Transmit each submittal using ca transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor. without prior approval irom Architect. 1, On an attachad separale sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant , information, requests for data, revision<; other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, including torpor variations and lirrlililtlons. Include the same label information as the relrated submittal. 2. Transmittal Foiml Pfovide loc;itiotis on form lot the following iti fort nation: a. Piolrc1 moue. b. Date. G1. oestin,ition ( ro.) cl Source (Front ) e. Names of subcontrtictor, nuulufricturer, 0111 s,lptllior, f Category and type of submittal t) submittal purpose and duscnphon h Subnliftral anrf lransimllol distribution record. i. Remarks J. stynrlture of triansnnller. H. Distribution, Furnish coples of final r.ubi611,115 10 nranrlfactureis, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, iristiallers, WthOritIUS hrlving jurlSdictlon, and others as necessary for performance of constrl,10011 act1V1t10'S. Show distribution oil trnrlsalliltral forms. 1. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicalind ,action taken by Architect in connection with Constru01011, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 0033 01330 - 2 ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit at least (6) six copies of each submittal. Architect, Consultants, and Owner will retain (3) three copies, Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipmont. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. C. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i, Mill reports. j. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals, k. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. I. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards, m. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale, Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1, Preparation: Include. the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b, Identification of products. C Fabrication and installation drawings, & Roughing-in ,and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g, Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. J. Compliance with specified standards. k, Notation of coordinalion requirements. ' I. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 2, Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 0033 01330 - 3 3. Sheet Saze: Exropt for tenaplatvs, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on shoots at least fl.112 by I 1 uu:he;a but no larger than 30 by .10 rnchuas. D. Coordination Drawings Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." E. Samples: Prepare physical units of naterials or products, including the following: 1, Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for rnockups. 2, Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of unals showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 3 Samples for Verifications Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from the s(.anx: nnalenal to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture v<arialums expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. l� 4. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review Of qualifies indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated, Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. ' b. Product na►ne or name of manufacturer. G. Sample source. 5. Additional Information: On at) attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, provide [tie following: a. Size ll(alitations. ' b. Compliance with recognized standards. G. Availability. d. Delivery time. G Submit Samples for rr,vlew of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final subrrailtal and actual component as delivered and installed. a If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the ! product represented by a Sarnple, submit at least (3) three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of the variations. , b. Refer to lndividural Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics. 7. Number of Sranlples for Initial Selection. Submit (1) one full set of available choices where color, paattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufaclurer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 8, Number of Samples for Verification: Submit (3) three sets of Samples. Archilecl will retain (2) two Sarnple sets; remainder will be returned. a. Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication technique's, rcarnnecUons, Operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 0033 01330 - 4 9, Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available: for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity, Sarnpie sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. 2,2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit (2) two copies of cacti submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. C. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements, D. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified, E. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project. F. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. G. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements. H. Maintenance Dam: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." I. Design Data: Prepare:written and graphic information, including, but not limited lo, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. J, Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection, 4. Required installation tolerances. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 0033 01330 -5 5. Required ad ustments. q I 6. Recommendations for cleartintl and protection. K. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service represenlalivfs's torts and inspections, Include the following, as applicable: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report, 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of oporalional and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements, 6, Statement whether conditions, prodLicls, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. L. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions, Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and staterent certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bean Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action, B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: 1. Final Unrestricted Release. When the Consultant marks a submittal "Approved," the �. Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance. 2. Final-But-Rc;stricted Release: When the Consultant marks a submittal "Approved as Noted," the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents. Final payment depends on that compliance. 3. Returned for Resubmittal: When the Consultant marks a submittal "Not Approved, Revise and Resubmit" do not proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity Revise or prepare a new submittal SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 0033 01330 -6 according to the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat If necessary to obtain different action mark, C, Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it loos not comply with requirements, Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party, D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded, END OF SECTION 0133 01330 7 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 0033 SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Water distribution. 2. Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water facilities. 3. Heating and cooling facilities. 4. Ventilation, 5. Electric power. G. Lighting. 7. Telephone senrice, C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: ' 1. Waste disposal facilities. 2. Field offices. 3. Storage and fabrication sheds. 4. Lifts and hoists. 5. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Environmental protection. 2. Temporary partitions. 3. Fire protection. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Owner's construction forces 2. Occupants of Project. 3. Architect. 4. Testing agencies. 5. Personnel of authorities h7vmg jurisdiction. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 0033 011500 - 1 13 [Joctnc Power U!w f-im,tfic jmwoi ffom owneor'S I!Xl;tlllr) systom Without iml ering rued Wllhout payment of uses chouelr,s 1.4 OUALI rY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply will) ANSI A10.6, NE'CA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241. 1. Trade: Jeri sdiction:;' Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions. 2 Electric Service: Comply with NFCA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for lerripor,iry oleclnc powei 1.5 PROJECT CONDI'T IONS A. Conditions of Use,. nc(, followrr)q condil,ons apply to use of temporary services and facilities by a all parties engaged in the Work 1. Keep ternpor)ry services and facilities clean and neat. 2 Relocate temporary services tend facilities as required by progress of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General Provide now rmrtenals Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use intended. B. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." C. Gypsurn Board: Minirnurn 5/8 inch thick, type "X" fire rated, by 18 inches wide by maximum available lengths. Comply with ASTM C 36. D. Insulation: Unfaced rncnerrl fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with rnaxItTtum fk.rnte-spread and sniokc;•developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively. E. Tarpaulins Fire-resistive Iolwk.:d with flame-spread r)ting of 15 or less. F. Water: Pclable , 2.2 EQUIPMENT ' A. General: Provide equipment suitat.)le for use intended B. Field Offices. Provide desulnated ;.)re.) in each phase of work ns the field office area. , C. Fire Extinguishers. Hand c:artiod, portable, Ut. rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as indicated or a combination of extinquishers of Nt"PA-recon)mended classes for exposures, ' 1. Con'rply with NFPA 10 rand NI-PA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by loc zillion and clriss of fire exposure. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 0033 01500 - 2 D. Healing Equipment 1 Use of d,isolme hurning spoc'u heaters, open-flame healers, or s;nlarnander-type heating units is prohibited. E. Electrical Outlets: Properly conlg)iired, NL_MA•polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120-V plugs into higher-voltage outlets; equippcld with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light. ' F. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for surveillance, win no circuits, riot exceeding 125-V ac, 2.0-A rating, and lighting circuits may be, nonmetallic sheolhod cable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, Gf NFRAL. A, Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of they Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities, 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. 1. Provide rubber hoses as necessary to serve Project site. 2, Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly from pans. B. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1. Toilets: Use of Owners existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. C. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. D. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adei11,17te for connection of power tools and equipment. 1. Provide warning signs at power outlets other than 110 to 120 V. ' TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 0033 01500 - 3 E f.ic hung f'lovidn tompofor li hling will) local switching umt provides ;i(loquato Illumnation for 1 ,1 Y .J conslrrlction tgwriltions and traffic conditions 1. !nstall mid operate temporary G(ll)laig think fUlfillS security and protection requirements without ooemlinn entiw system. 2 Provide one 100•W incandescent larnp per 500 sq. ft (.15 �;c) nl), uniformly distributed, for general lighting, or,equivalent Illumination. 3. Provu.le one 100-W incandescent lamp every 50 feet (15 m) ni traffic areas. F. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for common-use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction 'Xtivitas. Al each telephone, post a list of unportant telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. G. Contractor's home office. d. Architect's office. (:1. Engineers'offices. f. Owner's office g. Principal subcontractors' Read and home offices. 2. Furnish superintendent will) (electronic paging device] [portable two-way radio] for use when away front field office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Locale field offices, storage areas, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access. Q. Project Temporary Signs: Install signs to inform public and persons seeking entrance to Project. Do not permit installation of unauthonzed signs. 1. Prepare temporary signs to provide directional inforn-nation to construction personnel and VISItOfS. C. Existing Elevator Usa(e. Use of Owner s ex strut elevator wi!I riot be permitted. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTf:CTI(:)N FACILI rll S INSTALLATION A. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit n , dust and dirt migration to sepiimto Areas from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof floor-to-deck partitions of not less than nominal 4-Inch studs, 5/8-inch gypsum wallboard on at least one side and polyethylene sheets. Overlap and tape full length of joints to prevent dust passage. 2. Insulate partitions to provide not so protection to occupied areas. 3. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip parttons with dustproof doors and security locks as required for access and exit. 4, Close-off or seal mechriniuil tilt ducts, penetrating partitions or extending between construction phase areas to prevent pi:issage of dust through systems. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 0033 01500 - 4 ' B. Temporary Fire Protection: Maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. 1. Provide fire extinguishers, visible and accessible from space being served, with sign mounted above, a, Class ABC dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA- recommended classes for exposures. b. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose; provide not less than one extinguisher at or near each access and exit to construction phase area. 2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. 3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking in construction areas or any part of existing building. 4. Supervise welding operations, and similar sources of fire ignition. 5. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and first-aid fire-protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed, Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL ' A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition. Protect from damage. END OF SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 0033 01500- 5 r SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building for alterations. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. a. Requirements in this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. r1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch the following operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. ' 1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire-protection systems. 4. Control systems. 5. Communication systems. 6. Conveying systems. 7. Electrical wiring systems. CUTTING AND PATCHING 0033 01731 - 1 C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and (lashings. ' 3. Equipment supports. 4. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 5. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's ' aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. , B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces,, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials. PART 3 —EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to , be performed, 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION CUTTING AND PATCHING 0033 01731 - 2 A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to avoid interruption of services to occupied areas, 1 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, riot hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a ' diamond-core drill. 4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations ' following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. ' 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed f=inishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish ' restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. CUTTING AND PATCHING 0033 01731 - 3 a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces, 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even plane surface of uniform appearance. END OF SECTION 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING 0033 `Q1731 -4 w.i, SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and rernoval of selected portions of a building or structure. 2. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section"Summary"for use of the premises and phasing requirements. 2. Division 1 Section "Work Restrictions" for restrictions on use of the premises due to Owner or tenant occupancy. 3. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations. 4. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures for selective demolition operations. 5. Division 15 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching,or relocating mechanical items. 6. Division 16 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated, D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. ' 1A MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. 1.5 SUBMITTALS ' SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 0033 01732 - 1 A. Oualificatron Data: For firm, rind persoris specified in "Otiolrty Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, narnes and addresses .)f architects ,nnd owners, and other information specified. B. Proposed Dust-Control and Norse-Control Measure's: Subrrrit statement or drawing that indicates the measures proposers for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. C, Schedule of Selective; Demolition Activities Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, will) slanting and ending dales for each activity. Ensure Owner's and other tenants' on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utilities. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and contmur,tion of utilities 4, Use of stairs, 5. Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress, including for other tenants affected by selective demolition operations. 6. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of corrapleted Work 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Regulatory Requirernonts: Comply will) governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. D. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in , Division 1 Section"Project Management and Coordination," 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner, will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct sr..leclrve do)11011tron sr) Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide riot less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. B. Maintain accrss to existing walkways, corridors, and other;.adjacent occupied or used facilities. e 1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written perrnission from authorities heaving jurisdiction. C. Owner assumes no responsibility for c:onctrtion of arenas to be selectively demolished. 1. Conditions existing at tune of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 2. Before selective demolition, Owner will renuave the following items: SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 0033 01732 - 2 , a. Furniture. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; Immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations, 1. Maintain fire-protection during selective demolition operations. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as riot to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible and approved by Architect. 2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials. B. Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual Specification Sections, PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped in areas of demolition. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. ' C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 0033 01732 - 3 D When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting frorn selective demolition activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them agriinst damage during selective demolition operations. B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide at least 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover. C. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies if necessary. 2. If utilities are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary utilities that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of service to other parts of building. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. D. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utilities, Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing. 3.3 PREPARAI ION A. Dangerous Materials. Driin, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, flaniniables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition operations B. Site Access and Temporary controls Conduct selectile demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities 1 Do riot close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used faCltitlCS without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes raround closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. 2. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Temporary Enclosures. Provide temporary enrlosures for protection of existing building and construction, in progress and completed, from exposure;, other construclion operations, and similar activities. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 0033 01732 -4 ' D. Temporary Partitions Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to 1111111, dust and dirt migration and to separate areas fron) fumes and noise. 3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Dust Control; Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental protection regulations, 1. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as flooding, and pollution. 2. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas, B. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. C. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated, Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower, 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches, G. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation, 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly, 10. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing before selective demolition operations bean. ' B. Existing Facilities: Comply with building Owner's requirements for using and protecting stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during selective demolition operations. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 0033 01732 - 5 C Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply al with the following: 9 1Y 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items alter cleaning, Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage, area on-site:. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. D. Removed aril Reinstalled Items: Comply with the following; 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage, 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to rnake itern functional for use indicated. E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construCtion indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete F. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch (19 rnm) at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete indicated for selective demolition. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. G. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts. H. Resilient Floor Coverinqs: Remove floor coverings and ,adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI-WP and its Addendum. 1 Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods fecornrnended by RFCI. 1. Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants, 3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS A. General: Promptly repair daraage to adjacent ConStrUCtion Caused by selective= demolition operations. B. Patching. Comply with Division 1 "C.hirer; ;and f'afchang. 3,7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MA'I E_RIALS A. General: Promptly dispose: of dem(:Ashe d matennks. Do rant sallow demolished materials to ' accumulate on-site. B. Burning: Do not burn dernolishad materials. SELE=CTIVE DEMOLITION 0033 01732 - 6 ;E C, Disposal: Transport demolished materials off.Owners property.and legally dispose of them, END OF SECTION 01732 .- Obc 4 4 P wl q Jr-w f- r a t w t.: 01737 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 0033 7 } '4 y _ 't SECTION 01770- CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1,1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1,2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project Record Documents. 3. Operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Warranties. ' 5. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 6. Final cleaning. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of entire project Substantial Completion, complete the following, List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), th : value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance servict: agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, and similar final record informalion. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8, Submit test/adjust/balance records. 9. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 10. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 11. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 12. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects, CLOSEOUT'PROCEDURES 0033 01770 - 1 r B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion of each phase and entire project. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a partial Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection of cacti phase or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before partial certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection; Request reinspection when the entire project is complete (all phases) and the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected, 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion, 1.4 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1.. Submit a final Application for Payrrrent according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list)with each item initialed and dated as complete. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements, 4, Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1, Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) r A, Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. 2. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 1,6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 0033 01770 - 2 A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black-line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. d. Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings. 2. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location, 3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and similar identification where applicable. S. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each sot with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. C. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. 13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: 1. Operation Data: a. Emergency instructions and procedures. b. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards. C. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend operations. d. Description of controls and sequence of operations. e. Piping diagrams. 2. Maintenance Data: a. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 0033 01770 - 3 b. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier. C. Maintenance procedures. d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance. e. Maintenance record forms. f. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials. g. Copies of maintenance service agreements. h. Copies of warranties and bonds. B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to ' accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents. 1.8 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-l/2-by-1 1-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 0033 01770-4 A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's P ersonnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, P l and equipment not part of a system. I. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. 2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on limes, For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season. 1 Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice. 4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction, and course content. 32 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning at the end of each phase for that area, before acceptance by Owner. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B, Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C, Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. d. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. e. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including plenums, shafts, and similar spaces. I. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. q. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains rerna!n. h C!ean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. 1, Remove labels, that are not permanent. j. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces, Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show ovidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do riot paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and 1 electrical narneplates. k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Rurnove excess lubrication, paint droppings, and other foreign substances. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 00:33 01770 - 5 r �. I, Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains,. including stains resulting from water exposure. n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters, Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. P. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor, fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. q, Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do riot discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 0033 01770-6 r SECTION 04720 - CAST STONE PART 1 -GENERAL r 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Cast stone benches top. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing cast stone units in unit masonry. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cast Stone: Architectural precast concrete building units intended to simulate natural cut stone. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual com- ponents and profiles, and finishes for cast stone units. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing cast stone units similar to those indicated for this Project, and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units. B. Source Limitations for Cast Stone: Obtain cast stone units through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Pack, handle, and ship cast stone units in suitable packs or pallets. 1. Lift with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move cast stone units, if required, using dollies with wood supports. 2. Store cast stone units on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Ar- range to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation. B. Store installation materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. CAST STONE 0033 04720 - 1 1,7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate production and delivery of cast stone with unit masonry work to minimize the need for on-site storage and to avoid delaying the Work. PART2 - PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. American Artstone Co., Inc. 2. Arban Associates, Inc. 3. Architectural Cast Stone Corp. 4. Architectural Cast Stone, Inc. 5. Architectural Concrete Co., Inc. 6. Architectural Molded Composites, Inc, 7. Classic Cast Stone of Dallas, Inc. 8. ConArt, Inc. 9, Continental Cast Stone Manufacturing, Inc. 10, Cut Art Castings Co. 11, Dallas Cast Stone Co., Inc. 12. Dura Art Stone, 13. DuraStone. 14, Edwards Precast Concrete Co. 15, Kerckhoff: D. C. Kerckhoff Co. 16. Miller Precast, Inc. 17. Olympian Precast, Inc. 18, Pineapple Grove Designs. 19, Plasticrete Architectural Concrete Products. 20. Russell: W. N. Russell & Co. 21, Stonco, 22. Stone Legends Div., C.S.C.S., Inc. 23. Sun Precast Co., Inc. 24. Techcrete Architectural Precast. 25. United Cast Stone. 2.2 CAST STONE MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1364 B. Embedded Anchors and Other Inserts: Fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M, and hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123. 2.3 CAST STONE UNITS A. Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364. 1. Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory test- ing according to ASTM C 666, Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C 1364. CAST STONE 0033 04720- 2 B. Reinforce units as indicated and as required by A5 TM C 1364. Use galvanized or epoxy- coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1-112 inches (38 mm) of material. C. Fabricate units with sharp arris and details accurately reproduced with indicated texture on all exposed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. D. Cure and finish units as follows: 1. Cure units in totally enclosed curing room under dense fog and water spray at 95 percent relative humidity for 24 hours. 2. Yard cure units until the sum of the mean daily temperatures for each day equals or ex- ceeds 350 deg F. 3. Acid etch units to remove cement film from surfaces indicated to be finished. E. Color and Texture: Provide units with fine-grained texture and buff color resembling Indiana limestone. Color Selection by Architect from full range of manufacturer colors. Submit samples for review and selection by Architect. 2.4 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Provide mortar materials that comply with Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry." 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Anchors: Type and size indicated, fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M, and hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123, B. Dowels: Round steel bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 615/A 615M, 1/2-inch (12-mrn) diameter, and hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123. a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be used 2.6 MORTAR MIXES A. Comply with requirements in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for mortar mixes. PART 3- EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, wilt) Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cast stone. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other at- tachments indicated or necessary to sPXure units in place. Set units accurately in locations in- CAST STONE 0033 04720-3 dicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships s and indicated toler- ances. B. Drench units with clear water just before setting. C. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchors and ties into mortar joints as units are set. 1, Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar. 2. Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set. 3. Leave head joints open in coping and other units with exposed horizontal surfaces. Keep joints clear of mortar, and rake out to receive sealant. D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) or 114 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) or more. B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 corn in 3 rn), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 3/8 inch (9 mm) maximum. C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches (3 mm in 900 mm)or one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less. D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) difference between planes of adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. B. Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement. END OF SECTION 04720 r CAST STONE 0033 04720 -4 SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL l 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Face brick. 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Reinforcing steel. 4. Masonry joint reinforcement. 5. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following net-area compressive strengths (fm) at 28 days. Determine compressive strength of masonry from net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/'('MS 602. 1. For Concrete Unit Masonry: fm = 1500 psi (10.3 MPa). 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product specified. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following: 1. Unit masonry Samples in small-scale form showing the full range of colors and textures available for each different exposed masonry unit required. 2. Grout Samples showing full range of colors and textures for selection by Architect. C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results of Ile following for compliance with requirements indicated: 1. Each type of masonry unit required. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0033 04810 - 1 a. Include size-variation data for brick, verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances. b. Include test results, measurements, and calculations establishing net-area compressive strength of masonry units. 2. Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270. ' 3. Grout mixes complying with compressive strength requirements of ASTM C 476. Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients. D. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements: 1. Each type of masonry unit required. r a. Include size-variation data for brick, verifying that actual range of sizes falls within 1� specified tolerances. 2. Each cement product required for mortar and grout, including name of manufacturer, brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery. 3. Each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type. Include statement of net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530,11ASCE 6/TMS 602. 4. Each type and size of joint reinforcement. 5. Each type and Size of anchor, tie, and metal accessory. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required, B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store mason units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an Y P Y enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under rover, and in a dry location. Do not use cerentitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contarnrnation avoided. D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0033 04810-2 A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each clay's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a rnmifnum of 24 inches (600 rnm) down both sides and hold cover securely in place. 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or root loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns, rC. Slain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such i masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of brick required: 1. Provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces. B. Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade SW and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 7 MPa). 2. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 20 g/30 sq. in. (20 g1194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. 3. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced." 4. Size: Manufactured to the following actual dimensions: a. Modular: 3-1/2 to 3-5/8 inches (89 to 92 mm) wide by 2-1/4 inches (57 nom) high by 7.112 to 7-518 inches (190 to 194 mm) long. 5. Application: Use where brick is exposed, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Color and Texture: Match existing or reuse existing demolished brick. 2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0033 04810- 3 e B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. M Y Y C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying will) ASTM C 207. D. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1,14 inch (6.5 mrn) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-rnm) sieve. F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. , G. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494, Type C, and recommended by the manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. H. Water: Potable. 2.3 REINFORCING STEEL A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 6151A 615M. B. Low-Alloy Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 706 for welded reinforcing. 2.4 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: ASTM A 951 and as follows: 1. Hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire for both interior and exterior walls. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (18-mm) diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch (3.8-mm)diameter. 4. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units where indicated. B. For single-wythe masonry, provide either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods and cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches (407 mm)o.c. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS A. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 5(33 (ASTM A 5h:3NI) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot- dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of diameter and length indicated and in the following configurations: 1. Headed bolts. B. Postinstalled Anchors: Anchors as described below, with capability to sustain, without failure, load imposed within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Type: Chemical anchors. 2. Type: Expansion anchors. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0033 04810 -4 S 3, Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components z i nc plated to comply with AS TM B 53 3, Class Fe/Zn 5 (5 microns)for Class SC 1 service condition (mild). 4. For Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to four times the loads imposed, 5. For Postinstalled Anchors in Grouted Masonry Units: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the loads imposed. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying wilt) ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane or PVC. B. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No, 15 asphalt felt). 2.7 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 2.8 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270. Property Specification. 1. Extended-Life Mortar for Unit Masonry: Mortar complying with ASTM C 1142 may be ' used instead of mortar specified above, at Contractor's option. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement, mortar cement, and lime. 3. For masonry below grade, in contact with earth, and where indicated, use Type S. 4. For reinforced masonry and where indicated, use Type S. 5. For exterior, above-grade, non-load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 5 of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6n"MS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 nim) as measured according to ASTM C 143. D. Submit full range of available manufacturer's colors for selection by Architect, UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0033 04810 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1, Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 2. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected, B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated, B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this Section and in other Sections of the Specifications. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to the opening. D. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide a continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction, Where possible, use full-size units without cutting. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed, E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 cg/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at the time of laying. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following: B. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jaiTibs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 114 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. C. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), nor 1/2 inch (12 nm0 maxirnurr). UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0033 04810 - 6 D. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by mere than 1/4 inch in 20 feet(6 min in 6 m), nor 1/2 inch (12 mm)maximurn. E. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 112 inch (12 mm), Do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 118 inch (3 mm). F. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch 13 rnm). Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 118 inch (3 mm). 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 1. One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches (50 mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-min)horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. E. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows: 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including areas under cells. B. Lay solid brick-size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. 1. At cavity walls, bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. As work progresses, trowel mortar fins protruding into cavity flat against the cavity face of the brick. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0033 04810 - 7 C. Tool exposed joints slightly c:onc<rvo when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint l� thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Grout and Tool single-score masonry units, exposed to view, to match joints. D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 CAVITIES A. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. 1. Use wood strips temporarily placed in cavity to collect mortar droppings. As work progresses, remove strips, clean off mortar droppings, and replace in cavity. 3.7 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide continuous rriasonry joint reinforcement as indicated, Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 rnrn)elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 1111TI). 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 (riches (203 rnrn) o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings. a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. ' 3.8 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make it sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tic:, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. C. Grouting: Do riot place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0033 04810 -8 3.9 REPAIRING, POINTING,, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes, Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing the surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3.10 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Recycling: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At ' completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. B. Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including broker, masonry units, waste mortar, and excess or soil-contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches (100 mrn) in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade. C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess, clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 04810 ' UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 0033 04810 - 9 r SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. �i 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood blocking and nailers, 2. Plywood backing panels. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view and not specified in another Section. 1,3 DEFINITIONS A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise indicated. B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: ' 1. NELMA-Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2, NLGA- National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. ' 4, WCLIB -West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5, WWPA-Western Wood Products Association. ' 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation, Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART2 -PRODUCTS ROUGH CARPENTRY 0033 06100- 1 1 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for , moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2- inch nominal (38-rnm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER A, General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the qrading agency indicated. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or Hem-fir (north); NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-fir; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 inch (1'2.7 mm) thick. 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is in floor, concrete or masonry contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. ROUGH CARPENTRY 0033 06100-2 B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME 618.6.1. E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. F. Lag Bolts: ASME 1318.2.1. (ASME B18.2.3.8M), G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M)hex nuts and, where indicated, Flat washers. H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and ' fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. C. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. 2. Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule," in the BOCA National Building Code, D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION ' A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. ROUGH CARPENTRY 0033 06100 - 3 d Recess bolls and nuts flush with B. Attach items to substrates to support apple loading. ece surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, secure anchor bolts to formwork before concrete placement. 3.3 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Plywood Backing Panels: Nail or screw to supports. END OF SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 0033 06100 -4 SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Plastic-laminate cabinets. 2. Plastic-laminate countertops. 3. Interior ornamental work. 4. Flush wood paneling. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 2. Division 8 Section"Flush Wood Doors." 3. Division 9 Section"Painting" for field finishing of interior architectural woodwork. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, thermoset decorative overlay, and cabinet hardware and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1, Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in architectural woodwork. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Mari ufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material Indicated. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 0033 06402 - 1 I Pl StiG laminates. 2. Thermoset decorative overlays. D. Samples for Verificatioiv For the following 1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, !i inch(a wide by 24 inches long, for each species and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge, 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer QL)alificalionS: An experienced installer who has corl-ipleted architectural woodwork similar in material, design, anc1 extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construclion with a 1ecard of successful in-service performance. Q, Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing ;architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record Of SUCGCSSfuI in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodwork! ig firm to assume undivided responsibility for production and installation of interior architectural woodwork. D, Quality Standard. Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and ' other requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver wOOdwork until painting Arid similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in insinllalicm areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation , areas, ,,tore only in areas whero environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1.7 PROJECT CONDH IONS , A. f=ield fvteasuremmmts. Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other constructi011 by tielcl irie<1SUrerrleiits before fabrication and indicate meaSUR111aents on Shop Dri.iwuuls Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaynul the Work 1. Locrato concealed Irt ming, b1twking, and reinforcenlOntS that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Strop Drawings. 2. Established C)imensions Where held nieasurerrler)tS cannot be made without delaying Me Work, establish di nunsions anti proceed with fabricating woodwork without field rturasurefiwiits, Provide allominco for trimming rlt site, and coordit ate construction to OfMire that a0iill dimensions Correspond to established dlrriensions, 1A COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizos rind locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related , units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 0033 06402 -2 PART 1 , PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A., General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Red oak, plain sawn or sliced. C. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135A. 2. Mediurn-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A2.08,2, Grade MD, 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay, 5. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1. D. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, or medium-density fiberboard complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, with surface of thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1, E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative laminates by one of the following: a. Formica Corporation. b. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. ' F. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic laminate: Unpigmented contact cement. ' 2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by referencing BHMA numbers or items referenced to this standard. B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening, self-closing. C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, 4 inches (1r10 nmm) long, 5116 inches (8 mm) in diameter. D. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A 156,9, B04071; with shelf rests, 804081 E. Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, full-extension, zinc-plated steel drawer slides with steel ball bearings, BHMA A156.9, B05091, and rated for the following loads: 1. Box Drawer Slides: 75 Ibf ( Q0 N). 2. File Drawer Slides: 150 Ibl (670 N). 3. Pencil Drawer Slides: 45 Ihf (200 N). F. Door Locks: BHMA Al 56.11. E07121. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 0033 06402 - 3 G. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: ?-inch (51-mm) OD, brick, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic; caps with slot for wire passacle. H. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide hnmh that complies with BHMA A156.13 for BHMA finish number indicated, as selected by Architect from the following: 1. Dark, Oxidized, Satin Bronze, Oil Rubbed: BHMA 613 for bronze base; BHMA 640 for steel base; match Architect's sample. 2. Satin Brass, Blackened, Bright Relieved, Clear Coated: BHMA 610 for brass base; BHMA 636 for steel base. 3. Satin Chrenaium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. 4. Satin Stainless Steal, RHMA 630 L For concealed hardware, provide Manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. ' B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide Premium grade interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard. B, Wood Moisture Content: Comply with re(luirernents of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to anabient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Erase edges to radius indicated for the followint.): 1 Corners of Cabinets and Fdgr s of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch f I 'i rnn�j D. Complete fabrication, inducting assembly, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting 1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication cheap that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verily that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies tigainst field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings , before disassembling for shipm ont. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAi_ WOODWORK 00.33 06402 -4 E. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 2.5 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate cabinets. ' B. Grade: Premium. C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. D. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: ' 1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: HGS. 3. Edges: HGS. E. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative overlay. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative overlay. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative overlay. F. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with (lie following requirements: 1. Provide Architect's selections from laminate manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes in the following categories: a. Solid colors. b. Patterns. G. Provide dust panels of 114-inch {6.4-nuii} plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops. 2.6 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWl Section 400 requirements for high-pressure decorative laminate countertops. B. Grade: Premium, C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: ' INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 0033 06402 - 5 r 1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes in the following categories: a. Solid colors. b. Patterns. E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. , F, Core Material: Particlebuard or medium-density fiberboard. 2.7 INTERIOR ORNAMENTAL WORK FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 700, B. Grade: Premium. C. Wood Species and Cut: Red oak, rift sawn or cut. 2.8 FLUSH WOOD PANELING , A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 500 requirements for flush wood paneling. B. Grade: Premium C. Wood Species and Cut: Red Oak, plain sliced. 1. Lumber Trim and Edges: Trim edges indicated as solid wood using lumber compatible with grain and color of veneered panels. D. Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Random Match, ' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming, 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. ' INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 0033 06402 - 6 r B, Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shuns. Install level and plumb (including lops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches, (3 trim in 2400 Warta). C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substra,es. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete i istallation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. E. Trim (Ceiling Grille); Inslall with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. 1. Install trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches (:3 earn in 2400 nun). F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation, Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 nun in 2400411M) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches 0100 mrn) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-ir:ch (25-mna) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 rnrn in 2400-rnrn) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mrn) o.c. and to walls with adhesive. 3. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," as directed by Architect. H. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork, finished at project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A14D CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware,. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and senuexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 06402 ' INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 0033 06402 - 7 SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes joint seal,.rots for the applications indicated in the Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3 and the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section: 1. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Joints between dissimilar materials, as directed by Architect. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows, as directed by Architect. C. Joints between adjoining walls, floors, and counters, as directed by Architect. d. Other joints as indicated. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ' A. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water- resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. ' C. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer. D. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements. E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project. JOINT SEALANTS 0033 07920- 1 B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of Point suntan! through one source from a single manufacturer. 1,6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient arid substrate ternperature conditions are outside firnits permitted by joint- sealant manufacturer. ' 2, When joint substrates ,.ire wet. 3, Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant rnnnufacturor for applications indicated. 4. Contaminants capable of inlerferrncJ with adhesion have not yet been re:nnoved from joint substrates. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastornerrc joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period, 1. Warranty Period: 10 years frorn date of Substantial Completion. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compbance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL. A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substratra under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant rranufaclurer, based on testing arid field experience. B. Colors of Exposed .Joint Soalants. As selocted by Architect.from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS , JOINT SEALANTS 0033 07920 - 2 A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 92.0 and other requirements indicated for each pY q liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be ' nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project, C. Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant ES-1: 1. Available Products: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 799. b. GE Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000. c. GE Silicones; UltraGlaze, SSG4000AC. d. Tremco; Proglaze SG. e, Tremco; Spectrem 2. f. Tremco; Tremsil 600. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: N'T' (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: (M, (G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Use O Joint Substrates: steel, wood and glazing. Ab 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS ' A. Latex Sealant LS-1: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF. B. Available Products: 1. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 600, 2. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 r-. 3. Sonneborn, Division of ChenrRex Inc.; 5onolac. 4. Tremco; Tremflex 834. 2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material acid type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ' JOINT SEALANTS 0033 07920 - 3 A Primer- Material recommended by JOnv-seaalaant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to Joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstrcaction joint sealant substrate tests and field tests. B. Clearlors for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free, of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrate, and adjacent nonporous surfacers ail any way, and formulated to promote optantint adhesion Of Sealants to Joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent 10 joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive Joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for Joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint- sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of ,Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including durst, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optnnurn bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or,blowing out joints with oil-free ' COMpressed alit. Porous joint substrates include the following: n. Concrete 3. Rernove 1a:chance and form-release- agents from concretes. 4. Glean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do riot stain, harm substralUS, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. NOnporous 101111 substaaales I11a,lude thy, following: a. Metal. b, Glass. B. Joint Miming, I'rirne joint suhslratcs, where recurnrnendcsd an writing by joint-sealant rnanulaactuler, btlS('d On pre,,onstructlon Irainl seala.Inl suhstralra tests or prior experience. Apply ' printer to comply with JoinI-seaalnfit nlanufa�ctfurer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of Joint-st.,I!ant hoed: do riot ,))low !,,aallage or migrotion onto ,adjoining surfaces. JOINT SEALANTS 0033 07920 - 4 ' C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products ' and applications indicated, unless rnore stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. ' 2. Do no' stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. ' E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise ' indicated. a. Use masking tape to protect surfices adjacent to recessed tooled joints. 3.4 CLEANING ' A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. ' 3.5 PROTECTION JOINT SEALANTS 0033 07920 - 5 A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances ' and from damage resulting from construction operations or other cruses so sealants are without deterioration or damage at lime of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.6 JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE A.' Joint-Sealant Application JS-1: Glazing joints in doors and frames. 1. Joint Sealant: Single-cornponent neutral-curing silicone sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: clear, 13. Joint-Sealant Application JS-2: Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows; Perimeter joints of casework and backsplashes. 1. Joint Sealanl: Latex sealant. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. END OF SECTION 07920 e r JOINT SEALANTS 0033 07920 -6 r 1 SECTION 08110 - 81LE;L DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL r 11 RELATED DOCUMENTS r A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1,2 SUMMARY r A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel door frames. 2. Borrowed-light frames. r3. Fire-rated door and frame assemblies. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors installed in steel frames. 2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Naming Products)" for door hardware and weather stripping. 3. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass in glazed openings in doors and frames, 4. Division 0 Section "Painting"for field painting factory-primed doors and frames. ' 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in ANSI A250.8, are minimurns as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both uncoated steel sheet and the uncoated base metal of metallic-coated steel streets 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation, type, level and model, material description, core description, construction details, label compliance, sound and fire-resistance ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1, Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors including vertical and horizontal edge details. 3. Frame details for each frame type including dimensioned profiles. 4. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, accessories,joints, and connections. 7. Coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. C. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing schedule for doors and frames. ' STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 0033 08110 • 1 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Door and Framo Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.13, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 130 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire- ' protection ratings indicated, based on tasting according to NFPA 252. C. Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND FIANDLING ' A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames. B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage is 1 found. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover, Place units on minimum 4-inch- (100-mm-) high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mrn) spaces between slacked doors to permit air circulation. PART- 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to Compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may he incorporated into the Work include, but are riot limited to, the following: ' 1. Steel Frames: a Arnweld 131111drn(l P(OdUCIS, Inc I). Benchmark Commercial Doors, a division of General Products Co., Inc. C. Ceco Door Pr0'L)CfS; a United Dominion Company. d. Curries Company. e' Kewanee Corporation (The). f. Mesker Door, Inc. g. Steelcraft; a division of Inge-,rsoll-Rand. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steal (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface dr,fect s; pickled and oiled. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 0033 08110 - 2 B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366H, Commercial Steel (C S). or ASTM A 620/A 6 20M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretc-ter-leveled standard of flatness. h 2.3 FRAMES rA. General: Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings that comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile, Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. B. Frames of 0 067-inch- (1 7-rn(ri-) thick steel sheet for: 1. Wood doors. C, Door Silencers: E=xcept on weather-stripped frames, fabricate slops to receive three silencers on strike jambs of single-door frarnes and two silencers on heads of double-door frames. D. Plaster Guards: Provide. 0 016-inch- (0 4-mm-) thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close off interior of openings; place at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation. E. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0 042-inch- (1.0-nim-) thick, electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet. 1. Wall Anchors in Masonry Construction: 0.177-inch- 0.5-rnm-) diameter, steel wire complying with ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 51OM) may be used in place of steel sheet. F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate steel frame units to comply with ANSI A250,3 and to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free: from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly Lit Project site. B. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." C. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. D. Hardware Preparation: Prepare frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250,6 and ANSI Al 15 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. 1. For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcement, and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or hears of frames, as applicable. rE. Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered and continuously welded corners and seamless face joints. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 0033 08110 - 3 1 2. Provide welded frames with temporary spreader bats. F. Reinforce frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be clone at Project site. G. Locate hardware: as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8, H. Glaring Stops: Manufacturer's standard, formed from 0.032-inch- (0 8-mrn-) thick steel sheel. 1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 2. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing stops on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. r 2.5 FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of rust-inhibiting primer complying with ANSI A250.10 for acceptance criteria. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install steel frames and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless othervise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. Except for frames located in existing walls or partitions, place frames before construction of enclosing wails and ceilings. 2. In metal-stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jani5; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Attach wall anchors to studs with screws. 3. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer, B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. END OF SECTION 08110 ' STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 0033 08110 - 4 SECTION 0811 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A, Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for hollow metal frames receiving wood doors. 2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size. and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and ' other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and IOCatIOnS of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI's"Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated." 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 0033 08211 - 1 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING r A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic: sheeting, C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1,6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a ' 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-ntrn) section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mni in a 75-mm) span. 1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion: a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Flush Wood Doors: a. Ampco Products, Inc. b. Eggers Industries: Architectural Door Division. c. GRAHAM Manufacturing Corp. d. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. e. Oshkosh Architectural Door Co. f. Southwood Door Co. g. VT Industries Inc. ' h. Marshfield Door Systerns, Inc. 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL ' A. Doors for Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces, 2. Species and Cut: Red oak, plain sliced. 3. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 4. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match. 5. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each separate room or area of building. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 0033 08211 -2 C. Stiles: Same species as faces. 2.3 SOLID-CORE DOORS A. Particleboard Cores: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware as follows: a. 5-inch (125-nnm) top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers. b. 5-inch (125-nun) bottom-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have kick or mop plates. C. 5-inch (125-mm)midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices. B. Interior Veneer-Faced Doors: 1. Core: Particleboard. 2. Construction: Seven plies, bonded construction. C. Fire-Rated Doors: 1. Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or manufacturer's standard mineral-core construction as needed to provide fire rating indicated, a. 5-inch (125-mm) top-rail blocking. b. 5-inch (125-rnm) bottom-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have protection plates. C. 4-11'2-by-10-inch (114-hy-250-mini) lock blocks 5-inch (125-mm) midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices. 2. Edge Construction: At hinge; stiles, provide manufacturer's standard laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance and with outer stile matching face veneer. 2.4 LIGHT FRAMES A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: 1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces, 2. Profile: Flush rectangular beads. e 3. At 20-minute, fire-rated, wood-core doors, provide wood beads and metal glazing clips approved for such use. B. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 1 0.0478-inch- (1.2-rnm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; factory primed and approved for use in doors of fire rating indicated. ' 2.5 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated: ' FLUSH WOOD DOORS 0033 08211 - 3 I. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated door,. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied, Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI Al 15-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s)of door(s)required. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. PART 3- EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, reverenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. D. Field-Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements: 1. Division 9 Section "Painting." 3.3 ADJUSTING , A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do riot swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of , repair or refinishing. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 0033 08211 - 4 . � I I . � � I I I 11 I 1 . I I . . 1 . ' ' . - - 11 - 11 . � � . I � I I I . . d - - � - I I I r I I I . I 11 I . � � I I I � I I �.11 .I I � I .. I I �I . I. � I I� I I I .I I . I I . � I I � � I - � I I I - I . 1 , �' . I 11 .11,11, - I : , - - I I � � � I 11 11 . END OF SECTION 08211 = ,01. � fo � I I I I - I . I � I I I . I � � I I I - I � p I i, ,; : , " �- -�, � � I �", 11 . - I � I �, i t,I .� � . . �� ,� .'', !, I , ': , .. , I �z . � , , I - I bi, I � , - - �,o 1. I ;-�� , 4. - il ", .1 I I I - I ., -�: � , i - - - I I I �-, � I . - : I . � ,� I - 1: 1 : -i,:%� ,:' , - � �" .': t, I . 1. - 11 �I I . � I . I � I - I Irl-lb-1-1- 11 -1 "' ;,.- , 11 I'll .- 1 :1.i . ,- � '', - .. 111. '' . ��;_ � . : �� :-, --,: � ��:,- ."". .' '-�'� ., 11- 11 , . - - 1'' . �..,, - -,� -�' . '1� - � I I . �' .. � 1 . 11 , -� � - , , I - � :: - :--:.:- . --1 � 7 �, 1 � � I - :1 -li,. � ]-. :,.� . I ., . -� - I - I I � - ,� � � .� I - , , ''. - I . � .� ,i , I u - '-.-.-:,�ll � . I � 11 11 - --- . � 11 � I �: : - ,� � - � - � � ::. � " : �' , �' ��,i,1�1: 11 ��'�.: :-,:1,-1,�� li.... , , , , �:, I t" , , , �. - z�, � - -, :� � - - i - I I I . , - . - : �-i . . I - I -, I � � - 11, 111 , �, 1 11- 11 " I ' ll ll-, 1 : ' 11 -1 1 -11-1 I'll 1 - � : -� - , � � 11 I ., � ll,�;� :.� . - - :-:.- � - - � � � . I -- : ll-� :t - :,t -, , ! I . 11 - - - 11 - : - - 11 - - , I , - ,I: . I - I I I 1: ,�: � ''. � I I �1 :� .''.. ��� � �:: : - , :.: ,:. ,�� ,� I 11 � - � � .1 - : 1, ' ': � � �.� - I . . I 1- � 11 ,� � ''' : ­ �, � i-, i�."�,' "';,'',., I . I - - I I I � j - � I - � � ,, : 1. � ,�,. :�!--- . - � . -" . .1; 11 I - 11 -1c. ., .11, . � - ­ ,:, I 11 . � I " I . I , 11 . " . -�- - � I �.". 11-11.1 --.1 - � '' I - , I � I - � I I � - o ... I 1''. " : � - - : :' . � : - I I � - �Om , � �, - I I . ,­, ..,�, - - . . � .1 . 11 - I � , , - -, : ,:� � :�. , , , ' ' � Y . :, - �:� , ._ - .I I ' ' , � 11 - ., I - 11 -: ,- : I - � ::: �:��:-_ , . ,: 'i ��.-,_�� � _", �: ,:, - ' ' ' I .� I I.2. I I I.1 , .- I I -- � . . � - I ..�1-4 � .-� �. I I ' ' I , : I I I I�. � 1 I I I � � I .1 , -. I - � - � . � I . I - I�I I , : � , I :,, I ,� 1,a �� I I I, � � .I .. � I � . I'� I : ,.: ," I.: .�I . I.t I I" �I . ,� � I I �I I � I : � �,�,��, , 3 1 1:�,� � � � , �, , �� ,: ,,: : I I I � I I I I ��I � . � I � I� � I � � I �I � :,I I . , I I �I �. I .I:�I . I .I �. I I I ,. i . � .�� . I. I�� .��� �� . � � 11 I. I I. . I I . i I % � I : �. 1..'� I�:1.i I � � I I I ,� I I .: .�; � I I��. , , .� . � I� I � ..1 . I I I I I . � � I I I I �� , ,.� I , . I ,� I .,I x . . � ., . :. �, I �.�I I �-� , � . I ,.� � I , - .� I I � �; - I I I � I I I ,� I �, �� I 1:: I � ,, . I . .I ,I !�,�,. I " I I I I. I I :� � ,- :", ! � ��: , � �.� I:, . � � I, I I.� I I I I : �:;., ,:�,:� .I,: �;:A-, � � I �, I ,. � :, , ,.I �, . : ,, ," I I � I� �, ; �, . � ,� I I . " I�I �� I �I� . .1 . ,, � , ,, � I I I I . . I I �� � I I I I I . I � I . I �, . , ';� : �, . I I � , � , I.I.. , , I I ,I � I � . . I � � I � I �, ,I. I � *, ::�� � :� ..�; � I �� . � I I � I:I - � I I I I . I I I . �. I : I ,.. :, �,� 1,I I I I I I I I I � ,, - , : � , �,,11� I.I . , � I, I � I . I . I� I �: �I I .. . I I I . I I :�.�� � � , 1, �,:I I I �� .I I� -1 I . I I I � I I I I �I. I �.I I ,I I I�,� , � �,. .I,. � . ., � ,I ,. il I I I I � t . , � : ., � I I � I �I� �, � I . I � �I: I ., I I � I �, I I� ,� ,� . . 1,I I I� . . I . �.�I 11 I ,11 I I � � I I. I I I I I � � I I .I I .I 1.� � : �:: .I . - . I I I �I � I I 11 I. -I-�:41.1-% ., :11 I ��,,��", �I I � � � I,I i. :�� .� I , I,� �� .1 I. 1. I . I I I I. �I I . I I I � � ��i I I. I I I: I I I .� I, � I I I I��. � ,: �.� . I I : I�.1 I .I I �I.� �,. �I : I I I� I � I I . I I I I I.I � I I � �I I I I I� �%, . � . I� I I �I,- ,, , I . � I I "I .� I. I �I . � I I I I . I I I I� I�, I I . I I . I .,.I I � - I I � I I . I I I � , �I I I I T 4 I I . I I ,� I�I ,: I I I . �I I � � I I I � I . �, � � .I I� I �I I� I,: � .I.I t"� I I.I I . ; I I . I I I��:,! � I q . � . I I I � I � I . I; � I I � , I I � �I I� .I � . �I . I � � I I . . I I : I�. . I. I I �..� . .I� �I . ,� I, . :. I I � . � I � . I I � I . . I I I 1,� � !1, �,�, I I � I�. I I I I I I . 1. I I I� . I I � I I I I I � I� �I I I. :: � : . , I I I:w I,,,i � �. I ,I I I I I � I,I 11 .I I I I I I I � I �� � I I I I . � . :�, I � I I I i� I I I �I'- i, ,, .,� I I 1.I . I . � . I . I I I I I . I 1, � .I. � . I I � I . I I I I, ,. i, ,�� j�: ,I I I� � � . .: I I I I .1 ,� : I I 5,, "I " : 11 I 1. I I I I ;,. I : I:�. I I,� I I I I . I �,� I I I . , I .1 I I I I I � I I I . I �I I .I I I . ,, ,I I..I I I I I . I . I .�,i . I. I ,� , I I I I I:., � : .;I � . . I I i , , I I :I I I I � I I I �I .� ,� . .� . . �, �, ..�, I� : , , � �: ,��. i . � � �. . ,,, I � I. I �� , I I I � I I : :,. I I� � . . I,I .! I � �� . . � I I I �� .I .� I I ,o�. i � I � . I .: . . I ��� I � . - I I I, I I � ,I : , ..- i.1 ,, , : � I I �I I . I . I I � � I,I � , I, z I I " I . I I I ; I� I I ,I I � I i I � �I�, � , I 1, I .I I I I I :, : , �,, : �* , � . , �,.,, .. ,� ,.,,,,, I:- ��I %� �. 11 � I� I I�. , ,: I I . . I . � I �.1 I,; ., . I I I , �, I ., I, �.�, � . i I � ,I��I I , I I , � I :�� � ,; 11 I I I. I I! I i * . : ,,�� , .� I, I I -.I ," I �t� , ,I�,� ,I : I ,I � :, , � I I I� I .,I I, . I . ,, , , , �: -,�,,,�� , . , � - � , ��: . I i .� �. , ; I, � , � : �� I � . I� � , I I " � I I I: , � :" ,,� I.,4.. I I I �� 4� � :� , : , " ,,I ;: .� I ,:I � � � � I I.� �, , � . ,, � , ":I ,I �, � I � I I � : z:1, I � :�F -I, ; I I I ���, I, .. I I I I I� : ,., , ,, I . " . : ,�i , �I., . I ,� . I I : I: I 1,�� � � I: �:I I�� I I'. . I- I . I I I � 6, :,�. I -�, I ,�: �� . � I I I � 4 1 , , . I .1 I�,: ; . .�� I I I , � , : : 11 . " ... , ,; , . � �- �.,� . I I I�. � . I I � . I I , I , I I: , I , � . I , I I I.,.i 1,; -I , I , ,0.!,. ,� .� I . I � � I � � I I I I�� � � �, � ,�, � I 1, , - 1. ,�I �,� I ,I I . . I . I.� ,. F � I , , : .f I I I I I � I . I �l �i . � 11 I I . I I. I I.I I � I : , . I .. I I I I..I I! , � 1. � . 1, I � I �.,: I I,.. I :: , .I , 11 I I I I I. I I � I I I�, I ,I ,��, � I 11 .1 I� I� � I I�� . I I I I .I I,� I I : I I I I . . i, � : I I I I I ..i I I I,; .I ,:- I�,I i .; .� I I I - . � �I I i ,� I I I I .. ,I � : ,. I I, . :i , I I I I� � ,, :,* - I I I I I � I I 11 I � ,�, I 11 �I.I I I I I:,I I".I ... I.I I� I I � , I ,� I , .� : -, :,, :,,, , I I , ,,t. I I � I I I I I . I I I� : ,, 1 , �, .,,, �, ,, , ,, � �.I i - � : : ,, : �:, : ., I;, , � - � �- , �,� � 7 , . ;,�, :� , -: I�I I . , * ,I.I �., , ,, �, :� ,, �, I; �I I .� I . . I,. �,:, : � . I. � .I�,11 , , � . I i ;;, ;�I I I. .. I I ,::� I �,:, ,,,�..�.I,..I, I ,. I� � �I I � � I I � I. I , � � I� I :� � I I 1: I I, . I . � I� . I I I I i I I : �, I,, ,. I �-�, I I ., ,I-I , ,:I � .�,:;i;" �:,�, �I � , ���� : , �.:�: �:�. �,�, � .� � . ... I,�,, I I� .I��I I . .,I I �. I I ; 11 I I �I, . . I I i :� I . ,I. , , I , . �. .I , : . �� ,, � I I. . .: ; :,: : I � :,� ,:�� �, ,.�', : �� : ,I ;, , � � � ::� �� ,�- , , I I �I ; , : I I. � . � : q I I� I � I , I:� �-! : " ,. I.-I ,�I I� :,.�I. i I :. ;I I I I 1. . ," I.,,-.I - � ,�� I I I I. . I I I I I� ,�: I, I I I, . �,. I , .�, ,, . - . I . 2�:I;- , . I I I : �, . -! . . .. I, .. �I � I I , I,.I � I �I I I ,I� � I I .:, � � I .I .1 I .. , ,, , . � I .I � I . . I I . : .1�,% I ,�1:,� I �4,:,, I I I I� I I I 11 �I:�.":I , I �: I I I I . % .� I: . . . I .�I � I - I I. ,, - I, ,��. I I. Z," :�, ,, ,1 c- � " � i I I � I I I � . I � � .- �I I . I.�, t �.I � . .I i, ,, ��,��' , � I 1. , . . .� I , , � , : �, �I:� I f w I , I, I I..I I :: -, � I , -!1� o I. .I� ;: I ;� � . � , I I. : . �I I�.. �,,: � ,, I I I I . I 1, I I %I : . ���� � , I -:� I -� , I I� I �� �, ; ,I.I,'.�� ,, .,::I I I� I I I � I I � . , � . ,.I ,. : I .1 � , ,, ! I , * f 1, i:. . I i I � , " I�,I I I I ,-, �I , �I . � . ,I I� �. . I �I �!, I . . . I I �� I � :,,� I I- .,, � ,:. . . � I �1, I�,11�l I I I.,I I 1.I 1. I I. �11 � . � I I�;,; . ,: * I.,;.. , .,. ,., I� ; I, �, , :.,� : � �,���� � �,,. . I I�I I.��,.�,: ,, 1� �i .i,!,., ���,.�I i I:i:,�,1 i* . � I-� :�!*� * ,,. . I �, I �. I I, I �I ,,, �I I I�I I I ,I I I ,. �"I -�I I,I�. �,� �I: I j I I . . I I I , . , I �I .. f I� �I� I,,I ,I.,'. .,,�,7, ,..,-, 1�"� �".� -,; I I I o , . � - - .., ,!- - - I, �I ��;-��!,���; ��:�,�.�'�',��,:- , , ,�,, ,:, ,, I p � I ,, , �:,���, ,,,,�� �," �-�-�-1:-,�,�. � I � ,� ,. ,, .': . ,I I ,,Z!, I ... .. %,., I"I, I :� ,�I I � ., -.-I. .:1,.1,,��I 1, ,I I �.I I":� . . �, �..�,I I � . ., I ,. �. i.,: , , , �, a ,.I ., ;,�.I 1, . I,I 4 I , , I I � . ,� I I ,., . 1, ,,, � I I , ,,, ,.�, , I i�. ;- I I . � I I I I : ,. :; ., ,�,1..t,�I,-q I �:�,..,;�.," �,�,,-, -,,, �i - I I, 4 �, , I , � I,� - :, I: :, , ,,. , ,� , .I I� .I I ", :. ,,�? , �,,.,�. ,�,-i,,�",,�,'�" , ,,� . I 1. � .� , I I. . I I,: .- , � .::, � � ,i;:1, , , ,. , , �.I,� �: � .� I ,, -,I ., I I� I I-� I I�11 . I :, ,- . , �I . , � �,,,., ,�: ,� ., I i,I. � �, ,,-�,�: .I , �,"�,�',.',�;�,,,,�,,".,o;�,;�" 11;i- :1: ..1 ;.,,� ,,i .�', ,, ,:,I , �. I, :� I I I . ��., �, �,��--;.� ,,�����;', - j`-�I: ; ..I,�,,I I �,�...... .�.-,.:,,,, ,��s., .-t���:�,���i,�:ii ":I, , i I � I. I, I,,,,� I : -,::, .: . , �.,� . , , :,�, . ���I ; 4, �.,,,,, . ,I-I-'I,�,�I.�'I "�� , ." ��,:, ,,v� I I , , .I : , - ,�, .� ,� , ,, � ,,�� ,,, ,I .�il�,� ,.;.-,!�i:,`�,q, , � � - , ,,"' I �,�. I�'i�I I! : �,"� :,� :-1::11, I�: . �� �, : :�� �,I�I I,�I . :� ��7:;,,:�i�,,��:i���i,.:, ;�,�,�,*,,;� .::, , ,�-,,, �:,,��'", �, � �!�.,z'i,,:�.��, �'.�,,.,".1,.4;"�;�- ,z",1'.,, I'll I ,: ;i , , , , � , ,- .: - ���,.,,� ,�,�i,, 1,��,�,��I ei,!W,;I.I I,; � ,,, ,- I I � . I , �, ,�?� , . ,� ,; I,., ,�,1,� , ; - �, � ,': , '.�,,Z,,..: .:,� ,,,1 �, .,, �, . � I 1� ,;�, -:j,t -, I: ,:: �1, ,; .,, ��, . ,�� : : , ,�,,,: ,, ,,, � , �,, ,, . ., -, �;,.,:�!, , .,���I` I",, , �,. ��,�, �,�:�.,,��,,;, ,",.- .-""-".1,.-k;�-,k',,�':��,i,"1-,1 I Il�.',.',I,,,,�i,,�I,1, s., :,.I,:,o`,1.:�1-.,,,�,.�,I,,,,'�.,i".::��,-,:".I"4,��i.�,,I,,,,-,1.,I�,��`0.1',,iI��,�k,,.,.,.-,�-,,",.,,"ii�,,I;�:�,,-�.,.i,,,.,",I;,.,�I�,,,.1,i",,��,,'.-,".�-:,,�.�,;%,,,,-��:,�I,��,�,�L-,1 71 �� I I --�,-::' , �-1-.-',"�.� I . I. ,,--i",",�""..��.�:��i i,",�1"-;I",,'7,;;;,,i-.,"�.,�;,,..,,:"I�,� ,,I `;,I��"��� ���,�I..t�'.��,,1�ll'��-1'"`,,I,-,,!,4.�,�,I 1,��"!:�-.,i,�,(,-�I�i�I-I:,­�!,i 1,�-,1,.;i:l,,!-�.,,;,�l�,:-,1�,:�,.1.":i-.,,,,,-�,,�',-4-",-i�.,�.-.,":".1�I:.,,.�,,,.�-�.I,",:,,.;i,�,;.!�.-',�.�"I,:.I'.,�,�i;,,..I�,��i,,,-,:�,t-��, . .,�,�,.,i- I. �:I,I�,.:,:I I",.:�..I�,,:�,;:��,,.��I.,�,,"",�,:,:,-,,,�I,�;I:.�'�I,I%-.��..I--,.:.,""�.I.:,I,,";�i?I�,,��.i"-,I,��,,:,,I�I:1�,.�.,.��,.,I,.,"�:,.-�,,,,:�,�-,,-:-.�:,�:�,*,I.i,,,,..,.�1,,,'.:,I:.:I I�... ;.. ."�-i i�.,�I.,I�I,��i,,,,,:.�..F I�,,.�.,,��*1, ,-,,� ,1,:�,,�-, ,I��:,.,,,.--,,��,,,��V;' :,,,,.,,��i",��".v� ��,,�',,,,�-,.��"-- i '�,,,"j:.�,' zg.' :� } ;!:� �I�,��",.I��.:�.�_,-,�r�,1-.I,;,.�:,�i���,,,�%�11:�,-�'1�:i,,�,.��I��.:I,�I,�I.1,�,4.,.,�..I...�:,.,.-�f�,,,�:-,�I 1�,��-"'-,,,�����,,�I I,,:�".i-,.,;:,�F,�.,�-",.,,".'�"�,�,,,.�'.,,.-,,,�.i.�,"�,� �I�,�I:I,i.":",l,I��.. :�I,,��-,i.f i,�:.�-,I-:.,�,".1,I,,!1�.�r�"�,2,*-11.�I,�*;1.-.,,, :,�i,. ,,,,;-,,,�.,�. ,��,t�':��-,,�-.,�,-��,,,�,;',�,,�,:,, ,;,,1�i�:,.�;,���:��,.:4`�I,i.*,:;I:.:��I I�,.,�.�"�,.,!,�.;�I..'-..��,�,..,.",:,,,: ,,,�i,,'�I�.:,.�,,.�i:�,.,��.I j.-,;t�:�.,.,1".,��.-,,,,,.1.,,,�-,,1 1-,��."I��1.��,�,�N,;­�,,,",i,�,:�',l.�.��,","�i:,w;,,!..,�,�,�.,,,", ,�.,,,i..��.,-.�.,�,,,-:,,1�z�,����, -,�1�,�I,l.,'.�,�t�.,,�',,,���:'-.!�,-,.-,'-',�.�.,,�,.,�.,:i,�,i�I I -,;,,",-"" ;-,�,l.,�'', ,,�,,,�l�'%,,i..�I,�,i.,,�,,-,�.'';-.,�,1,,,.:,,�,.,,�1,, 1".,�� ,�,"I,, ;1 ;,i,,.";,��:,�, ...�-�;��,,,O�. .:1:Z- "� �,1.,...,-,-'".,�, �"*;,,.,,-l,.�,. �,���,, .,' �:�,�-,"-;*,--,,�.��!;i�I, ��� �-�,��-�� j�,-,,!,�,-! �,;;,l.��,:," I r`. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 0033' 08211 5 _ f; ,, 1 e yam:;t i I �' ,.�� �.`-, . SECTION 08334 -OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Electric-motor-operated overhead coiling grilles. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for lock cylinders and keying. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Operation Cycle: One cycle of a door is complete when it is moved from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Operation-Cycle Requirements: Provide overhead coiling grille components and operators capable of operating for not less than 20,000 cycles. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling grille and accessory. 1. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs. B. Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. C. Samples for Verification: Of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below, 1. Grille Curtain: 12 inch (305 mm) square assembly with rods, spacers, and vertical links. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 0033 08334 - 1 A. Installer qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling grilles through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling grille manufacturer. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc. , 2. Atlas Door Corp.; Div. of Clopay Building Products Co., Inc. 3. The Cookson Company. 4. Cornell Iron Works, Inc. 5. Mahon Door Corp. 6. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc. 7. Overhead Door Corporation. 8. Raynor Garage Doors. 9. Wayne-Dalton Corp. 10. Windsor Door; a MAGNATRAX Corporation. 2.2 GRILLE CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. General. Fabricate overhead coiling grille curtain consisting of a network of 5/16-inch- (8-mm-) ' minimurn diameter horizontal rods, or rods covered with tube spacers, spaced as indicated. Interconnect rods by vertical links approximately 5/8 inch (16 nirn) wide, spaced as indicated and rotating on rods. 1. Space rods at approximately 2 inclif (51 mrrr) o.c. 2. Space links approximately 9 inches (228 nun) apart in a straight in-line pattern. 3. Aluminum Grilles: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 22 1 M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated. B. Endlocks: Continuous end links, chains, or other devices at ends of rods, locking and retaining grille curtain in guides against excessive pressures, maintaining curtain alignment, and preventing lateral movement. C. Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard continuous channel, tubular shape, or 2 angles, finished to match grille. 1. Astragal: Provide a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene, for placement between angles or fitted to shape, as a cushion ' bumper for grille. OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 0033 08334 -2 2, Provide motor-operated grilles with cornbinaUon bottom astragal and senor edge. D. Grille Curtain Jamb Guides: ManUfMtUrer's standard extruded-alurninum shape having curtain groove with return lips or bars to retain curtain. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and to minimize operational noise; with removable slops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain. 2.3 HOODS AND ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate locking device assembly with lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, op4rating Dandle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bar to engage through slots in tracks. 1, Locking Bars: Single-jamb side, operable from inside only. B. If grille curtain is power operated, provide safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when grille is locked. C. Mounting Tube Frame: Provide manufacturer's standard mounting tube frame designed to support grille; factory fabricated from structural-steel tubes; fastened to floor and structure above grille; to be built into wall construction; and complete with anchors, connections, and fasteners. 2.4 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM A. General: Counterbalance grille by means of adjustable-tension steel helical torsion spring, mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to the curtain. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot-formed, structural-quality, welded or seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up grille .curtain without distortion of curtain and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. (2.5 mm/m) of span under full load. C. Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Provide cast-steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft. D. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of case-hardened steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load, E. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, either cast-iron or cold-rolled steel plate. 2.5 ELECTRIC GRILLE OPERATORS A. General: provide electric grille operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and proviede by grille manufacturer for grille specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking grille, and accessories required for proper operation. B. Comply with NFPA 70. ' OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 0033 08334 -3 C. Disconnect Device: Provide hand-operalod disconnect or nw(;hnnlsrn for automatically r engaging chain and sprocket operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor, without effecting timing f0o limit switch. Mount disconnect and operator so thy are accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. D. Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency auxiliary operator, E. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with , NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V, ac or ctc. F. Grille-Operator Type: Provide wall-, hood-, or bracket-mounted, jackshaft, gear-head hoist-type grille operator unit consisting of electric motor, enclosed worm-gear running-in-oil primary drive, , and chain and sprocket secondary drive; with auxiliary chain hoist and floor-level disconnect. G. Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque, reversible, continuous-duty, Class A insulated, electric motors complying with NEMA MG 1; with overload protection; sized to start, accelerate, and operate grille in either direction from any position, at riot less than 2/3 fps (0.2 m/s) and riot more than 1 fps (0.3 m/s), without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor. 1. Type: Polyphase, medium-induction type. 2. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise; indicated, 3. Coordinate wiring requirements and electric characteristics of motors with building electrical system. 4. Provide open dripproof-type motor, and controller with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure. H. Remote-Control Station: Provide momentary-contact, three-button control station with push- button controls labeled "Open,""Close," and "Stop." 1. Provide interior units, full guarded, surfacc1-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general- purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure. I. Limit Switches: Provide adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop grille at fully opened and fully closed positions 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of ,:butting or adjacent pieces are r acceptable if they are within one-half of the range; of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearnrlce of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Sannples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES , A. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. , B. Manufacturer's standara mill finish. OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 0033 08334 -4 C. Class Ii, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker)complying with AAMA 611. ' PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install grilles and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and as specified. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust grilles to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion and fitting tight for entire perimeter. 3.3 STARTUP SERVICES A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace .damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling grilles. END OF SECTION 08334 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 0033 08334 - 5 SECTION 013711 - DOOR HARDWARI, (:;t;fif:()Ul..f:b BY NAMING PRODUCTS) PART GENERAL 1,1 RELATED DOCUMENT S A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Seclions, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the followrnq; 1. Commercial door hardware for the following: a, Swinging doors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Door Hardware Schedule. Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams, Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. ' a. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2. Content: Include the following inforrnatiow a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. ' C. f=astenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. 3. Submittal Sequence; Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule, Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks; which are to be keyed to Owner's existing system with Corbin ' iocksets. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations. D. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) 0033 08711 - 1 E'. Warrorilles Special warronlles specifled Iii this :Section. 1.4 QUA1.17Y ASSURANCE: A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware sirnilar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of succc;s5(ul in-service performance. S. Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity , and who is or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant, available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type, and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise Indicated, D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following: 1. General: Comply with regulatory requirements for all hardware, including making recommended modification to Architect to comply, if necessary. 2. Comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities Act ADA, as follows: a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand arid does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist. b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening force requirements indicated: 1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 Ibl (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door. 2) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors: a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 Ibf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall riot require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. b. Door Closers: Not more than 30 lbf (133 N) to set door in motion and not more than 15 Ibf (67 N) to open door to mmirrium required width. E. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having Jurisdiction, for fire ratings, indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 F. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, , but riot limited to, the following: 1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, arid plans for future expansion. , 2. Requirements for key control system. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING , A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) 0033 08711 -2 ' B. Tarf each item or p;rc:kage separotely with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions w0i each item or package. C. Deliver keys directly to Owner. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive. Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents, B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workrTranship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware, 2. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. C. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. D. Warranty Period for Manual Closers: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. Verify that all hardware in the Door Hardware Schedule complies with the minimum requirements of this Section; if not, adjust accordingly and obtain Architects approval. e 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, stern, size, finish or color indicated, and products equivalent in function arid comparable in quality to named products. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1, Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the PuI pose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule, DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) 0033 08711 - 3 2.2 HINGES AND PIVOTS A. Available Manufacturers. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Hinges: a. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BI), ' b. Hager Companies (HAG).` C. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. (LB). d. McKinney Products Company; Div, of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (MCK). e, Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (SCH). B. Standards; Comply with the following. 1. Butts and Hinges. BHMA A 156.1. 2. Template Hinge Dimensions: BI-IMA A156.7. 3. Self-Closing Hinges and Pivots. BIIMA A156.17. C. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches (1549 to 2286 Run). D. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units. E. Hinge Weight: Provide not less than the following: 1. Entrance Doors- Heavy-weight hinges. 2. Doors with Closers: Antifriction-bearing hinges. 3. Interior Doors: Standard-weight hinges, unless noted otherwise, F. Hinge Fuse Metal: Provide; not less than the following: 1. Exterior and High Humidity Area Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin. 2. Interior Hinges: Steel, with steel pin as a minimum, unless rioted otherwise. 3. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Steel, with steel pin as a minimum. G. Hinge Options: Comply with the following minimums and as indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule' 1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the following applications: a, Outswinging doors. 2. Corners: Square. ' f-I. Fasteners; Comply with the following: 1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes.. 2, Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. 3. Threaded-to-the-He^id Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors. 4. Screws: Phillips flat-head screws; inachine screws (drilled and lapped holes) for metal doors, wood screws for wood doors and frarnes. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges. DOOR HARDWARE ' (SCHEDULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) 0033 08711 - 4 2.3 LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1, Mechanical Locks and Latches: a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; Div. Of Yale Security Inc.' B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1, Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 2, Exit Locks: BHMA A15G.5. C. Bored Locks: BHMA Grade 1; Series 4000. D. Lock.Trim: Comply with the following. 1, Lever: Cast. E. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire door requirements, and as follows: 1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch (I 2.7-mm) latchbolt throw. ' 2, Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch t25•mrn) bolt throw. F. Backset: 2.314 inches. 2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products to match the existing system and as follows- ' 1. Cylinders: Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; Div. Of Yale Security Inc.` B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Cylinders: BHMA A155.5. C. Cylinder Grade: BHMA Gracie 1. D. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumblcrr type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with tree following. ' 1. Number of Pins: Six, to match existing, 2. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam. 3 Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised ' trim rind. 4. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces 10 suit locks. E. Perrnanenl Cores: ManUlacturer's standard; finish facie to match lockset; complying with the following: 1. Removable Cores: Care insert, removable by use of a special key, and for use with only the core meuruf7cturur's cylinder anti door hardwiare. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) 0033 08711 - 5 F. Keying System: Provide a keying system complying with the following requirements: 1. Existing System: Masterkey (Departments) and grandmaster (Building) key all locks into Owner's existing keying system; with Corbin lorksets. G. Keys: Provide nirkeksiiver keys complying with the following: 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include , the following notation: a. Notation: Information to be furnished by Owner. 2. Quantity: In addition to one extra blank key for each lock, provide the following: a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. b. Master Keys: Ten. 2.5 STRIKES IN, Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 2. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5. C. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's strrndard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frarne, finished to match door hardware set: 2.6 OPERATING TRIM A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to Compliance with requirements, rmanufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are riot limited to, the following: 1. Baldwin Hardware Corporalion (BH). ' 2. Hager Companies (HAG). 3, Ives: H. B. Ives (IVS). 4. NT Quality Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NTQ). ' 5. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 6. Triangle Brass Manufartunng CoMprany, Inc. (TBM). B. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.6. C. Materials: Fabricate from bronze. 2.7 CLOSERS ' A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Surface-Mounted Closers: , a. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN).` B. Standards- Comply with the following 1. Closers: BHMA A156.4. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) 0033 08711 - 6 ' C. Surface Closers: BHMA Grade 1. D. Certified Products: Provide door closers listed in BHMA's "Directory of Certified Door Closers." E. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. 2.8 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1, Metal Protective Trim Units: a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH). b. Hager Companies (HAG). C. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA). d. Ives: H. B. Ives (IVS). e. NT Quality Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NTQ). f. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). g. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc. (TBM). B. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.6. C. Materials: Fabricate protection plates from not less than the following: 1. Bronze: 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick; beveled top and 2 sides; unless approved otherwise by Architect. D. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of either machine or self-tapping screws. E. Furnish protection plates sized 1-1/2 inches (38 rnm) less than door width on push side and 1/2 inch (13 mm) less than door width on pull side, by height specified in Door Hardware Schedule, but in no case less than 8 inches. 2.9 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH). 2. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ).' 3. Hager Companies (HAG). 4. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA). 5. Ives: H. B. Ives (IVS). ' 6. NT Quality Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company(NTQ). 7. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 8. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc. (TBM). ' B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16. 2. Mechanical Door Holders: BHMA Al 56,16. 3. Combination Overhead Holders and Stops: BHMA A156.8. ' DOUR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) 0033 08711 - 7 4. Door Silencers: f311ti1A A1,513.16. C. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA Grade 1. D. Mechanical Door Holders: BHMA Grade 1. E. Combination Overhead Stops and Holders: BI-IMA Grade 1. F. Floor Stops: For doors, unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or Indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. 1. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders, , G. Silencers for Wood Door Frames: BHMA Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum 5/8 by 3/4 inch (15 by 19 rani); fabricated for drilled-in application to frame, H. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 1/2 inch (13 mm); fabricated for drilled-in application to frame. 2.10 FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in ' conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise; approved by Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard. C, Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates ' generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips flat- head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise ' indicated. 1. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications: a. Mortise hinges to doors. b. Strike plates to frames. C. Closers to doors and frames. 2. Steel Through Bolts: For the following fire-rated applications, unless door blocking is provided: a. Surface hinges to doors. b. Closers to doors and frames. 3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors. ' 4. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors." DOOR HARDWARE ' (SCHEDULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) 0033 08711 - 8 211 FINISHES A. Standard: Cornply with BHMA A156.18. B, BHMA Designations: Comply with base maternal and finish requifements indicated by the following: i1. BHMA 612: Satin bronze , clear coated, over broze base metal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B, Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frarnes: Comply with DHI A115 series. 1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to SDI 107. B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI Al 15-W series, 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: ' 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frarnes: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames " 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections, Do not install surface- mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved, ' 1, Set units Level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for <:mchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards, 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating itern of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to ' operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements, 1. Door Closers. Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) 0033 08711 - 9 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A, Engage a service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. 17 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE GROUP NO.1 Doors 103A, 126A, 151A, 15GA, 157A, 158A, 121A 1 Lockset CL.3651 x NZD x US10 CorbinRusswin 1 set Silencers Reuse existing hardware for hinges, stops, etc. GROUP NO. 2 , Doors 118A, 1268, 147A, 160A, 161A '1 Lockset CL3451 x NZD x US10 CorbinRusswin 1 Deadlock DL4013 x US 10 CorbinRusswin 1 '/z pr. Hinges BB 1168 --4 '/7 x 4 %x US10 Hager 1 Closer 411 1-Cush x Brnz LCN ' 1 Kickplate 8" x 34 '/2' x 0 050 ga. X US10 1 set Silencers GROUP NO, 3 Doors 120A 1 Lockset CI-3451 x NZD x US10 CorbinRusswin ' 1 '/, pr. Hinges BB1279 ­I :,1 x 4 '/. US10 Hager 1 Closer .1111 x Bmz LCN 1 Kickplate; 8" x 34 W' x 0.050 ga. x US 10 1 Stop GOC x US 10 G.J, e 1 set Silencers GROUP NO, 4 Doors 120B 1 Lockset C1.3451 x NZD x US10 CorbinRusswin ' 1 Deadlock OL4013 x US10 CorbinRusswin 1 Y pr. Hinges BB1279 —4 '/1 x 4 i1 - US10 Hager 1 Closer 4041 x Brnz LCN 1 Kickplate 8" x. 34 Y:" x 0.050 ga. x US 10 ' 1 Stop 60C x. US10 G.J. 1 set Silencers DOOR HARDWARE ' (SCHEDULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) 0033 08711 - 10 r GROUP N0, 5 Doors 124A, 124B, 148A 1 Lockset CL3451 x NZD x US10 CorbinRusswin 1 '/:pr. Hinges BB1279--4 Y2 x 4 Y]- US10 Hager 1 Closer 4041 H x Brnx LCN 1 Kickplate 8"x 34 Y2' x 0.050 ga. x US10 Stop 60C x US10 G.J. 1 set Silencers GROUP NO. 6 Doors 154A, 155A 1 Lockset CL3651 x NZD x US10 CorbinRusswin ' 1 '/2 pr. Hinges Reuse existing 1 Stop 90H x US10 G.J. 1 set Silencers END OF SECTION 08711 DOOR HARDWARE ' (SCHEQULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) 0033 08711 - 11 1 r SECTION 08800 - GLAZING PART I * GENERAL 1. A DOCUMENTS 1 TED REL A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. r1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for (fie following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Doors. 2 Interior borrowed liles. B. Related Sections include the following: r1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants used at glazing installations. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and riot to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 1A PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systerns capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable)without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective rnanufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or r gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction, ' B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for various sire openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or, heat treated)required to meet or exceed the following criteria: r1. Glass Thicknesses: Minimum glass thicknesses shall be inch. ' GLAZING 0033 08800 - 1 1.5 SUBMIT'T'ALS A. Product Data: For each glass product ,and glazing material indicated. B. Glazing Schedule: Use sane: designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glrass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations for Clear Glass; Obtain clear float glass from ono primary-glass manufacturer. C. Source Limitations for Laminated 'glass: Obtain laminated-glass units from one manufacturer using the same type of glass lites and interlayers for each type of unit indicated. D. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated. E. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. F. Fire-Rated Borrow-lite Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. G. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. H. Glazing Publications: Comply with puiblished recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations b0IOW, unless rnore stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations. Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate , temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation,or other causes, GLAZING 0033 08800 -2 1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 1.9 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall he in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Written warranty, made out to Owner and signed by laminated-glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish replacements for laminated- glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions"Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3. � 2.2 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3• 23 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS A. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3 (glazing select); class, kind, and condition as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3. 2.4 WIRED GLASS A. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II (patterned and wired glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q8 (glazing); 6.4 mm thick; of form and mesh pattern indicated below: 1. Polished Wired Glass: Form 1 (wired, polished both sides), and as follows: ia. Mesh m1 (diamond). GLAZING 0033 08800 - 3 B. Available MallUfacti-vers Subject to connpliance with rcqurremenls, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work Include, but sire not Grnrted to, the following- 1. Polished Wired Glass it Ashai Glass Co./Arran Glass Corp. b. Contral Glass Go.. Ltd. c. Nippon Sheaf Glass Co , Ltd. d. Pilkmgton Glass Ltd 2.5 LAMINATED GLASS A. Laminated Glass. Comply with AS I'M C 1 172 for kinds of laminated glass indicated and other requirerYirnts spccihrd, including tho;;e in the Laminated-Glass Schedule at the end of Part 3. B. Interlayer: Intertayer material as Indicated below, clear or in colors, and of thickness indicated with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites and installation. 1. Interlayer, Material: Polyvinyl hutyral sheets or cured resin. C. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce; glass free of foreign substances and air or glass pockets as follows: 1. Laminate liter with polyvinyl butyral rnterlayer in autoclave with heat plus pressure. 2. Laminate liter with laminated glass manufacturer's standard cast-in-place and cured transparent resin rnterlayer. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers J ypes recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers, F_lastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass rnanufaclurer to imaintain glass liter in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric materr.il of hardness needed to limit glass literal movement (side walking). 2.7 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCT'S A, Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements. GLAZING 0033 08800 -4 B. Clean-cut or flat-grind verlical edges of butt•gla/.ed monolithic. (rtes in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junction s with indoor and outdoor faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edge,." PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazino, w0h 1w;Itiller present, for compliance with the following, 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Minimum required face or wide clearances. 3. Effective sealing between joints;of glass-frarning inernbers, B, Proceed with installation only sifter unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates, 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face cle arance:s, and adequate; sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation, Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where, required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass rnanufachrrers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm) as follows: GLAZING 0033 08800 - 5 I. Loc:ilte spacers dleclly opposite eadh ollw-r on both Inside and outl;Ide faces of cflass In Sti.tll Cel(ect SIZ.e and Sl)ilcllag to pfetiPlVe re(1l.Ilr'E'd face clCilf iinCC!i, Unl(.'S;i gilskels and glinting tapes are used that hav!i dentons!raled iIt)Oity to rnautl,un owlulred face clearances and to comply will systcrn performarn;e req.twunients 2. Provide f-lknch (3 mcn) inlnirnum bite of spaicers on cflass and use thickness equal to sealant width. Will) (lazing tape:, use thickness sllOhtly le ss than finml compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated Or noeded to prevent cglass Isles front moving sideways to glazing channel, as recommmnded in writing by glass m ora l aclurer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications, I. Set glass lites In eiarh series with uniform pntlern, draw, bow, and similar rhiarocteristics 3.4 SE=ALANT GL.A7_ING (Wt:t) A. Install contlnUOUS spacers, or sp iceis combined with cylmdnciil se;iliant backing, between glass lltes and glaring stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems Maul sealants cure. Securt, spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed seal•nt relative to edge clewance for optimum s(;alnnl performimco. B. Force sealants Into glazing channels to eliminate voles "ind to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and cha111101 Surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces Of SO atan;s to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.5 PROTECTION AND CLE=ANING A. Protect exterior glass from damage imtrrxlcately after lnstiMialion by attaching crossed streamers to framing held iiwiiy from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with Conti In substances rosuiting from construction operations, inclll(fing weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come Into consist wtih glass, remove them Immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other rnasonry surfaces at frequent intervals (11.11rng construction, bill not loss than once a mcmth, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or sti+Ins, remove its ream mended by glass manufacturer. D. Remove- and replace: class that tS broken, chipped, cricked, abraded, or damaged In any way, Including natural causes, accidents, and vandialism, during construction period. E. Mash glass on both exposed surfiu;es to ciarh area of Flioject riot more than four days before date scheduled for inspections thiat establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash Blass has recommended by glass manufacturer. 3.6 MONOU'ri-tIC FLOAT-GLASS SCHEDIJLI GLAZING 0033 08800 - 6 A. Uncoated Clear Float Glass: Where glass as designated below is indicated, provide Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear)glass lites complying with the following: 1. Uncoated Clear Fully Tempered Float Glass FG-1: Kind FT (fully tempered). 3.7 LAMINATED-GLASS SCHEDULE A. Laminated Glass LG-1: Where glass of this designation is indicated, provide glass lites complying with the following: 1. Kind LA, consisting of two lites of annealed float glass. 2. Inner Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat)float glass. a. Class 1 (clear). b. Thickness: 118 inch minimum. 3. Outer Lite: Type I (transparent glass, flat)float glass. a. Class 1 (clear). b. Thickness: 118 inch minimum. 4. Plastic Interlayer: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm)thick. a. Interlayer Color: Clear, END OF SECTION 08800 GLAZING 0033 08800.7 SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1,1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum wallboard, 2. Non-load-bearing steel framing. 3. Sound attenuation blankets at all partitions. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and furring. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. i 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, fabrication, and installation of control and expansion joints including plans and details of components, and attachrnents to other units of Work. C. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size sample in 12-inch- (300-nim-) long length for each trim accessory indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM F_ 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1,6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 0033 09260- 1 A. Deliver materials in onginol packages, containers, or bundles I)oornng brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations. Carnply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever rrre rnore stringent. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are riot limited to, the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Clark Steel Framing Systerns. b. Consolidated Systems, Inc. C. Date Industries, Inc. - Dale/Incor. d. Dietrich Industries, Inc. e. National Gypsum Company. f. Unimast, Inc. 2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. American Gypsum Co. b. G-P Gypsum Corp. C, National Gypsum Company. d. United States Gypsum Co. t 2.2 STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. B. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-incf - (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1 :'i-r7xn-) diameter wire. C. Hangers: As follows: 1. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 64'1/A 64'1 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch (4.12- mm)diameter. D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm), a minimum 1/2-inch- (12,7-rain-) wide flange, with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 0033 09260 -2 I. Depth 1-1;2 inches (311.1 nun) E. Furring Channels (Furring Members): COmmef-CKII-steel sheet with rnanufactr.rrer's standard corro Sion-reslslant zinc coning, 1. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 713 inch (22.2 mill)deep. a. Minimum Buse Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 nun), 2.3 STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Components, General: As follows:. 1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 2, Steel Sheet Components- Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating. B. Sleet Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness, 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm). 2. Depth: As indicated. C. Deep-Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mrrn-)deep flanges. D. Fasteners for Mehl Frarning: OI type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. ' 2.4 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. Panel Size. Provide in maxirnurn lengths and widths available that will.minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36. 1, Type X: a. Thickness: 5/8 irich ( i 5 9 ru(n). b. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Location. All vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 1 b. I-C-Bead p-bead): Use at exposed panel edges. C. Expansion (Control)Joint: Use where indicated. B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 0033 09260 - 3 I. Available Manuf�+clurers: Sutalecl to rumpliance with rc:quiremmits, manufacturers offering products (flat miry be incorporated into Ifin Work include, but are not limited to, the fullowing: a, Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. C. MM Systems Corporation. dt Pittcon Industries, 2. Aluminurn: Alloy and temper with not less than the slrength and durability properties, of ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 22.1 M), alloy 6063-T5. 3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer c:ornpatible with joint compar.and and finish materials Specified, 2.6 JOINT TREA1 MENT MATE=RIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1, Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-typo taping compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. ' 3. Fill Coal: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type all-purpose compound. 2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive. Adhesive or joint compound recormended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. C. Fastening Adhesive: 1. Steel: Adhesive recommended for attaching panels to steel framing, D. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. E. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 0033 09260-4 I. Fit e-Resistanc..e-Rated Asscmbhe;. C;oinply with mineral-fiber requirements of osserrably, PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-rnotal frames, cast-in anchors, and stnrctaaral framing, for compliance with requirernenls and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3.2 INSTALLING STEEL F=RAMING, GfNLRAL A. Installation Standards- ASTM C 754, and AS't M C 8,10 requiternents that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsurn board assemblies to support fixtures, e(IUlprnent services, heavy trim, drib bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with ;gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook." C. Isolate steel framing frorn building structure of 1=160ns indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. 1. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. Install slip-type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally support assembly. a. Use deep-leg deflection track where indicated. D. Do not brick e building control and expansion joints with steel frarning or furring members. Frame:, both sides of joints indopendenlly N13 INSTALLING STEEL SUSPENDE:I.) CLILING AND SOFFIT FLAMING A. Suspend coiling handers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plums) and free horn contract with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that rase prat part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension systern. Splay hangers only where rr,qurrecf to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by brn6110, countersplayrrtrj, or othfar equally affective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapozes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to supfOrt ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards, 3. Secure wire hangers by looping and ware-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, er other devices and fasteners That are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will riot cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 0033 09260 - 5 4 SOCUre rod hangers to structure, iirlu(tMg iilernnedi;ate fr;urrinrl I'llornbers, by ntto-u;huig to Inserts, eyescrews, or other d('.vtces aril fasteners thal are secure and appropriate for slrtacture and hanger, and in a nnanncr that will not CnUSe hangers In deteriorate or otherwise tail. 5 Do not attach hangers to steel deck labs. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck, Attach hangers ire slrurtur;a1 ranennbers. 7 Do not connect or suspend steel frarning From cluck, pipes, or Conduit. B. Installation Tolerances: Install stool frarung components for suspended cr;ifings so members for panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch is 12 foul nuasured lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel rnennbers. C. Wire-Ire or clip furring channels to supports, as required to coniply with rectuirernents for assemblies indicate& D. Install suspenclod steel frarning components in sires and sparfngs indicated, but riot less than that required by the referenced steel frarning and installation stan(tards. 1. Wire Hangers: 18 inches o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners). 18 inches o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Mernbers): 16 inches o.c. 3.4 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT F=RAMING A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural wails ,incl rolurnns where gypsum board assemblies abut other construction. 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior wafts, install asphaIWelt or foam-gasket isolation strip between studs and wall. B. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel frarning and furring member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 inrn) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue frarning over (r;.arnes for doors and openings and franie around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum l)o;ard, 1. Cut studs 1/2 meta ( 13 nnnn) short of full height to provide perimeter relief. 2. For fire-resi,tance-rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other conlinuous solid-structure surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other inombers extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed to support gypsurn board closures and to make partitions continuous froin floor to underside of solid structure. D. Install steel studs and furring at the following spacings: 1. Single-Layer Construction: ir:i inchr.s o,c., unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mulblayer Construction: 1 G inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. E. Install stool studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading Cadge or end of each panel can be attached to open (unsupported)edges of stud flanges first, GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 0033 09260 - 6 F, Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 1. install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (13- mm)clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint. 3. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. G. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 3.5 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216. 1 B. Install sound attenuation blankets in all partitions before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1116 inch (1 5 corn) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported)edges of stud flanges first. G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. H. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. I. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1, Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes,and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 318-inch- (6,4- to 9.5-mm-)wide joints to install sealant, GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 0033 09260 -7 J. Space fasteners In gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and rnanufartiaer's written recommendalions. 1. Space screws a IMIXIIIIH11l Of Q In(;lles 1 3(.)4 8 i1irn)U.C. for vertical applications. 3.6 PANEL APPLICATION MC(HODS M A. Single-Layer Application, 1. On ceilings, apply Gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and ,,t right ;moles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2 On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (pnrnflef to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. B. Multilayer Application on PartibonslWalls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. C. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. D. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and fare layers separately to supports with screws. 3.7 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For from with back flanges interufed for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written ins!ructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints occording to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual affect 3.8 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, mt(mor angles, edgo Irim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration, Prornptly remove resuf ldl joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surfarc arer.Is. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 1340, for locations indicated: GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 0033 09260 - 8 r r . I. Level i: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenitm areas, concerned areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: Embed tape Lind apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view. r3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. A. Above-Ceiling Observation: Before Contractor installs gypsum board ceilings, Architect will conduct an above-ceiling observation and report deficiencies in the Work observed, Do not proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have been corrected. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of date and time when Project, or part of Project, will be ready for above-ceiling observation. END OF SECTION 09260 r r 1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 0033 :09260-9 . SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 11 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Paver tile. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Module Size: Ac!ual the size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus Joint width indicated. B. Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For the installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028: 1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of the and grout indicated, Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Full-size units of each type and composition of the and for each color and finish required. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tile of carne type and color or finish from one source or producer. 1. Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. CERAMIC TILE 0033 09310 - 1 11 "3mi re 1_untt<tt(rns for S(dtnc and t;ruut�nc M<atenulls Obt In Ingredients of ,t umfolm runlit .1 .) .l I Y for coch mortar, adhwiivu, mid (l(Out componwit from H single rllanllfacilrm and aggregate front One sourco or pfoduCer 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, ANO HANDI. INC, A. Deliver and store packaged molenals in o(iginal containers with seats unbroken and l abols intact until lime of uses Comply with tequirernent in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealud the packages. S. Store tle and cemenlibous materials on elevated platforms, cnuier cover, and nn a dry location. C. Store aggregates where dradmcl and other required characicnstics can be rimintained and COntHo"finatlOtl NVOK10d, D. Store liquid Latexes In unopened conloiners and protected from freezing, 1.£3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do $lot install file l.antil construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are rnairatairecl at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written Instructions. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products Installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents, 1. Tile and Trim Units Furnish clurtntity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount Installed, for each type, crampo,.,Rion, color, pattem, and size indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS r 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where: liter below Introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: t 1. B axis-ol-Design Prod:act Thu design for each tite type, is based on the product named. Subject to r;onaplc.nu:f; with requlrefilents, provide either the narned product or a comparable product as approved by Architect 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL_ A. ANSI Ceramic 'rile Standord. Provide ttc that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic; Tile", for types, Compositions, ;and oilier characteristics Indicated. 1, Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated. r CERAMIC TILE 0033 09310 -2 r 2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to the sizes specified in Part 1 "Definitions"Article. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials; Provide materials complying with ANSI standards referenced in "Setting and Grouting Materials"Article. C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements: 1. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. D. Factory Blending: For the exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in faclory and package so toe units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Unglazed Paver Tile (Ti): Flat tile as follows: 1. Composition: Porcelain. 2. Dimensions: 12 inches by 12 inches. 3. Color: Combination of three colors to form pattern, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. 4. Product Manufacturer and Style: a. Granitifiandre, Granistone, Graniti, or approved equal. B. Unglazed Paver Tile Trim Units (T2): Match manufacturer and characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: 1. Wall Base: Covcsd with surface bullnose top edge, facial dimensions 6 inches high. u 2.4 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc. 2. Boiardi Products Corporation. 3. Bonsai, W. R., Company. 4. Boslik. 5. C-Cure. 6. Custom Building Products. 7, DAP, Inc. ® 8. .Jamo Inc. 9. LATICRETE International Inc. 10. MAPEI Corporation, 11, Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. 12. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 13. TEC Specialty Products Inc. CERAMIC TILE 0033 09310- 3 B. Latex•F'ortland Cement Morlir (11hin Set): ANSI Al 18.4, consisting of the following: 'I. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix cornbined with acrylic resin lrrlrnd-!atex additive. C. Organic Adhr;sive: AN TI A136.1, Type I D. Polymer-Modified l tie Grout ANSI A 1 18.7, color as indicated. 1 Polymer Type, Acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout tmx. a. Sanded grout mixture for Joints 1/8 inch (3 nun) and wider n 2.5 ELAS1 OME RIG SEALANTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard chernically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and chnracteristcs indicated that comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants " 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowolable Underlayments and Patching Compounds; Latex-modified, porlland cement-based formulation provided or approved by rnanufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated, B. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. C. Grout Sealer- Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not change color or appearance of grout. 1, Available Products. a. Bonsal, W I. , Company, Growl Sealer. b. Bostik; Cer<amaSeal Grout Semler. C. C-Cure; Penetrating Sealer 978, J1 Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc,; Silicone Grout. Sealer. e. Summilville Tiles, Inc.; SL-15, Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout and Tile Sealer. I, TE-C Speciaily Products Inc.; TA-256 Penetrating Silicone Grout Sealer. 2.7 MIXING MORTARS AND GROAT A. Mix moi tars and grouts to cOmPly with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' wntten instructions. B. Add rnatc:rials, water, and ;additives in accurate proportions. i C, Obtain and use type of rnixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and Other pracedurOS to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. CERAMIC TILE 0033 09310 -4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other ;onditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1, Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSi A108 Series of the installation standards for installations indicated. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind the has been completed before installing tile. 3. Verify that joints and cracks in the substrates are coordinated with the joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials. B. Provide concrete substrates for the floors installed with adhesives or thin-set mortar that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of the installation standards. 1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. 2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. C. Blending: For the exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic the installation schedules. B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or Point alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of the without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of the abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight CERAMIC TILE 0033 09310 - 5 aligned joints fit file closoly to electnk,�U outlets, piping. fixtures, fund other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap life. E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, cind trim ar0 same sire, Lay out the work and center the fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize the cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated. F. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where, indicated during iris tallation of selling materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-rut joints after installing tiles. 1. Locale joints in tle surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 7. Prepare joints and apply sealants In comply with requirernenls in Division 7 Section ",Joint Sealants," G. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following the installation standards: 1. For ceramic Tile (Jreufs (sarrd-Portland cement; dry-set, commercial portand cement; and latex-portlafid cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10 3.4 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. General: Install tiler to comply with requirememis in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of lire installation standards. 1. For installations indicated below, follow Procedures in ANSI A108 Series file installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage. a. Tile: floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 2100 mm) or larger. t). Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles. B. Joint Widths: Install file on flours with the following joint widths: 1. Paver Tile tlrl inch !() :;5 nun)of a;; ;.gmroved by Arcchit(-d. C. Grout Sealer: Apply giorit sealer to grout joints according to (If out-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetnate:d grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on No faces by wiping with soft cloth. 3.5 GLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Cleaning. On coinpfeton of placd:nwnt :fnd grouting, clean all ceriimic the surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1 Remove graUt re:sidUe frOffl tle N'S anon as possible.. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tilr; according to file and grout manufacturer's written instnrrliOns, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by No and grout mmrnufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are SMe to use by testing on samples of the mid other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and pltambrrig fixtures Irorn effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and alter cleaning. CERAMIC TILE 0033 09310- 6 . 1 t3. ' When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed the walls and floors, Protect installed.tile work with kraft paper or other heavy coverinc; during construction period to prevent staining, damage, andwear. C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. D, BQfore final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from the surfaces, END OF SECTION 09310 r t CERAMIC TILE 8033 09310 7;: t - r r SECTION 09511 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL r 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. r1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systerns for ceilings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division G Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for ornamental wood ceiling grille. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AC: Articulation Class. B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class. C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient. D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cacti type of product indicated B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Panel* Set of 6-inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12•inch- (300-mm-) Iong Samples of cacti type, finish, and color. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling and components. D. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system through one source from a single manufacturer, ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 0033 09511 - 1 E3 Fire-Jest-Response C:h.aract+ n;Uca, f'mvid(! ;ac ousticill p,uiel reiline)s that comply with the following requirements 1 Fire-Resistance Chomclunstiitis' Where indicated, provide acoustcA panel ceilings identical to those of asson0lies tested for fire resistance per AS TM E 119 by UL or another lesting and inspecting agency acceptable to ;authorities having iunsdiction. 2. Surface-Burning CharactowAics. Provide acoustical panels with the following surface- burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class (A1 (131 (CJ rnatearials as delermined by testinil ydenlic,il products per ASTM E 84. 1.6 DF_LIVLRY, STORAGL, AND HANDLING A. Deliver iacoustic.A panels, suspension Syslena components, mid accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store there in a fully enclosed, conditioned space; where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, !emperatcne extremes, direct sunlight, surface:contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing ocoustic;.al panels, permit there to roach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle: acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmentai Limitations, Do not instill acoustical panel ceilings until sp;aces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and (fry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperaturC3 and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intendr;d use. 1. Pressurized Plenums. Operate ventilation system for riot less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel cerlmcf installation. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction th;al Penetrate:; ceiUndr, or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire•-suppressinn system, and partition assemblies. 1.9 EXTRA MA1'E=RIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2,0 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension Syslem Components. Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 0033 09511 -2 r 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles, where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but arr, not limited to, the products specified. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS,GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectOnces, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measurinq NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is Iii-;314 inches: (400 mm)away from test surface per ASTM E 795, B, Acoustical Pslnel Colors G.rnd Patterns- Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type 1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Archilect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for tyre, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size. 2.3 WATER-FELT, MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING Al A. Available Products: 1. Armstrong-- Cortega Tegular t12195. B. Classification Provide parcels complying with ASTM E 1264 for Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted; and pattern as follows: 1. Pattern. D (fissured). C. Color: White. D. LR: Not less than 0.80 E. NRC: Not less than 0.55. F. CAC: Not less than 35. G. Edge Detail. Beveled Tegulaf, H. Thickness: 0/16 inch. I. Size: 24 by 24 inches. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 0033 09511 -3 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metaal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension system:; of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicat.ale requirements in ASTM C 05 B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply will) NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural rend Metal Products" for reccanunendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hang," unless otherwise indicated. D. Wire Hangers;, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires cornplymg with the following re(Juirements: 1. Zinc-Coaled Carbon-Steel Wire: AS I'M A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Sire: Select wire diameter Aso its stress at three limes hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide riot less than 0 106-inch- diameter wire. 2.5 METAL. SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANE=L CEILING - Al A. Available Products: 1. Armstrong -- Prelude XL. B, Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension Systern: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 6531A 653M, not less than G30 G"90) coating designation, with prefinished 15!16-inch- (24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges. I. End Condition of Cross Runners Override (stepped) type. 2. Face Design: Flat, flush. 3. Cap Material: ` tcel cola-rolled sheet. , 4. Crap Finish: Painted white. 2.6 METAL EDGE MOIJANGS AND FRIM t A. Roll-Foirnod Sheet-Metal Edge: Moldings and 1'rin): Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, nianufactwei's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1. For lay-in panels with rew.rsi edgn details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reve,al of snmo depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension inenmber a PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 0033 09511 - 4 A Lxomlrle !,uhsUatvs, NW"V;, ,111d cmndrtumt;, rnr.ludnul struc:tnicrl fr,lrninq to which acous;Ucnl {lanel crtlnrtfs attach or 'rbul. with Insloller pte!wllt, lot cornrph;nu;cr with regurr HR,'ots; specrfled rn this and other Sections th'tl offoc..l cr.11utd ulsuillntrott ;rnrt mnchcnaye ..and with requiluments for installation tolerances an(d other conditions nlfectinq petfonnance of ac0ust1CN panel coilings. B. Proceed with installation only titer uns;ahsfaclory conditions have been corrected. 12 PfRf'f'ARAIION A Measure each roiling ;ue;c and estmhlrsh I;ayout of arousticoi panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of Brach ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-wfdlh panels ;A borders, and comply with layout shown or) reflected wiling plans;. 3.3 INSTALLA7I0N, GENERAL A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASf M C 636, pet manufacturer's written rnstrtrctrons and CISCA's "Ceilrncf Systems Handbook." B, Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of Supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions, offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means, 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Sire supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within perforr'nanco limits established by referenced standards and publications. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members arid to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, nye screws, or other devices that are secure and ;jppropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures, 5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten handers to cast-in-plane hanger inserts, poslinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or {tower-8ctu;ited fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 6. Do riot attach hangers to steel deck labs. 7, Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 8. Space hangers not more than -tit wrhes ( 1200 (am) o.c. along each member, supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 ' rmrhes Gl)(r win) frorn ends of e.-rch member. C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of NCOUStiCal ceiling area and where; necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. r1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches ( 100 min) o,c. and riot more than :S niche:; (75 nun) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 :? rani u) 3 6G in), Miter corn;rs accufately and connect securely, 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings rand trim. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 0033 09511 - 5 D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. . 1, Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows. a. As Indicated on reflertcd co ling plans. 2.' For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 3. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufachirer. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 0033 09511 - 6 SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl composition tile (VCT). B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor tile. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Maintenance Data: For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation Mi9terials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50(leg F (10 deq C)or more than 90 deg F (32 dog C). Store tiles on flat surfaces. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 dog C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following lirne periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (1,3 deg C)or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 0033 09651 - 1 r . D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. I. Floor Tiles Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor the installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 COLORS AND PATTERNS A. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE -- R1 A. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT) ASTM F 1066. 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Standard Excelon. 2. Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO; Cortina. 3. 'rarkett Inc.; Expressions. B. Class: 2 (through-pattern tile), C. Wearing Surface: Smooth, D. Thickness: 0 125 inch (3 2 min). E Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 rmn). F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq, cm per , ASTM E 648. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated. RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 0033 09651 - 2 1 B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. PAR'r 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products. ' B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710, 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3. Moisture 'resting: a. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. ' C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. E, Move resilient product:, and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation, 1. Do not install resilient products until they are carne ten iperattire as space where they are ' to be installed, F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation, After cleaning, oxamino substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected, ' 3.3 TILE INSTALLATION RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 0033 09651 - 3 A Loy out Isles from center marks (,stabtshed with ptincipol walls, dc,colmlinc minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room ;ire of equal width Adfusl ;1s nec:ess:iry to ;ivoicd usuhg cut Widths that equal less than one-half the at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles square with room axis or in pattern Indicated B Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiler, from cartons In the same sequence as rnanufarturcd and packaged, if so numbered Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay ides;with grain running in one directuan. 1 C. Scribe, col, and fit ties to butt neatly and tightly to vertu;al surfaaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, olillets, edomos, Uoor frames, throsholds, and nosings. D. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reve;hls, :,+nd similar open igs;. E. Maintain reference markers, holes, .and openings that arcs in pl;tre or marked for future; culling by repeating on floor tilts as marked on substrate Use; rhAk or other nonpr..rm anent, nonstaining marking device. F. Install tiles on covers for telephorm ,vid eler,tne:al dents ;lief r>!mlm ileitis in fnushod floor wens. Maintaain overall continuily of color and patlr,n with plores of tide Installed on covers. lightly adhere Ide edges to substrates that abut covers ;rrrcd to cover pvnitl,(r,rs. G. Adhert; tiles to flooring :;ubstl,.Itw; m,nul ,i hill s;prr;;hd of ;hdlwsave apptcrd Ic, s,,t rafo to produce a Completed inslollabon wlthont open crm;ks, void,;, r;usuul and puckonng at joints, telegraphing of adhesive ,pre;julor nark. ;Ind otty.-r surf;we milwifecbons. 3A RE:SiLIENT ACCESSOPY iN5IAIJ AII(1N , A. Resilient Moldinq Acccrssonr:s Biltl to ;iddactmt matena!s ;Till tightly adheres to substrates throughout ienclth of e;Ich piece In',f;ill rc,dur:er strip:; ;II (sdquo i of floor covrrmos th,,A would otherwise be axpo"L-c.! 3.5 CLEANING ANO PRO f f=.t;;ION A. Perform thc,� (ollowing oporltions filufwcduItely after completing fwAl znt product Installation: 1, hemuvr, adhesive raid othher blor1w;he; flout exposod sus l;wo"; 2. Sweep and wimmol surfaces thoroughly 3. Uartp-I1`101) surf;'IC4S to remove, marks and ,oil ;a. Do not wash surfaces uritf after time period recommended by manufacturer. B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equI pit mI'll -it,,d fixtures during reriminder of constmclion period. Use p(otection methods recornmendw] era wriGn!a by raurnuf:actutor 1. Apply protective floor polish to horizontal surfaces Thal ;Ire free front sail, visible , adhoswe, and surface: bleinishes. RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 0033 09651 -4 0 a. Coordinate 5Flection of floor polish with owner's maintenance service. 2. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces, place hardboard or plywood panels over flooring an d under objects,while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. END OF SECTION 09651 O RESILIENT FLOOR TILE : 0033 09651 SECTION 01165:1 • RESILIEN f WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES FART 1 • GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A, Drawings and genoral provisions of tho Contract, incicuflnq Goneral and Sulrp►ementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Ser;tlons, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section utcludos the following. 1 Wi111 base. I. Moldinrl accossorms, 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product inrllr.;atxd B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicatod. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Charactenslics l'r'ovldr, reSlllent shill amessoriwi with a critical radiant flux classification of Class I, not less ti m n 0.45 Wlsq, cm, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 6411 by a toshnq uno inspecting agency arroptable to authorities having ' jurisdiction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store ro silient products and Installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient tomporalmos maintained within rangy. recolTImencded by manufacturer, but riot less than 50 cdecl F (10 dog C)or morn: than 90 deg F (32 deal C} 1.13 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures within range recomrnonded by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 dog C) or more than 95 deg F (35 cdor) c:;j, in sprtcos to rocoive floor the during the following time periods: 1 1. 48 hours before installation, 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours aftor installation. B. After poslinstallation period, maintain temperatures within rando recommended by manufacturer, but riot less than 55 clog F (13 deg C)or more than 95 deg F (35 (log C). RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCE=SSORIES 0033 09653 - 1 C 111,0,111 rr,;;rircr!1t prod!.uts ,tfluf r>Ihor 11n!nllmo operotions, uuaudrnel Iminting. havo txion complele'd 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A, furnish extra rnalenals described below that mulch products rnstallod and that are packaged with protoctivo covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. I. Furnish riot less than 10 Ime,ar foot ' linear (r1) for avery 500 linear toot (150 linear rn) or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed, PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Producls Subject to compliance with royc.lirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are riot limited to, produrL; listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 COLORS AND PATTFRNS A. Colors and Pattern:,: As selcctcd by Arctuted from rr,mulacturm's frill range. i 2.3 RESILIENT WALL. BASE - R2 A. Wall Base: ASTM F 1861 1, Burke Mercer Flooring Pioduc;ts, Durk,; Base Rubber Wall Luse. 2. Roppe Corponation, Prommin Rubber Wall Base, type TS. B. 'type (Material Requirement) 1'S (rubber, vulc,rn!zed therrnos::t) e C. Group (Manufacturincl M0010d) I (soL(J) D. Style: Cove (will) lop-set loo). E. Minirnurn Thickness: 0 1;)5 !rn;h 0 ." nun. F. Height: 4 rru; ws ( tU;.' min). G. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length ' H. Outside Corners: Job!owned. I. Inside: Corners. Job formed. J. Surface: Smooth. 2.4 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY , RESILIENT WALL RASE AND ACCESSORIES 0033 09653- 2 A. Description, Carpet edge for glue-down applications, Nosing for carpet. Nosino for resilient floor covering, Reducer strip for resilient floor covering, Joiner for tile, and carpel. I BUrke Mercer Flooring Products. 2 Roppe, Corporation. B. Material' Rubber. C. Profile and Dimensions: As required. 2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland convent based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturers for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 2, Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected, 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare, substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates for Stair Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recorrnnended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only aftei substrates mass testing. 3. Moisture Testing: a. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates puss testing. C. Remove substrale coatings and other substances that are incompatible will) adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 0033 09653 - 3 1 I), Use Irnwelable leveling and potchalg compound to fill cracks, holes, ;Intl depressions nl suhslrales. E. Move resilient products and Installation materials into spaces whore They will be installed at least 4£3 hours in advance of installation. 1 Do not install resilient products until they arc the sane, tenlperllure as the spaco where ' they are to be Installed. F. Sweep and vacuum (;loan substrates to be covered by resilient products snimedralely before installation. After cleaning, ex;:Irninc surbslrales for morslure, alkaline, salts, carbonation, and (lust. Proceed with Installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION t A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework Ind cnbiriots III toe: spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at se,anls and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. C. Tightly Adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates, D. Do not stretch wall base cfu!ring instaNrllrorl. E. On ITlasonry surfaces or other siruilar irrerlular substra!es, fill inlets along top edge. of wall base with manufacturer's recommended ;Idheslve filler material. F. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight picres Of nl,axunurn length,; possible. Form without producing discoloration (wh(ten,ng) at bends. Shavo back of base at points where bends occur arid remove strips perpendicular to length of basis 111,At me only deep enough to produce a snuq fit without removing more than half the wall Buse thickness. 2. Inside Corners: Use, straight ple(:eS Of nliaXIITIWII) Ienoths possible. Form by cutting an Inverted V-shaped notch In toe of wall base at the point where cornor is formed, Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Resilient Molding Accessories: BLItt to adjacent materials and lightly adhore to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise bo exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other ble1`11i';I10S frarn exposr;d surfaces. , 2, Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 0033 09653 -4 rn a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer. Q, Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of.equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended In writing by.manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09653 1 - • rr : RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 0033 09653-,5. • SECTION 09680 - CARPET PART 1 • GENERAL. 11 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Srclion. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Carpet. B. Related Sections include the following: 1, Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition"for removing existing floor coverings. 2. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet, 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations ' for each type of substrate required. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Carpet type, color, and dye lot. 2 Seam locations, types, and methods. 3. Type of subfloor. ' 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. 6. Pile direction. 7. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 8. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet: 12-inch- (300-mru-) square Sample. 2. Mitered Carpet Border Scorn: 12-inch- (300-inm-) square Sample. Show carpet pattern alignment, - ' D. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. CARPET 0033 09680 - 1 F. Ni'lintenanc.e 111"o For colpet to Include III liminlc'llmicl. InomIA!; s(rut;llu:d Ili Division 1 Include the followrnd 1 Methods for Ilmintalninct ri.irpet, ntc;ludincl cleanmcl will stain-removal products and procedures and nr.rrtuf,'ICturer's rec minu:ndod rnamlenonce :,Nodule. 2 Precautions for cleaning IT)atr:nols and rrnothods that could be detrimental to carpet. 1 4 QUALITY AS SUR/\NCE A Installer Qualifications: An cxpenencecl Installur who c, c;r!rtified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who ran denu7nstmte comphmu;c� with Its (,ratification program requirements, B, f=ire Toat Rosponsa Characterrshrs Provide products with thc! ciitic;il radiant flux classification inc-1icN-ated in Part 2, as detormined by toshnd Identical piodi,icts per AS 1'M E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agericy ncceptable to authonturs having jurisdiction. C. Product Options: Products and rltr:rnufoclurerr; narnocl In I'ivt 2 establish requirements for product quality In terms of appearance, construction, and porforrnance. Other manufacturers' products comparable in quality to nrrnted products and complying with requirements may be consulenad. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions " 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General, Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Stor ge ,and 1-1a11cfun,r " 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A General: Comply with CRI 104, Section (i 1, "Site Conciiiions, Fornporaturci and Humidity." ' B. Environnaenta( Linntatfons Do riot mstail cxpet until wet work m spines is complete and dry, and arnbient temperature and hu ildlty conditions ore (Tmintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for Its intended use C Where demountable partitions or other Iteliv, me Indic:aleci to, Installation on top of carpet, ifastall carpel before installing thtac: ilea's. 1.7 WARRANI-Y A. General Warranty: Special wr..trranty specified In this Article shail riot deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of tho Contract DOCUmentS. B. Special Carpet Warranty: Written w-xranty, sulned by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does riot include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures Include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delarnination. , 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Subst.:anlial Completion, CARPET 0033 09680 -2 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet: Full width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8 3 sq m). PART 2 • PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET (C1) A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Shaw Contract—Movement; Oceania Collection. a. Color: 75500 —Coral. B. Face Construction: Pattern Loop, C. Gauge: 1/10. D. Stitches: 12.0. E. Pile Thickness: .165 inches for finished carpet per ASTM D 418. F. Protection Weight: 28 oz/yd3 for finished carpet. G. Primary Backing: Polypropylene.. ' H. Secondary Backing: Action Ba +. 2.2 CARPET BORDER (C2) A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Shaw Contract— Utopian. a. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. B. Face Construction: Textured Loop. C. Gauge: 1/10. ' D. Stitches: 11, E. Pile Thickness: .154 inches, ' F. Production Weight: 32 ozlyd3, G. Primary Backing: Polypropylene, CARPET 0033 09680-3 ;? 3 INS I AI.I Al ION AGC LE,`) )I IE", A. 'Irowelable Leveling and F'otc;hind Compounds: Latex-mcdr}n.!d, hycirrrulrc: cr nrent based fort nulatron provided by or recormended by the foflowrnq: 1 Carpet manufacturer B. Adhesives. Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to sort products and suWI= conditions indicated, that complies with flanunubrlity requirerncnfs for installed carpel and that is recommended by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer C. Seaming C:ernent: Hat-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and bultmg cut edges at bar..king to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified. B. Concrete Subfloors. Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by the following: a. Carpet manufacturer. 2. Suhtloors are free; of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreir.n deposits. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected, 12 PREPARATION A, General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; F=ioor Preparation," and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive ' carpet installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching cornpouncds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, acid depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatihle with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by the following: ' 1. Carpet manufacturer. CARPET 0033 09680 -4 ✓r D, Bioonl and WICUUnI Clean substrates to be covered imnediately before installing carpel. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8, "Dirert Glue-Down Installation." B. Comply with carpel manufacturer's written recommendations for searn locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams Linder the door in closed position. 1. Level adjoining border edges. C. Do not bridge budding expansion joints with carpet. D. Cut and fit ca.pet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, Arid built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosinds. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. E, Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, Open-bottonned obstruL;tions, removable Ranges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. ' 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using clear, ;r recommended by carpet manufacturer. ' 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet to comply with GRI 104, Section IS, "Protection of Indoor Installations," C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or ' recommended in writing by carpet manuf-acturer. END OF SECTION 09680 CARPET 0033 09680- 5 SECTION 09911 PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of interior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. Plastic Laminated Architectural woodwork. b. Acoustical wall panels. C. Toilet enclosures. ' d. Elevator entrance doors and frames. e. Elevator equipment. f. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. g. Light fixtures. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. C. Ceiling plenums. d. Utility tunnels, e, tripe spaces. f. Duct shafts. ' g. Elevator shafts. 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: PAINTING 0033 09911 - 1 a. Anodized aluminum b. Stainless steel. C. Chromiurn platy:. d, Copper and copper alloys e. Bronze and brass. 4, Operating parts include moving parts of operating equrprrumt and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. t7. Linkages. ' C. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts 5. Labels: Do riot paint over UL, FOG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Related Sections include the following: 1, Division 5 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for shop priming interior architectural woodwork. 1 2. Division n Section "Steel Doors and Frames"for factory priming steel doors and frames. 3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation of gypsum board. 1.I DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 2. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when 1 measured at a 60-degree nacter. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. For each paint system indicated, fnClude block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and ' cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Marrufaclurer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, aril applying each coating material. B. Samples for Initial Selection; For each type of finish-coat material indicated. , 1. After color selection, Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. C. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, With texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until ' required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. PAINTING 0033 09911 -2 d 2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application. 3. Submit one (1) Sample on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and texture only: a. Stained or Natural Wood! 4-by-8-inch (100-by-200-nim) Samples of natural- or stained-wood finish on representative rod oak wood surfaces, 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material, 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials riot in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1, Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. 1 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F ( 10 and 32 deg C). B, Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F (7 and 35 deq C). C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. ' 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. PAINTING 0033 09911 - 3 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1. Quantity: Furnish Owner with extra paint materials in quantities indicated below: 2, Quantity: Furnish Owner with an additional 5 percent, but riot less than 1 gal (3.8 L) or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' narnes are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore). 2. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints). 3. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams). 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL id A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable, C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 INTERIOR PRIMERS ' A. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formul�)ted Intex-t:lased primer for interior application. ' 1. Benjamin Moore; Regal FirstCoat Interior Latex Primer & Underbody No. 216: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less th,.in 1.0 rnil (0.025 inn)). 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 SpeedNide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry ' film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil (0.025 rnm). 3. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0 041 nim). ' B. Interior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive alkyd-based metal primer. PAINTING 0033 09911 - 4 I. Benjamin Moore; IronClad Alkyd Low Lustre Medal and Wood Enamel No. 163: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 rails (0 033 nun). 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 7-858 Pittsburgh Faints Industrial Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 nun). 3. Sherwin-Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ61B50WZ1: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3 0 mils (0.07(3 m(n). 2.4 INTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated eggshell acrylic-latex interior enamel. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Regal AquaVelvet No, 319: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0 036 min). 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 89-Line Manor Hall Interior Eggshell Wall and Trim: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0,036 mm). 3. Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Interior Latex Satin Wall Paint A87 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 rails (0.041 (nm). B. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss acrylic-latex enamel for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Regal AquaGlo No. 333 Premium Interior Finishes Latex Semi-Gloss: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm). 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 88-110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Lo-Lustre Semi-Gloss Latex: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils (0.028 mm). 3. Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel A88 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 rails (0.041 nim). C. Interior Semigloss Alkyd Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss alkyd enamel for interior application, 1. Benjamin Moore; Satin Impervo Alkyd Low Lustre Enamel No. 235: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 rails (0.03:3 min). 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 27 Line Wallhide Low Odor Interior Enamel Wall and Trim Semi-Gloss Oil: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 3. Sherwin-Williams; Classic 99 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel A-40 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils (0.043 mm). ' 2.5 INTERIOR WOOD STAINS AND VARNISHES A. Open-Grain Wood Filler: Factory formulated paste wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. ' 1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Paste Wood Filler No.238. 2. Pittsburgh Paints; none required. 3. Sherwin-Williams; Sher-Wood Fast-Dry Filler. B. Interior Wood Stain: Factory-formulated alkyd-based penetrating wood stain for interior application applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Penetrating Stain No. 234. 2, Pittsburgh Paints; 77-560 Rez Interior Semi-f'ransparenl Oil Stain. 3. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Interior Oil Slain A-48 Series. PAINTING 0033 09911 -5 C. Clear Sanding Sealer: Faactory•formulated fast-drying alkyd-based clear wood sealer applied at spreading rate recommended by rtuinufacturer. 1. Benjamin Moore, Moore's Interior Wood f=inishes Quick-Dry Sanding Scaler No. 413. 2, Pittsburgh Paints, 6--10 Speedl-fide Quick-Drying Interior Sanding Wood Sealer and Finish. 3. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Fast Dry Sanding Sealer B26V43. D. Interior Alkyd- or Polyurethane-Based Clrrar Satin Varnish: Factory-formulated alkyd- or polyurethane-based clear varnish 1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Interior Wood Finishes PQPYurethane Finishes Low Lustre No. 435. 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 77-7 Rez Varnish, Interior Satin Oil Cleru. 3. Sherwin-Williaiiis; Wood Classics Fast Dry Oil Varnish, Satin A66-300 Series. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4, 1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers, 1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the Clem, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly parnled surfaces, ' PAINTING 0033 09911 -6 r r C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular srabstrale condition and as specified. 1 Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of ' surface preparation. C. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. C. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required, Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b, Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations. ' a Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch Lip with same primer as the shop coal. D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions, 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue:. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do riot stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and ' techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules. PAINTING 0033 09911 - 7 ()o riot poilit uvnr (lift. !il;t, !cola. grc.c;l:, nuu stoic ,.ulf"d !;mf,ww", of cunrlltron dctlimentaf to fornlatiurl of o drn:lble piiint film 3 Provide finish coots that are compatible with Inim :r'; used 4 The term "exposed surfaces" Includes areas visible when pernanenl or built-In fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in plane. Extend coatings In these, areas, as required, to maintain syslern integrity and provide desrcd protection J Paint surfaces behind movable oquiprnerll Mid fllM14110 the S('1111e 0S Similar 0XI)OSed surfaces Fic.,inre fr;ai u)sh.11lation c)I equipment, panel surfrlcr s behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prune cost Only 6 Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and minovable or lunged covers to n1a(ch exposed surfaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on lops, botk)rns, and side edges tho samo as exlerior faces. J. Sand lightly between east) succeeding enamel or varnish coat. B. Scheduling Painting; Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting is soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Uo not apply succeeding cools until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a ,month, even surface: according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appe.irance Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds;, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces 4. Allow sufficient tune betwoun successivc; coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to when: It feels firm, and does riot deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressun;, and until appliu)tinn of another coat of paint does not cause, undercoat to lift or lose adhesion C. Application Procedures Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators i according to ranufacturer's written Instructions 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of matu-mil ,.ipplied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted. 2. Hollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-File sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 3 Spray E quiprnenl. Use airless spray :quipnx;nt with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and tOXlure n:quired. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's ' recommended spieading rate to w hluvo: dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as reconifnended by manufsarlurer. F. Mechr.)nlcrll Items to be painted inr;lude, but are not limited to, the following: 1 UriinSLJIated Metal fn(arng. 2. Uninsulated plastic piping 3. Pipe hangers and supports. 4. Tanks that do no( have factory-applied tinnl finishes. PAINTING 0033 09911 -8 5. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. 6. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable jacket material. 7. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory=primed finish for field painting. F. Electrical items to be painted include, but are riot limited to, the following: 1, Switchgear, 2, Panelboards. 3. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting, G. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. H. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. ' 1. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections, 1. Provide satin finish for final coats. J. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. K. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work riot complying with requirements. 3.4 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces, Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect, ' B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work, PAINTING 0033 09911 -9 I After work of other trades is complote, touch up and restoto (Imnaged or defaced paintod surfaces. Comply witli procedures specified in PDCA P 1. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE" A IPS-1 - Concrete. and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry): Provide the following r paint systems over interior concrete and brick masonry substrates: 1 Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coals over a primer. a. Finish Coats: Interior low.-luster acrylic c:,tamel. B, IPS 3.1 and IPS 12 - Gypsurn Board: Provide the toll(wing finish systems over interior gypsum , board surfaces: 1. IPS 3.1 - Low-Luster Acrylic.-Enamel Finish: 'Iwo finish coats over a primer. , a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel. 2. IPS 3.2 - Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish. Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. a b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. C. IPS-5 - Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: 1. Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel, 3.7 INTERIOR STAIN AND NATURAL-FINISH WOODWORK SCHEDULE A. IPS-6 - Stained Woodwork: Provide the following stained finishes over new interior woodwork: 1. Alkyd-Based Stain Salin-Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of alkyd-based clear satin varnish over a sealer coat and interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain. a. Filler Coat: Open-grain wood filler. b. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain. C. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer. i C.!1 .,'t f1�11''• it',r!ti(y ,!��,`�(! of r7Ul'1'f;Igtll,lr�i: t)�l;,C(! clear tiO;In varnish. END OF SECTION 09911 PAINTING 0033 09911 - 10 r r SECTION 10101 - VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES PART 1 - GENERAL r 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS rA. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. r1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following, 1. Tackboards. 2. Visual display conference units. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking installed in walls. r 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Tackboard: Frarned or unframed tackable surface. B. Visual Display Boards: Chalkboards, markerboards, and tackboards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to olher work. r1. Show location of panel joints. 2. Include sections of typical trim members. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of visual display surface indicated and as follows: 1, Actual sections of porcelain-enarnel face sheet tack assembly. 2. Fabric swatches of vinyl- and polyester-fabric-faced tack assemblies. 3. Samples of accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of visual display surface indicated and as follows: 1. Visual Display Surface: Not less than 8-112 by 11 inches (715 by 2130 nun), mounted on substrate indicated for final Work. Include one panel for each type, color, and texture required. 2. Trim; 6-inch- (152-rnm-) long sections of each trim profile. 3, Accessories: Full-size Sample of each type of accessory. VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 0033 10101 - 1 r E. Maintenance Dativ For VltiUal di';1*1y Ulf f;iCes 10 InClUde it) maintenance (11anUafS. F. Warranties: Special warrontles specified In this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of rnotor-operated, sliding visual display unit manufacturer for installation and maintenanct; of(snits required for this Project, B, Source Limitations: Obtain each type; of visual display surface through one source from a single IMMOartl.rrer. C, Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of visual display surfaces arid are taasad on fire specific system indic;:rled. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as Judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's appfoval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Archm.%t for review D. Fire-Test-Response Characleristics: P(ovide tabrlcs with the surface-burning characteristics indicated, as determined by tesling identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authonlies having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver factory-built visual display boards completely assembled in one piece without joints, where possible. If dimensions oxcee(i inaximurn n)anLJfaCtUfed panel size, provide two or more pieces of equal length as ;1cceptable ir) Architect. When overall dimensions require delivery in separate units, pfefrt components at the factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at (lie site B. Store visual dlsplrly unit: vertically with i ockiriq ITlatenalS between e,ich unit. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurornents W(Ify dirt ew'1r)n5 by field ;neasuri-nnents before fabrication and Indicate measurements on Shop Drawiligs ' 1, E=stablished Ditnensicnls. Where field nleasurmnents cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimun,,;ions ;,act proceed with fabrrcatind visual display surfaces without field rneasurenlents Coordinate wall construclfon to ensuie that actual dimensions corro spond to e!"tablished dimensions. 2. Allow for trirnrninq and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might delay the Work. 1.8 WARRANTY ' VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 0033 10101 - 2 A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period, 1, Failures include, but are riot limited to, the following: a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities, b. Surfaces become slick or shiny. C. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking. 2, Warranty Period: 50 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2 -PRODUCTS 21 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: Porcelain-enarnel-clad, ASTM A 463/A 463M, Type 1, stretcher- leveled aluminized steel, with 0.0236-inch (0.60•rTim) uncoated thickness; with porcelain-enamel coating fused to steel at approximately 1000 deg F (536 deg C). 1. Gloss Finish: Low gloss; dry-erase markers wipe clean with dry cloth or standard eraser. Suitable for use as projection screen, a, Product: Claridge Products & Equipment, Inc.; LCS Markerboard. B. Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. C. Natural Cork Sheet: Seamless, single layer, compressed fine-grain cork sheet, bulletin board quality; face sanded for natural finish. D. Vinyl Fabric: FS CCC-W-408, Type II, burlap weave; weighing not less than 13 oz./sq. yd. (440 9/sq. m); with flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84. E. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M),Alloy 6063. 2,3 TACK ASSEMBLIES A. Available Mariufacturers: rt. A-1 Visual Systems. 2. AARCO Products, Inc. 3. ADP/Lemco, Inc, VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 0033 10101 - 3 4. Bangor Cork Company, Inc 5. Best-Rite Manufacturing. 6. Claridge Products & EquipMent, Inc. 7, Marsh Industries, Inc. 8. PolyVisron Corporation, B. Vinyl-Fabric-Faced Tack Assembly TB: thick, vinyl-fabric-faced cork sheet factory laminated to m-rnc li- (S) 5-rant-)thick fiberboard backing 2.4 VISUAL DISPLAY CONFERENCE UNITS A. Available Manufactures s: 1. A-I Visual Systems. 2. ADP/Lemco, Inc, 3. Best-Rite Manufacturing. 4. Claridge Products & Equipment, Inc 5. Ghent Manufacturing Inc. 6. Marsh Industries, Inc. , 7. Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc. 8, PolyVisron Corporation. B. Visual Display Conference Units: Factory-fabricated units consisting of hinged-door wood cabinet with perimeter face frame, safes, and back; not less than 3-inch (75-corn) interior depth and designed for surface wall rnounling. Fabricate inside of cabinet and cabinet doors with fixed visual display surfaces. 1. Wood Cabinets: Fabricated from solid wood with integral, solid-wood markertray. Fabricate hinged door panels with solid wood frame and wood-veneer exterior surface. 2. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard full-height continuous hinges,wire door pulls, and ' door bumpers. a. Closed cabinet size: 4'H x •1'W x 3 '/.D. r 2.5 TACKBOARD ACCESSORIES A. Aluminum Frames and Trim. Fabricated frorn not less than 0.062-inch- (1.57-nun-) thick, extruded aluminur'n, of size, and shape indicated. 1. Factory-Applied Trine M;rnufr_rcturer's standard. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Porcelain-Enamel Visual Display Assemblies: Laminate porcelain-enamel face sheet and backing sheet to core material under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard flexible, waterproof adhesive. B. Visual Display Boards: Factory assomble visual display boards, unless otherwise indicated, 1. Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shalt be assembled and attached to visual display boards at manufacturer's factory before shipment. VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 0033 10101 -4 C. Factory-Assembled Visual Display Units: Coordinate factory-assembled units with trim and accessories indicated. .loin parts with a neat, precision fit. 1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length, Fabricate with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as acceptable to Architect. D. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricate units straight and of single lengths, keeping joints to a minimum.. Miter corners to neat, hairline closure. 1. Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to visual display units at manufacturer's factory before shipment. 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES iA. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a, strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum ' Association for designating alurninum finishes. D. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class 11, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker)complying with AAMA 611. ' PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine walls and partitions for proper backing for visual display surfaces. C. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth where sliding visual display units will be installed. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove dirt, scaling paint, projections, and depressions that will affect smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards. B. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of Flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, defects, and substances that will impair bond between visual display boards and surfaces. VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 0033 10101 - 5 r r I, Seal wall surfaces indicated to 101cc1ivc. visual dispiay fahnc. C. Prepare recesses for sliding visual display units as roquirod by types and site of unit, 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Install visual dispkay surfaces in locations and fit rtirniriting horght s indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated holow. Koup puninetor routs ritolighl, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backinq materials, adhes,vos, hrackots, onchors, trim, and accessories necessary for cornplete installation, 1, Mounting Height: 36 inches above finished Iloor to top of chiclkiray 3.4 INSTALLATION OF FACTORY-FARRICKMD VI`MI AY UNI IS A. Visual Display Boards: Attach concealed clips, hangers, mid c)rourufs to wall surfaces ,end to visual display boards with fasteners at not more than 1i, uu ,u-, (•liitl (11111) o.r, Socciro both top and bottom of boards to walls. B. Visual Display Conference; Units: Install units in loc,,horr.; 011d 01 nunmtutg 111111141111:+ uulicalod on Drawings, or if not indicated, at height indicated below Allach to wall mrince will) conc:oitled brackets screwed to wall. 1. Mounting Height: 36 inrhos above finished floor to hottom of cabnutt 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean visual display surfaces according to mu.uw lac harr;r'r. wrilierl instnu"Isom; Attach one cleaning label to visual display surfacer in Bitch roorn. B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore daninged or ioilod iue.,s. C. Cover and protect visual display surfaces niter utstallittion iunl domillio 3.6 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACE SCHEDULE A. Tackboard TB: Factory assembled 1. Tack Surface: Vinyl-fabric-faced Mck assombly. a. Color: As selected by Architect from full i,ingo of iodo,,tiv color!, 2, Edges: Concealed by trim. a. Factory-Applied Aluminum Trim. Manufacturer's slandord with clwir anodic III)IM). 1) Color: As selected by Architect from full longo of indw&y Color!; find color densities. 3, Width: As indicated on Drawings. 4, Height: As indicated on Drawings, VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 0033 10101 • 6 r 5. Mounting: Wall. 6. Mounting Height: 36"A.F.F. to bottorn of surface. B. Visual Display Conference Unit: 1. Cabinet Material: Solid red oak with natural oiled finish. 2. Fixed Rear Panel: Porcelain-enamel markerboard assembly. a. Color: White, 3. Inside Surface of Doors: Vinyl-fabric-faced lack assembly, a. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 4. Corners: Rounded, 5. Accessories: a. Flip-chart pad clamp. b. Cylinder lock. 6. Width: 48 inches. 7. Height: 48 inches. 8. Mounting Height: 36" A.F,F. to bottom of unit. END OF SECTION 10101 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 0033 10101 -11 ' INDEX MECHANICAL 15000 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIC:'AL GENERAL CONDI'T'IONS 15000-1 - 17 1.5010 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15010-1 - 4 7.5020 MECHANICAL - GENERAL . 15020-1 151.50 REFRIGERATION PIPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15150-1 - 11 15500 FIRE PROTECTION 15500-1 - 5 15600 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 15600-1 15610 AIR HANDLERS AND COILS 15610-1 - 2 15650 TERMINAL UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15650-1 - 4 15740 HVAC WATER COILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15740-1 15790 CONDENSING UNI'T'S AND CONDENSERS . . . . . . . . . . 15790-1 - 3 1.5810 ELEC'T'RIC HEAT 15810-1 15900 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15900-1 - 11 ' 15910 START-UP, CLEANIIIG AND TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . 15910-1 - 4 15930 BALANCING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15930-1 - 4 15960 TEMPERATURE,' CONTROL, 15960-1 - 2 r li; 'f?AP1 ic.t+.I, Aldo FL '11L SECTION 15000) - I1N P l i,ECTP,1 :AL GGNER.AL, CONDITIONS 000 . 1 (7,ENERTII,," " . A . :'ro 1.51.c?rt.� of I).i vi..:Ii.r)n 1 , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, shall L)e a part: of t:hir- Sect--ion . 13 . 'I'hc rnt'.'!;-1nic:ct ., L°c tti.1Cd1 , file protection find 1y with all pr.(.;v.ision: .)f the i:.i.rf:, protect_-i.on cinci I:)1 tlrnb.i.rlg C:Ir l'r1111C1:; 1-111(1 si)Ec I.Yi clt.iolis . C.; . The '. Orr{ "C(:)IIr.raC:t.:")2" 1.13 US(3(:1 in tIIESe SE)eC1f:.CatiOnS shall be. held to mean the, parson., firm or corporation contracting to do the herein described work . D. it shall lac: a part of this Contractor ' s bid that the submission of a prop-)sal. .includes this contractor ' s agree-i11(erlt to gill i t,?Ill 7 and conditions referred to in the specifications and accompanying drawings . E . `I'h:? dr.P:/.LI"li)S -arid spt'l"1.i:7.Cdtions are as complete as prac--ticab.l.e . 'rlht.r> iboth model number and product description are prc_,sent and a conflict exists, the product description shall take precedence . Not all details and components can be shown or specified. Failure to ment.l.on or show minor details shall. not warrant the olr.i-: sion of anything required for the sa'C.isfactory operation of the system. Furnish and install all necess��ry i.t.eclls such as fittings, valves, controls and IC cr :.;; e i : s for the proper function of rill_ 4lc: t:l: in c:Cirp.l..l.anC'E' wi*.h all local. ca!'1 CI stag codes dInrf t:ho. I :: :)[I'1.'TI!'fi<1_'CI li?I:.:17.1ti arld Practices of mc1nt1ta":1:1.11:t:'rs . Pro:'idt' necessary offsets, bends, fittirgs, and transitions to accommodate work to actual f.;Lold condit. i-ons . Field measure all required dimensions . ' F. `1'lie word "provide" where used Shall mearl " furnish and install" unless otherwise noted . G . Do not scc11e t:.he di,awi.ngs . Refer to architectural drawings for buildi.rlg (-I:c)nstruction and di.mensi.oils, and refor_ t:o "Ro:)m Finish Schedule" on architectural drawings for inatijrial_, finishes, and construction I method of r/alls, floor: arid ceiling so that proper roughing-in of work can be provided . 15000 - 1 AND ()I. I-Aii 's C"--)I I L I:a(-'t:'C)r to furn1—.01 . quipment, Services, pp t., i A r d t e x e t i t r i i I-,) n a11. A .)!,i by the work shown n the "'j L I I i d i b e d J.n U I i e s e .9 p e C i t .1. r I S, . I I . This C:o ri L a t I., :-j h cl "L.1 S 1'1 E2 d U I E? a1.1 wc,,r}: and furnish the required in such a rn(:.inne�r that the work may to f. i.rlish in an exped- t -OL S d viii-Aiout- undue interruption . :11%;0 SCIIV!dUIC-? 1-111-S, • Ork t:C) conrda" Ilt. r. for t his P J . It; shall be LlId-s contractor ' s responsibility to hire the propt--•r t:---ad(: !; Lo iccc.)mplish the ..jor - described on the dra,.-j L rigs or -in K. Data gl.ven herei.rj :and on the: drawings is as exact as coul(I JD�3 'Nieir ahsolute accuracy is riot guarant:.e,-.!d (-on',-.ractor shall obtain and verify exact measureriierits, levels, space 3t the ,iite, and shall S a t l; r*a I L . V to �ictuall condi,tions at the 1)11 j.I:i i i Cunt: t.r LI t�1,--0 d 1, The drx.-jinqs shall considered schematic and are not IJ i i*c c,i i d ed to iridicai�e all changes in direction and fit- - - t:,,) be installed by thi.3 Contr:.i(':1-01.' . Pj.j:r,. , equipment, etc . , shall be all, :iL(MIS clear the structure and other i-,uild.int-i and inairitain appropriate and maintenance . 'plans arc? sc-lioliiaLic or diagramm', I.c . are, not irivended to show all ot-1c . , requi-red to achieve the :;h,)vjn the plan rev.j.ew, but instead are t: 0 s,hovj -.1-hose items, such as valves, damp<-I-S, etc . , which Eire not shown on the plan v.tew. 'rhi.:3 Cont.ractor shall appropriately adapt. - L, -hc --ual condit.ions idc i -!se de -iils to t. -! act of the job . N . Fixtures and (_'quipmeiit: ,,howri on the drawings may be 1',000 ME,("'HANICid, A1,11) I L 'L 10 N S, -i radius of fifteen ( 15) feet at the request of the Tenant. , Owner , Ar(..-hi'Lect , or Engineer, prior to inst.allation , without additional cost to the Owner . 000 . SITE A. Visit: !:h(..! sJt:(� rind all Conditions ('I)�1 1:a t.i rD I I . B. Plans t:)"' exi.stirlq corldil.-..i on,:-. are issued as Part of the contra­_:t: di,awin, I ji,; for contractor ' s refer(---nce . Th(D.S(D Ci I';I W i r,g S .:ire pis (::ompJ_F?I-e as practicable . In no case should these, drawings be scaled except for approximate dimensions . Field measure all required dimensions and field verify all existing conditions . C. Failure- of any contractor to fully acquaint himself with existing conditions under which the work is to be performed ':rill nct_ 1.)e justification for additional compe n.,,a t.i oil . 000 . 3 COORDI NAT I nN A. Carefully examine drawings and specifications, existing job conditions, and coordinate work with others to avoid deiay. Be responsible to ascertain that the work installed does not interfere with work of other contractors . If work is instal-led which does interfere, it shall be corrected at no cost to the O-wner ireoccupatAcn r--)f space by any contractor or do,­s, not: give him the right of prJ ori t:,2, f B. The locat-ions , eLevations, and sizes of all existing utilities within the buildings are as exact as Could be secured but. exrreeme accuracy is not guaranteed . Locate all Utilities before commencing work . Any connections to, or relucaLion of, any existing utility line rE�quiring temporary discontinuation of utility servicc�,_:- to other buildings shall be Schedu1(.­-1 r.il-id with representatives o-.I-' the Owner . ,%ny ut- ilit,:ies damaged due to the be repaired to the satisfaction of the Owner at rio inc-,-'ease in the contract amount . C . Pipe and f '.tti.rigs shall be installed to allow maximum headroom and shall. be installed above hung ceilings 15000 - 3 11 11 I51 1%1 ()I: iAl L'11'.! un I I o (i t,I ir?r w s e Wilen I . ,.!..'i1 adequate IT',,) :.c} ,31.1.0w, fol- 1.]i:(: from hein(..j h1ocked off by I-,hel:s , exist.,-,, b.i.-ing t-.he rnattr�,r f-'ot- Confel.- 4-ith a1 l, engaged in the consUruct:i.on of Lhc', .[)]-()j(?Ct whose work may in any way Whenever intorferences any of the work in tAle ctllel, (,'Jilt 1.a ct.,or and come to 'DII t:hem :.i:. .) the .:a(:,t, 1.o c a t '.on and (.-J. h.:.s pd.pin,i and/or other. parts of his e C1 u.i.Pme i I t.. . Th, be sal.e1y respon.,--,ible for thy-, proper arrangeillent: of his pipe and equipment . The Engineer shall inake all final decisions as to any cc,.ndit-ions which require the changi,ncj of work , E . Sizes anf-1 local- ions of chictwork and piping are shown but it: is no int!: n:3 �d to show every offset and fitting nor evo-ry ,.;trLICtura1 difficulty that will be inst-lallation of the work . 7 he --�quipment shall be varied alliglll',VIIIL Off JDJIJ)�iAlg, and ( from thai-- un (itcjw.-Lngs, without extra expense to the Den-ious, wher(-.� i2e-cessary on account of slight ou to avoid the work of any Otll(e I: t--ra"h:,s 000 . 4 RUJJ'.'-'a AND PF"C;U1,ATTON:) A Thf,-! Lit, orciinances of- all applicable qovi-rn, � n,j in the! tAine of execution of the .i part of include, the requirements of state, t-,iit.y and also the local utility C 0 M)D a n B. A1.1 and work performed shall be n o in 1)1- J.a I,c e t-j i t.iI t-h e f o.].I ow i ri g codes 1999 BOCA PlulArlinci C o cl I:n-ni L 1,o 11 a I Plumbing, Code 1.996 ni C1,A 1 Code 1 5000 4 F",V I H 0 0 0 1 "'A's AM) 1 Al' Code 000 . 5 PERM r T S AND FFES� A . Cost of al.l. f,' es, perinits or licenses that. wt,-.iy be rQquir-d 1:()): the ri,'rformance of the Contract shall be MF '117'N I ("A 1, '!,.:I F1 COOP P FHATI'011 A T1 I e, n r " �1 t.01: ":"'k 1 1:1 1.) ',,inq the equipment shall- furnish all elements or components whic,h are part (*:)! ",hc' equi.pitient-, ,-Ind shall set said motors, heating elements, (etc . , complete and ready for operation . B . Control %-jirina is defined as that electrical which ..-, condelectrical energy at a vol't",age of less than LOU volt Z11 e r I(:)( w4 ring is clef i ned as that wirinn which i-.,erfor­ms a control function, but at a voltage, of 100 v(-,Ir-s or. greater . All other. wiring .shall be considered 1:)ower wiring . C . The ElecLrical Contractor shall furnish and install all power wiring to, and including connection to the equipment . Unless specifically noted otherwise, all interlock wiring shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical. Con.tractor . Unless noted otherwise, the control vrj. ,-injg shall be furnished and installed by the Contra,._*Lor furnishing the controlled D. Unless :i,.)t:,-.d 11,:-._­ef 1 S h E I e t r.i c a-1. Contractor shall turnish and install all starters, disconnects, pushbutton stations, etc. , except those which are fL1rrIiSh(-�d with the equipment as a part of a factory-asserfibled package . E; . Unless ,:;pe�cifically rioted otherwise, pilot controllers (aqUj.IStat:s, flow switches, pressure switches, etc . ) shall be furnished and mounted by the Contract -,r furnishing the controlled equipment . 000 . 7 MATERIAL S 11 131:!T ITUTT M, A. The spec�ific manufacturer and model number scheduled on the drawings arid/or the first name in the specification is the basis of the system design . 15000 5 AND FILECTRU"'Al, G'E,HTERAI, CONDITILONS name finer .- thnn 0110 the .,mrds, "or (.dual" , it :01 ill t !10' rfmnufactul.ers Shall he Lo the E'nclilieQr- fol- a j: Th(-- make C111d ITIode'l SLlh!IIJLterj .,hriil ho in sui`.,--)t.ance- and function to the schedu : t:'d (:,I: ndrricd manufacturer, as de'termined by the E:n'.}lllEe"l: , B . Thc9 i:ii-iy propose strb3Litutcs, should he so de sir( . A11 proposil.s for substitution shall be in the form of It f.uily ..-oordinated proposal covering all change,'-', in Cissociat.(:A with making the Substit-,lit ion . A1.1. pi.oposals for substitution shall be S U1)III I I.-,I-c2d f,:)17 1:t`2 V I I rW by this office On,3 (a ) week prior to bid due daLe . The change shall cover electrical wol:k,, mechanical work, and the work of all other trades . C . The Contractor shall be held responsible for all physical changes resulting from such substitutions, or the use Of app-roved equals (riot the basis of the design) , and bcar any and all increased costs to himself as we-ll as to Other trades in making said changes . App:ova l by the Engineer of equipment other t. 4 Ila 11 Si:), j f I C-, Cori relieve th .� - - tractor of this D. In all iznstances, the Contractor shall assume full responsi I bili" y for proof of equality of the substinite to t-he il'-quipment, hereinafter specified . All data and information necessary for proof of equalit.y shall I)f:., prepared and submitted to the Engineei: with the substitution proposal . E . Approv,:11- Or r�*�Jrrt-.I.01-t of all or part of the u b s i I!:.�,-I i 1:,e t-I r g t i v e oaf the Erig i.nee r . r Except as statc,!d ,above, bidders shall make no pre sumption.,.; regarding sut),stitutions . G . All .Md e-quipment.- shall be supplied by only one of the manufacturers . 000 . 8 MA.TNTENANCE AND OPERATING T HSTRUc,r IONS AND MANUALS A. Upon completion of 1:he job, this Contractor shall 15000 - 6 1 0 i.n.struct, the, owner ' s renresent.ative in thc.-: proper Operation and maintenance of the systems installed by this 'Cont.ractor . These instructions shall consist of a r(iiiiiiiium of : M(_.�C 11 a n i c'a 1. 4 hours L I e c.,t.r J.c,11 2 hours T hir"5;^:! h c',1 1r:_ :Ai. I "o-, j(--)b ,i i t-e (i)u B. This CoriLracvor shall also submit three ( 3) complete setS of properl.,,. 'hound operating manuals t-o the I-r -se inanuals shall include the for revit::.w. The following : I ) Complete set of chop drawings . 2) Manufacturers ' operating and maintenance instructions . 3) As-built drawings . 11 Written op(--ra.ting and mi--IintQnanct-_, instructions fol. the system. This is a written version of Paragraph "A" above . 5) Copies of warrant.ies . 6) Parts lists for each piece of equipment-. and name of local. supplier . 000 . 9 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A. This Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer for revi(w, a ,:omplet.e set of as-built drawings, all j.11id r visions required by inst-aii'v. ion a.n thf� field. These as-built drawings are man,'J:-ii_ory an,,-I shall be submitted to and reviewed by rhi,� 1"ngineer before final payment will be made . B. As-built drawings shall be reproducible mylars . 000 . 10 GUARANTEE A. This Contractor shall guarantee all equipment, materials, workmanship, installation, etc.. , for a Period of one y(:,Ijjr . This one-year warranty shall coi:'imence on satisfactory completion of final punch List items . Satisfactory completion of the final PLInCh llst will be determined by the Engineer . B. During the guarantee period, this Contractor shall make all required repairs and replacements, and shall 15000 7 AND Z:1 .'V i. :tl I L 1 If r v i. e I a bo r -o I,, 1- C, 1 c-,q',,I I r C'(1 (ILI 1:J,I")cj r)C�I-iOd ; �F"" 'I"N I t'.NP WORK F r ec and A. i I I'a t:L I.- si a at al, tJrn( " prot all' macerials, supplies, equipment, piping, {'l llni:Irj4' (I ti e to weather, corrosion, dirt, h e fit; Ltc . , and shall ftirther provide ;.Ill 1)C,10`3 L I r(-2 S «r -'3 J) a 1. prote.ction FIS indicated IDY B. M,1LC-I:ia15, E--qLliprlleht, C-t.C . , be r"Siilt: -,)f his negligence, than this C'o I I I r a t-r:)I- :.hall be held responsible for all such darnacle atid costs im-,Lirred for repair or replacement . 000 . 12 SHOP -DRAWING,1:1 A . This Contractor shall submit shop drawings in -I -I c)m p I i a c, w 1:1 Division 1 , General RequiremeT t3 . -.,.i o shop dra,,,;inc s for rt, 1 1,ow S c.] I set, 0 1: h i t e c t. 3 set fo l , maintL iance manuals 5 sets f, r the Contractor and equipment Supplier H . `Phis Cow-.ractor shall review and correct all shop dral-jjngs, big --fora ,:hey are submitted. Shop drawings b-;,-r fte and dated - approval stamp of 11 i's C C.')I I t.-r a t:o r C ciirawing ; shali in(--iude the plan mark D. Valve and fitting shop drawings shall indicate the intended service . E,. Equipment. shop dt,'Awii shall give ca pacities a conditions .1, shall lncl-Lide manufacturer ' s an(:] (7:ti t,s Shop drawings, shall be ca C1.1 o,q 111.111A "1 0 ha I 'indica e all acce.ssories c1f,,,arly mark.(--,�d and i t e I n s, c o nd i i.- j.on!3 e which are hei.ng furnished c n(I he and speci f i ca L ions (:)I)s of -p 1.an s L5000 8 AND C is.re= beln(.; d"Li'Agralms sh,-ill also bc' s ubmi.t'�-ed . F, stjbmitt-ajs which do not, provi.de t.hr required informat 'Lon will he rc�turned unchecked . G . ' his Cont- ractor for errors and is v.i %-J o L, Ii b In i,I- tF. !3 -1,11is i:-; iI-�--.,:ipor,---,i.J:)l(-, for deviations in submit-t-ai.s from document requirements and this responsibility is not relieved by ArchiLe,,t.,/Cng.-J.neer review. 1 . This Contracr-ar shall coordinate each submittal with the contract documents, of otlier contractors, -ind joh site conditions . 000 . 13 HOISTING i.-A(--'[LI'rIEc-) A. Ascertain fro.,r. , clr,,�•Iings and visiting the site the location and size of the openings which have been provided for entrance of all equipment and apparatus to the project . B. Make the necessary provisions to place equipment required on the floors, roofs or mechanical room floors by either special rigging, arranging with the A r. )r- "knock down" shipment of or b,I ;:t c--or"Ibination of the above . 000 . 14 BUILDING FOR ADMTSS10H OF C-0Q.T.PMENT A. This Contractor shall ascertain from his examination of the architec-Lural and structural drawings or from the exist.ing buildincl whether any special temporary openings in the building for the admission of apparatus furnished under the Contract will be necessary. The Cont:racr-or shall pay all cost of 000 . 15 DEMOLITTON AND REST ORATION A. "['his Contractor shall review the drawings, specifications arid existing job conditions and shall include in his bid a1..1 demolition work as required 15000 - 9 AND 1-AA:(,'TP1(7AL IF,1-1 EFIA I, (..'(,)ND1• 10NS nd L ci d C,t:I j e i:wi s i i i a n s 1)1.u rrib i 1-1 g or. 1:t:)t c I I I I I',:; r :.i r, q u i r c d J-t- 1-1 a 1..1. 1>e t h e- rns: pon;.-i l i)J. 1,J!. o h i s Co n t r a c t o 1: t c) 1.)r()v i d(.-, t h e renLI i Y(2d a CC-0 3 by i.-err.ov i ng c -0 i I i rig, cutting -i.s Iecluired . -i d --,r-jings is a C . I-,,e p I a c' w, I I'L 11 11, r at repair of opt part UI 111.._, wr)rk . W o r'. s I i o Ll:acles . • aL(-rial.s which are r-emoved ii,.d soiled sh 11.1 I')e replaced C'eiiinc.1s, walls and floors shall be propt-'..1- 1-y ,:epaireed and restored to as close to the origin,ij. as possible . This shall include replaceri,-snt of surtace fini5h materials such as paint, j.-jlastei:, drywall, ceiling tile, flooring materials, etc- . D. Those of and equipment to be removed by this '::c1-)nt-".-;-!(-t-".,)r and designated to become the propert-.y (-)I: ':hc shall be de-livered to an on-site by the Owner . All other rern,.,)Ved shall become the propei:ty -,4 t-hls Conl,:i-�ictor and shall be removed from the joh and di.sposed of in a legal manner . E . Where il-,-ms are removed, Utilities and the area from which have been removed shall be left in such f-.i ri.ann--r. they are safe to both people and F. The ahovc cfemr)!.ition work shall also include- the r Q('I Li reel f o r 3.11 s t a 1.la ti o r.) or. G. Whore nt--tessary, this Contractor shall provide te-tllporcll:,,, to be sure that the area is secured, s---ifc and weatherproofed . H . IL shii]- I be a p,;.irt (,)f this Contractor ' s work to repair parking lots, and to which have been altered by the w c')r k with matching those 15000 10 i,1 b T T 10 j,j S which have b,--'?on removed. J . Under no circumstances shall any structural members be cut, without first: obtaining Permission from the Observe'r, Linle's's the location and size of openings ,wore predeLerinine,.I I.-)y the Consulting Archit(-..-ct as noted cni, drawings . -inn/or f ield measurement by Ine'llis of--, Lnstrument's to detect any con,-:,'sled metal piPillcj or conduits prior Should any existing and active P.'Lpll-ICJ or conduit- s be damaged by the contractor ' s work, same shall be restored in service immediately without cost to Owner . 1, . Cut t.-I-nq shall be limi ted to the Size necessary for workinq conditions 'A . All I'D, ("•(-)rrcre!-e slabs and walls be done with rotary dtanion,.-I bit core drills . N On surfaces which receive new finish or will receive new furring, rough patch only. Coordinate with Finish schedule on architectural drawings . On all other ,surfaces, patch and restore sur*.:ace to match existing conditions . 000 . 16 CUTTING AND PAT C,j,j T 1,1 A. i work 1-inri any reClUired patching I done by the proper. Ljr-Ict sl-jall he included in the work of t:he contI.actor . Columns, beams, girders or other st:ruct-uii.il members shall. not be cut . No openings shall without written approval of the SLrUCI-.Ur;i.I. Enciin(.Ief . 000 . .1? A C C'F S S A Al 1. !:(-•1 dovi(--us, equipment, specialties, valves, ' l:l:ciEa:i, : . , hail bu ";0 located as to provide 101: easy acce.,;!:i and proper clearance for operation, and repair . B. Where items are located above non-accessible coilings, in or behind walls, or in other similar 15000 Il 1ECHANICAL AND CAL G 'RAL CONI�ITIQNS E N E arelas, this, Cont.ractoi: sh,All access panels . This C", nt ,;jj III turni.,.;h .cess panel-- end ,he Goneral- t o n `-o- , who el-- d �- will i:e(-(�ive ind -irv7;Lall thc-- panel.,i . L g Access p.ane.' s sha 1.1 cornpl y with t he ollowl Access panels shall be constructed of heavy gauge steal .-jith factory applied prime Coat of baked enamel . 2 ) Panel doors shall be aLt-,-Iched ,:o frame with cone ,a loci hi l 3) Cain ,1'-ocks shall be provide-d dn not less than the following quantities : Panel Hei.qht (opposite side of hinges) 0 to 18" : 1 cam lock. 18-1/16" to 30" 2 cam locks 30 •1/16" to 48 " 3 cam locks 48-1/16" t:o 60" 4 cam locks pal.loj. Width 0 No cam locks on top or bottom .18-1/16" to 30" 1 cam lock top and bottom 30-1/16" to 48" 12 cam locks top and bottom 4 i On the panel height, one of the cam locks rahov-,-, Shall be a key operated cylinder lock in lif u c)f the cam lock . One key shall operate all pl-inels . 5) Cam locks shall have tamperproof heads . Provide 10 tools to the owner , 6) Panels shall be equal to Inryco/Milcor type K for plaster, type DVI foydrywall, type- M for masonry . -iccoss doors shall be U . L. labeled F; Le rated hour, "B" lahel, type U .A. 15000 12 A Al:;. of mechanical factory finishi,-!d machinery-grey, or, standard c-Olor as, furnishod by or tl-is c-alled 11or in t.ho ""criltChe.,a tOUCIIE"'d UP wiUl a "l)('111olit-ion 'md 1:(:!sroration of 1!:000 ha1,1. 'be painted . 000 . 19 SLF-:EVF,S AN.F., ESCU-TCIIEMIS, A. This C"(-.)ritractor shall be for locating, placing and maintaining in proper. po.,;ition all s I e e V(2-9 C(2 0 U i r 0 d f")r the W C)r V - In the evc".!nt that faiiuro do cutt.ing and patching of 'L1.IIJ ,311c"d : t: he done al- th.i.; contractor ' s B Sleeves LhrOLIgh out:side walls, above grade, shall be SchedUl�a 40 PVC piPE� - Sleeve shall be cut smooth and shall be flush with each side of the wall . C. Sleeves through floors shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe extending 2" above finished floors . D. Sleeves in foundaition walls or footings shall be Schedail- 40 steel or S(:.,he-dule 40 PVC pip(-: . No shiown on the drawings, shall L-- instal- 1.r c-i Lhrough footiilgs or foundations wit:holll' '-,braining approval from the Structural Engineer . E . Where pipes pas: t-.hroi.igh existing concrete floors or walls, the shall i)e cure dr-L' Ile-cf . Provide - 1.0 ') eves F. Where piy.)es, pass I-hrough ex.isting foundation walls or concrete wall.,-, grade, tho hole shall be core d zi 11 e d . G The internal (Iliameter of sleeves shall be 1" larger in dj.am(--�ter tlian !Jie outside. diameter of the pipe or Pipe iIISLIlar-i011 . In.sulation shall be continuous through sleeve . 1,5000 13 ■ „11-"CHANICAL ANP 1',LJ;t"I'1?.i C'i�L, r G,;1-,NI-`1RAI, ("Oil D IT 1.011.1, P e r p J,pe S Il t i g h n c,r o w,i 1 ht-' L ow g r a d P, PJ.r(- Itrid 1:h t,? cl'(-)I.-., cll:.i 110d hale sh,Al! 3)(2 with l( ad wool p,l c ".1,1 t-.e r ;ht: r,1111r (,mt-.sicle 1--)ot.ween pipe and s1 r rte or hole wl-Ul (*,c,11(-?rat El-c.ft"r.icl c)r Cn Ullkino - cici do,,,cr.ibed ]Aeu ol, lo.-Id wooci . i. Chrt711,e plated L)c' provick-cl i11.- all rc A . 1U1 jdipi2 clild duct,wc).1--'rl wi-th exterjc)r 1nsulat-4 ,01" iji-lich f-i-re rated floors and ali 1'j.rt! fM,QC1 Walls, be firostopped using 3H J.ntumescent.-. fj.rc..?st-.oppirlg syst:em.,.-, i.ncludiing restricti.ng coll-ar. RC-1, FS• 195 J.rit-Alinesc.'e'Ant, wrap, and CP-25 caulk or 30-' puL.t-- y. Arsembly ,311all be installed in accorciance with U . I., li.sti-nq and shall mat:-ch fi.re rating aif C(.-)ll'3t. rLlC-t—i.0n . :'ysti,�mr; a,,3 by Nelson of, equal Only j, f i-ijey :ji *For t:ho ippli.car-i,on . B . 18 gauge sheet metal (o.- 4o st-.oe-1 p..pe) sloc?ves shall be instal.-l+ d . i?1,:1 t:c'r Or drywall iround t-..hc? outside of the SIe-eve shall b( patched t.o form a t:ight sleeve . At masonily walls, Lhe ,;pace ma-sonry and C . 1:n,! ,mcf Hie --,hall be -vi-i' l.-h f. i. ie toiin sea -1-cint, CTC pp C)I: OT,Ial . I I'K-`3 1 11 r I(:1(2 i”I e ot p o r'l 0 1) 1 S c e 1)L a 1)1. i:! I u t: t--Ilo 51.17.Con i aa irt sea 1 a i i t 1 i.s t e d -I bo v e . `;Lop putty by G . S . Nelson also accopt,:d--Ae - Products used shall be ---diall produce norl-t:ox.i • fljme.,,,, and shall be, a Shes t-o s f. I e A hroucill w'.1 I or floors, pi.pe .-tvi t--}IC' --jlec.'ve, or fl(,oi :101all, c'ml,ked w reduce lloj,se .*1,11.'T1()1! P1000 1-:'1 i A 11 71 rarisinis.,3ion - nci Lo prevent the m veme rit. of smoke between spaces . B. Product: used shall. be U. L . classified, shall. be asbestos ftee, and shall pi.odlice nail-toxic fumes or s n10 k. C . Th,-, L ' ("d and so".1 I ed with one of the I CTC Pr%-855 foam sealant. by Chase Technology Dow Corning Silicon R foam. 3) 3-IN Bar.riei- . 4 ) 'Tlalnersecll " f tre Stop pulty by 000 . 22 C01,"FINUITY OF A. All work shall he arranged that: electrical power, steam, sewer, qas and other services are available to the building at all times, except for short periods of interruption necessary for the performance of new wc-)rk . Interruptions shall not be uiiti.]. til new :-.;ervices cire, complete and ready for final, cormr--.ction . R . All. and services ,>hall wri.t.tell approval of the O".J11ol' s Noti. fication to the shall includ(-.' t.-he exact- time and (-st. i.matod dur-11'..i.oll of any interruption . 000 . 23 CONSTRUCT] ON STAGEN(.', A. It. L)e Llie of th.is Contractor to provide aII ':Dark, materials, etc. , required to by, tho cOFISLIAlction st,-.lging as desc-ril-,)-d ill t1l,:! ""tPeri,a]. (":ondiions, th( se, S 1) 1 1-1(.1,1 t:i on's I" :_s h c)'ej I-I ()11 t 1)f, pl,llls . B Becau.,.iu !:h(,� facility must remain in operation during is necessary to suAge the COnStrUCtiol) j:)r.-o(-(1.'3S This Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with the "Ownerls Representative" Engi.neerl Generlal Cont.ractor" to plan 15000 15 1 A1,11) f?I,}'("1'}t1('111. r and t."v, ti 0 11 ,iLa 1 000 - 2,1 }':,n[J T!'i1E:.i1_I _E'(J?'tt)1�"�{}' Cr !?'i <.J:'({_F_�> ; r A SOMe indic,att-Jd in the wil I b(-, furni shed by the owner and/or tinder i-.)t:her D"ll.v isi.ows of: the.st--: spe(-,A,f ications Thi.s refor t-.o ! !,t' "'Equipment ned t:.c:� k'1:.,'1. r r n I f:--I i-c" r 11"2 Ile I.- o1: under o'1:-I o i 1.k`- :;,I i I I t."d t- i 011,S, Shall ID(� the or. cnrit,r. - cti.-,,- under the Section d s 1)o r i:-,i 1)i 1.i L y t-.o rec(-Ave- and set in -Issigrie the r c place or to rnov(�• and set in p I a c e, C Warranties for oquiplriel)t furnish(--:d �Ilall be by the equipment mariuf-.acI,-.u1.er . This shall., however , guarantee the woil: he performed for these i gems 000 . 25 LF ,O(.,7VFL(:) L F r', A, S ome-'- I V-c!,Ins o cx 3'c -i 11(j equipment a r 1.--2 t.'.o be relocated. This c,'( - -)n —�,!I, <:* ;: I i;i I I i-c, f e r to t I i d w i 11 g s for existing ecjuipiii,c:'nt which i:3 to he relocated . All ij t:j.I i t.-.y .-o n n e(--t : ,,)ns .in the e.xistinq location shall be (.1ir3connected by this Contractor . This Contractor utilit-y j.n the new location . s -i- i ii I 1.i d;J f- 1.e(.,,,t r i c and ID ping The t: r(.)m the i--ixi.,-,Uing location to the on I. he. drawings . B, in (-c-)ndit.ion in begins . This -i.s not for reconditioning Y'rior to clisconnecting any ut.ilitA.(=s ar-,(-.1 prior t:c) the equipment out of service, this Contractor shall., in the presence of thc-.- owner ' s !�(:'pre,,.;t,ntative, i.nspoct all items or eqUij)1110111, -SChOdl-iled for r.elocation and shall document deficjellc'-J'(!s inight this Contractor . After:- i ,; in {.)lac(, in its, new location, it. shall hr! of this Contractor to and the (--'cjuipmerit into 15000 16' 1 rrt "rrl <+ AND j}1 30ri�11)1 or darlldCC cion r C G1' ti? r: :! a co J 'c LO r� t he r r: u.i.mt;nt iu�:in�1 e C)c�i�ion , E.xce it+ foz ..t hc' document d, clef c"i��n :.L���, i;l� L cir��"icieficies ;skl�►11 `bG ' orisaciri"wtri" tc} h rte �� rrl�rrii rit.;rzrlc3 rr�ct�;��� arl, n tlhl h 't rl. f' .l hi y' r`.cifti..7:rlr° � G�2 : ��'fc`1a.�. ' 7t?� T� COY `�`.C'�:l� t`1Ct�....tT� fTC� clClC�1 %I C.'lr'lif,i 1 1 1 1 it 1 - 1 6 E�Ar� Et': hlf';+:::EIAt'JEra'�L, h1A'E'i�;E;1ALS AND III E;•i'E OD—," ::E'C'T1ON 1 50 10 - Ell ASTC MATE"P rALS AND NE HODS c:7I',NFRA REQUI TRE,MF,tJTS and K. E'ravi;31.'!Ii: a 1'50 0 0,� t�EF;r�l�:AEIIc:�.L AND E LE C"IT T CAI, GENERAL cCPI(;li ""TON`S tt1d .1 .)0- , ;:,F,I` t'tTf; I'I;rl'Ff;C 'P ION are pal- of r}tL:i >E'C1 ion =il: t 0 t, '-,pe i. f.icat.ions 010 . 2 DESr."R1 PTTON 01.,- WORK A . P}11.5 :'sE'e:to.iC)I1 t;ntJi?r.'i E7i.t::>1C lziecttal'llcal materials an Cl method.- r�] t7llst.tin:,, f:.il � E:,r.rt ct.i.on and HVAC work . N A. 1Eate1:ial. and equipment :hall be t:he Standard product: of a manufact.t.lrc�r rer}tll.arl.y OfJE19cd in the manufacture of they pr:odut t [or at least 3 years . B. Products shell. be supported by a service organization which which maintains an irtveyntory of repair parts and is located within 100 miles of the job site . 010 . 9 ELE CTRIC MOTOR A. till 1(.-!:;:: ho):sepoaer motors and smaller phase?, and all motors 3/4 hor.seEtc;�r::r cl:lCt l 1.1.ger Shall be 3-phase . F; motor voltage shall be as follows : shall be 208 volts . �) 41nr 1.�? E.i}l i3 �e lliotC)I:"i ::iflaII be 120 vo1.t.s . ' 3) Fan Eitywc:?i-rd VAV unit mot shall k,E, 2'17 vol t::a. c, C . P�1<itt;l: mp.ly with t:ti fc;11 :)wj.ng : 1.) Motol:s sh711 c-Onfor.m to the standards of IEEE, MEMA, UL and NEC . 2) Mot:oi:s sEl~a.l.l b� tlF P4A E:tr s i g n B unless spec:.i.fical.ly noted ottic�rwi.s ' 3) b(.,., cuitCible for COnti.rWous clut:y at I rt0d }1<32:s e1.) wei w.l t it temperatur-e rise, not to :101%1., MA'1'1;f;1.AkS �. r:•: C f-,,d N F,MA 4 ) t111.1.ti': `t c7tnerw nc7te tip motors :shall br r ated for (?' " ;7 ti11:i:i.'ry I!c. 1',c3 r c:1 t: Ion �;) nst., ..<lt .i r:y :,,. _nl t-rnl:>Ioye d � a1 :v 11lr::tve 1:}�.:.n. Lost-,ad i.11iCa :.i}lr'l,111 �7L' f..i.a .s 13 or f'. 6) t;ot t;;r a haI I. b.3 (_ctl?abl (J(' w.1.t:11 !:ands.ng a Ille?r.IQ t ary t;'✓F•t:lr;aal oI Z' -O w.ithouL da III a l.n the mor_vr: . 7 } N1ntc.r::s shall. have a sc•�r.vice factor of 1 . 1.5 . At selected condit.ions, motors uhail not: be al�er.aiti.nq in l.he st�rvJ.c.e fact:or.. . 8 ) Mote>r.:� sh,'(1.1 be i�ui.lt in NC:tfA st :tncf4trd 7'- fr�rrne -2 t note , mot-or :r lli ) tnit '; shall be dri p proof: and shall be rugged construction of stQee1, iron or aluminum. '10) End br.ack-its shall be cast iron or aluminum. Aluminum c- shall have steel inserts in : t:h', h�'r: ring ccavitty , il ) tJIIIe s c:LII v.v:y:- e noted, beetrings shall be ball. ' i'�c ,,t' irtcs C" :lcl :_;IIri1.1 h,avc grciul o fittings for 1 � ) t1c�t'r:: : %oru: •:cr.�cf t.o driven equi.pment. .by belt :ihaJ I. 1)(? fu1"Irr.S�tled with crCj usta1)1c, bases 1`ra 't.ior•a.l. rncitc�z c, Sh�ll.l be . furnished with slotted ' IIIOLI11 ing 110105 Mr.)tC?!: baso, :,hell. 1.to .fuI:ni.shod w:i_Ch rhE� rnc�i:or . 1;i ) t111 ie:;s ir',,Uc At:=_•t:1 ot.tlt:=r:wi se' Irtott:y.r:.i I a.l 1 1.)e 1800 1. i J 1_icrr� t'i rtcfc. sll i 1. i t:,c: r rf;r-,c1 t:ctr 1•, 1U 1. i. f:c of 2.0 000 1'tC)iJt 1>it:i=:''t'.t r,n 1-oaring load being calculated with r tlC,tli: rrt.i.triln!arn `r..l.,r.:.It' 1)L11 10y so loc atoll Lhat: the c.r�I.t err' l.tnc, ('4 Hhe hQ1.t 1.oi:tcL is wlt:.hin the' NCMA St'.anrtlr.1S:d shaf:1: l.t`I1C]t ►1 , Ca. Molar , enor gy of f a.ci ency s h al comply WItl-1 the Cal l c>w'.i.n t� 1501 (Ill OH 15 1.0 lo--id, jind Vol L"v,le of at 1(7:last: 85% . if nnot.")r draw.," th;nn 1.000 watt's at full load, it ' 1.:: ,�Iudod Lrolr _1�1 t, 0 -( I t 850 p . F'. r --cuiremcnt , -C -t e t or exceed the ( ) Gle 116 1:611 pul.pose mot- )1's shail mc f i c i t ("i I-a I-)I I I a e d a F, f 0 11 ovis INCY W f PO A'C 1,10M1 JA 84 : 86-; 1.D 87 , 1.5 88% 25 89% 110 avid I.arg(,-,r 90% is. 1� v i.?. .1 Sound po to,: motors will be no greater than thc! qui de )-i ne n, y 14 EM A -12 . 4 wivrionded (MG 1. 9) F Three jm,;is( : i� I: :: lc.' rnotor,,.; shc-ill be Gould E-Pius, General Fic"C • ric, or approved equal . -r -pow G. Singlo phcist,-,t IM 1)1:'S Loss then 112 hoi.. �,o er shall - capacitor type with sleeve be, perininent s F)I i t bearings . CI A , TI i d n F,ta 11. a1, t i c,1: Le r i::.;e r t. a n c 11 c.)r t,:o equipment, fm:llish(:'cl and in",.O.alled by E3 . Fllywo-c)d shall be provided for all. wall. mount.(-,d i-'quipriieont,-, arirl corarcils (with the exception of 3 1;r f �ace� mounLod cabinots) Backboards shall be d construct".c.c.1 of 3/411 oxterior. grad- plywood grade B--C. T'he exposed . All. edges shall be vrfinmiA with 3/411 x 3/4 " solid .JLock to present a Al.I shall be ' . ai t, d 1 e t:o r, t: t.a I mu, n t, c.)f cant' s u r f a c o e q u i p i n e n t 010- 8 Ljh'CEI7JALEI A OIL ISTANDARDS, .1501c) 3 M1,:CHAN11("A1, MATEP-I.Al,'.3 A. 1111 o(IM,I)ITIC-111U, cir'jd I'Lli.nished by this 1 4 1 Con L r..IcLor bo new, and where or more items :117 I'Aw k"Jild Oley shal.l. bo the �A f-.ho tit,I rt.) ;A.on r ci r., d i i r os and tn,,i,- i <i :-.nd jn,-,n t: A S M I.." Engineers Ll 1, b1t. -he National, Fire NFPA Al.-)p I i ca -,�ec -()n�; of t Pro!-ect-ion N F,V,A 1,1,titiolio! Manufacturers As i t- i o n OSHA 7.iiid Health H E C, Code A M C A Air M�)Vinq i-inn Conditic-ning As.,.ocicltian REufriqeration and Ail: _,OraClit:1.'?I1.i;iC� 1?nq.inFa�'r,, , A I Air Condit,-Joning and Refrigeration II-ISLitUte ANSI Anierici.ln Nat-ional `)tandards Institute, Inc. A STM for Te.9ting Materials SMACHA Shoel-1 it t431 and Air Conditioning ccl--titvio:i-:)r::; ' H.-?itionil Association I P(-'[;"A Power Cable F',nglneers Association I-I El I'll F-',ducation and P D and Draino(W institute N E F Foundation .1 E Eli; ol- Eie -urica,l, ,:and El.ect--ronic AWWA Aw.Qric,'in Wat.e.)r Works Association ADA Americans wit--h Disabi.),Ities Act r . Al 1. vtttt�,- v i,,t I ':; I::,--J be api")l i.ed in comrl.iance Vj j.L ll I-,i 10 Vi-,i I 1 1,11 i I C U I r e,c o I n I T1(--�t I d a t i--)1-1 s If a appii-cliti.011 of I Ca ti r i ,i " :.; �1 S:; - 7 , I Lc!d !.`.)r on ! he dri-11-lin(l."i or in "..I I speci I., i.(.1-(.,t.1.U1).,-; and t:hcl: inanulfacttirer ' :31 1:,!C(AM n(I i I(-i Ei!:A u I , t,I i i :-; di s>c°rc,•panc y s ll a 11. bra ca.l.I d t t:he •lliq , <it, t.1-1111, i.un b(1,f:t-n,e materia1s, are ol. P30,10 4 INIE'CHAN 1 CA!,,, IF;1.A I, 020 . 1 A Provisj.om of Division 1 , General Requirements and -1 "AL A,ND ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS 15000 , MECHAN] are a part of this section of these specifications . 020 . 2 A. T I i c, I c) 1,-Dw i i i g i lc a t i n i i s e c t ions a i. a par t of work - Pd,11) RLECTR 1'.CAL GENE.,RAL 1.50;1 (31 1?A;,`)T C� MATERIALS AND METHODS 115020 INEICHANICAL - GENERAL 15150 IREFRIGERATION PIPING 1.5600 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT GENERAL 15610 AIR HANDLERS AND PAN COILS 15650 TERMINAL UNITS 15740 HVAC WATER COILS 15790 COND1117NSING, UNITS AND CONDENSERS 1.5800 FUEL HANDLING 1.5815 H UM I P, I FI CAT 10 N 15900 AIH 15910 CLEANING AND TESTING 15930 BALA.NCTNG 15960 TEMPPRATUPF-.1, CONTROL 020 . 3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. This Contractor shall submit shop drawings in complit,111CC1 'With Section 1.5000 . B . Shop :;hall submitted on : 1 ) Al ! )D'),- this Contractor. 2) for piping ductwork . 3 All, qi-ille end diffusert-i . 4 se.-11lt_!1'­, acco'-Ps doors and turning vanes . 15020 1 .SECTION RE'FRIC.,'EPATION PIPING E:CTI C 1 A 1.)j%­'.,' 1C)j1 i , Gclleral lz,-!quirements, (MNI RAI, CONDITIONS and Section SF-."1S1%11C TIP,:)TECTJON are a 1-mi-t of this SecUir),-1 of specificaVions . one has been listed with the various mate,)-Lals r.r, establA .,.,,11 the desired qLiality, type -ind ­r!rtc Products by oLher manutacuurers sp(-_lcifications will 1---,e -)proved in DrIS,ii-Jered equaIly acceptable if al 150 . 2 DESC�ILJLU) ETON OF.' WORF A. Flffrli ,h X111 material , s(--rrvices, and related items necessary to furnish and install the refriclerant-.. pipi-ng systems shown on the plans and :3p(>c i f:j _cl 11('reiii , These systems shall include : 1) ]Aquid R­2Cr-igerjjnL 2) .,*,I i c d o 1.1 sizes- and arrangement shown on l-":'I7 ha ied Oil the equipment. ,;cl-iudule.d. This sizing and arr',u'vic-,ment'. accourits for system capacity, correct ve1c)(11i.tie"s, CAI. re-turn, and correct through all load ranges . A1(_-)ng with the equipment shop drawing submittals, this Contractor shall submit refrigerant piping shop drawings prepa.red by the equipment g a detailed layout of pipina, showing all L.raps, double rise_rs , p-1-pe size.-_; , and -1:ef-ricjeram velocitie,,­� arid p:i:essure c,t. imum arid Inini'mum loads . The is ur-posf: Ot these refrigerant piping shop dj:aw.iiiq,i; is to coo-:dinette' the relrigerant pipe sizes , , with the requirements of the mariufacutirer being supplied. The only changes in LhC! refrige-rant- piping system that, will be allowed are those- c-hanqos required by the manufacturer of .1 0 1 M the equipment bt)i.nc3 fl.l):ni. hcrl. r 1 0 . 3 I RMITTAI,S A. Submit- shop drawings in c:omp.l :i.anc.c: with S13ction 15000 on thl_,� following : 3. ) Rrsfr:it_lc,I:ant t:)i1)t?t 6 sight, r. 1asse.s 2) dryc r!73 :3) .').'+: F Eil.11'(:'. 2:':'1 i t?f: lcl l. .''F:' t,} :?+:)IF-iioid W'11 Vey 5' older 150 . 9 COMPLIANCE, A. All material , meLhads, and the completed installat:icn shall comply with : 1) ASIIRAE ;standard 3.5, latest edition, Safety , code for W!chanical. Refrigeration . 2) ,NwI r; .. ECTION 1.5150 REPRIGEIZA,rTON 1ILPING 'Ilay, at. opt; i, IJI SC)f t cl lieu r.A hard. drawn . IT he il.:.ar izi app(-2,irance, and w it'h t-Ale U.00lsz . PI . j Al I j c):i.11 t:. hall he sa .d(:_!r t:y). 2) ,c)1 dj e r- be No . .1.22 silve it :a i.rlcJ alloy LeITIPQrature 01 11450P, -3) l-I-e :} )n t-.Ile t.hel.(Ilal exE-)aIlsion Valve may be Mueller. A903 , ;lilt:imony, of Mueller A-907 _c;c"Ider-flux. C. Rofriclerant Sj.)ecJ..:ilt-.ieS 1) Refrigerant:: ,;I_-)er_ia*Lties shall. be by one of the fal.lovid.ily mariufact:urers , a) Alco Valve Company h) Company !-ionry Valve Company 2 ball type, equal. to Ball valves shall. be c�(:j f(Dj• I:efrige.rarit application, shall :,-ai:hon filled teflon seals . Stem shall a,.r rwo _ rin� j 4 and a threaded cap with as k e WlI.VC2S YM11 have extended pipe to soldering without damage to the )alve . 3) I,iqj,jij filter dryer shall be sealed by Sporlan Valve Company. Si.zc r e cc)mme.tided by manufacturer m,-.lxiIrIklIll drop of PST , soldered COIIIIE�c'tic)!ls . 4) Stght shall be of the liquid and ' incai. t1.11.0 j.1-1cl.i.cating type, "Eye-Spy" by Also Valve or equal . Sight. glasses shall be full size .line, ize is larger than where line s a i i(I a r d ght glass size, they may be :Ln.9t:aAA,,�6 in 1:)ypass line using manufacturer' s 5 0 -3 CT 10 N 15 15t1 'PIPTNC, bypiiss kit cmd inSLallcd in accovdanc(:., with t ions, recommend,-a 5) Two-Wav sol(-' acid valves -,hrill be forged brass, iiortzmlly closed tef1cm to ARI i60 , M',MA 1. solenoid I 1c.1.o:-;u 1: 21 vc)lt: , 60 11% , MA li-,Led, 250OF t +::np :7:<It:itl r: I."a" ing, 400 vim-king pressure . valves be Mu(-A.ler Brass V a I ve s meet ANSI 139 . 1 ,ind unfired pre ssurct vessels , 7) Furnish amd install Sdiradei: type. refrigerant . gauge connecLinns at the following locations : M 1A.cluid .line inlet to each expi.m.sion h) Liquid line� inlet and out'Let. of each t' i 1 L r dryer . If t'-he i' dryer is iiear rAi (2ypansion valvct, than the gauge (--onnection on the outlet of the filter ch'yer may be omitted. if the filter dryer is near the condensing unit , then the g.-.-mcfe connection on the inlet of the filter dryer may be omitted . c) Each s,.i(:.,t:.ic)n ].in(:- connection to ' ions ohall 1)(�! Muell.er Brass Cc')Imc'ct- A- 1.7100 150 . 6 LLILSITLL-11 A. Hangi.i,g ,incl supporting of refriclei.ant piping shall be detailed an the plans , B . Refrigerant piping shall be run as shown on the plaris with i-Io additional bends or offsets other than t--hose shov.m on the dravd.rigs . In the event that, colif lic ':Ilc)uld occur 1_,et.w(-(=rI refrigerant P.I.p i n g and lhuildinq component.::,,, it !:-;hall be r:I-Al I c!d L(D the at:t.c2ntion of Lhe Engiiiei..r for I.e so I u ic'I I 15150-4 SECTION IS150 REFRJ(,';ERATTON PIPING r (2 1alit- I be in tAv! t�-u T-11 L,0 the (I 1C)II kA f 1 A.111, 're tai 1. 0 d a i I t-rap,-3 al: base of all I S('U!'i Oil t:.ral..)s shall b(-2 as SIMM 1 i "ind as possiblle ijild still ret:;iin the inLf:,,nc_!ed function . E . All ptirt.s cind (-c)irq)cnenL.­, shall I)e i.ristallcd in COT1li::.l1.c117C.r 411 t;11 HIC! [(1a1­rufa(-_,t:_117.f.-!r, r3 inat-.alled to a.,:; possible with disLanc-'e, be t:w,.'en the two riot L() (:-�Xce-ed 411 . 'Ilse. frc,)m the expansion valve shall be straight into) thie distr.-Ibutor without elbows or other fittings between the tw(-,j . G. Expansion valve thermal bulb shall be mounted on the suction lin 1jetween the coil and the oil trap. Bulb shall be mounted on the top of the suctA.(:)n line .1. 11 and smaller. BuIlD shall be 1110MIt:1"(i (DII tt"t-• 1-op, for suction lines 1- 1/•I " 1!1�1 q,herinal bull-, ,,halll he securely �'OnLacu with tli('.! :eruct .ion line, f(-)I: f:;.,-)(DJ 11-.1-'• t: Wrap 1,-)u.11.) and pipe with a foam insulaLing talc , Mueller Brass A1209 or equa H . Expansion valve- equalizing line shall ccnjnf'ct-. t;i7 the t-op of the. suction line downstream of t:hc.. bull) for thermal expansion valve and upsn_*t-�am of 11-1h(-, trap. j, '1'11 ' 1 1's L.a I I c : ? _'.Oil SUCILion t11_1 ci th 0 oil h',, 1.t:+I.-)t. t0 cA (11illiPIL1111 01-111 j1110'.,Iillg valvc, Lhermul and connec-Lion . IT . TO S(,!nnitive componerits or electrical p'rirt- n_s i val.ves , remove the part.s and components beforci soldering the valve to the piping. Use wet rags. on the valve body to protect it from heat wrappage. . clu i(I v� I'irtc I.-a I I v, I iIIe I-1 a I I bc' rull �Ilollcj 3,1J uhe slicLioll 1ille", out .side t'he r."uctiorl i lic-'i.1 I a t. L on . The .1 i(ju id i i no sha 1.1 .,ecurcd in I.-d':'Ic- flyl-on dr-civi-Axind.,; ()Il ") , cf.'Iit:ers . L. 111.1 (01;.111 br! b1c1ed co. idai� loll , .)Ill[.)I t: dirwonllect A a I I d c 11I? 11,:2!*w; t-(") etc, . 'AlicAl 111.4gli", bc! dallia(' I'V <t- essul:o test. 0 P C'.I I all :;orvic'e Va in 'systemict and charge system w i L 11 2 - 1/r7 1 o k I i I d I.; o f R -22 f c,i: (scich 5 tolls of systems capacit.y. Add ;uffictcnit (Ivy nitrogen to rai a :: ;%"1 t.- I rc) 150 pr;i ((ir hicIlic.-r if. i:(,.lquired by - - ;j I I I 'Ind for 'J d 11 fl!rl 1.":.; or': foulvi, a", 1. I 't tks U. be Af Lev sysLrni ii-, to bu compIet.o1y free- of I(-.!a 1;;, ijt-in :ayot.em be dehydrated by evacuaWing with a vactilin, p1A[tip S'Yste'll compressors I "LIUM N, rl(')t Y)r2 AS �I ',rl( I milp , Pull. ,;,,ys ✓em down t-(:) .100 microns, and hold Loi. 8 liours . Break vacuum with (Iry nitrouen . Vd!3 procedure shall. be thrf--3e times with vacnium being broken the Char(I the nysteni t, o rlie '-;ynu-,tn through r f 2.-i q e I:,-.I I I t:. C3 rye rs PkIl. L-c.-ti-Agerant and oil used in hc (*-A—iw!1-(7-d to the site in 150 8 INSULATInN _ i- IT be imsul.ated with A . 't- 2:i3 i a.1, 1/2 " of Armi-0:1ex Type I'M)" flo'Jtned p1ar.'tic I he I A (I i I I c.c):I I a 1.1 c. w i 1 n la n ti 1 I' 1 ('All 111(.!11(1-1 i u I I 151.5 0-6 I)ECTION 15150 RETRIC"'l-.."RATION PIPING MI.] II I I" 9 C U I t1 0 1111 C 17.0 manner that tiot: form cm tAie piping ar other 1.50 . 9 TF,c;TTN(', N,11) A. R e f:i:i :? i;ill be uesced al:t-er t.he. air 01 tIhc! valve shall the, c This, crmitrac-t:or _,hall- :-,;ubmit a refrigerant chargiii( , eranL system I an(I tc,�sting report . Data shall be field RlcasUrecl and recc)rde d on a day when the outdoor ambient temperature is within IOOF of the ambient air temperature at which the condensing Unit was rated. The forms on the following pages shall be filled ouL and !,,uhmit:ted for each refrigerant circui.t . Tjj�. Eiwfiiiecr be given 48 hours notic,,3 and cliveii t--he option of being present D , ."�11tj adjusting, and Startup of all D", .-�hall he in compliance with the u-i!(juipmerit: recommendations . See Sf: C:t:ion IS-60() those ite-nis, requiring startup by of. t1if-, st-,i)*tup reports described in paragi-aph (". acrid D. abrive shall be included in the 111aint-'enance malluals . 113 0 P!'."ioVAT,-- VD,' --------- A. Ail woi:1k shall bc-, in compliance with all =-gulp LAc�ri.s. in affect at the time the work is perlorme(J. 1 13 . Refri(-Y-2rr--int. not be vented to the atmosphere . This includes rcfrigerant used for leak testing system. Cl. be removed tram the system with 1 5(11 -7 r Sx:C:`I'%Ulf '15150 REFRIGERATION PIPING, m hatla. �i�. ec�u:i tiierit. ��rid LrGi11 ci z ed`to:-, ap��r ai�r.i.�Tt! .: utaz riye ront6iners ; D Existing r e f r i g e_rci nu system sli al.I be ewicuated as rcpquir��ari by r:ey1.11.:Tti��1�� . E'f2.'1rt;�Y' iT1t ,Brill be-one',, .tho prape'rry of . lCtCy1: c"117d .31:,1].1 }5e C1.1. inr)se . of ial a 1EC1 1TT i1127i'1 legal t i 1 N 15150 8 .f SECTION 15150 REFRIGERATION PIPING REF'RI yLItAIII' SYSTEM CHARGING AND TESTING REPORT I,C:7CA'I'ION PROJECT NO: y DATE:- TIME OF DAY : SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION Ambient Air Entering Condense- OF dry bulb-/. —°F wet bulb Air Entering Evaporacor ___2,P dry bulb/ OF wet bulb Suction Line Pressure, 01 C(nipro,-,> or Suction Line Temperat:ul.*e Compressor Liquid Line Pressure ts, Condensing Unit � PSIG Liquid Line Temperature. c,} Condensing Uri.iL OF Suction Sucti.on Pl:essure c? Evapni,:ito.r Suction Temperature EvaporaLor. °F 1 Liquid Line, Pr(-2!1--;,,,,11!1,e' .,; ExI>izrl,:;a (.)n va.lvo F.n.le t Liquid Line Temperature c,9 Valve Inlet Liquid Line Pressure c? Filter Dryer Inlet _PSIG Liquid I.,iquid Line Pressure (? Filter Dryer Outlet PSIG Compressor manuf:acturor' s recommended superheat range °F SupeIliC'at:. settinc t�io,rps : :��1ao•-� RI:,FP GPR11`IION PIPING 1 k11 re ada ng ,:sIla11 ,}e t "Aket7 ion t+11 compre por under consLaint; load And xuI ly 1 o, ci�d r TuSTC:IJ F3Y`. DATE wa . C.�E3S1�'32VEI2/X1CS DA'I'L: ,.r f r r t f i 151P0. 10 SECTION 1.5150 REFRIGERATMN P113 ING ' R I'll Fi;., G,13 R1?NT SY"STPM C.'.ilhlPONEN'r DATA PROJECT LOCATION : PROJECT NU ._ _ � _...___. _ .� _ DATE: Condenser tint Compressor Rated Condenser Fan No. 1 FLA/_ Condenser Fan, No. 2 _ FLA/ _V/ Compressor Measured RLA �/volt _ Condenser Fan No. 1 Measured RLA /Volt Conderser Fin No, RLA /Volt Expansion Valve : NEanuf. . Madel — Solenoid Valve : Manu L • Mode,I Liquid Line F i l r_r r D r y tr�r : M n u f: • _ _.____ ._.. _._ __.______ ____ 1 . Compressor measured RLA (Running Load Amp;) shall coincide with refrigerant systert p c s;;ure readings . TESTED BY : DATE: OBSERVER/ACS; .._.__._.I:)A'l'L 15150-11 GO VI P14; PPOT 1"'('T LOO 15500 F, A . pruvj.r;j.c-)rls (A [)j.vi:-..J.on 1 , (':;ENE'k'Ak PD-A)IRIENENTS, and Se.-t. i.wi 1000, M F", 11,N I CA 1, G E'N E R A C 0 N D IT I N S arc" a I-)a r 1-. of t h i i h e at t: I I(.--.(I II :.,r to or. t I C)t 500 . 2 DE'SCRIPTTON OF W(WN A. Furni.:;h ill. lrlbo,, mat.(!rial. and related C:(1)1[1plfA(--' the flirf' work nrl t*hf-- dt:,twinq:; and/or ied her(-,,.in . '.-Iork iflcluck!' I.-Jut nor- he 1 ) Furnish and all bulik, ct-o-,-ismain and branch line piping as r.-equired tor a complete fire prote(--tlon system as shown on the drawings or r(>quire-(l by the bu.ilding codes, local Eire marshal , and MI-PA 413 . f3. All work shall. 1)(2 111 accordance with the latest: "edition r"'i. t.i cJ N,iLicjn;A1 Pr:ot:ecti(--)n 4 .13 and shall the b requ-i •",4nor, t--he loc"tl Fire Marsha]. and the filmii(-:44'11 of Buildi.rig Rogulations . L- C . A1.1 materials ;,-md equipment under this section of the specificiitions slhall hQ approved by Factory Mutual and Underwriter ' s Lciboratori.es for fire protection systems, D. It describe a complete in Qv(--,!ry detail., and all D:ems r1(-' *Q "a1.'Y 1'or. compl.(-..te installation shall hf., specifically or 11(A . 500 . 3 NJ ATE R I A L S, A. All. material arid equipment furnished shL11. be listed by Underwriter ' s Laboratories, Inc . as approved for the firc! pr.-OtCCti()Jl s(--,rvices arid installed in accordance wi.th Lh(-,! r(,-.(::ommonda t.ions of the specific -500 . 11 SHOP DRAW TITG; ', 15'�)00 A ('*omplete ;hop dri'v'JiIICJS 1:11:0 t-.0 SkAhMitt(-'d to the aforementioned agon •ies f or their approval . Copies of these approved drawings are to be submitted to the Engine,er for their approval prior to starting work. B Sprinkler. shot.) -Jrat-jinqs and hydraul is calculations shall bQlar the coal and signature of a registered profess ion,'--il (.�ngineer for t- lle st-ate in whic-11 Lhe work f.-. 1kes C . Shop drawil-1c.1:1. ;hall 1')( s.tl:�mi.t:Lc-cV t:c .Al local rind th(-� owner ' !:; msurzince carrier, Architect: and Fn,j.i.neer prior to fabrication and the start of work . D. No work shall be (---on(-eal(----d where it is inaccessible unless inspected ind approved by the aUthorities having jUriSdi(,.t-i01-l . E . The system shall not. he accepted until final testing and receipt of t-..h(-2 Contractai. ' s Mat(.�rial and Test Certificate, Part "A" General . F. Submit shop drawings as required by Section 15000 for the following equipment and/or materials : 1) Valves - control. 2 ) Water flov; switch 3) Piping and fitf-1.11gs 4 ) Sprinkler heads 5) Pipe Specialties, 6) spri.nkle.,-, hr.,ad c,.Ahinet Insi.1):--cl. or ' s t- st connection 500 . 5 DESIGN A. The following derisities have been established by NFPA 013 and have been used in the design and hydraulic ci.-ilculation . B. Water pressure data at the site shall be confirmed by performing a wat:er test. at the -site . It shall be the respon.,; i'hility of the Sprinkler Contractor to contact I . S .O. to Verify the water pressure data at the site . Also, Insurance Service Office shall be contacted to determine static and residual deficiencies for this area . C. The information given herein and on the plans is as 15500 F!'RE PROT!;-'(,'I'ION Couid ht! o.,3 e 5 i or I-ii.dd:ing pu I- but d i r I:; (11) -ify all --jation.,.i, clearances, pipe s e s, t' 1)e. ore :;tol.til,(J his work . D. The C racroy sjj�.11.1 pi.ovide all necessary alf'-fsets, raises ()j. drops in piping and auxiliary drains required by building conditions whether or not shown on t he plans . r i� . p i pi I I(I j..,, to 1.)(� held high as possible and maintain c k t:Cr ma.in sy5Lc'r -i se r s r 1 500 . 6 COORDTHATION AND -M'P.E, -,,T�jNG A. pipe sizes and routing, and exact sprinkler location shall be based on hydraulic calculation and spacing requirements . This Contractor shall be responsible for total coordination of the reflected ceiling plan using the engineered HVAC, electrical and architectural. plans . ..)00 . 7 OVERHEAD P'lPE. -AND FITTIN(I') A. Feed maims an,--I srandpipes -shall be thinwall steel pipe desi.�jned to %%,iti-istand a working pressure of not less than 175 psi . B . Cross mains and branch lines shall be standard weight black steel pipe ar approved equivalent such as copper tjjjP ),- thj.r,,.jr:il.t steel. pip e des ign ed to wi.1-hSt-clild a WOrkirl( I)r(-ISSUre of not less than 1.75 L J p i. . C . Pitt-inq".' sci.ewed or flanged black cast iron or appro,✓(,d equivalent such as mechanical gro(,-)Nir! or. welded c-•onstr.uction . D. Piping is to be held as high as possible where exposed . E . Wet SYSLEIII pij)(.1 May he installed level as per NFPA 1113 . AUXTIA'APY Dr)'�%J !JS A. AAIXiliary drain:; consisting of plugs, or globe valves 15500 - 3 and j of pipe section eX c ee is v e J a -, - n s shall b e provided to drain all points in the system that cannot be drained back to a main riser . approvod r -I -- ri- is a i paced in A 1. rd 5 plat at all wall pnet a C,11 s . 500 . 10 AND A. COntr(-.)l T.raj.VeS ;.I',S ;-Cie buildings shall be 175 psi working nressur-� approved i.ndicatLnq type valve . B . ChecF, valves shall j,(-, 171) psi .-iorking pressure h o r on a valves or �pi: roved equivalent such as '..Jafe".- C . Drain and test ralv,ts shall be 175 psi working pressure, bron-';--e threaded globe valves with renewable composition disc. D. All valves on the sprir.}-Ier system shall be supervised . V a-I ve s w-i t C h e to be furnished and installed by the Sprinkler Contractor and wired by the Elect-- ricai ,'-'ontractcr to the tire alarm control panel. . shall be Potter or appr3ved -�jua-L 500 . 11- SPRINKLERS A. Furnish and install t,,ih-� re shown on the drawings the follo,,jing symbol typc-s of sprinklers : p e Lo Reliable Model E'1FR/F2 Quick Response sprinkler head, style : recessed with chrome. discharge orifice and 1650 F temperature Li n1 : he installed as indicated on-i pla n s 2) Type 2 : Eclual. to Reliable Model G4QR, Quick Response conceal,ad pe�rident sprinkler head, style : recessed di:op down deflector and concealed flat cover plate, '�" discharge orifice, 135 -i t c -es --,r pi, and 165 degrees F dear( F link on cover 15500 - 4 ION I" n I r s h i 1 installed a s i n d ca t:e,.f ),-. ",.I Pla.".S . B Furnish and rl• ,': s t,Istem, i.iser a six-head a sprinkler head qrenc and types and tenioerra,c.ure of exi-- i.-I. :5pi� ,_nklers t-.o be in proportion 4 to those _Ied ,n 1:hi:� 500 . 12 BACKFT,01,-j PREVIENTEP A. Provide where sho,,,;:,, ,;ri d,--a%,j1.n(g,­. a 1.)1/L listed double qai:e va!_-;­�, valve assembly back-flow c r ev type . unit- to be Ames, Febco, o'_- Wr: tt:,S, e(jual to Watts Model #709 . 500 . 13 SIGNS A. Approved enamele=d rnetal signs shall be securely attached at the main drain, auxiliary drains, inspector ' s test connections, control valves and electric alarm bell .1. . B . Signs shiLl b,:-, a , the main --iser to indicate the hYrJr,-_,.ul `Lc ci:izzeria for she system and the systein demand at base of the ri-Sier . 500 . 14 TESTING A. The entire aL11n(DM--tiC :sprinkler System shall be tested in the presence an authorized representative of the Engineer and the governing agencies having jurisdictior-, foi: .approval . Advance notice of 24 hours is reauired . B . All interior spr;_n.k].er T_-)tping shall be tested hydrostatically not less than 200 psi 'for two (2) hours in accordance with HFPA #13 . Interior sprinkler piping shall be installed in such a manner that there will be no visible signs of leakage for the duration of the hydrostatic pressure test . C . The Contractor ' s ilatarial and Test Certificate as shown in NFPA 1113 i-iust be complered and submitted to the Engineer before ftnal approval may be given . D. Preliminary 'cesu:.ing shall be conducted as mentioned above to assure proper operation when the 15500 - 5 SECTION 15500 MECHANICAL EQ1JIPMENT - GENERAL SECTION 15600 - MECHAtMICAL E^UI PINEN T - GENERAL 600 . 1 GENERAL A. Provisions of Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Section 150000, LIECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS and Sec--- ion 3.5005, SEISLMIC PROTECTION are a parr_ o;: this Section of these specifcations . B . Al'. �qui.pment shall ^;e installed in compliance with the• -ianufa: Lure*.• ' s Commenda t ions, sae Section 15010, Paragraph "Xi TERIALS & STANDARDS" . C . Equipment selection has been based on the manufacturer schedule to establish the desired style, quality, performance and type . Products of other manufacturers listed in the specifications by name will be accepted if their product complies with all requirements or the plans and specifications . See Section 15000, paragraph "MATERIAL SUBSTITUTI0�1" 600 . 2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Fu;-nish all labor, material, services, and related items necessary to furnish and install the equipment shown on the plans and/or specified herein, complete and ready for use . 600 . 3 MATERIAL A. See Section : 15610 - AIR HA,IDLE.DS & COILS 15650 - TERMINAL UNITS 15790 - HOT WATER COILS 15790 - CONDENSING UNITS & CONDENSERS 15810 - ELECTRIC HEAT 15900 - AIR DISTRIBUTION 15960 - TEMPERATURE CONTROL, 15600 - 1 A] PI AND CO ON w5iS10 - AIR A MLERS *iD COILS 610 . 1 AIR RkNDLIJNG UNIT A. Existing air handling unit was manuf,:act ured by the Trane 3 . "he DX coill -a— uired Ln the exi � air handler ng (in s;clhedule 1 ART COLIS Sh�-Jll consist of 1/211 or S/811 O . D. , 0 . 02211 tube walls, -Laggered copper tubes and 0 . CO75 " thic" aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes . (-'c)ils shall be comr)_� etely dra.inable and shall have drain and vent connections . Headers shall be copper with tubes brazed r-o headers . Return bends shall be formed so tube wall thickness is not less than chat specified -:above . 2 Coil secttion shai.l have heavy-duty coil tracks extending the full width of Lh(� unit to provide slip-in, slip-uut coils fog: ease of service and maintenance . All coils shall be of the cartridge type, removable from coil connection side of casing. They shall be tested at 250 psig air pressure while submerged in water . Coil performance shall be certified in accordance with ARI SranJard •110 . After testing, coils shall be deh-,,),drated an6 charged with dry air. Coils shall be designe=d and zestc-_A in accordance with Aincricati Mar-ional Standards Safet--y Code for ii a ri_4 cal P.,_­I-r ige ra L n (ANSI F)9 - 1) 3) DX' cooling coil -,,hall be horizontally split with interlaced C4 i'CL1itiI-jq and shall have two independent: rz!friqeranc circuits . coil manufacturer shall furnish the expansion valves with the cooling coil. . 4) A--'I .i:• handi�er, condensing units, and cooling coil shall all be by the same manufacturer . 5) soace availalble, for the air handler is limited to that shown on Tie plans , All. parts requiring service shall. be serviceable from one side as shown on the plans . This Contractor 'shall verify all dimensions prior to shop drawing submittal . 6) Shop drawings shall includQ manufacturer ' s matched capacity rating for coils, condensing units and refrigerant pipe sizes . SECTION 15510 AIR HANDLERS AUD COILS 7? Shots dra��ri:�gs shalt include manufacturer' s tatal og data can the air handler, cooling coil, condensing units , and manufacturer's matched capacity rating for air handler, DX coil , and condensing units . Also submit; refrigerant piping izlformation , as called for in that section of these specifications. .. •',f .. A ;I { i �.t SECTION 115650 TERt',11NAL UNIITS) 650 . 1 TERLMINAL ( D(.)I,.',P BOX ST,,!LE) L has A. r i-,i.; n a uni�� sel� 9 been based on Tempmaster desJ­rad type, quality, and -d,i t:- -omply" na with these -11 z:)ro c 'by n.1 m nu�ar.,t u r e_r s are 1) 2) Carne.,-_-, 3) T B . Te rill i na ur"Ij-3 _`� ncLude. andi/or comply with the t7l L 0?4111 1) u:jJ !-.,-3 shall be ':he single duct: bypass typo . units shall vary t- , the supply air to the room I-It/ J)YpasSl.J_J(j a i r to tho rcatur.n air plenum. 2) Terminal units Shall be pressure independent and shall'. maintain pressure vai:icaLions, regardless of internal damper position . Casing sha-11. be const-ruct-d of not less than 24 aivanJ z­d steel, and damper constructed of -1 1 -ilvc no.. LeSS t:�Iaf I" gjauge g. inized steel . 4 ) !in j.t L-, shall. -) ? .-1 s u 1 a t:P d With I . 5 1 b s , density, 1-1/2" --h.ic.k, complying with IME-'PA 90-A . 5) termi'.I-ja> i inits shall be factory calibrated for maxlmum and minimum air quantities given in the schedule . CF-M s-_�ttings shall be capable of 6) F(Dr h(:)Se UNiCS requiring reheat coils, coil shat! comply t• ' specificat:_Jons for reheat C:o i 1. Coils shill. be mounted in an insulated sheet. inetal enclosurfi-, mounted on the end of the terminal ur.it: Reheat coils shall be hot water. 7) Terminal Units ShM.1 include an electric operazor . Un.it manufact-Urer shall coordinate spring range and actuator normal pc)sition with the Temperature Control Subcontractor . Damper motors shall operato on a 24 volt control signal . 'Ia S Shal "'. -")*c exceed ,1C; 'i5 at 0 . t ­h q p, 3 u r e drop when di scharge r r,,,. 1 .14 1.,C.d with h I . 5 if/FT3 insulation own s, r e a i i i of -lorminal, unit . An a n c e of a db for room absorption is included HC -e qu i r e iile n t s R a(J a e,:-,, s 0 u r-,d ..Iicllout allowance, for Ceiling or P t i, n ­"I no� exceed NC 28 at 0 . 5 inch I _ � Power Level data f r gave Lands through 8 . drcp of U terminal. unit shall not excced 0 . 4 " at maximum air flow . 650 . 2 FAN POWERED TE-Ki,_VINAL LI,1_115 A. Terminal uni,_- selelctI'.or,, ii-as been based on Tempmaster to es-,_ablish type, quality and performance products, with these Speci f i n s of he r e,qu j.re d physical d i rue r,6 J .D ne _)I L ng manu 'acturers are equally acceptable . 2) Carnes 3) Titus B. Tcrmin..al urliis shall include and/or comply with the F 0 1 L o""i rI(j: : ')rl.-4.',_':3 shall variable. air. VClUrIle on the primary aLr fol: c7011.r1g and ccinstant volume on the secorldalry air -side for- heating, parallel flow d a s i g n . 2) Casing shall be galvanized steel meeting ASHRAE and SMACNA Standards . 3) Casing shall be internally lined with 1/2" 1-1/2 lb . density coc-ited fiberglass . Insulation shall conform 90A. e s s panels s 1-1 a I b,­ provided which will allow rim:"v ion . e A I C., fail �5 e C F , motor shall b permane nt split capacitor 15650-2 L. motoz wit.h overload protect-.ion . F:ln ruator shall be :i spe=vri. 6j .':,r.ar!J I ZI 1 ani.t 6h ?" ir,cludQ a hot °:raLOt heating comply with 15710 . � . . ..r:v'� ldcl;�' < hFa!1 be ra';i(:l} d at rh' r� ' r=mac ir. ivr r'Orwar Curve R ) c tan :1;;ra� l:c d c° ry M c; ntri fugal a: . d the ANSIML 883-1980 shall not. exceed NC--35 at Lnch w. , pr,.SsurQ drop when the discharge C7Ll irl_:;rn4 ly ln (i w:i.th l . � IA s . prar cubic :got:, insul-at:iori or Lr,et downs`_,rearri of terminal ,Ir;ir. . An a?.i i'.r lr.ce c)' 8 cdb for room ab��orption JLs irICILIded i.n the. NC rcquirereI"tF, 11) Radiated soun:i :rithout allowance for ceiling absorp"_ion shrill riot exceed NC-28 at 0 . 5 inch w . g . pressure drop. 12 siia- ll subrna.t Sound Power. Lovel data 10-12 f:or octave bands 1 r.hrough 8 . ' 13} The damper 4actucat or and room thermostat two positionl thre:e -way control val.vo shall be fllrn].shC;d -with i:he terminal units . Damper actuator shall. be 24 volt, factory installed and :�i.rr�cl . C:;control shall be solid state proportional . "Sta1.1" type" motors area not �-i cc(:.pt-ab!E� . C . The r rail i:lr].t..i l_�e loc;. teri outside o1: t:he primary air sr-re4am. D,,iL1; ncj the- cOOl.iI g 30,asOn, t11C. fan shall be shall IrlC�dulatf-:, the prIITIar.f air damper. :r required to maintain space temperature . bl.tri.rlg the heating cycle, the primary air d.arnpt.r sha:1.1. i ei in the minimum position, the fan shall run, and thi? space thermostat shall control the heating coil. as required . U. All wiring shall. meer the requirements of all applicable codes, including NFPA 90A and NEC . Wiring shall be in conduit . 1.5650-3 :1 CaCT I ON Twl;NtxNAL UNITS Terminal unit shall bA ractory" set t6 fail in the, ma;imam air flow posi.tion . F- Terminal units shall be completely `zactrjry prewirod in such a manner that the only rield connects required are a Single 120V/1 phase. connection and thermos tat `w:iring connection . Factory wiring shall Include : ?} 21 'Iola contro I voltage transformer . �. 3) D .sconnec f , l56`.SD: 4 s SEC"I"ON !=740 111JAC WAIIIII;1I17 ('011131 m A hav�' been based or, ariul-act'urer listed oz­ the Rehenit Coil Schedu'le . Equal products -ac ble . by the following manuf turers. are ac cepta Trane 2) Temz)i-riaster -'Iraia 0 1., 4 ) C'a r n e s th'� fol).("Will"71 : 1) S u i ti ahI e for ho.. �IPPli, 2) corjstruct: ioi-i be suitable for 175 psi. working pressure at 250 degrees F . 3 ) O. D . (5/811 or 1/2" ) seamless copper tubes, 0 . 020" walls, staggered with mechanically bonded alumirium fins . 4 ) Coaqpitat:ely drainable . - 5 Drain, ve,,L, ;�,up a e ply, and rtur connect ions . 6 ) Frame shall 16e ;,,3-uitable for slip and drive type sheet me-t-'a 1. ]olil%a . 7) Coils shall lie ARI certified. 8) Headers shall be copper construction non-ferrous, I rAPT Coruiect_ioiis described above . Tubes shall be brazed to headers . 9) Ret:urii 'De—,ids shall be formed so the wall tlhic`Kne.ss j.s ric A thickness )t-- iess than the tulle thic n is spec L f ied above , C. The i.equired coil pel-Eormance is given ii-I the Fan Powered Terminal Unit Schedule . Coil manufacturer shall submit , with the shop drawings , ratings and ' ti c capa(:.,-, -!s based on the scheduled conditions . 15740 A1141 ) 1.5790 UN-ITS AND COEMDENSERS AIR.—COOLED 1-C)NDE'NSING 'UN [T A Sf.-,Iection ha.,., been based on Trane LO est-7--iblish deUirc-A ty[)e, performarice� and quality . ECIUal, products, (:otinply.j.1-Ig with rhese, spocif icali-Ions, by the follow."Lng aro equa.11y -.icCe-pLabIO-,, 2) Y B . Air .o1_'d i r I I: ha I I i,i c 1.1-1(,J c... a r i d Un-4r- shall. be a fact:,Dry fabricated, assembled and tested un"'i.t, and shall include all safety and operating controls, wiring, piping, etc . , assembled in such a manner than_ the only field connects rec.iuired are refrigerant suction, ref-.L-iqerarlt Pallid, refrig(-..rant: )-,ot gas , and cont:rol. IxJn: (- ne ,:L ions . 2) c.1sing shall make unit fully weatherproof for outdoor installation . Casing shall be fabricated from galvanize-! sLeel and -:;hall have a factory applied baked enamel finish. All edges of the met-al shall have the same finish to protect the mat�erial from rusting . Openings shall be provided fcr power and refrigerant connections . a Pne]L.S shall ,ct' r(:M()Vable to provide access for Servicing . fabric;-it:ed from copper ic'al P/ }added :III ' num fins . ' coil :;il::i }:: _i' ai.r. :ci fot subcooling. fails -hill b di rect drivc:m propeller type . Each fan shall have a fan g,,tai-.d. Fan mot-.ors shall inherent protection, shall be resiliently mounred, and shall hz1ve permanently lubricated 1-)-parings . 'rwo refrIgc-,rant circu-its . G Ea_`h c.-otnply with the following: ' hall be the -,(�rviceable hermetic type . b) Sha] �. be mounted on spxin- �L .1 vibration isolators . 15'790 1 SC�l1 15790 CQN-D,ENSING UNITS AND C.ONWENSERS c) oil pump shall be reversible, positive displacement type . (1) compres,s(- r shall he across-thc—line st,-art . shrill include a crankcase heater. cssor shall include discharge and Suct-lan Sh-L"toff Valves . 7) Condensing unit.-. shall include cylinder unloading in response Lo -suction pressur,-. . condensing unit shall have the following stcq:)s of capacity reduction : a) 0 SO - 100 8) Condensing unit sl-iall include the following controls : a) Head pressure controls suitable to allow operation down to 30 degrees F. b) Winter start controls to allow compressor start t--o 30 degrees F ambient , c) High head pressure cutot.1t . suc-'- `-On cUt:out: - e) Timer to prevent short: cycling of Compressors , f) Low oil. pressure switch. g) Condenser far, controls . h) Recycling pump down control . j.) Njaj,ual rnim.p down switch, j ) Exnans ion valves for Cooler. t k) Solenoid valves for liquid lines . 9) Condensing unit shall comply with the following standards : a) Ratings shall be in ccmpliance, with MRI 520 . b) ANSI/ASHRAE 15 Safety Code : c) Wiring shall comply with the National 15790 2 UNTTS AND (1) unit shall be ETL or- UL, listed . e ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code . LTjjj,L wiring shall, include : conriection, c Mterlock ,-ird i.ini.L control sy,�tem -hall be , OC"V"_>-d a weather-uroof enclosure . Panel is tees: J(<)rs :,-,hall ke,,, lock . Dead- front -panels slhal.l be provided on thfi line voltage sidp . b) Starting contactors for the compressor and for each condenser fan. Compressors shall start unloaded. c) Control c_,' rcuiL transformer and fusing . d) 0-,,,erload :ind short circu.it protection of all r 1 S, :it>>1Ci s -i Le -es�, tc - compy jor overload protection in all. Lhree phases, and inherent condo an motor overload protection. ense r e) Terminc als for [low switch and liquid line solenoid valves . f) Factory in.stalled non-fused disconnect . g) Compre.-,soi,3 shall be part--winding start . ,t-it manufacturer shall furnish a nar­::l whir-I, nhall contain the following : a) L,6 aving w").1 ter temperature controller . b) System on-off. switch. 12) Compone-nts. shall be housed in a factory painted control, Control panel shall be located in the Inechanical. room. 13 ) Cc)ndensing unit shall, have condenser fans with a v -tic �,chargf.-? e i a.1. di!: C Con&.,nsinq uni.L shall, have a minimum 2.13R rating of 9A . 15790 3 I i E AT A U i ii t se I. c t io r i ha.33 be e,i based o n Mark, to establish th,:, dosired ✓ty.'I.e, quality, an,-! performance . Equal products, complyi.ng with these specifications , by the fo.1,11owing manufacturers are accept:able : tla r k I a:I d c Orny', Y will"} ::I2(2 .'hail. bt:,, a surfacf' mounted unit, with stamped grille-s in the cover for both supply ai.r outlet . 2) Cabinet shall be constructed of not less than 1.6 gauge, steel properly reinforced with stiffeners, tramework, etr_ • , tc, provide a rigid cabinet ,7.issembly .­)uit:able for installation in a public a,-ea - S '_Iicable- for this project . Front panel shall br,,• 11inge,J lffor access to tht-:., internals of t h Q u n t: 3) All -_---abinet. parts shall be properly cleaned and prepared and :.shall be finished with baked-on primer and baked-on enamel . 4 ) Fans shall be propeller type forward curved. 5) MoLors sit 3f1. PSC ',_ype, with integral thermal 6) ing ccdil s�lall be el(-�ct,ric resistance type. 7 ) Unit shall. compleLel wired factory d so only a connection is required . A.].I wiring shall be in compliance with applicable codes . Factory installed controls shall include, but not 1) e limited to motor speed selector switch, c,,)ntroi voltage transformer-, disconnect, and overload and short circu.Lt protection of all circuits 8 ) Unit sh.:1 I! be UL 1.is te d . 9) Unit shall include i.ecQssing flanges . C . See sch(=dule for capacity. 1.581.0 1 1 r��1''. r�;srt�: l�trtic�N SEC :.O`I 15900 _ AID, 900 . 1 GENERAL , . A. Pr:)vi:3i.ons oC Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Sect:icrzl 1500(), HECIHAN.ICAL AND ELEC'T'RICAL GENERAL CC1.1DITIOIH , and Section 15005, sFisi- ,rc PRo,rECTION ,are of these spec i f. icat lolls . 1•tj A. Unless spoc i.i:.Led otherwise, all duct:WOrk snz.L.}. be < i nri; rli-:--i:, l of galvanized stc'e1 . B . All mater:- als used shall meet the requirements of NEPA 90A .and UL 181. for Class I ai.r. ductwork . ' 900 . 3 C0NSTRU,''PI()N A. Rectangular sheet metal duct dimensions are sheet m�t:rl cliznensi. ns . 1'o r. t.has ducts :1i. th internal. .liner, r_he cluct diuienr; ians gi.veri allow for the int(eI:naI liner . ''or those ducts with . external ifaa�.Ila iOt1, the 'IiuRf'nsions are fre,.? area dimensions . B . Round duct dimensions are inside, free area di.mens i ons . C . Metal. gauges, joi.nr_ fabrication, reinforcement, and sLzppor.ting �1: dtzct:ro;:}: s11a.il comply with the latest ecfi*_.ion of t_}le f.(7)l1.owing standards : .L } Si•I:%C. i:',. HI/A(' C;'.; Construction Standards , Third Edi.ti,,Dn, 1991 . 2 ) SMAC'NA High Velocity Duct Construction Standards . D. Duct,;lork shall be constructed for the following ratings : 1) Supply duct.':1orr: shall be suitable for 2" w. c.; . positive, pressure . 2 ) du,- :;hall. bf:; suitable for. W . C . ne-g atl ve pressure. 3) Exhaust ductwoz:E: slc:il.l i suitable for 2" w . c . negative pressure . 15900 - 1 r t� 1 ) c�utcicar air duct-wol-k shall be for- 2" c n Qg p.,:essure . IT'V`4 C if- S r)p U 0 11 LlSr' flanged and t:h os e s o e c i f i d e. 3 (�,d S 0 i r-i S i ri li(?L ) ,in t:he S)MACUi. n,-.inuals 11L used, joints Shall b(�. "Ducttriat_-e" as man,Jlact:urod by Ductmat -� Indus, ie .Inc . 7 ,rots shall be installed in compliance with the manu %act-.,Jlrer ' s recommendations . The Ductmate Svste"Ti s"na.111 not b? used fc-)r duct gal-iges heavier than 16 claugt- or lighter vhan, 26 gauge . The 3M-900 scaler T� n t a Sve s e r e a f e r s p s ri o t- r e q u iz. d c) r n r e t.., 'outside with all - -s ij e �3 i i r E a c e s shall. be smooth n t i cr Ur L I c a I stream a m e xcept for air balancing devices as hereinafter specified. G . All, fast.--ners and it.Lachmenrs shall. be made of the same material as the ducts or of corrosion-resistant material H All radius ::,Hall. have a mirlimUlll centerline radius o_` 1 ­1/2 '_`Lmes width of t:he duct . I . Dissimil-ar ­�t:a L.I- Aiall be connect.ec-1 wir-li flanged -is -. - , P jC�1rits 1-_71 dl(:-. u P w ri�_,op r e 71 in- q, �if,,e t-, to p r e v -n t contact t�Let_als . Flanges shaj-1. be fastened with bolts by ferr ,.les and washers made of the same as the gaskets . J . All Si:-,,� Or. I:!).-�AIISiti(311S 3i,all be made gradually with t.-.ota-1 angle noc to P_:.:Ceed 30 degrees . K. Balance coniply with t-he [ollowing : 'j:. o n s, not 4 in One an,:,! exc,�eding 12" in the other use a stnglo blade damper . 2 ) For ducts which exceed the dimensions listed above, use an opposed blade damper . 3) F'or ducts cver. 48" x 721' , u.,.ie multiple damper Sect J.olls . 4 Darnp,-?r t_raines shall be 14 gauge galvanized press formed 'eILL11 welck-'d corners . Dampor blades shall 15900 22 e. s a it e 'a J Ivan J t?C�I 1,q i t h P -4,ngs shall S� '-Olnned' Bea., I f J�U�)r iCa t 4 be (Iiamet,�.r ncl bron:ze or nylon With plated e :7 t e axles, plated bracke-ts, an b 1:a 5 clij d e ma n ua I lock in CI L;a a a r lit P-rtDdu(--'-.s Model equa— mm- iple 'n , ade �i,ainpers Model. 5303 .Dr approv'f�d C"u-al :urn s, s, a 1.1 b a I,i r i c e- a r i c i s p .r dampers w 1,1 e r s h tDw n and wh I d j t a f i ow duct.re, required to properly 1:.alance e i 'very duc 3 plit or branch duct roc shall have a split--ter or balance damper M A11 s;-I -t.; (supply, return an--] --mhaust) shall --c n t n I Ig V�j -,I 4 h a , L , . I - I -J -'N A ma n u al o in p 1.i a n c c2 w �h t-I i M A C -i(j va n s a r e c a led for, they 11 . "-Ihe�re acoustic turnii shall be AL-1-san AcousLiturn . Vanes shall be airfoil, cioul)1e, thickness, extruded aluminum back-plate, perforated face, iiberglass filled, with factory furnished rails . 0. ="ir ex'-_rac-z:of3 ma.", b-- us�:I*d only ',.,here shown or called L )r . shall I-De Tivus AG-45, or 3 wht'-'re af'c(-ass is rD C)s s h r'.-)k"q.' and No . 2 operator a(--cE-,,s.-, panel in the ductwork at each air (-'�xcept where, access is possible through P. SplitLer '--iamp-�rs Miall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA Plate N(D . 28 and the detail on the plans . YOLIng Regula!:.or end ho-arings and locking quadrants shall be provided on the damper shafts . Splitter damper shall be c:,onstructed of not less than 16 gauge gal.va,nizf:!d sheet ynet_-.al . Throat, areas for splitter da.nlpers -hall b" proportioned to air flow . Branch duc-, be full depth of the main duct, until, after d Q n i.s, insade and than transition to branch Q. Access doors shall he constructed of 24 gauge, or 15900 3 0 1s'7'J "_'.:, iJ,.: J .:. '_ l a';c•i� r11�: t:cal w.i.t h .a ,7i �ra.wr(�e, (?r tleavii?}:, .�Yai.v.:l; r.'amQ Doom shall be ,insulat:Ed t:h ri ma` ?ria1 h ink F}~A 50A . a::sG +`'_. : t".K.l.. . 3"t '. t:s ':ea �. �:et '"eon t hc, t„�t.`di ":fir"d i.rafll@ 11'_i. ail 31..i. 7il iris"y 1 fE; 1 ;it c1]. l3C't'tJi K?n ;i1n rarrl and ' d 1ict . tic or:s .xha11 b mode 1.s HAD-5 (hinge,d rani oCKS; :."-AD- ri (dorlbl.a-.earn locks), as ma n uiac 0T:ed 'by C . E :.. parrow 'Comp, hy, 1nc . , ��ir1flE:a�7C� .1 a, Mirin(,ata' or ripPro",eI For ].t+ i.nSU1.rl' i.}r., u:a'ro' r"AL) 1C, c)r HAD-.1Q. . �?. e1 �Ja!tlpt?r 3 t;ltr 'i n space, such as :1!".C7'Ie t?.� i::it:':.'.. _i 1..: rIF�. , .(J. wl 3::.n C:h l it? , C'X -�nCi damper >fi .+? ;:,: '=::a :+.ip iJi iw;, t ''.1sh (-aver. pIate in N.'. sl S . Al rai,, V'.. r is oi ni ;ha.. sctoaleO Can t:i'}(a, outs-ire -wit:Ci �i�-'Jt.)t� 5C i1.i.i?1: ,ar:,pl,i--d in compliance with the C:1sll'll1 )oU . 4 INaSTALLAT.iOis A . Ducts, (:risings nn:.i li,inger, shall 1:1f= ins talled 3tra ighL,. l eve I ?n s)i a I I be free o. vibrat ion arid. rlC')1:aE?_ 't1r1c n 2� < rated capacity.t- : y: _•-::t is ope :ci � . B . R tid CsnI1 C.:t:..l.}t't;a b( t:weori d c t;eic)r and equipment. ih[i17 11<' Ri, rr' ::it..�: ;°]. �ey ' is w ... ti E" , �� .:1 n t c. J � .r}�.;�, a�.a.l. ri rr a,t h Miring construction all open enc] s of installed dactwor.;; :,hall � e; } eirt ( t.)vered to prevent dirt and debris r"r.;)m ent: rin.j ciuct:,s . Oren.inqs 31IF11.1. be cove'Qd 'r!?,_i1 p1,:1:st z.c ilel.r] in p1at✓c with curt tape . D. Pry. vid44 all. drops, I':i.-:,es o C7t.'fsets its required, due to C;1; rt..i<.'t:i . r}S . ');l�'11 Cii sa.it i +.rlc]l Uisfse .S, totc. , ':.'sC' she>';rrl arf l:rz!quired, aEal71'C7Vc(] shall 1;e th�-� Engl.rl.er . E . DiLta:�(:a1: . 3r:=:i cra.l.lcY' l ty��uts shown on the Mans have been the Layout: a1' thF ceiling grid to establi:5h the desired arrangement Of grilles and c].iLC1a e T�ri.or, t �, i1, ,t:i].li.nq any rit.tr..twork which eiould be; of fect:ed by the grid layout;, this Contractor, sh[i:.l vt;rity th( clr:ici ].a.yc�ut_ with t;lirs Architectural ceilinlg �F+I an .ind thr= clr(:u al ceiling l.r�;�utit: . E - .' The w orr ::ha 1,1. be co r.;r'di nated viirh t:ti�lt oC c�k hei , 1:5900 Y 4 1 t1 1 X00 a rZIanner that when the installation is complete, all it{ n s are pro).t<-:rly installed and are serviceable . =c;0 . 5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. :loxi bl ar;n >Yt.i ,n > shall be provided eihere . Faris or .:cir i�andl?rs cc:�n?::w` :r_ o dur-tF;orb: or ht.,wt mF.tal si.on of vibratican to B . shall zit_ tightly around ducts and Trans and SI'i%l t.w' securely bolted in p.li-.1ce . C . .Flexible connections shall be made of air- tight, waterproof, flame-•rr�,sistant. material. 3uitabl.e for the service required. D. Flexible connoctions shall be "Ventfab" by Vent:-(fabrics, inc . --)r approved F^ca�.lal . E . Joints flexible connecr,ion and duct or fan shall be sealed with ducat sealer. . F. Flexible duct connections shall. be a minimum of 4 " in length . G. Flexible wonntt ctions iri high pressure systems or �onn.c:ti.t.ns locrat--d outdoors shall be "Ventglas" by C" riri(e' C.,r,:7, a e not recUirrYd cat the Loil.C"Wi.nQ 1.0 cat arcs 1 ) Mict r:annec.tions to terminal, units . 900 . 6 DUCT INSUIL,ATTON A. The following ducts require internal. lining : 1) All Supply air ductwork, e::cc`pt as hereinafter 1J,,t.e(! . ?) All ret."urn ail- ducuiork . E . Insulation thickness shall. be as follows : 1 ) Ducts in air conditioned spaces (including return air plenums) shall. have l" liner. 15900 - 5 A A be Lined :'IL'.-h 1. , 5 1}-r . e n s L E r(31 iA ci u c i. liner ens Fi b r cj a s A-, ROE'I',EX 'ipr)-oved Thz3 ]—iner. :3hall meet. the J,j-fe Standards as established by NFPA 9 OA . The dilc- .liner shall have a sLirfac,-, roughriess that gives an Air. Fric"E.J"c-ri Corrf.-Iction Fac`,.Or not: (treater F N iAc liners ners t.h an Of 4000 g t1lat a greater Air o r I e 0 r i F aI C t 0 r :3 l'I�I I oversized ,1 C,C'0 r,-!I n:-) n e r I s I i� c),,-i C a e f- e f r t r g i.i e,n:-,/ 121 5 • 23 250, 54 50i; 68 B. j,he d1jC!: liner -,hall have --i K Eat:t_-or of . 26 at 75 degrees, F- rne,,-in C. Linf-.,r, shall have a L'larlle. cr and a smoke developed ratir.cj ' o as in accordance with ASTNI EX"i . D. Appl lic-1 i-on The duct linc-,r shall be cut to assure :illLlg insL,illed so the black surface " rie a'i r s L r C'('.)in. Duc, .Liner shall ter a P 1.) e d t-- sheet:� with a 1007-1 coverage of Berij,-,Ilnirl Fosrf--:!r,. (.)n horizc'mt-al runs, -jt:h' si7e-s over 1611 t:.ops ol i n j.( j. I I y re d w G r i p n a i "Li P i <7r1 ct 1IIaxiIIIUfil of 15 c e n t e en ri.ins, or welded pins and speod (--:Iip:7, shl:ill be CM z' maximum ad 15" c e -1 t:I rjt.c�,rs )n i I I wi,, h dinierisions over. 1.2 mechanical I a s t e n,e r,--; shall, st-._,rt- within 2" of leading edge of each s e ctic)n, and. wU hi n 3" of the leading edge � of -1 Ll cross Joints within t-h(.,! sc,-ctj.ori.3,. fl-astonc--r.,.; shall be f Imsh wi.th the liner S ur f a Clips shal I be, c1ra wn clown f1l.ish only arid ZInCl C USP the leading ri(D t rlt�t' a edge to jl-�jise t.ii All exposed edges and the I(--,adi.ng edge of all, cross jc)ints of che lirier shall be coated 15900 6 o 6 . FAI EXIBILE P(;(,NN'() DOC"Ll A Flexible round duct-,-iork may be used wherfz- sh.-)wn on t 1)e :J r,i,ji n s sI'&I-I.'I Wirr2mold WG or approv('-ad C . DU >l"',I I (.'Q f:a y p rll-e insu 1--h I .)/4 pound de,r, t y .j'I a:3-s blanket sheathe.-:1 w.,:"kh an exterior v a p r r-;.e r an'--1 1).al I mr��- t 1.ht. requirements o Lf LNFPA-9OA and shall. (-,'L I .Lsted as -1-lass I air duct in a---cDrdanice wlt-h S I-a n d a r d 181 . Air passage shall '--Onsi.;t Of a "'orrosion resist.--int- roin-Lorcing wire helix permanently bonded i.Cl a polyester film. The Victnar bar:i.er ':;hall :-: • t:k--nd alld b( Coule integral with vapor D. Ser-1-11r(-? CIUCt 't'.O and Mail'. CILICL takeoff with stainle,ss steel (.-)r nylon drawhands . Wrap vapor barrici. duct: before installing drawband . Use duct sealer if n(-:!cess,,-iry to obtain a leak tight connection. E. All duct snail be routied and supported in such a in'--Inner tilh Ir- -, ho duct is not flattoned in any area and !�Ihai-.3 Lull. cross sectional area is 4.;-, ' I " mack- in such a manner that the f"Id,i u S a the bend I-,o the insid,- ('Lamet.er of v.he duct is nor- les:3 than 1 . suppC)".!- f '-om ")viilding stru(:,turci with sheet providing sheet metal. saddle between the in:-;ulation to sti:,-ap, to prevent duct from saqqing a-nd from on lights, ceilings, etc*. F. Two-ply all aluminum flexiblf� duct by Clevaflex Type 12FV is :.�qually acceptable . 900 . 9 AIR DEV'rCES A. Mod-�l numbers for air dovices are given in 'the Grilles , Registers and Diffusers Schedule . The model numbers and manLlfcicLurers listed are- given to establish the desired style, quality, and perf orinanc(a . Products by the following 15900 i i t.JN 1j0 mc�:nuZ:_::1 :�':� those st? :�Cf:� dCt.� :r<� ,lil: complying 1J Yy't t: i o::.i , a r o egL)a11.V acceptable . 3), :'arn,t�o B Diffuser and return .air gri11e s' zc a given on t.he ' plans arf' c��'c,k si . s . Cyr. i I I e s:�ze s are core. sires . C . Air dF�vicrs shall tlrvey an NC rating i NC25 car less at. SpeC.I J, wcl t FX. 1 ; ("eilint.r mounted - Flat ',4hite 2) Opposed biadc, dampers - Black 37 Other as called for in the Schedule E . A sponge rubber gasket shall be pr<�vicied on bac side edge of all maunt.i.nr framer; so as to provide a snug tight fit to construc.:Lion surfaces . , F. Where round ducts•ro:.'k I'S used, provide a squar4S--!:o-r-und %adar- zDr with the it devi<�e . 900 . 10 ROUND DUCT F:,Br ICA'PTQ'N A. Round duct',rork shall. be s spiral scam type as p manufactured by United M--G?1.1, Semco, or approved equal . 6 , Ductork .and fit t ings -3hall be by the same w Manufact-.urer . C . Du,rtajork construction shall be suitable for static prt'sSUr :revitaUSly listed, and shall be fabricated from not less than they fol].owing gauges : Up through 14 " dia . 26 gauge 1.5" _ 26" 24 gauge g e 2.7" - 3611 22 gauge 37 " 50" 20 gauge 51'! - 60" 18 gauge D , Duct and fitting shall be fabricated from galvanized stet l rt1F�'t::L1C!r� f'15�P1 A-527 67 . , E . 'Transverse joints shall be of the beaded sleeve joint. . ( :ype r^.'.'- 1 ; 1:5 de rai:.ec3 in 3 Of t.h-a S'dACNA on, 1985 .Hr ?C Dur Construction Standard, Editi Joint s'r«a.l.i. be secured with :ghee* metal screws as desc`iibr�d in Fi.a . i_� . F. Longs tUdina1 scams shall. be the spiral seam 'type: ?-�' rd listed 1'1Cr:S ..i"'aJ. Cr._ ..Uhr': .(':1 3d ;JlCh C )I;tirtllolls ':Jelds, g,.luges : UP tjnru 6" DI' ,a . n C-IuCJe 18 a 51 ' and over 10" gauge E'3 . Ducr,emrk shall b� s� ppori.ed in crimp.lian,ce with SMACNA recornmenda ions . T Du,-t ;s(:!a 10 L', a lir':'viously df'sc`'_.r ed i(or rectangular duct—eiork shall C:i� �,ppl n 3 to trarisverse 10111ts (c,ouplings and fittings} . J. Duc,,- : shali be r::t:ernally insulated as c?escribed under Exterior Duct Insulation . 900 . 11 FIRE DAMPERS A. Furnish and irlst:all UL labeled fire dampers where shown on e drarri.ngs . 8 . FL--.2 t-he curtain type . Prefco Type ;. 8 or C; . _�:.. L:'D ...., also acceptable . . C . Dalilper_a in a hori-.ontal posit.i.o,n shall have stainless steel closure spring and blade lock. D. Damper installation shall be in compliance with NFPA I190A, UL requirement-s and manufacturer ' s installation .instructions . 'r: , h3ir1irtlum fire, damper r,id(.h shall be 1.2" . Provide duct transition if nece6srary to achieve the miniITluI17 width . Provide an across panel in the duct to allow resetting the damper . All dampers must be '.installed so the fusible link is accessible . F. Eire damE,er pressure drop shall not exceed the following : 15900 - 9 r 15"')00 fit. L�1�3? '1L30TION 1 . r tl 0 . 01 1500 0. 0151 2000 0 . 03 G. Equal products by the following manufdcturprs are r equally acceptable : 1 Pry,fco .. ) 2 ) Air Salance 3 ) Airsr_ream 900 . 12 GRAVITY DAMi ER..5 A, Gravity dampers -,hall be Ruskin or =approved equal, and shall oomph;' with the following : 1 ) Shall have a n�7t less then 3" , 14 gauge galvanized s:eel channel frame, welded and reinforced for rigidity . ' ? ) Aluiini Zum bl.a(Jes of maximum 6" rra.rit:h . 3 ) Adz u: tat}l.' ca';;'tt tir:�eight . 4 ) CaCIP11L:R! plated steel. Shafts . 5) Bla(-Je shafts shall operate in ball bearings . 6) Hardware shall be cadmium plated steel with brass pins . B . See plans Eor sizes-. 900 . 13 h1rJTORIZFDDA.MPERS A . Mbtorizod dampers shall be Ruskin Model CD50 or r Honeywell. Moduf•iow Series D642 through D645 . B . Dampers shall comply with the following : 1) Frame shall be constructed of 14 gauge steel i•!el.di I and galvanized, e ir.i i F, sli aL1 1.)e 'W' J . D. bronze o.11ite . 3) Hardware: shall be; zinc plated with brass pivots . 15900 - 10 e . t 5EC,l 1C)I A IR 0 1 3't'P.4r�U'I'S�fi lip 4 ! ldes , shill b 16 ciaul galvariied steel Press formed. C;se mu) t.iple sections >rc�z dampers river 3'6" wide x 72' high . 6) ". Damper seals shall. limit I akag ` to �. c> m per o<�t o �3re�� p�reSSu e > cli Lcrcntial .af {�II 1J.. C.'i 'ti�r1.�f3Ci ail, d :i 311. y �'`II : iznlpl?G . f)alnprs Mie, AIMC'A °i) Damper torque requirements shall nc, :tcc;ed 1 1/2 in-lbs per tt , i ) i�atn�a��r blr�cles shall not be greater : than 56"' long , q; goo ii J. 15*�) 10 CLEWNLNG AND ICEIS'TING SE'CTION 15911.0 -- STAR'?.' UP, CiLHANIEN,", AND Tj--'ST.INjO G E�i-IF,'R Al-, and Section A ID EIL,LCTRICAIJ CONDITIONS are part of lt. • is of Lheso 910 . 2 DE-SCRPT!(.DN ("IF WORK A. all labor, and related items he up, cic,,aning and testing Work in(3 j.,-,I--)t:,2(] ()II �,ind/ur spec.,ifted herein . bu!- not Ine limited to, and irw alled by All water' 12+_'I r i q -jerant: piping system 91.0 . 3 STA7T UP -Ifore ,Illy syst: or parts of t-,,Zsteriis are placed into t-hey shall be r.-ompletely installed, i'lushed and balanced with all r.)Peratil"g and ill5t:,.Illed, calibrated and lel*herl st-al,'* ali iw)t_ors shall Ix.. checked for amperage . a --; iiidicat:ed, immediat:.e corrective measures shall be Laken t:o prove-nt: dawage tr) the motor. Motor roi:ar.ions, and shall be checked . C. It: c,,Ihall be 1--hQ of t--his contractor to place (-IP,--2Cat.J.(Dn . Any equipmenr , pieces of damaged or not Operational shall. bl..l roplaced at: t.11is contract-or ' s expense . D� ThJj.i.; and operation of ol circuits C7011t.-L Is, an(I canti- ht,'f orc, Lle :i-: Ir-ft ujiatrellded, ai:•Z! opurat--ed, all, bearings shall. be lubr.ica,..ed, oil lt.--vels, checked and oil, added if necessary, Alld -111. c';ther 11'.quid level;; and pre.sm-ures (-.-heck-:-,.d and if air filters sylall be in P]. c A-iF not 11-)e at anytime w i 1-1 o-.I I i I t:. rs ji-i ,";yst-.ews with high (-:?fticiency filters, not: bj, ill plactl-', until clean--up is AND ccilinler-e and air IS 'IbouL to 'begin . High sl"a ]. ! Ibe i!, place during balance . filt.. I .. ing air Telllporai.­/ throwaway t.ilv--er ­'hall he installed until the high e.fficiency filn---r is in.stalled . G . For Cl(DSt:•d systet-ii using glycol , after the glycol loop has been cleaned, tested, and is r.-e-acly for final fill , this si , _ibcont: racr.or shall fj.*11.1. U.he sylst:eni with 50 o ethylene glycol (by weight ) The glyc'-)]. shall be glycol shall q,.i t:i 1 :)owtherm SR-1 . 9 10 . 4 PIPE SYSTFIMS A. Except: _­)r I-l'ic-'ist', pipe�-! hereinafter lj..;ued, all piping in.,-3tailed L­/ this Ccritrac-Lor sha-11' he pressure tested. B . The following pipes do iv_)L requir(i, a pressure. test : L) Air hand.l.ing. uni-, condcn.,,;ate drain . 2) Exis _Jng piping shall not.: pressure tested . The c-ollnecti'O'l C), 11�:!W *':0 pipes shall be examined T:)!"­)I)'_ItIy made LIP , C. Any item ahicli might: be damaged 1--,y the pressure test shall be, re.niov,�d the ,itiring the test , or isolated from the t stl: . D. Existing I.Aping sliall not be subjected to a pressure test4l A stop val,;e and uriion shall be installed at the connectio-n pipes and system testing shall incllid'-' the pip.ing to th�- Stop Ialve . During testing, disconlleCt: aricj. -.F i-i.ew pipf- zind the union to be t i.1,7 _ha'._ doc?F, not leak. to the E tested for accuracy, and c:I oze 4-3 p- ss3ihle to the low point of the sysLem to be c 11 e,c k,e d F. Test shall 1-,e, maintained for B hours . Initial and final test: pressu-ces, and ambient temperatures shall be recorded . Tt.-..st and ambient temperature shall -ilso be recoi:(Jc-.!d on 2 hol-ir intervals during the daytime work shiff : . All L(,�sts shall be witnessed and signed by the 0"Jiiel' ls n t e, i complete, Whin .3 r s i._", Le submitt-­eO, to this, Engineer. Any r.c!srs which are nor. witnessed be considered void and pipes bQ G. Na leakage, is permit.t:.ed . Lt­aks, shall be repaired and the I I e s r(2 t e s t.e d 1.5).1.0 - 2 AND Tt"'s'rII'jr'j H Any chan!.p d �t 1:L,,7. t- e,,", ri, S Le shall d. T . Tesr daL-i shall be r,-2%-_ordeJ on a stai,.dard form . ' s care sh=all bi-, taken that S d(",tD S' I 10 t: OCCIAI: due to incr:ease. of a-mb i;_-,n,_ i e mr.)(--ra t u ro . K. Tes!: Prt-!ssi;re and 'Ie' iium, lip t.:Z r�,�.I -ri r:)t. ;]a'�EyZ' Wa t: .I:__._._._..-.__.-------=-12 5 L. -a e L-at i i-) ni n' .`h+z11 1.)c! L ,It,d u-, in that C L E AwN i'N(I A, Adequate -prelcau'.-.ions shall be taken during storage and I installation to ken-p the insido of all pipes, valves and f it-t in�Z_s free from I.oreic;n materials . B . The in side of all pipes, valves , J.1n(I fittings shall be SMOOL11, ('I;_`EIn, from bl-istcr, laose mill scale, sand, dirty c,t:!-,er miat:erial . C. close"3' aaLer Sys-tems {heating hot water) Shall Z-'-'illr2d clean water and 1.1ushed. The systems Shall t'--i ire witl-.I) clean water to which 5 lbs . of Vulcan, or -_-qual , pre-clean per 100 gallons of water has be,_--2n --id:-led . ,system shall be allowed to '_eCir':,'Ulat7e far 8 hQUrS and tlien drained and flushed with clean water. Any components which might be damaged by the cleari,ar =hall be isol.at-o-d or removed from the system. Vulcan Laborat:,orie.,; , ar other: approved cleaner nianul_ac�.urer, :'hall the cleaning and shall submit ;:.o r.;-ie Own,,-�_r :i certificate of cornple: tion of clearaing , Aft--er cleaning, a.1.1 strainers shall be cleaned. Sy'suellis, %Ihic"' ("'nine-ct: tc; exi:_-3ting systems, shall have pumping installed, whicheve': I.s apl'--Iicablo Lr) allow cleaning of the system as describeil abolif- before it-, is connected to the existing D. This Contractor slial..L clean al.:l piping installed by him. This shall. izic.j.udc', if neces.sary, setting up temporary pumping t_o allow circulat ion of detergent and water . ').10 . 4 A. When t'urned over to the Owner, all systems shall ha';c' 'ber!n sIltllr!-,ed, t_ested, balanced and checked and 15910 - 3 SECTION 15910 S71'Al2'"-UP, CLt i'011NG AND T;✓STINC proven to be fully operational in every respect . B , When the system is turned over to the comer, all bearings shall have bef�n -ecently lubricated, nil levels checked and oil added i.f necessary, liquid Levels and pressures k:ed and corrected, flow rates checked and corrected, chec R.P. M. Is verified, belts tightened and aligned, and all controls and control sequenc_,es checked, verified operational and if necessary, corrected. r C _ r`1hc'n t1:- s f'Stem a Wi C.1,12:'nt�:i over t (7 i�h�t C)Wner, all. air filters rshall beg r z iaced with clean falters . 1 :.591Q 4 A . provis_.; n5 of Dl" vision 1i :3EN,ER,AL R,EQUIRELNIE T3, and - SWctir?n 1.5,010, ',ECHAN1CAL AND E;1w ErC"TP,ICAL GENERIAL COND?TZt)id5 a �' �3 da rt of tlli�; Ct?(�:ion of these S:)eCi..fications . nFSCRIPTION OF WORK .. M r VS rt c, f er 1 d r7 �te l A : Uri1.i,5C: +:t 1 1. l }(7 . , l;t Ctat- iii S iaii t C lt:of l a a.:aL"y C<;' _t°CTljJI i? '�he b al,ancint-1 'work inci_ . .�;_ and/or spec."Fied herein . bti, performed shall incl,udQ, bui: not be limit:•?d t:o' the fc:'Llowing items : 1.) Balance all air ystems . 2) Balance all water systems . 930 . 3 BALANCTI G A. The balance 'aork shall. bc� done by an AABC (Associated AJ'L :?•�1 .:, e ?3t.tr a'.1; or G: HEBB (,national Environmental E , i.Gr,..+. :gar :a.:} _� •.�i furl: A1.1 wnr.k shall be (.ion(--+ in cnmpli .ince with the standards of the c(--r.ti::ic rat- ion . FAII work shall also comply with ASHE;AE S _-Ian,d.t:d t w 1 - 1938 reC,ommenda t:l ons pertaining to meiasurement. , i.nstr.uments, testing, adjusting, and balancing ' B . Thy ha 1. fncr Ei..rm .�hfil..l have a minimum of 5 years in ba1.-_:M7_1-nCJ SI.miLar systems . C . Thi.:v C crnt -I -,-I r-or 'ih{a.1,1 ilSsl t 0 1 e baIant:e firm as o l 1 I} PrOVid tho t.est: rind balance firm with one copy cat: t:he HVA d approvod i ? : ra ac i i � egu.i.pmerv- sh(,.)p drawings . ' 2) Install all balancing.nc devices in a manner that will leave them accessible and t:ead.il.y ad j ii:jtable . 3} PIt(; ta,hrs. H'v'At F. :lua.pment atzd sys.trns into t !fll. crrjllti.11U'. r)Pel:at.inq the equipment : during I,he testing and balancincl . 15f930 1 r,n.Y 4JI'{1p�./nN,ni.. �J�. an.� system, wtlich does not . proper,iy function shall be replaced at this c:ontractor ' S k?X'D 11S Q . . D The test arld t7a1an<,e firm shall }r.nvic:le. the following 4ervcl.,, , . ._s� anC'! t~�1..ct:. `�? th4=' .3:.,1.' ::iis':.Y.i.i':'ut 1.C'.)t'I and e:f}la list . Qf de Systems r;o ':i.lCiliTl. i:l.' design conditions In acr_orl�anc f> ' 11 the fo� lowinq : a} Measure! and record the following initial and final fail data : fan total _:tatic pressure, PP,,%I, flail motor urT.'{'nt, total CFM1 +.lt �tcica a3.r CFM atwl return air CFM . ' b.} :`wake ad)ustmIl nts in arl Reif and damper settings, a3 required to obi:a'.n design tot. C iI, c :lt a e air ''ITH and ret turn air C:Ci4 - c) t!r?ra ure Ind adjust all brancii ducts to obtain design d) [Aeasure and .adjust all outlets (or inlets) to obtain. design CFM. e) Adjust o,,.itlet deflection vanes to eliminate Ir<af c l:.1 ?-t.r.<::.:. 1 L (--cmpl(,te the balancing ntractor hh:i11. rev lsit erich room, open the rloars anC� .,.ill t h�� assi.a ela ' anco of smoke verify .ct..ive to the su::rounding ar-F-,a Balance r.ep(. shall indicate if: room is positive, nclgacive, or ' !Aeutra.l . E. 'rest land t: Alan.':l+ i:yd1:0ni.t: S713tOM to within 10% of design CCnC:1i.L" 1.OIlS .L:1 t''C :?::CirIT10E? ,wit.:h the 'folloWlnC�: 1) Heasure, a!'', t :�].linra. i.n.itial and t: 1, c>rr final. pump data : :ahutof:f h.tfari, operating head, motor cua:rent anc:i . t:otal GPM . z) Adjiirit the pump dic;charye balancing valve as required to obtain. design GPM. 3) Measure and adj ;.tst flow through all elements to .. obtain the rcsagl GPM . 159 3 0 - r ION I ?':J . � ) ;Y.'f: .:.:... l)�� E:d,''..�i:; 1 [t'3 �a . . �? ri `: }'li, 1.�'�[:;e1.iS 1:.ii'1t3S t:0 `t" '. s ,.,. .1 ? 'ci ,'.' I:llrQ .,`.:?.:i.., i.,a:. ., 4;ii+2n .f:h contr01 11. v 1a to:i-, r c s i t w o n . (.�0 r w. l.em a[)d IIa (3 ... t 11 L(3 ` f? s=_, z t1 Ki C,',,,:1 r t.!t.t r1 C e W.i.i .0o p.! at z ``r) ,�itv1, he :ontractoi , chick - e v i.c es 2 i control ,5 y-z>r.om fqr f[anCtLO11 ;1 a1. ib ,clf , (", •t r,.a , . ` T r a nd L,V1 1' C ,�'1 .. ii, 1. °o a.I.«:,. ','.rl 1,.'S, boil rs, .1 ' +:?':11 ,In this equipment, .and� r maxiniuttl }..cad :,r Conditions [ii..).•:l i..Q ma:.1..Rltii1 1 oa'd . G. Motor r otU at:.ion and ,>pe .d shall be chf=;(--lod and recorded for. al.1 i1Ctt r)I' . ' }l . Prepare and ^aLl ttTl t" .. i')1" c..,opies .`t .' he cnrtif l -d tort: and bCalarl` Ii:r ' itit'I.:r.1.rts :,h:11.1 1)e s1.rneci by the St2[Jerv.i.::,;} viii t7i",:", DJ'tit(`i'.{ thc' WorP 1 . P:: +'J1C:IE:: ,'t:. t?:. 11 rJi.iJ tc►:i .`•r f;+i :an C,: y ear .during which t:1f[tt? 1CiC! wi+w}Jl ' 1. i=`i i't.l;�t!(1t C)t will. brr. ,m-I,-Ie to achieve J . 1'rl�� t.p. t r1nC1 LJ:1ir.1nC'f t,J.rm shall provide all necessary L'f st ins r n1: , . These: a,nstrtaments shall be ur.,.t' e I v cal.i.b::-)t:od and in rlt.7od working or-de : . K. It i:_ i.nt_tart,dc�r-i ti; t:, r.ol:,er. f:1c��'1 l:;(; pcnven in both "~ '� �)l).�.).t:.1,c)II:, or Ea.l.teT'n�lte fIOW r)fi�1 ': "-C%I:;� [:;t:' Ltl1!'!.i.l<dt:.�a li,::.).it: 101113 C'.lrt. fully observed t:C, i.'n'su.?:e . that: 1",c, ,.')V,-I-Ifx-id1 r)q t7r . oI-,h f-2r objec:i:io nab 1e Shotild' any Ot)')f:t;:ti.Unable ("ondj,t:Lnrl.i '::;1' '.t1J:, i ho F`tn l i nc!('r ,hc-ill b(,2 notified as t:C) the-3 +.told: t 1.C3 t'1 art l its ,"Fluso . 1 IJ. Make r,:h,_1nge,::c in puL.lc:'y.a, t.�f,.Lts, t1rive, etc. , as I:raCjl)l.r�'t1 t7 C;ijtli.n f hfy �zi.r nr. w,-iter balance . , These f::hangw:7 ::,hral1. be. vi,1(- at:. no wtdl:l.,t,t;.:).onal cost_ . ' M. If Cara/ rttt:::cIanic�.11 e,:4uipmenr; or .vstf?I ,: are found. to perr,>rmj1'.q ti n)F,a C:3.:.tf 4 ci,<ar,•i.i.y anti cannot b }).r s C n i_i:ia 't'.!:};: t::libmlit:, a Leport, indicat ,i.rYy vec, artunf.ndi;ri r f)L I:f3't t:?v measures 15930 3 tl . �rI h�an balancing is complete; Final position of all balancing devic es shall be permanently marked with paint or similar means . 0. Patch holes made .ir; insulation, ductwork, etc. , which have been ,.ut or drills:Cd for . tryst purposes . Holes shall c,, c atche i in a manner recommended by the or.'c�in ir;st,;l_=r . ' P . In all r�rr.c,del d Garecas , trho balance firm shall, before any reinod,-.I inq begins, measure and record existing wat,ar and air_ flows to confirm that the new e flow rates shoes on the plans can be obtained. Remodeling war. shali not begin until the data . has beer. re : r„rred by th a Gnc�i.neer . When t'he abov reading Ir.e tar.er:, supply air temperature Shall �U r< corded along with date and outside: temperature . , Balancing firm shall rebalance existing areas as required to insure proper flows to both existing and remodeled areas . This applies to both air and hydronic systems . 4` _ SI"C"'TON 5960 CU, SECTION 15960 - TEMPEPiNTUPE CONTROL 960 . 1 TEMPERATURE CONTROL A, This and install a complete oL c(.-)ntrols . This system shall thermc-)st:at:s , control ev req,,. red to accomplish t.-.he �;i-,aj! be pleiu,,ai rated cable or in conduit and -,-�,hall r'r--auirr�inenus of the latest edition of the �N E C . C. The existing building temperature control system is a 'Hone-vwelll system izisua'lle-1 in 1982 . D . ThermostaLs for '-tll Lerminal and fan powered rerminal unit., shall bca analog electronic, ::;land alone typ? 'FIIU) shall be controlled by a Kreuter, mocks! OCTE-1103 or approved equal . 2) Terminal Ur,-j.L:7 (TO) :=;hall }De controlled by a Kreuter, r(jodol itICTE'-1001 or approved equal. 3 ) Replacement for existing terminal unit t:herm.osLat-.s h(-: a TtlmpinasLer model 4ES-11 or approved :qi.,al . The.se t1hermostats" are electric I:Vnt� E' . Se 1) Sequenc(-, I-or fan powered variable air volume terminal parallel flow type . a) Occt.tpied Cycle As the spact, temperature rises above the cooling set-point, then terminal. unit shall Madlilate to itl,, maximum CFM. As the space temperature falls below cooling setpoint, the r-erminal unit: shall modulate to its minimum cooling CIPM . Upon a continued drop in t--emperattAre and/or unit CFM, the parallel fan 15960-1 S F-T 1`1 N I S 9 6 0 , TEMPERATURE CONTROL will be energized . Upon a further decrease in space, temperature., thz., terminal unit will -i t e minimum CFM. The heating modul, to heating miz wi I I then be staged an as follows : P. ional Hot W -aer Be-lot q heating Set--poin,,-., modulate the hot. water valve as required to maintain the active heating S b) Unoccupied Cycle During the i.inoccupied cycle , the air valve on terminal.l unit z,-hall drive closed. The '-an and heat shall cycle to maintain a, reduced space temperature . -it:`ion, air terminal units (TU) 2 Seal" -nco new and Oc-uoic�d and Unoccupied Cycle As the space temperature rises above the cooling setpoint, the terminal unit shall modulate to its maximum CFM. As the space temperature ffalls below cooling setpoint , the t-.er-minal unit shat' modLilate t:o, its minimum cooling CFM. to-:,m) rises, above the cooling se t--p("A III: , t:.e�rminal unit ,:,,hall modulate to its As Lhe space temperature falls coming setpoint, the, terminal unit shall Modulat-,,:-, to its minimum cooling Cm. INDEX ELECTRICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16010-1 - 6 15010 GENERAL PROVISIONS c,IUDJS . . 16110 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16110-1 8 16120 CONDUCTORS . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16120-1 _ 16143 WIRING DEVICES 16143-1 3 16452 GROUNDING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16452-1 - 2 16470 PANELBOARDS AND SAFETY SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . 16470-1 - 6 ' 16477 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16477-1 _ 2 16480 MOTORS AND MO'T'OR CONTROLS 16480-1 4 16500 LIGHTING FIXTURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16500-1 - 3 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16721-1 - 12 16741 TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEMS 16741-1 :-ENEPAT- A Applicable previsions of --he General Condition- , Supple.-Ilent,-.1r, General (7or.d.it:ions , and Mechanical and Elt'ctricdl. General Conditions Section 15000 shall. g •vern work performed under this s Q ct.i c)n . B This section supplemenzs all sections of this Division and. shall. Dpply to all phases of work hereinaft:er specified, shown on the- drawi. ngs, or requir,:id to provide a complete installation of electrical systems . 1 ) WORK 1NCLUCED. D.,,rnish all labor, material, SF!fvices and skilled supervision necessary or the construction, erection, iris tallation, connections, testing, and adjustment of all. circuits and electrical. equipmenll.-t, specified herein, or sho,.•in or noted on V..ho- drawings, and its delivery to the Owner cornpl��I-e in all respects ready for use . 2) COORDII• ATION OIF WORK . Plan all work so that it proceeds ,,iith a minimum of interference with other trades . Inform all parties concerned of openings required for equipment or conduit ri�quired in th,� buil.ding construction for Electrical work, and provide all special frames, sleeves and anchor bolts as required . Coordinate the Electrical work, with the Mechanical i ns t a 11 a t-i on . The Electrical contractor shall review the Mechanical drawings and specifications for coordination of work . Work lines and establi.,.3hed heights shall be in strict accordance with architectural drawings and speci f ica t ions insofar as these drawings and :3peciftcations extend . Verify -311 dimensions shown and establish all Qlevitions and detailed dimensions not: shown . Lay Our. and coordinate all work well enough in advance to avoid conflicts or interferences with other work in progress so that in care of intr:,•rference the Electrical layout may be altered to suit the conditions prior to the installation of any work and without additional cost to the Ownor . Conflicts arising from lack of coordination shall be this contractor ' s responsibility . 16010-1 St C:'Iri0N 1.x010 GENERAL PROVISIONS 3) EQUIPMENT AND F.IXTURES . Equipment and fixtures shall be connected providing circuit continuity in accordance with applicable cosies, whether or not each piece of conductor, conduit, or protective device is shown bee Lw-e?n such items of equipment or and t-he point: of circuit origin . 4 ) NEW EQUIPMENT AND MA'T'ERIALS . Unless otherwise spe�: .i.zieci, (?gl1J.r)Iil�nt and Itir."Sty ri a l.s of r_hc same type or classificcat.ion, and used for the same purpose, shall bFw products of the same manuf.3Cturer . Use only new, t.irrwc�at leered, and unused material. , k�xcept as spec-i. ficall..y rioted. Z . EXECUTION OF' THE WORK 1 A. Install equipment and materials in a neat and workmanlike manner and align, level, and adjust for satisfactory operation . Install euuipment- so that ail parts are easily access.i.:b.le for inspection, operation, maintenance and repair . B. Provide the design, Eabr.icat ion, and erection of supplementary structural framing required for attachment of hangers or other devices supporting electrical. equipment . 1 ) Provide me.,mbers welded to stru(:t:.ural members equal to the specification for the main structural. member . Provide "simple beam" type framing with F---rid connections welded or bolted for shear: loads . Use cant.il :ver.s only when detailed or specifically approved by Engineer . The Engineer ' s appr.oval l.s i:equ.ired for location of supplementary framing . 2 ) Design framing member.; for their actua.l loads, 1 with allowable stresses specified by •RISC, Without e-COSSIVC! deflection and with consideration for rigidity under vibrati.on,, in , accordance with standard structural practices . 3) When supplementary framing is indicated, verify that dimensions are suitable for the equipment- furnished. Provide additional strength when equipment furnished is heavier than that ' Specified . 16010-? SECTION 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS C . OUTLET LOCATION 1) POSITION OF OUTLETS . Center all outlets with regard to paneling, furring and trim. ti Symmetrically arrange outlets in the room. Satisfactorily correct outlets improperly located or installed . Repair or replace damaged finishes . Set outlets plumb and extend to the finished surface of the wall, ceiling, or floor without projecting beyond same . Install symmetrically all receptacles, switches , and outlets shown on the wood trim, or cases, and where necessary set the long dimension of the plate horizontal, or ganged in t,.:indem. 2) MOUNTING HEIGHTS, to center of box above finished floor, shall be as follows unless otherwise shown or indicated. Other mounting heights are indicated on the drawings by detail or by a plus dimension shown adjacent to the symbol : Switches 48 inches Convenience outlets and similar devices 18 inches Convenience outlets in mechanical rooms 48 inches Motor controllers and disconnect switches 60 inches to top Parielboards 72 inches to top Exterior WP convenience outlets 24 inches above grade Telephone outlets 18 inches Wall telephone outlets 48 inches Ciro, alarm manual station 48 inches Fire alarm chime, bell., and flasher 80 inches 3 . SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. SEAL EQUIPMENT OR COMPONENTS EXPOSED to the weather and make watertight and insect-proof . Protect equipment outlets and conduit openings with temporary plugs or caps at all times that wor_k. is not in progress . B. NAMEPLATES 16010-3 SECTION .i6r:+10 GENERA I, i':l;UV"1S'I.0NS 1) Engraved mic,ar.tea nameplates shall he provided for all Panelboards, Saf >ty Switche3, and individual Motor Control ecru pmerit . The nameplate shall include the equipment nrarno/number, voltage, amperes and the feeder or the equipment that it feeds . The r,am«:,p].ar a ha].�i_-��hol.t:e_d orr rDQD-civet:A, not�c;l+.ir-_cd ,,nom, `I'ho nameplates for pane board.5 shall be mount-ed on rhk, front: covea r �l Pro,;.'A' "Dymo Tape! " identif:ica1c.i"!n for all equipment not'. cov,_�riid in 1) above, which sha11. include., but: ri(:)t be ',irnitteC t.7 : Fire Alarm l'r3ne1S . C . SHOP DRAWINGS shall. ho. in accordance with the Mechanical and c;lec:tri,za1 Conditions sections and shall include shop drawings for: Panelboards and Safety Switches Wiring Devices Lighting Fixtures Fire Alarm System Motor. Control Equipment Provide, as part. of the shop drawing submittal, system wiring diagr.airks for this installation for : Fire Alarm Systems . Partial or standard wiring diagrams wi 11 not be accept able. The wiring diagrams shall be i,.-'r th<: <_,ompleLe :i nstG3.1 ied system. D. RUST PREVENTION . Provide hot clip galvanized COmpOnnn':S for t:errou:; rTicltcO-r.ials 'xposed to the weather . E. TESTS . Provide, the tests gar, outlined hereinafter and other tests nec.essar.y i:o e.st:ab.li.sh the adequacy, qualify, :ic�ifety, (-unipleued star.us and suitable operation of each sys,.em. 1 ) GROUND ROD TEST. Trltmediate.ly after .installation, test driven grounds sand count-erposes with a Ground Resistance Direct--Reading Single-Test Megger, utilizing the AC Fall.-of-Potential Method and two reference electrodes five~ ( 5) ft,et deep . Disconnect the ground rod to be tested from other ground systerr.s at the time of t,�st.i.ng. The , ground resistance tor: the electrical service shall be 15 c;hms or Less . Submit the results, 16010-4 clf;f�.11I, r r..)'I i ION date of test, and soil to the Engineer in writLng, ?.nimedi ta1y after testing . 2) This subcontrac:toir shrill. balance phase currents of all distri.but..Lon wi.thin plus or minus 10 percent variation bet'wer n average phase current and measured individual phase, currents . 3) 'Written test record shall be supplied to the Owner to show with governing codes Lar : a) Eire Alarm b) Grounding t.:'�rtt inttity < FINAL CORRECTIONS' c.o rrect promptly any failure or defects revealed l-ly these tests as determined by the. Engineer. . Peconduct tests on these corrected items a:s d.irec:tecl by the Engineer . E. Concrete wort: shal..l ,c2 as sp-ac.i Pied within the Mechanical, I'lumb.i.na, -and F Lect r.i c.al General Conditions, except the concrete fixture bases and the concrete envelopes f()r c_oncluit: shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor . 4 . ALTERATIONS A. The Owner_ intends to make continued use of existing faciIj.ti. S . Utilities and s'?rvices to existing facilities shall. not by interrupted without the Owner ' s approval. CIS to the time and duration . The Owner will contirtic., to occupy t-he existing facilities throughout: the construct- ion operation., and the Electrical Contract-or shall so organize his work as to cause a m.in.imurn of- tnt-erCcrence with the normal routine activi.tic s of the facilities . All interrupt--ions .sh,il. l br schodulC2d at the convenience of the Owner. . B . The E;lecr.r.ical. Contractor shall. remove, cap and/or relocate equipment, outlets , conduit, wire, etc . , as showIi and specified on drawings, arid as may become necessary becau.sc� of (2xi .;t:ing field condi.tions . It shall be the responr; ib.ility of the Electrical Contractor to visibly examine all existing walls designated for removal, to (Jeterrni.ne the conduit and the wiring that will require capping and/or ,removal, whether or not such conditions are indicated on the 1.6010-5 0 i�. GENERAL PROVISIONS drawings . C. All lighting f.i::tures, switchOS , receptacles , clocks, tel��phonp a�Itlots, intercom atati.ons, nurse call. systems, <loac2 lights, speakers, fire alarm outlets, special ,outlotts, etc . , which are shown with dotted line symbols on the domolition plans shall be removed c+nc1 the r;o.lr,c �a�3tchc r1 .anlrwss otherwise noted . D. Al.l concealed conduit [or ._ar.c .I.I.,..; which are partially or colnplF-.eIy abandoned may remain in place . Expowced c:onduir. for abandnned circuits shall bt? refRC7V''d Unless otherwise n0'i..t'd— E . Wiring f(:)r exis1,.1ng C:1rC:uit: ,,Ih:4Ch MUSt be re-routed, or which are partially abandoned, shall be reconnected --o serve the reimai.n.in-; outlets on the circuit . F. All wiring for a circuit which is to be abandoned shall be removed back to the panel. which supplied the circuit . G . The Electrical Contractor shal.l, coordinate with the owner and shall. turn over to t.,h owne:r. all removed electrical equipment that the owner. designates . All other equipment that is removed shall become the property of the Electrical Contractol. and shall be removed from the job site , , a v 16010-C� I:Ti';^1 1Q, Ii0 PACl•;WAYS AND FITTINGS 11 GENERAL, A. This section .includes s race-ways and fittings complete . 2 . MATERIALS A. RACEWAYS . All racoways shall be new and shall bear t.h U . L . .4,ab e 1. . I ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING . Provide cold rolled welded steel conduit, galvanized on both the out-side and inside with coated interior. All connectors and r_•ouplings shall be steel alloy, rai.nt:ight and concrete tight . Setscrew connectors al-.ci couplings are approved for indoor expoF,ed or concealed (bat not encased in concrete or masonry) worF only . Gland compression connectors acid couplings are approved for all locat.ions . Indenter type connectors and couplings are: riot approved and shall not be used. Connc!ctor.s up t_o and including size 1-1/2" shall be with insulatedi throat . All. connectors shall be terminated with a bonding type locknut and for conduit_ sizes 2" and larger, a plastic insulated bushing . 'Chre:aded steel_ insulated grounding bushings having so.lderless lugs shall be used where requ.i.rod . 2 ) FLEXIBLE METALLIC: CONDUIT . Provide flexible conduits, ;zinc-coateyd steel, single strip type, UL listed . Usca' Arnerican Brass "Seal.tite" flc.,f.i,ble, I. i..clu.i d-t:.i.ght: conduit in damp or wet locar.ions . 3) SURFACE ME TAL RACEWAYS , Provide a two-piece steel r,acew.ay with removable covers at sizes indicatE!d on the* drawings, complete with fittings and all necesr;ary components for a complete installation . it ) RIGID PVC CONDUIT . Provide heavy wall polyvinyl chloride conduit, Carlon Type 40 (NEMA EPC-•40-1?VC, Type IT. !l:II ) Conduit shall conform to all provisions of Article 347 of the National Electrical. Code . 5) WIREWAY (,surface trough) shall. be constructed of code gauge and shall bca in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL-070 for 16110--1 EC;T 10 1 r; '10 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS Wireways, Auxi.liar.y Gutters and Associated Fittings . Wir.eway shall be lay-in type (no cross bars or straps ) with hinged cover . Indoor wir.eway shall. be constructed with knockouts . Outdoor wireway shall be raintight with no knockouts . All sheet metal parts shall be coated with a rust-inhibiting primer and a gray baked enamel finish . All. hardware shall be plated to prevent corrosion . Wireway shall. be of standard dimensions and sized in accordance, with the National. Electrical. :.'ode for the particular installation . Wi. reway shall b ,, Square D "SQUAP.E-DUC'i" _�r approved equal. . B . OUTLET BOXES, PULL BORE- S AND CO NDU IT FITTINGS . r, Provide outlet boxes, pull boxes, and conduit fittings as described below . Catalog numbers shown are those of Appleton El.ectr..ic. Company. Steel City, National Electric Products Corp . , and Raco are equally acceptable . 1) OUTLET BOXES Lighting Boxes (concealed) - No . 40-3/4 Lighting Boxes (concrete) - No. OCR Series Lighting Boxes (exposed) - No. IS-3/4 or 40-3/4 � .. Switch, Receptacle, Telephone, and Junction Boxes ( flush) - No, 45-3/4 or No. 225 where separate extension or plaster ring cannot be used . Switch, Receptacle-, Telephone, and Junction Boxes (exposed) - FS Series Switch and Telephone Boxes (concealed in narrow mullions) - Bell F,iectri.c Co. No. 447, 448 , or 449 . Weatherproof or Exterior. Boxes - FS Series with cast cover and neoprene gasket . Where space is limited, No. 4CS-3/4 handy boxes may be used for a switch, receptacle, telephone or dictation outlet With specific approval only. Pr.ov.ide extension and plaster rings as required. Size outlet boxes in accordance with the allowable fill. permitted by the National 1.611.0-2 RACEWAYS iND FITTINGS El.ect:r:Lcal Code . 2 ) PULL BOXES . Provide c ode gauge galvanized sheet metal pull boxes sized as per the National Electrical Code or as shown an the drawings , Provide a removable cover an the largest access side of the box unless otherwise; detailed . Where ' cast boxes are spec:ifiod, provide conduit et,trances threaded hubs , Provide stainless sthee� screws i.n all (.-'.x. ericr Locations and in wet or (Jamp {) CONDUIT FITINI GS . Couplings (EINIT) Sgar3.es 95T gland compression (all locations) - Serif-,,s TWC ;yet sc=rew ( indoor only but not encased in concrete or masonry) Connectors (E.MT) - . arias 8?�T 1-I1and compression (all locations) Series TW set screw ( indoor only - but not encased in concrete or masonry) Insulating BUShings (1- 1/4 inch rigid conduit and larger) - Series BBU Straiythtt ?cox Connectors ( flexible conduit) - Series 726 9V ?angle I3��:: onn(�ctcrs ( f le::ib.Le ccanduit) - Series 733 2V Sealing Gland Assembly - OZ, Type FSK f xp;ansiori Joints - OZ, Type AX or TX with bonding jumpers and Clamps . Expansion and Deflection Fittings - 02, Type DX Cast Metal Conduit Fittings - Crouse-Hinds, Condulets farm 7 with wedge nut cover. 3 . EXECUTION A. RACEWAYS 16110-3 RACEIWAY,) AND 1.-IsfZall 311 wiring, includin(:j cel.,---phc'ne, low voltage, Qtc . , in ineLal raceways . Insta -iLo -�x 11. raceway,.3 conce, d , c cept in mechanical equipment rooms or wher(., tndicated on the plans . 3) TYPES A Conduits located exposed, w:oncealed inside shafts, in concre :e -incoc" C J'ad above ceiiinl;js , and in furre-d walls b,--, EXT . C C s 71 L p pt-Ovect for these ca t ion:; b) 111diVi(R11L UI AJ[:),, D d ed -)rizont--a y --n lbox,:s I t a!nin g wiring clevices (as df) IL'in,.:!d i.n :,,p,-:(::J. ficat.ion section ",I I R L NG DE".11 C E-S iri I'u r red a-- Its s ha I I be i t h o r EMT or rnotalltc !-'I.(i2.:-:ib I c-! conduit at t.he Conn ra c. - n T ho maximum length of rnetallic condu,l.L between wiring devices tri tarred Walls shall. be ten ( 10) f7, Ail. - thcr hriz ontal conduic in furred walls shall btu? C:XT -,xcept: as Jiste.d below. Except ions to a ) and L)) above are : c) Sle'eves, in :'labs on grade, and Conduits for feeders over 600 volts shall. be f�Rc . %i) r,onduits i-lor :-connection (maximum length of s i -x vibrat�ing equipment (motors, f�tr and for heat loops to light: fixt.ur--2s ( f—ofn jU'rlCt:iOn boxes above ,, thorn) shall be mc_talli.c -I .L(---,ibIe conduit . h o r - shall be used in damp sealtitf w a t .1.)roo 1) or wet- locat:ions . e, Conduits below grade in direct cont,'.ict- with the (>ar.th shall be schedule 40 PVC or. PVC rJqid steel conduit . `These raceways shall encased in 3 inches of concret.c..? where indicated . All PVC conduits located below paved areas shall be encased in -I c 3 inches of c ol I,r� �t( f) Cable t- •ay, wiremold, plugniold, wireways, and a other raceways shall be located where shown 161,10-4 RACEWAYS NMI) FITTIING:, on the Plano . 4 ) Any type of conduit: or raceway that is s p e c i f i c all V la b c_,le d (-,n r.h c rl a ns shell a ke pre cedonce over t:ho spec fi ca t- ion , Th e Eli)ct:ric-al Conn r,;.i(_tor must obtai.n writt:en permission from the Enginer!r for any other lev".'at" an frr)[11 thf.-' ,ai.J1,I 1.-1 ;.011 Or UU11. boxc!:'; . Enter and eLectrical -on L J.nL1j,t-'j I' III Ch}? r)L Vf s e r v e t;0 (D u t: I e t:S . j -)J. hi:;,hJTiCi on Lerminals j o, r SIZE . Usr:., t-vo,,: "han 1/2-inch, u ni es,s otherwise RACEWAYS EXPOSED. Rkin r.)xv)o.,3od raceways in straight. lines at right angl(-.,s or parallel with walls, beams or COAAMins . 8) RACE,,JAYS itl 111-AIN (NON-REINFORCED) CONCRETE . Do not place raceways in plain, concrete, such as cem(,•rit: toppings on sLruct.ural floors, without sp,_,c ,_al approval . Install, hoviever, in nat-reinforcQd concrete headers provided for their installation - 9) RACE14AYSS IN 'FURRED SPACES . In.st-all raceways in acc(-)I:dancf� with Lhf� of the National r l:.o t:.ilt t.f i.li.ng e c r i C a I Cod, . Da not anc.hor or strap conduits furring channels or attach to furred ceiling hanger. wire°i 1,jitlhout' the1 Engineer ' s approval . 10) S'T'RAPS AND HANGERS . Conduit shall be, supported from building structure on approved types of qal.vanized brackets, ceiling trape',e or pipe straps, or hangers secured by means" of toggle boLu-s on hollow Ma.,;onry, or expansion bolts in ', concrete or brick; or machine screws on metal surfaces; or .,iood screws on wood construction . COndUitS Shall be attached to the hanging systems by fittincjs equal to thosrz� inanuff-actured by, Caddy Fasteners . Nails shall not: be t,is)ed as a means of fastening boxeq or conduits . Perforated flat 16ilo-5 PACEWAY:, s tee ,it raps, j h a I I no 1- 1-•? t,, :5upport:irl"., c 0 Ild u I.t. s,hil I 1.1c')t- 2,11r.)P0 r"k.Od from rluctwoz:k or d 1.1 L w r k u p p 0 All conduit, shall lay prop(.)j:ly ord.--r de. er any ad dy C, oi- Ch- t-01, G I i.p,s ITI a Y C)! "A 1.,1 suspended ceil nq wi.rt- hang-.-:rs, fc)r 1/2" and 3/4 " conduiL, 14-th not moi- AND a ITS A. I n t S s care, vn -Mill "it ail 11J1.th a ;n..ni.mum oL two or a'pprcvodl :V-�-e,A , p lastic fibe-r bushing formin(j an Light bond with 't)(Jx . Previd-? loclknut--s bath inside and 11J. I t of tjjt, t:e) which the conduit IL <ltt. achctd U,,,3e r,i n compression type f t j.r i a s o r r i c,a tin I-a JI. c t u 1)1 n(j systems and use at le lst- orie locknut on the ,inside -)f (-,!rt,.ry . P r C,v i d e r--)1.111 cl i n nuts clr .,ihere required i.n S t:i. n C;R 13 M F)I N G ",Y-S)TE M - b) PIC COINDUU!"1' - ..-I . wat-7rtJ ,1-1ht: ;.:ill couplings cj 11(_j (_.c,n c t,c) ::3 ill conclui.- runs . Utilize ,.?,Ojvf rjt (::r?jrjerjt )01 : -S rD f type approved by th,e manuf,-,icturer for all couplings and s . Provick! idapters and iocknUtS ;'It:ta�-hcd to metal junctl-ion i.)OV ....— f 1.2 ) B El N D S) . 0116 C.OndUit in -:i bank of 11 a q( c t i o n I L bends r I shall b c! c,--)n c r i I- r-i c . Conduit bends shall. not be less t:hatn -,;randard radius, unless otherwise A n d ic:a t(:,d ccnduit: for powr feeders over 000 vni,ts and for telc!phone feeders ,3hali be long radius 13) SEALING OF' All openim.-Is and sleeves throl,igh which :, cc),iduit pass(�s in walls•, floors , and ceilingn shall be properly sealed after the conduil- is t-() pre-vew- transmission or leakage of lixjuLds, f.moke, and sound . Openinqs in rated walls oi- floors shall be sealed 1.611.0-6 RAC'EtdA'i S A,1D t ITT Ii'G';3 with minerr�al wool. tlilghtl.y packed .ir.�: and the conduit in the opening, after which bath sides of the opening shall be caulked with a .resilient non-har.denin.:i c cfl:lr:ing (U . S .G . Acoustical Sealant , Tremcwo, Specified Technologies, Inc . , or t r--,,n iuit passing through a fire ratQd acoustical t:..lc ceiling shall be seal.e'd with wool i:?.Ciht:l f packed around the conduit in this capening, maintaining the fire rating of the ing . conduit passing through C'C.fa+ rate +:.,r:+cr C'onst.ruct.ion :�r sleeves shall be tightly pa c-ked around t.hry con+:lu.i' in t.tl'_ opening, malnl--aini.ng the fire of till C'Glling . The u S e o;: chase Foam, "Fire-Seal" as manufactured by (�" I�G'(:in�?y, +�r•yt'O-Siaa.e.lci++ as manufactured by as RIInUfactured by Specified Technologies, Inc . , is approved for conduit pass.i.ng through fire rated floors and 14 ) THREADS . ClQan all thr.erads of rigid conduit . Coat all male threads of all steel conduit i.nst.alled underground or in or under concrete slabs with Lef.l.on immediately before bring coupled t_(DgQt_her. . 15) RUtdNNING `IHREIM . Us-> "E.ri.c:kson" type couplings in l. i 'u of running !-,hreads . 16) Pr�0'ru..'r.I.Oi) . C:rap r�ac:Q,,q�ays st.ubb+�d up, including C.h a+'' a.n c::ahiriet:.:.i, MITI E'L'1] ciL y upon their i.nst.'a1.lation . `t'ha use off paper or rag wads will not h, pering.t,L-,,L 17) EXPANSION JO TNTS . Provide raceways crossing expansion joints eiith Type AJ bonding jumper for rigid condu t tt, anc.i Type `I'J bonding jumper for electric metal.l.i.c_ tubing . Where differential. .sett.lement may occur, use deflection fittings . 1.8) GE ERAL LOCATION REQUIREMENTS . All. raceway runs shown are diagrammatic . Determine exact locations in the field except where otherwise noted or where dimensions are specified' on the drawings . Condu.i.t:; shall not run within 6 inches of pipes carrying hot, liquids, steam, or gases . 19) All empty conduits shall be provided with a pull. 161. 10-7 SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS AND rITTINOS wire . B . OUTLET BOXES AND PULh BOXES 1 ) Rigidly mount all boxes and provide with suitable screw fastened covers . Plug open knock-outs or holes in boxes with suitable blanking devices . - 2 Install ull boxes in locations that will be P accessible after completion, of the building or as shown on the drawings . 3) The Electrical Contractor shall. furnish and install pull boxes, whom veer necessary in order that a run of conduit between outlet and outlet, between fitting and fitting, or between outlet and fitting shall. not contain more than the equivalent of three quarter bends (270 degrees total) . 4 ) Label the covers of all boxes with a permanent marker indicating the pahel.board name and circuit number of all internal wiring . 16110 -8 .3rCT1 OE! 16 12 0 CONDUCTORS 1 A. This section covers conductors for all voltages that are util ized for this project . 2 . MATERIAL, _( 600 _` QLT) A. ALL CGLEDUCTOPS AiND CABLE shall c;cnforrr, to UL or IPCEA as applicable . Provide recently manufactured cable, with auaranL'+.es ar`.C{ warrantl,es initiated duriing the- cont 17 1 C t perl.od . E3 . 600 VOLT <;OtVIDUC'±TORS l.} IPJ;')UI,ATI(XI <a } Pr.ovido Cropper conductors with insulation .".ated for 600 volts . b) Unless otherwise specified, provide stranded copper ccnductor.s Typty '1 W, THW, THFIN, or THWN for all conductors . C) Conform ar.ith tho National Electrical Code for fixture: wiring and specifically to the temperatur.rz.� of the enclosure and to the wet or dry location , 2 ) FEEDERS, BRANCH CIRCUITS AND CONTROL CIRCUITS . Provide single cc Dper. conductors throughout . Provide No . 12 AWG minimum branch circuit- wire size . Provide No . 14 AWG for control circuits, unless otherwise specified or required by overcurrent: protection . 3) EXTERIOR F'EEDE'RS OR BRANCH CIRCUITS . Provide Type RHW-USE7. or 'I'HW-THWN conductors installed in underground raceways . 3 . INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS f b00 VOLT) A . GENERAL 1 ) Provide conductors continuous from outlet to outlet, and splice only at outlet; or junction boxes . 2) Circuit ,:ill fe�cler.s and branch circuits as shown on the plans . Approval of the Engineer is 1.6120-.1 r e q u,i r e d for r!e vi a t i c n s from the plans . 600 VOLT CONDUCTORS 1 ) CUNE)OCTOR INSTALLATION . Install all. conductors ill a rinqlt� raceeri►y at one tir,,le, insuring that conductors do not cross one another while being u 11, -i ii n _ t 1:1 I, a ,* :-uff icic e n t cable -I, X11.1 7 1. j.11 q:.; (.)r boxes and prf-,vent conduct.or s . Fu.7el) t-he allowable rl s,j.o n and c,.%1c-f)0dif1q t:ho_l III bOrlditIq radiUS, for wiro pul.ling, if u:3ed, shall '-he .1rid rac.-�,euiY 2 ) COHD'UCToR SUPPOPT . Provid(? (,<-_)nductor nupport:s as r e q ui 1:Q d by t-.ticY Na t:i c)I-,al E,i c, r i ca I C()(11 e 0 r as recommended by whichever roquiremen': ts iticrn st_r.ing, nL . Whet.Q- required, provide cable- supports in vertical conduits siirnilar to 0-'1, "I'ype ind provide the lower end of conduit wi.t:h O-Z, Type 2 FVF ventilators . 3) S P L-ICING a No s P I i(."J.ri q (--)r j o i n r s w i 1 1 be permitted i n eithor fec.,der or branch cl.rcuits except at outlet or ac_,cc-:�_ssible junction boxes . Utilize type oolderless connectors, s,irriilar to O-Z, Type XWC, when making splices or taps in coricluctors No . 8 AWG or larger . L)) Ut] ilizc� twi,st-on connectors, 3NI Corip,iny "PL-Inqcr Winq" or Tdceal Industries, Inc "Wj.ng Nut " , fc-)I: sj_-)1 i(.oS and taps ill ( c,nc1ucL(.-)r:3 No . 1.0 AWG and camaller . Any or-her t.wi,,o—on cc.)finoc,,tor.,; mue;t he approved by the this type C'011l'if-Ict-,or ((:)I- factory-made t-.o installation . Also utilize .';p1 ices ir) fi:•'.t:Ures or equipment . c) Pressures i.ndent-. LYIDC.- connectors shall be su b III j.L rc d `c) !:he Farr ill ee r for approva 1. . d) Tape all splices find jo.ints with vinyl plastic tapo manufactured by Minnesota Mining Manufac"Wr.'ill( j Company. U.se sufficient tape (:o sec.urcr insul-ation strength equal to that of the conductors joined . 1,6 1.12 0-12 SECTION 15120 c�rJr�rJcTO�s �) Keep Splices. in underground junction boxes, handholes, and manholes to an absolute minimum. Where splices are necessary, use resin pressure splices and resin splicing kits manu£a( d by the 3M Company, St . , Paul., Minnesota, to totally encapsulate the shli.c�. . CONDUCT' TE'R.NTNATION . Provide all power and r.ont:rol. t:Cindti;.to s that cerminate on equipment or tt-:,rminal strips, with solderless lugs or fork and Clanged tongu-.-� terminals . Provide T & B Ot"ITA-KON" torl.au : terntin.al . This typ . nductor t�5rinina'.:.i.on to not required when the :c;.;ipment is prIOvidC,.d wit!, so,'Aer•l 5s connectors . a) CO-NDUC'iOR IDENTIF"TtiATION . Identify phase, circuit, and voltagcr at; each panel, pull box, junction box, and switch . Provide waterproof non- metallic bands or identi.f:ication tag for each conductor . All secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors throughout the project-, secondary el,oct.r.i•c al. syr,term shall be color coded as follows : Phasr;,� B - Red Phrase C. - Bl u(,, ' Neutral white Ground (:3 r:eon h) 'ilher(-, coded conduct-ors are not corrrmercia.11y •avrri.labl.o, rolol.ed non-ag.i.rYC� plastic tape may be utilized . 7 ) Colo,7 curie zal_J, control wire insulation and tag eacl-i splice and ter.minri t:ion . 1,6120-3 S E N 1 4 3 NC A. This s(.ct, -Jon covf:'r:.� wiring detiices, including flool: boxes -in, -ac -netal raceways . i out:lot--s, and .9-urf �e i Provide boxes and rac(-.�wayq as spc;�c i fied in Section RACEWAYS AND r-,rr,r1NGS ; A 11 wJ h cs s h ei 11 1-)c! 's r.%Q c cat i 0n rkd e, q u i e.1U, 0,p e r cl r n ra,,-.ed aL 210 ,im i r ,r e s Types Listed below : A S i n g.).e 11 A)I e 1,2 21. C G E 5 9 51`-:'6 NACI-1 1.221-1 D,m,iblo 1 12 22" G 1.-' 952- A C 2-- T 1222-I Throe- Way 1.223- 1 GL'95:3-2U 2 OA(,3-1 1223-1 Fr,;- :r Way 19)94 -1 GE 5 9 5-1 201101-1 12211-1 Key i n t,j 11.e Pot 1`99i. L G E 5 9 5 1 -"0 2 0 AC 1,-1, 1221-1, Piiot Light ( I ') 2999-1 S P 12 1-4 G 20ACI-CLII, 1221.-PLC 4901 1221- 1. Double P o I e, 1902-1 1227.-I Th r o o Way 4 9 031-1 1 four. Way 4 9 0 4 -1 1224 K o V--Si i i q I e P(D I e 4901 -1, 1 Pilot Light: ( 1.P) 4901-PLR120 ------ Duor switches shall he A . H . 11,1029, G . E . I1SD-1 , Elerfect-Line, (T&B) 11IM-415, or. Bryant 02968 . B . Rc-cepracles in Administ.-.raLivo Offices, Storage Areas, Locker R,(x)ms, otc . , shall br! t3pocificat ion grade, q ro u n lin,j type rat,:'d at: 20 amperl2s . 'rypes listed b el(.,,w A. S1 . �i . P&S ST RR A 1-10 B R E'l,L zY 1)Lit)1.ox. 5352.1 GE 1110 8-2 5362- 1 5352-1 �3 L n q 1-,� 5361-1 (;;1%4102`2. 5351-1 5361.-1 U LO U t I d Ed U 1.t. G F 5-34 2 1. 2091-ICI GF-5362-1 BRYANT 1-,FV,T_j!:LN Duplex 536,2 -1 5362-1 Single 5361-1 5361-1 Ground Fault G FR.5 3 FT 1 0398-T al pui:pose receptacles, shall be f r isked as S p c i, u 11 lei 1.1 L d for on Lhe draWL11gs C Cover plates of the appropriate type and size shall ho provided to accommodate all. outlets , unless 61,1 -1 -13 WILIRiN6 DEVICES otAlorwts":! r+-'-'q uirod li".)y t:110 Ar(��hLtect ' Or unloss for (2 � a ,-)r ,;peci. fic 'quipm--'2nt supplied , 1 Gemirally, ---111. shall bC? whito in color, ,;mool.h tht-.,rmoplast -ic, manuf"Ic'ured by Bell, Arrow-Hatt, Gerif-,Lal El,:-,,-.t-ric, P&S Sierra, Hubb(-:11. , 'Bry:amll- , Leviton, or Eagle— .jj --h ;:A ., I 111110:0, clearl.7 ri')r L: Whi .LQ In use" d L j. '2 d 1'h,,[.•,, ml u a -a 3k t, 1-.)j: I w C e I I mount.-.i:vj surfac-'e, and ( ovoz arirl Arli-I rig p L a- /base Th 113 cc,viz-r shal. l be cqual i. oil 'Shill. I be t'-')IP0 - 4 ) Wh�'r,? are insLallled in exposc(.-I fiLtIngs or boxes, U.5e Appl(*'tnln "FSK" covors . 5) blank c:i0vor.9 (of: the came type as installe-I on devices in the saim.- room or area) on 71 (jj VjC s v D . Slingl ! Pol.(- irlcarldi"scr?w: dillirm:m.- S%-jitch(-s , unless nthc>rwi.:io noted, ,.;hall. i-.)e LLItlrori 4 N-600, 1.20 volt, 600 wa!- Ir. 'f hr} w:i�-" aqo is rvotorl orl the drawings, ho dlfnmc:r swit-ch Lul-roil 11 N- 1000 ( 1000 11-1 5110 ( I5'_)0 W a t t s r N--:'000 (2000 watts) . -w::I y i. ':a I I di-Mflf�r unless ho Lurron Q 11-603111 120 volt, 6 0, treat:.'.., Wh-ro 1000 1--)rl the drawings, LlIe dimillf.'r 1.-,0 LUt-I-Orl IJ N-10031 . Raceway 1 ) All. mit'll-,�t-' .,-, I:or tho multi-out-.1et power. ;y�-;tnm shall h--! in Wirr111ol(I 3000 as on th"-2 Ri*-',copt.,F.i(-,l,(:,,s shall, be Dupl -!x r.(:!ceptacle cov,��rs 1. 1 11 G,--3 0�I 3!'F, . Finish be f 11 cl I I LI f cA C t 1 1:C f I I d a r d . Mini.muifi length shell be 3(5 A1.1. e;ovei,s , r!nd fittings, (-oup lings, receptacle plates an(J mounl.- in(j hardwarc! shall be fUrnished as part of t1h(II for a ("oulplete :iystnznn. C 3 . EXE 'UTION 16143-? S E('T I0id 1 6 1..i 3 WIRING DLVICES A. rnstall call wiring devices indicated on the drawings, compl4te with coverplvtes , B . Position of, cutlers . Center all. outlets with regard s o paneling, furring and trim. Symmetrically arrange outlets :In the room. Satisfactorily correct outlets improperly located or installers . Repair or replace damaged finishes . Set outlets plumb and extend to the finished surface of the wall, ceiling or floor without pro ec„t.ing beyond Name . C, All wall swI tc:h outlets shall . be on or in the wall adjacr.nt to the lock side of they rigor . Where glass partitions or other architectural features prevent such locations, switches shall be located for maximum ac,- -ssibility. D. Receptacles shall be insr,al.led with "U" ground at `op E. LABEL ALL RECEPTACLE COVERPLATE a WITH THE PANELBOARD NAME AND THE CIRCUIT NUMBER. THE LABELS SHALL BE BLACK LETTERS ON CLEAR TAPE, , • 1614 -3 ` j?tt�jr R A . The e P.t:i r o o 1.o -11. s V.s,t:o m and a I I e.).e c t:r J.c a I ecjuiprti7'nt shall bo grounck!d in Strict accorijance with Cocle and a: ,s shown or, the drawings . h !.-Ir'DIInding s-;srem be continuous t'hroughout. h -,hall. be ::,DnLinuouf-3 throughout �i1 lc c t:ri,'-,al s,t-!.,rn and shall be, q r ou rlded only at at. the serviLce switch, Or at the ol'- n t:r.:insformer secondary vii.nding .-or a as indicated on the D . ',,ihen c-onduit: cont-.ains only ground rhe g1:(-)Und wires ,z�hall h-D bond,:!d to the, conduit at both ends of thn- co* ncluit. run . I AIJ. (2()nduit; shail. cont:ain a properly conncc,t,-'d qrer--m c-opp:�r ground wire, sized in accorclancQ 'with Nat-'ional. ElerLrical Code Article 250, unl�25,13 indicated . F. Service and equipment grouncls to -,-he water System Piping be made using an approved clamp installed in an acceL3sjble location . ProvidQ jumpers a r o u n d .-j a r!r me t:o rs, sand i n s u 1.a t e d p p onnections . C . All c a h i n t,s , p a n t.Ls , boxes, a p p I i a n c c- frames, conduit s ind ot:her non-current carrying metallic bo qr.ound.--d as required by the National —iroways, mechanically And ''Iect:lrically at all joints and at all boxes, and equipment . I . '3ond Lo the ground bus of the pan(,I , j-,),inr� lhoard, c)i. -3,,,iitchhoard to which they are Lq t,.c.!rviin,-tt.J.ng each conduit with an insmIated grounding bushing having a ground wire, sized per Nal.-ional. Elect:rical Code, a • •achpci to t-hf--! ground bus . J. The Electrical Coj-,t:.ract-or shall. furnish and. install a properly 3ize(A groe-ri (.:oppet ground wire along with the currflrit: car.,.-yincj conductors in al.1 non-metallic conduit.s, regarcliess of whother or not the ground wir- was shown on tho drawings . Conduit sizes shall be incre a:3cd vht:m necessary in order to accorruod-ate 1.64 5 2-1. the ground wires . K . Refer to section t,i NE'RAL PROVT�"iIONS for. G.r.Ounding Continuity tests reIu.i.red . . GROUNU CONGtJC'i'aRS A . All ground re shalA. bt= copper. and, unl.es:7 other'rr.i..se indicated, stall be insulated a.ith Type TW, I. HWf 'T11H"f, or 'IHI4N i.n.sul.ation, color green . Aluminum shall not 1:;Q Subs'•-- .i.',,utod for c�.;p(:,c: r in ground ',,fires . . B . Green insulated cjroundirv.i :.y"a11r7 that are furnished f i%: uros and; r:f, .'1..s : w:. 11 b' ,:tC.•c " ptab.l.e . 3 . ClROUNDTIAG QIF >'rill'''r,Ij c* .� 1!i i?r'< f "7'i n 'i.f';: A. the Clect.rical. C,:)nt:r..s,:t-oi_ shall 1,..ovidt) an equipment bonding jumper tr.cm the grounding t:errninals of light s'e)itches to the grounded box. t_,h,at rhF y cite mounted .in, unless the dev.icc? .i s listed for sF,.l f-grounding . B . All sha, l bt-a yrc)un :fed by an insulated (green) copper conductor installed .-itt:h the branch circuit conductors in Ov., conduit- supplv.ing these receptaclF!s . 4 . GROUNDING OF MOTORS A. Connect t.hr ground cony. uc:tor r_o t:he conduit with an appy.'ove'd yr.ounding bushing, and t,t, the metal fr.aine with a bolted sc.)Ide;rli}ss loci . i3oLLs, screws and washers shall be bronze, or cadmium plat.ed steel . 5 . GROUNDING of DUC•I'WOP"' A. Provide ;a flexible cT:,:al.trlr.f st-rap, No. 6 AWG equivale,nt, at ea(-ti duct; connection at each air handler, exhaust fan, ::;apply fan, etc . , and install to preccl.ude vibration . 1645?_•-2 N IF:,I I CA i 1 A114) :AFI-`,'VY -)W I'TC If EIS A. Th-i s sec- i.on cQVQ1 U'i L kc t L1.gh t i rig and Po-wor P�)wor and Motor Starter Pa nolbod::(A a n(I Sa, y Sw L ch,s B Fuses are C The. Pant:' Lboards be 1� 3 hv General I -Hamrv,r, o r e r k:ion in sec, V (Al, .ND IMOT'T - 1 0 E r t.C,, S E H F.." 1, ")MI" t or Nanie.platQs . 2 . MATE R I A 1, A. Circuit Breaker !J (111ting ,)ijcI Power Parielboards . 1 ) Panelboards -hall b':, ck1od frotm safety type w.0--h it:c t, j t breakers . The parielboard, including all. J)t,js shat L have an :;hart cIrcuit, rating equal to the shot!: circuit intorrupting capacity of the circui L bre;1ko,:s Panc.,lboard bus structure and s}7c911 t1aVe (---urronL �.ind vaita,j raLings , ind number of phases, ;ins-i ejir(-,.; as indicated on the d r a wi n q f; . 2 ) ( Lrcuiv, Br,2-:ir:ors -jhaLl i--)o cjui.ck—nake, quick-brc--ak, t-.vpe having over-center r,,c m-I . rr -�i q e c c i)a T ii s,m.--; vi i il,t'i t I i(--,r , I - i, n t i trips and .;hall be, -rip fro y . Muiti- pole� circuit breakers shall have (..,ovinion and a single operating h a n d.).c, . Ilandte will riot be accepted . Circuit be provided with a means L nrl i(-a position . Circuit brr:.,aker i,1111pere rating, and number of poles sh.ill be: as�, i.ndicated on the drawings . All circuir, have a minimum inr-.,-,!rrupting capacity of 1.0, 000 ampe�ros RM.13 ,3ymrnct' r:ical, unless otherwise i ridica ted . Circuit br(:!akers shall be equipped with individuall.y i.nsulate(-], braced, and protected .:,-onnectors . 16470-1 ,3 a:.. round (",I i -i I In r v i d I-,d can 120 VA(:; branch --ihowr, c),n plans or in the 'C'hi. p 'Lij t i o n s ha I I b all t,, r u J.1-. b rea ki:,!r i.:i L ,- [) s r t: i-^r hr,wr,,1j j,r 'I r.L11g T ripping cu I: u i. �i k ii!r .-c,n a i t-i i n g g r 0 U 11 d t ":1 1,r: r)t.I on 'i h a 1. noL disr-urb Lhe "k!T'. c-i r :::'1 1 lb':;-I r A s i n l;A.(-, poll: (I r.* I'n d f a u 1.L p']n C"71 r'.] I . . :.hats a co nv r t.* i,;:) i i, k;! 1-1 a b r :i �-,!(J +" rom odt� rj a uge, n i d I Un*1.�--1,;5 at-h.:!rw L so. indicated, p a ne I h oa.7 d.,; s h r.-i I L bl! :,itandard widt.h wit.h boxr:..s having a mi.rlirluln width f-I)f 20 inches and a minimum dept--h of 5- '3/4 inch !s . 5) The pa ne.1.boa rd s h a I 'I b i' :-,u r 11'a c e or flush mouw:r'd a- Lhr-- (1-1wings, fabricated from c c I- r o 1. d 1. o;A d w j,t h wiLh ANSI-61 r us hi b light: gray anti shaLl have a door -J u i r'-: ..j i n t--�a d hinge-s, a "n I"..)ck r(:qu i r n q a in i 11.c-.,d y and a I ramod d c-c 1:or V card w i Lh a clear plastic c(-)v,.-- !,i n(.-] mr)1-1 r.',-o,-i r.)n t-.h e i ms i d C' of the door . The !---hrill pi:ovidf-> a space at least oi- tht--! I-, quivalent, for each circuit . The shall. taF t-yred to i.dow:iA.-Ij t.h- load f*f,.,(,i by each circuit . At least rie key Sh.All provide,.-t with each I)an(---Iboar(-1 and all Locks shall be, keyed alike . `l•}1(' r)rl(l'l.l?+?<a r l i:2:C?r'it shall. bf--, fastened to the? pemel rim(`rin(2 or other approver) and slhali not be removable with IC-11i.) ci(:"-.,r- in Pc'sition . 6) The par-teLboard j.nLeriors shall be equipped with bussing, cirr-:uit: and adjustable means for positioning t-.he interiar within the enclosure . 7 ) ALI main hu::; ',*m(.'1 circuit breakor branch bus shall be copper having 9D, conductivity, sized in accordant--F? with Undi.:rw::iter ' s Laboratories 16,170 I I I S) I D S A l'!,"T''e S lel I IV C 1-1 F., F,ta n da r d s Al In i r I u in I., is s,h,I II not', be acceptable . 11(=Utral ho"3so:3 h tCivl,llra�'ecl from'rom the pane Lbocird and rp the carne Size as the pha:,(:! bi,isse_s . Th,:� locat_-.on of the main t:.erminat.ion:3 ;h.-tIA h�_, dr,­_ermin4..,d by the entrance of t,-,he t:(*� the panelb � rd e-n -losure . In the pass through the P; C ul r_ers Shall bo P r d v�d 8 T h r _l I -I e r 3 ha I I provide-d with a to 50" am* pacity of the p j I ra b( banded to the and be properly C'orit:ractor to the or approvf�d grounding p(.')i 9) The afid t"he r,round bus shall be j 1)r o vi d w i.L I I i n d tv i d u FA I r e I.mi na 1 or lug f o r 0 e r inin al I,- c ondu c-to r s to the Pa no lboa rd mai,n.s, and nt�utral. shall be UI, listed as suitable for 1,ho )I- conductor specified . Terminal for branch cir:cuiL wiring, both breaker and neutI.•ril, Le U1, listed as suitable for the ryp-_, (:),: Specified . 11 Bus.,3ing shall be distributed phase start at the Pus soquence shall p bu.s of L he interior: for both top panels . Provisions or spaces for shall he locaLod at the bottom of (7, C u I I y bussed C OITIP ie t e with a1.1. nr=ce ;scary t I n r-i n g hardware' less the breaker. t,r) 12ach breaker, Space, or provision an i.ndivi,dual nutnber permanently affixed to the [)a n e�I h o a r d ih.unh.,?ring tape or painted numbers ri h a 11 "I o t: 'A(__C Q P t.a 1j.1.C. . 12) The inside of Lh panel or door shall have a printed nameplate indicating the nanie of the panel inanufacLurer, shop order number, panel r_ype, system voltage, and bus ampacity. - Panel shall be raarked with its UL short circuit withstand ratings 13) All panelboards shall be built in accordance with 16470-3 -'1-T T.-IN 6 4 V 0 M and c the applicable sections, of r.he Electrical Cod(:.,, NEMA Publicaticns and OSHA . All panelboards shall bent. !uhe Laboratories Labo-1 . b r:�--!a k r .1 ir.j ht-in,(:I na n e.1 t--oa ---d s shall. be of a pp ra ved. c}>:.rai.t , !,,pial to S)(1t,aro D Lypt., MQOD for 1 ..'0 and Squarr, El 1 yp(�,- IMEHE, for 2'77/490 hrc:�-ak"r powE'.r pan(�lboards t'1il11. I ',:o Square D type "a W shellL furni h and L I safery .5w,J.' tches where. rm Ch-e drawincs and elsewhere as 4.17 i I :---,aEefzy switches shall be- single-throw, n -d --, uck-break r,-mitive quick-rnL K qi cunt ,-Ict- met-hanisrn, fusible or non-fusible as Jual horsepower dead ead front, -�Ind I I: r)I I I b1. The switch handle shall th� ON and OFF positions . shall also be able to accept ji duty industrial type b(-, oadl.ocked :.,ither in the ON or t'.he QFF Covers shall b--? interlocked handle.,.i to prevent opening in the An inter. lock override device shall Personnel to Lhfl, ix, :orlock for inspection purposes in Lhe ON position . Switch :uwiper,r� and number of pales shall be as on drawings . Fuse clips shall. be p, i t,. i.vt:! pr—.'-im: on cartridge type and shall fuse�s as i n,rj I.:C�d on *,.I)e, drawings and/or as specified in 3 Thc. disconnecL handle shall be attached to the box or enclosure base, and not to the cover . Torminal lugs shall be Underwriter ' s Laboratories listed for copper and al.uminum cables and shall be front removable . All current carrying par.-,s plat- ,haLL b(--,� -ed by electrolytic processes . 4 Switch enclosures shall generally be NEMA I 16470-4 !'i%,C)VI i,i 'JA P:':* AND d,) q a i.g,o? .Slle steel �i d outdoors or In wet locations shall bf:i NEMA 31? raintif3ht, codle gauge galvanized Stp-(-11. and aro idrant: i.fied on t--Y c drawings as weatherproof (WP) Cr raintight (RT) - S w i t.c h(!3 I I - c,,-Ii s i:,� ry j.c r,,:,�pa i- t i o n and 1,ot::arod �.n fo � I r I -(hall be NEMP,, I watertight, slwit.clhies IDcated in hazardous -.ireas shall r;av 'nrlosures Of the Proper NIEMA :hc-., locition and so -, ndicateld on Z:h,�, drawings .* Laboratorie,.s S".ondard 98, and they with a rust-inhibiting phosphate enorklei Paint . 3 All Laboratcries, inc . , and shall. meet [-'ede.,ral Sp,•c,ificatian WS-865c and I-IF,,MA Specifications KS 1 . 6) Ejea,.,y djjj.-.,j shall have, permanently attached arC :juppressorZ hinged or otherwise to pQrmit easy access to line-side lugs wit.jjo(it rcmr--,val .-)f the arc suppressors . 7 ) in having a neutral. con':kIct:)r shall pro,, idod with an insulated grourldable Solid ncrutral. terminal bar . 8 The E-Uec-tr-i ,--a I C,ji-I t. racL-C: shj 11. f urn i sh and j.n!s Ill f'us,,,r, ji :111. f.!:s it)I • disc-orinect sa te ty 9) S w L* t C.h e-s used (:"rl under 250 volts AC be 01 i 1-11,2 r gt-:M(rral duty type or heavy duty t Y F) swi t:c h es use.!d on circui L voltages between 2150 and 600 vol t-i AC shall be heavy duty type . !3wttchos shall be horsepower rat(:.(:i for 50 volt:s AC and shall be equal to qu<jre [) Duty. jik�avy duty type switches shall be horsepower rated for 250 volts AC/DC or 600 volts AC, and shall be equal to Square D Heavy Duty 3 . E X E CUTT(7)N A. Properly align Paneiboards and Safety Switches and "equately support independent of the connecting 16,170-5 SECTION 16470 PANELSOAROS AND SACETY SWITCHES raceways . Provide all steel shapes and appurtenances necessary for the support of the equipment . it B . Where panelboard:s are installed during construction, place tr.mpor.ary covers over the openings at all times , except when work is being performed therein. C . Where panel.boawd cabinets are flush mounted in an outside wall. or f.i.z:e wall., insulate the bark and sides of the cabinets with 1/2-inch rigid fiberglass insulation . D. Provide all flush-mounted {panels with three (3) spare . 1-inch conduits stubbed up above the Finished accessible ceiling for future wiring . t; , t P } 16470-6 .;"; '17 A. T I i.i ,3 ion (.O"e r S f.u ses for 6C OV rsr. 1',-15 5 B Fus--'r3 fol: protection are cover('d in Section I N( FT X.- P E S 2 . M A T L'F�T.A T-1-i t1 Prryji(je fAls,--S 3111 IOCaCiOnS shown on the drawings ,q r-. 0 red tor supploment.,l protection . Ii . Prov �,de fuses manufactured by Bussmann Manufacturing D t., 73 r a"I-E C i i'3(D I I C n r n p a 11 Y . I I " with -1,10 0, 000 interrupting capaci,--y. Fu,;es rat:,ed 600 amperes :)r shall be U[,, Class RKI or. C.I.a.ss J . Fuses raLed 601 amperes and larg(,r shall be UL Class D. Fuses rated 601 amperes and larger shall have a r1lir-liMUM tiTTIQ-dEL.1aY Of 'I seconds at 500% rating arid have pure silver link's to insure MaXiMLIM current limitation . Bussmann KRIS-C- (arnp) SP low-peak [uses . E . Fusos raced 600 amperes or Less for all loads shall be dual-eleriient, UL Class RKI or. Class J time-delay . t7p,: . They shall. be self-protecting from extraneous heat . BLISsmann LP!4-11,K- (am[)) SP/1,PS-PK- (arnp) SIB or LPJ- (amp) SP low-po.--Ik fuses . F . Cusk,-,s installod in individual mor.or circuits shall be sized at-' 125> 1-4 motor nameplate current rating or the next: fuse size . Where excessive ambient temperature., high inertia motor loads or frequent "ON-OFF" cycling requires larger fuses, COr-ISLI.It the Engineer . Mc)t(-.)r controllers shall be protected from short circuit--s Lo provide TYPE 2 protection . vas level of protect-'ion shall alLow NO DAMAGE to the controller under low and high level fault conditions Bussinann LPti-Rv,- (di(ii)) ,3P/LPS-RK- (,.irnf)) SP or LP,J- (amp) SP low-peak UL RXI or Class J . G . Provide a spare fuse- cabinet, located in the Electrical E'quipment Room, model SEC as manufactured by Bussmarin Manufacturing Company . 3 . EXECUTION A. Fuses shall not he installed until the Electrical installation is complete, .including thorough cleaning, tightening of ali electrical connections, 1.6477-1 SECTION .16477 FUSES ; inspection of all grounding conductors, and a megger test for adequate installation to ground of all circuits . 13. Provide Bussmann all metal fuse .reducers where the � fuses are smaller than the- fuse ciips . C. Twenty percent spare fuses (minimum, of three o1 each size: and type) shall be placed in the spare fuse cabinet . D. A fuse identification label, showing type and size, shall be placed .inside the door of each switch . 16477=2 F� r H011'ORS AN 'MOTOR CONTPOLS A This section covers motors and individual motor c on I-r ol ".devices B. Mo!-(Dr Panelboards are specified in Section PANELIBCt ARDS AND SAFETY SWTTC!-IES . MAT EiR I.:V-'I A. G e 1. ) Unless otherwise Lndicited, all rnot-ors 31/4 horsepower anj larger shall be connected for operation at 208, 3 phase, and mot:ors less than 3/4 horsepower shall be connected for operation at 115 volts, single phase . 2) Motors . All motors shown on the drawings will be Furnished and set in place under the specific section where the equipment is specified. 3) Control devices such as aquasLacs, firestats, freezestats, etc. , are furnished under the Mechanical Contract-., and wiring from each such device to the motor starter is included in the Eiecrri.cal Contra-'.'t, unless specifically indicated otherwise . 4 ) Control devices such as electric-pneumatic switches, thormostats, flow switches, etc . , are furnished under the Mechanical Contract, and wiring from each such device to the motor starter is included in the Mechanical Contract, unless spectEically indicated otherwise . 5) Motor Controls . Uniess specifically indicated otherwise, provide all power wiring, 'disconnects, relays, pushbuttons, pilot lights, motor connections, supports, and all appurtenances required for the safe and satisfactory controL of all motors . 6) Refer to the Motor Control Schedule on the drawings for details . B . Motor Starters 1) Provide magnetic starters for three-phase motors . , 16480-1 manual vlcirters for single-phaso tilotors ,losure is UnIO i en(.- sLandard, but for enclosures exposed to the weather provide, MEMA 3R enclosures Allen-Bradley starters are specified to establish quality and general requirements . Comparable starters riianuj:ac.tur,�d by Cutler-Hammer, General 'D'iemens or S(quarr-, D wi. 11 b�:,, accoptable . In suarter Provide : a "Start" covt2r-mounted selr ct:or switch . b !-,ed "On" pl-Lot light . c) overload relays properly sized for the :,i •tual motor nameplate current, and motor p(-,ra t i n n (7,o n di'I-- iD ri s . d) minirnum of t:,eic auxiliary contacts plus those scheduled (maximum 4 ) Cr.)nt:rol transformer (unless otherwise indicated) for maximum control voltage of 120 VAC complete with primary and secondary v c,r c u r r r,n t- and short circuit protection . 2) Maniial Motor Starters . Provide Allen-Bradley Bullet.; n 600, single pole, complete with red "On" pilot I i gh t , t-0 Cj Ij 1 t? swig h, overload relay, and manual. reoet . Pr,DVide flush mounting with steel pL-:ite in finished areas and surfaco mounting 111 Unfinished areas . The starter shall have a minimum rating of 1 liorsepower :O-. 240 VAC . 3 Full Ma,,-jnet*ic Starter . Provide Rulli-atin 509, non-rc-.,versing, sized for the horsepower and current rating of the 'riot:C)I: The rill.nIMUM SiLe shall be NEMA size 1 . 4 Combination Starters a) E-or indoor application, provide Allen-Bradley Bullet.in 512 with fused or non-fused disconnect as indicated . 1.6480-2 MOTORS AND MOTOR CON'T'ROLS N FOr out door. applic:lt.i.or;, provide Allen-Bradley Bulletin 1232 (NFMA 3R.) with fused or non-fused disconnect as indicated . S) Remote controls . Provide Allan.-Bradley Bulletin 800T pushbuttons and selector switches, oil tight type, with red "ON" pilot: light . Provide flush mounting with stainless st:eel plate in finished arras and surface mounting in unfinished areas , Provide mom+ehtary buttons or mair.tairied contact three-position "Hand-Off A+.rr_ �mati.c" sel.cc.tcjr switch, as indi_at ':1 . 3 . {SCU 1 IO!'1 A. Coordination . Coordinate all details pertaining to . the motor control equipment with the mechanical and :temperature control installation . This includes, but is not limited to: motor size, coordination of motor starter coil voltage ratings, ver.i.ficat.ion and coordination of mechanical control device voltage and amp ratings, and coordination of pilot control devices such as momentary contact: versus maintained contact . B. All Temperature C,antrol 'Wiring (helow 100 VAC) will be provided by the Mechanical. Contractor . All interlock wiring ( 100 VAC and above) shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor, unless otherwise indicate-d . See the Motor Schedule on the plans For detailed requi rc>ments . In general, the interlock tat' ring is not shown on the plans, but is callQd out in the Motor Schedule. The Electrical Contractor is responsible for furnishing and installing al..l. LIuch control wiring as indicated on the Motor Schedule, bur not shown on the plans . The Electri.cal. Contractor is also responsible for the proper e.lectri_c:al operation of all items -on t-he Motor Schedule, such a:; correct rotation of motors, correct heater 54 -CS, etc . C . Connections . Provide all connections to motors, and other equipment subject to vibration, with a flexible conduit connection . Use jacketed weatherproof flexible conduit, equal to Sealtite, for motors i.ri3tal.led in a damp or wet .location . Flexible conduit shall be installed in sufficient length and with enough slack to preclude transmission of 16480-3 41cYr0RS AND IMOTO ? .CONTROt,s , vibration . D .' 1.11 starters .shall be installed less overload heaters. The Electrical Cont;ra.ctor shell review the motof name plates Tor the full load amps : When all , nameplate full load amps have been recorded, the overload. heaters shell by ordered and installed.. .,Any. starters that are installed with av! rload heaters prior to the name-plate full load amps being available sh�i11, if zscuired, be .changed by r.he Electrical Contractor at no additional. roost to tho Owner . (� t 1F4�6Q-4 L F,RA 1, A T h e. E'I e,7 r i a.1 C o n t r a tear :ihi.311 and install. . jiv-ing of; recent manufacture as shown on the ,.-Irawinq.3 and hl:- rein B . AII fix- ires and ,--(.-.miponents shall be U . L. listed and an-:1 local code appLicati,on . All hc. it '7,hQ IDEW j.n ':ne sc-,hQdule s t, -,i:s 1-1 b h q n r_31. r q t I j.I:e m e n t s . c.ataic,g numbers are not to as J1. 1 in,-:Iusive . Approve-cl equal Light by oLher m,-inulfacturrlrs, may be subs ti uted. Ali muit- be approv,,!d by the Engineer a mtrlillit.I'm rerl ( 1-0) days before b.i*cis are due . The Cantrai-Lor shall furnish and install all or hard%-iare z:equLred for a complete ills La tiorl . Li(,ht fix',.ures shall bC-, equipped with Proper lenses , louvers, reflectors, hangers, --iips, fr-ames, lamps, ballasts , and oche r I :)I: r:lropor in or upon walls, c-( ilinqs. or other features, and shall he propl2rl-y painc-ed for protection and to thcl place installed . B . The E,-1 c:t:l:i.cal Ccr.tr..ac:tol: shall refer. Lo the Room Finish S:I-.,hedulets ) on "he Ar(.hite-ctural drawinrls to ver;,. fy !--ID�D 01' CC-2J Ling c-onst. ruction . T h o :-;haj.I rye; rosp',)nSibIc! for with Lh,:- prc>p .,: hardware, for in oL on t:he, :ire,.., iA:ieCI c'eiling . wh,e r'l he dr:lWings indicate that*, the lamps of "open" type C .ixt.TUres (s!-,rip lighu;) ar-, to be provided with E' Contractor shall. L am p 5 a I e I y 1.:urrli-sh and install •ry.stal (71ear unbreakablta plastic ovc-r Lhe lamps in'-: 11,1ding eno caps,, along with ,- afety guarc.1 tubehol,-,ie -s . SIC--evos shall be rion-y-11-,-)wing, nc�n •ch2 I pping, and rion---reasing and shall be Malcoli.te "Tool-.)-Guard" Type TG series . T11ermnplast7ic: "Arin-A-Lite" , House-O-Lite, or approved equal . SI [I.:!ty guard tube hoiders shall be Thermoplastic Pro,7,es.:; Type A.13G-T12, or ' tubelocl , or approved equal . 3 . BALLASTS A. Baliasts For fluorescent fixrut.(--!s shall be Motorola 16500• 1 i,I*I NG F I XT U P%E L; o I e c t r()n:c 1E.y p,:�, A d va ric,e (7c.,r i ur., o�, app-o"rod Oclual B . All outdoor fLI.uji:Q3ceriL aticl intercity discharge light fixtures: be furnished leiii-th cold weather, ballas s, capabl,:_, of snrti.ng i-,ri down to -20 dc.qrce.,.-; F, 4 LAM P S A All Lamp:.; shall bi-:! fu.,.-nishodl inst-i.11led by the L:arl-or as f: the work hf,'roir-j, <3r1cl shall bo in pror)or when turned nvrr t:o he U e� h iJ r w i s,,.' I'l(D t: r"c c I CZ-'!_,C,�i`a I I t 1.a I T 11.)'3 3 11 a I I n s Fr ci C U n 1,e s:_ o L h 4!,r,,q j.s(:: noted f I i_i,)c es r r-.-n t I a inp s s h al 1. be T - 8 (octron) , Color I 100K. I - D. All lamp­; shall be as tnanufac-Lured by GenQral Electric, C):--Iam Sylvani.a, (-)r 5 . A. All lic1ht:ing iixtures shall Le .installed in accordance. with mariufacturer ' s recommenda t ions, instructions contained herein or en the plans, and field coiidit ions . B. r,ocation:.5 oi: I.fix.Uures, uni,-!ss, spw?cifically dimensioiied, may be scaled from the plans and adjLlStQ�d a ; required within plus or minus 12 inches to meet Job c-ondit-ions . C . All- necessary acces.soriQs required for the Support or VIOUnt-nq of fixtures shall iD(-, included . where riecessary, oridging b(?t:ween s.r.uctural members Shall be prc)videcl . D. All recessed fixv,urf�s shall 1:)o mounted with flanges tight to finish,-.d cei I i, figs . FiXt',Urc:s shall be mountec.1, adc3quately supported by the ceiling supe,rsLructure or the building structural system. Recessed incandescent. fixtures may be. supported di.r.ectLy fr(-..)rn plaSt(:�J_ using plaster frames . All recessed fluorescent fixtures mounted in lay-in ceil.uigs shall be fastened to t:he adjacent it-bars by approv(-_d (::lips such as Caddy 11515 , Provide seismic supports in coiiipliance with LIOCA scismic requirements . E . Surface and suspended fixtures shall be se-surely 16500-2 LIGHTING FIXTURES seismi.c mounte=d to the structural system, the ceiling superstructure, or to supporting members provided as specified under the "General Conditions" of this specification . Fixtures weighing less than 30 pounds may be supported directly from plaster ceilings , Incandescent fixtures weighing less than 10 pounds may be supported from the outlet . All surface fixtures shall be mounted in proper alignment with the cell; rig . All suspended fixtures shall. be mounted from supports hung at r..ight angles to the plane of the finished floor . Aligner. type! ,hangers shall. be applied on sloping ceilings . Provide seismic supports in compliance with BOCA :-,eism.ic requirements . F. Wall. mounted fixtures shall. be securely mounted with a minimum of two .:,crews to the wall or to Muds or framing within the wall to prevent the possibility of movement or misalignment . G. All continuous runs of fluorescent fixtures passing through expansion joints shall be separated mechanically; electrical connections between such fixtures shall be in flexible conduit . H . All adjustable fixtures shall be aimed as directed by the Architect and/or Engineer . I . Where fluorescent fixtures are scheduled to have an odd number of lamps, ballasts may be consolidated with adjacent fixtures to minimize the use of single lamp ballasts . J . Where lighting fixtures are furnished by others, the Electrical Contractor shall receive, store, unpack, assemble, connect, install, and shall be responsible for these fixtures . 16500-3 SECTION 1.6'721 FIFE ALA2M SYS'T'EM 1 , GENERAL A. Codes and Standards 1) The equipment and installation shall comply with the current applicable provisions of the following standards : National. Electric Code , Article 760 National Fire Protection Standards : NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code Applicable versions of SOCA and IMC Building codes All requirements of the Local Authority having our.isdict.ion B. General Requirements 1) Submittals a) The contractor shall submit complete documentation for the Fire Alarm System showing the Model Number, type, rating, size, style, manufacturer' s names, and manufacturer' s catalog data sheets for all items to ensure compliance with these specifications . Copies of this information shall be submitted as required to the engineer within thirty (30) calendar days after award of this work and shall be subject to the approval of the engineer. b) The Electrical Contractor shall provide on complete set of as-built drawings to the fire alarm equipment supplier following project completion . The drawings shall include : (1) Routing of any conduit and all wiring from each device, i . e . , smoke detector, signaling appliance, etc . , to the control panel, annunciator or remote power supply. (2) Clearly identify each indicating appliance circuit , initiating or SLC circuit, control circuit, etc . ., and quantity of conductors . (3) Device identification number. 16721-1 SFCTICN 1.5731 r FIRE ALARM SYSTEM C . Equipment Manufactuvers 1) Base bi.d for the Fir.t: Alarm System shall be the Not:i. Eier AFP-"OC Series Intelligent Fire Detection and Alarm Syst(lrn . The system shall be the latest technology rnrilt.ipl.e::, addressable, analog system with all f- at1. z:c--s as ca?scrib•_ ci in the product :sect i.on . ?) Alre note bids f(.,,r P, rarronics :1XL and Simplest 4100 True Alarm shall be corisid�r.ed equal providing all r c,ui.rFamcanc of these specifications are met . :3) The Electrical Contractor shall be. held , financially responsible for any and all costs of the engineers time requirtL-d to review and research non-soecif.ied equipment for substitution by the Elect: -i.r_al Contractor . D . Equipment Supplier Qualifications 1) The fire alarm equipment supplier shall have a IvICET level 4 certified individual on staff r.espon.niblt� Loa- ovor.seeing the technical design and Lunctions relat:ed to the fire alarm system. Th(—.! NICET level 4 certificate number: must. be submitt(---d to the engineer with shop drawing submit-t.als . 2) ih 7 :s ire a 1.arm !qu i.pmenL supplier shall have on stiff t "'Mi'st`s f' .lt?V%'.l 2 technicians supervising the f ina: connections ,--ind programming of the system. ' 2 . PRODUCT A. The FACP shall b�, a APP-200 :series or approved equal and .shall contain a microprocessor bused Central Processing Unit (CPCJ) . The CPU shall. communicate with and control they foll,)winq types cif: equipment used to make up thee syst:ean : intelligent. detectors, addressable modules, annunciators, and other , y. tem controlled devices , B . The panel shall be UT_, listed as a Fire Alarm Control. Panel per UL, £464 -and NFPA 72 . r 16721-2 r SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM, SYSTEM C. System General. Operation 1) System Alarm Detection a) When a fire alarm condition is detected and reported by one of the system initiating devices, the following functions shall immediately occur: (1) The System Alarm LED shall flash. (2) A local signal in the control panel shall sound. (3) The 80 character LCD display shall indicate all information associated with the Fire Alarm condition, including: type of alarm point , its location within the protected premises, and the time and date of that activation. b) All system output programs assigned via control-by-event equations to be activated by the particular point in alarm shall be executed including: (1) Alarm indicating appliances . (2) Control relays for smoke door release. (3 ) Control relays for general air handler shutdown . (4) Central station outputs for connection digital communicator : Alarm Trouble Supervisory D. The Microprocessor unit shall contain and execute all control by event programs for specific action to be taken if an alarm condition is detected by the system. Such control by event programs shall be held in nonvolatile programmable memory and shall not be lost even if system primary and secondary power failure occurs . 16721-3 SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM E. All programming of the system may be achieved without special equipment or lap top computers and without interrupting the alarm monitoring functions of the Fire Alarm Control Panel . If special hardware or software is required to program the system, it must be included in this contract and be provided to the owner at time of delivery and the owner must be trained on the programming of the system, F. Program edit shall not interfere with normal operation and fire protection . If a fire condition is detected during programming operation, the system shall. exit programming and perform fire protection functions as programmed. G . Provide a battery back-up and charging system for 60 hours of standby and 5 minutes of alarm for the entire fire alarm system. H. Special FACP Features . 1) The FACP shall provide the following features : (a) Drift compensation to e:~t.end detector accuracy over life . (b) Sensitivity test , meeting requirements of NFPA 72E . (c) Maintenance alert to warn of excessive compensation . (d) System status reports to display or printer. (e) Alarm Verification with verification counters . ( f) Non-Alarm points for general (non-fire) control . (g) Periodic detector test , conducted automatically be software . (h) Walk test with check for two defectors set to same address . , (i) Control by time for non-fire operations, with holidays . 1.6721.-4 SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ( j ) Day/night ,automatic adjustment of detector sensitivity. I . Control. Panel Switches 1) Acknowledge Switch a) Activation of the control panel acknowledge switch in response to new alarms and/or troubles shall silence the local panel piezo electric signal and change the alarm and trouble LEDs from flashing mode to steady ON mode . If multiple alarm or trouble conditions artist, depression of this switch shall advance the 80 character LCD display to the next alarm or trouble condition. Depression of the acknowledge switch shall also silence all remote annunciator piezo sounders . 2) Signal Silence Switch a) Activation of the signal silence switch shall cause all programmed alarm indicating appliances and relays to return to the normal condition after an alarm condition. The selection of indicating circuits and relays that are silenceable by this switch shall be fully field programmable within the confines of all applicable standards . The FACP software shall include_ silence inhibit and auto-silence timers . 3 ) System Reset Switch a) Activation of the system reset switch shall cause all. electronically latched initiating devices, appliances or software zones, as well as all associated output devices and circuits, to return to their normal condition. Holding the RESET switch shall perform a Lamp Test function . 4) Drill (Evacuate) Switch a) Press and hold of the drill switch shall activate all indicating appliance circuits . 16721-5 SECTION 1.6721. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM The drill function shall. Latch until pr(-.lss of signal silence or reset: . ' J. SLC Loop Interface 1) The SLC interface shall. provide power to, and communicate with, all nf. the Tntelligecit/Addressable Die"k�:,ct:.ors and Addressable Modules over a single pair oL wires . 2) The loop inte=rface board shall receive analog information from all. intelligent, dete,ctcrs that shall be processed to determine whether normal, alarm, or trouble conditions exist for each detector. The software shall. automatically maintain the detector' s desired sensitivity level by adjusting for the effects of environmental factors, including the accumulation of du:3t in each detector . The analog information may also be used for automatic detector testing and for the automatic determination of detector maintenance requirements . 3 ) The detector software shall meet NFPA 72E requirements and be certi.fi.ed by UL as a calibrated sensitivity test instrument . K. System History Recording and Reporting 1) The fire alarm control panel shall. contain a ' history buffer that will be capable of storing up to 400 system alarms/troubles/operator actions . Each of these activations will. be stored and time and date stamped with the actual time of the activation . The contents of, the history buffer may be manually reviewed, one event at a time. 2) The history buffer shall use non-volatile memory. Systems that use volatile memory for history storage are not acceptable . .L. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall, include a full Leatured operator interface control and annunciation panel which shall include a backlit 80 character liquid , crystal. display, individual, color coded system status LEDs, and an alpha numeric keypad for the field programming and control of the fire alarm system . 1.6721-6 SECTION 16721. P I RE ALARM SYSTEM M. Maintenance Furic:tIon:3 1) Smoke Detector a can,ait. i.vi.t,y Ac:l us t 4►) Means s-1. 11 b�� provid(,d fc)r, adjusting the st�nsi.ti.vit~y of early or gall. analog Intelligent detectors In the r►ystem from the system keypari , ac ncs i.r,:ivi.t:.y r-,ancte alial l be within tile allowed t11, winclow and shall be a t1TGtt/MEi71't.JM/LtUWs��at�cst.ian . 2) Alarm Verification a) Each of the smoke detectorr1 in tho .-sy€sVem s3hal.i. be Galarns ver,i.f:ied , l'h(� �altai, veri.fi.c7tion function shall be f rom 1j,-50 rs('rcondn and etach detector shall be tab1c. u) be tmabled/dir3�lbled during the f:ir_�l,cl prr]clr:rsrn►rs.l.nrl c,f t110 sy►3ten1 or anytime a tt_r nyr►t•em turn-on . 3) AuY,omat.'is Detector M7i,ntctnancc� Alert, a) The fire alarm control ptanol frhall autonm caII.y i.nt.er.rograt.e each intelligent smokF anc:l shall. analyze the detector re-Sp011130 ave►, a l)Oriocl (4t' If any int e;1l.igent; smokc-! rl�,►t:crc.l.c)I .i.n the nyr3tem responme with a r oadi.ng t_hal, In below or above. norma). 1, i ml tn, then tJie faytrtrem will enter tale trouhlu ii►cade and the pfart'i.ctrlar. detector- will bc.- ratsnunc;.i.r:at.nd can the fayBtem display. ThiO frR;. uui;o nhtrl.l, In no way inhibit the r012:0-ipt: Of 01r11,►n Ccandi.t.ionu in the system, nar nhatl" i,t. ro-qiurC rosy rrpucical hardware, ;3pc�r..iFrl t: ,c,l.ra r�r computoi: eaxper.tise to perform' N. Field Devices l) Addressable Msarri.ral. Statiotin a) Addressable manual, fitaticrtrr3 uhal.l be Provided to connect one addrean3table, nupe3rvined manual. station to one of ttrka f'i i e alarm control panel signaling line c"l.rcuiL (,SLC) loopm . > > The manual ratat.ir�rr sh-03 on command from the control {�anc�l r3F nc1 ci,:zr_t� to t:he �71r11 16721 -7 .t{ S�C'I'?'ON 1(;721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM .representing the state of the manual switch , Manual Eire alarm stations shell bo crush ' tube type with a key operated lock . Notifier. model NPv-12LX . 0 . Automatic Fire Detectors 1) Analog Addressable Ionization Typos :Sm(,A ! D,--,ee:;tors a) The ionization type smok= shall be intelligent and addressanl�7! and ::sh,:il1. c:onnc-ct with two wires to one of r.h,-� f i. t-e alarm control panel signaling a.ine circ:ui ±: loops . ' The detectors shall use the dual chamber ionization principal to riaasurc- product:, of combustion and sha.l1 On Command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog 1-_vel. of products of combustion. b) The detectors shall be coiling mount and shall include a twist -Lock base, . The detectors shall provide address-setting means on the detector head using rotary decimal switch shall also store an internal identifying code which the control panel shall use to identify the type ot. detector. An output connection shall. also be prov.i.ded in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED. The dete=ctor sensitivity shall be set through the fire alarm control panel and shall be adjustable in the field through the field programming of the :system, Notifier model FST- 751 with standard base . 2) Analog Addressable Duct Smoke Detectors a) Duct smoke defectors shall be addressable and analog photoelectric type devices enclosed in a duct type housing and supplied with sampling tubes sized for the duct . The defectors shall be intelligent and addressable and shall connect with two wires to the fire alarm control panel, signaling line circuit . The detector sensitivity shall. be set through the fire alarm control panel and shall be adjustable in the field through the field programming of the system . , 16721-8 SECTION 16-121 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Notifier model FSD-751P with ST-XX sampling ' tubes . 3) Control Module a) Control modules shall be provided to supervise and control the operation of one signal circuit or as an addressable dry contact (Form C) relay. The control module shall provide address-setting means using rotary decimal switches and shall also store an internal identifying code which the control panel shall use to identify the type of device . Notifier model FCM--1. or FRM-1 . 4) Monitor Module a) Monitor modules shall be provided to connect any N.O. dry contact device (kitchen hood suppression system, waterflow switch, tamper switch) to the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuit loop . The monitor module shall provide address-setting means using rotary decimal switches and shall. also store an internal identifying code which the fire alarm control panel shall use to identify the type of device . Notifier model FMM-1 (standard) , FMM-101 (miniature) or FDM- 1 (dual) . 5) Signal Strobes a) Audible signals and/or audible sections of combination signals shall be electronic multi-tone units and shall not require vibrating solenoids or contacts . The audible section shall provide for a high/low setting providing different dB levels meeting the requirements of the particular room or space . Tone selection shall be 2400 Hz or low frequency mechanical sound tone . Continuous tones or the temporal pattern based on the ANSI 53 . 41 standard shall. be field selectable . Set audible signals to low frequency setting and temporal pattern for this project . b) The signals shall. operate on 24 VDC polarized 16721-9 SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM and meet UL 1971 and ADA. Mounting shall be semi-flush using standard backboxes . The ' visual section shall be polarized Xenon strobe in various candela ratings . C) There shall be FIRE lettering clearly visible on both sides . d) The signal shall. be able to test: circuit supervision without disconnecting wires . e) Provide signals based on the following types : Audible signal : Horn shall have 100 dB peak output at 10 feet on the high setting . Gentex GEH24-WR. Audible/visual signal type 1 : Horn shall have 100 dB peak output at 10 feet on the high setting. Strobes shall have 15/75 candela output Gentex GEC24 -15/75-WR. Audible/visual signal type 2 : Horn shall have 100 dB peak output at 10 feet on the high setting. Strobes shall have 75 candela output . Gentex GEC24 -75-WR. Audible/visual signal type 3" Horn shall have 100 dB peak output at 10 feet on the high setting, Strobes shall have 110 candela output . Gentex GEC24 -110-WR. Strobe light type 1" Strobe shall have 15/75 candela output . Gentex GES24-15/75-WR. ' Strobe light type 2" Strobe shall have 75 candela output . Gentex GES24-75-WR. Strobe light type 3 : Strobe shall have 110 candela output . Gentex GES24-110-WR. 6) Signaling appliance remote power supplies shall be UL listed for fire alarm signaling and provide 6 amps of 24 VDC power. The power supply shall include 4 style Y notification appliance circuits . Provide two 7 . 0 amp hour batteries with each power supply. Remote power supply shall be Notifier model FOPS-24 . Provide as required for 16721-10 SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM horn/strobe signals . 7) Central monitoring equipment shall be UL listed and include a commercial fire digital communicator complete with the following features : a) Meet NFPA 72C requ�.rements for Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter. b) Capable of seizing the telephone line at the protected premises, disconnecting an outgoing or incoming call, and preventing its use until signal transmission has been completed. c) Contain a minimum of 3 channels . d) Connected to two separate telephone lines at protected premises . e) Capable of selecting the operable line in the event of a failure on either line . f) Programmed to call a second number should the signal transmission be unsuccessful . g) Equipped with battery pack, charger, telephone jack, and dedicated 120 VAC receptacle . h) The contractor will provide cable, connectors and installation of two CO telephone limes and interface in accordance with FCC Part 68 using a USOC-##RJ31-X jack. The owner shall furnish two standard business lines for this purpose . i) The digital communicator shall be connected to the fire alarm system to receive and transmit alarm signals, trouble conditions and supervisory conditions . Digital communicator shall be Notifier model 411UDAC. Monitoring service and communicator programming shall be furnished under this contract for a period of 90 days .at no additional cost to the owner. 3 . EXECUTION 16721-11 SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A,. The fire alarm control panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20 amperes . . This circuit shall be labeled at the main power distribution panel as FIRE ALARM. Conduit shall enter into the fire alarm control panel back box only at those areas of the back box which have factory conduit knockouts . B . All wiring will be as required by the Equipment Supplier. Wire color coding and the color shall remain the same throughout the system. In general, all initiating devices such as manual stations, thermal detectors, and ionization detectors will be installed across a common 418 AWG twisted shielded pair . The signal circuits shall require #14 AWG. All system wiring shall be plenum rated wire . The ground will be minimum one #6 AWG insulated copper . r 16721-12 a• 4;�s SECTION 16741 TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEMS 1. GENERAL A. This section covers the Telephone and Data rough-in system, including installation of outlet boxes, empty raceway, and pull wires. B. All outlet boxes for the Y Telephone and Data systems shall be located as shown P on the drawings. C. Provide boxes and raceways as specified in Section RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS. 2. MATERIALS A. Telephone wall outlets shall be a single-gang outlet box mounted with the long axis vertical. B. Communications (Data Comm)wall outlets shall be a 4"x 4"x 2 — 1/8" outlet box with a I-gang plaster frame and a blank ivory device coverplates. The plaster frame shall be mounted with the long axis vertical. 3. EXECUTION A. Provide a 3/." EMT conduit, unless otherwise noted, from each telephone and communications outlet to the nearest accessible ceiling space with a #14 AWG pull wire(or equivalent strength nylon cord). Provide a plastic end bushing at the top end of the EMT. B. Telephone System: The Owner shall separately contract for furnishing and installing all communication (telephone) cabling, devices, plates, instruments, equipment, wire, fuse protection, lighting arrestors, and other devices directly related to the communication system except for that noted/shown on the drawings. C. Data Systems: The Owner shall separately contract for furnishings and installing all computer cabling, plates, and devices, in the Junction boxes and empty conduits provided under this contract. D. All penetrations of fire, smoke,and/or sound barriers (walls)shall be properly sealed to maintain the rating. 16741.1 �r . � y ADDENDUM NO. 1 February 13, 2002 TO: PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR INTERIOR LOWER LEVEL RENOVATIONS JOHN G. CHR!STY MUNICIPAL BUILDING ' 320 EAST McCARTY STREET JEFFERSON CITY, MISSOURI The Architects Alliance, Inc. 631 West Main Street Jefferson City, Missouri 65101-1531 573.636.5000 Bidders are hereby informed that the construction plans and/or specifications are modified as follows: GENERAL: ' 1. Proposal Form: Submit bid on the revised Proposal Form (Buff colored) enclosed with this Addendum (sent to General Contractors only). 2. A temporary partition should be built around the owners existing computer rack and equipment located on the east wall of room 124 (Plotter/Plan) for protection from dust and debris during Phase 4. ' 3. The contractor shall make arrangements for demolition of planter and removal of existing floor tile to be done after the Owner's normal business working hours. The contractor will be responsible for any overtime pay required to complete this demolition and shall coordinate times with the owner. 4. Mechanical, Electrical and other approved work not completed within the offices and rooms included under Phase 1 will need to be done after the Owner's normal business working hours as approved by the Owner. The contractor will be responsible for moving and/or protecting furniture, equipment, supplies, etc... within spaces and shall also be responsible for any overtime pay associated with the after hours work. PROJECT MANUAL & SPECIFICATIONS: ' 1. Supplementary General Conditions, modify as follows: C. COMPLETION TIME: ' The Contractor agrees to Substantially Complete the Work within Two Hundred Sixty-Four (264) calendar days, and further agrees to pay to, or allow the Owner as liquidated damages, and not as a penalty of forfeiture, the sum of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) for each calendar day occurring thereafter that the entire Work or each Phase of Work is not Substantially Complete per the construction schedule. Refer to attached Construction Schedule. Addendum No. 1 0033 Page 1 of 3 ' n 2. Section 01100 — SUMMARY (REVISED), add this revised specification section (see attached pages): 3. Section 01230 ALTERNATES, add this specification section (see attached pages): 4. Section 03334—OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES, modify as follows: A. Paragraph 2.3.A.1, change to read as follows: Lock cylinder is specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware"and provide locking mechanism. B. Eliminate 2.7.6, Manufacturer's standard mill finish. 5. Section 08711 —DOOR HARDWARE, add the following: ' Group NO. 7 Doors 129A, 1296 1 each Cylinder/Core CorbinRusswin 6. Section 09511 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING, modify as follows: 1 A. Paragraph 2.3.A.1, change to read as follows: "Armstrong—Cortega Tegular#704." 7. Section 15100 — INSTALLATION OF PIPING, add this specification section (see attached pages): 8. Section 15110 — HVAC WATER SYSTEMS PIPING, add this specification section (see attached pages): 9. Section 15200 — PIPE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION, add this specification section (see attached pages): 10. Section 15612—AIR FILTERS, add this specification section (see attached pages): 11. Section 15650—TERMINAL UNITS, modify as follows: A. Paragraph 650.1, A., change as follows: Add Tuttle & Bailey to list of acceptable manufacturers. ' B. Paragraph 650.2, A., change as follows: Add Tuttle & Bailey to list of acceptable manufacturers. ' 12. Section 15900—AIR DISTRIBUTION, modify as follows: A. Paragraph 900.9, A., change as follows: Add Tuttle & Bailey to list of acceptable ' manufacturers. B. Paragraph 900.11, A., change as follows: Add Nailor to list of acceptable manufacturers. DRAWINGS: ' Addendum No. 1 0033 Page 2 of 3 f ' 1, A101 -FLOOR PLAN, modify as follows: A. Refer to drawing A101-R1 for carpet patterns In rooms 120, 126 and 144, 2. A601 -FINISH SCHEDULE, modify as follows: A. Note N4, change to read as follows: "LIGHTLY SAND EXISTING VARNISH & PROVIDE NEW VARNISH FINISH ON EXISTING WOOD PANEL WALL". B. Finish Schedule: Remove note N3 from Room 111, Room 109 and Room 105, These rooms should have paint applied over the existing vinyl wall covering. 3, A602-CASEWORK, modify as follows: A. Elevation K1/A602 will be changed from a plastic laminate construction to a 2x4 wood stud with %"plywood, painted. ATTACHMENTS: ' Specification Division 1, Section 01100-SUMMARY(REVISED)(4 pages) Specification Division 1, Section 01230-ALTERNATES (2 pages) Specification Division 15, Section 15100-INSTALLATION OF PIPING Q pages) ' Specification Division 15, Section 15110-HVAC WATER PIPING SYSTEMS (15 pages) Specification Division 15, Section 15200-PIPE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION (5 pages) Specification Division 15, Section 15612-AIR FILTERS (1 page) Drawing A101-R1 Drawing A602-R1 Drawing M-4.1 ' Drawing M-4.2 Drawing M-5.1 Drawing M-5.2 Construction Schedule dated 2/13/02 Revised Proposal Form Notice to Contractors (REVISED) END OF ADDENDUM 1 Addendum No. 1 0033 Page 3 of 3 NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS (REVISED 2/13/02) Sealed bids for Interior Lower Level Renovation, John G. Christy Municipal Building, 320 Cast McCarty Street, Jefferson City, Missouri will be received until 3:00 p.m.. February 19, 2002, at the Office of the Purchasing Agent, City of Jefferson, John G. Christy Municipal Building, 320 East McCarty Street, Jefferson City, Missouri 65101, at which time they will be publicly opened and base bid read aloud in the City Council Chambers. A certified or cashiers check or bid bond executed by the bidder and an approved Surety Company in the amount of five percent (5%) of the bid shall be submitted with each bid. Plans and specifications can be obtained from The Architects Alliance, Inc., 631 West Main Street, Jefferson City, Missouri 65101-1531 upon deposit of $100.00 per set, company or ' cashier's check payable to City of Jefferson. Deposit will be refunded upon return of the documents in good condition within twenty-one (21) days following receipt of bids. A Pre-Bid Conference and Site Tour is scheduled for 3:00 p.m., February 7, 2002 at the City Council Chamber, Upper Floor Level, John G. Christy Municipal Building, 320 East McCarty Street, Jefferson City, Missouri. All bidders are urged to attend. The Contractor shall pay not less than the prevailing hourly rate of wages for work of a similar character in the locality in which the work is performed, as determined by the Department of Labor and Industrial Relations, Division of Labor Standards, State of Missouri, as set out in the Project Manual. Payroll records will be required from the contractor by the Owner. The Contractor shall be required to furnish a performance bond and labor and material payment bond in an amount equal to 100% of the contract price, with a duly authorized surety company satisfactory to the Owner, per the project manual. The City of Jefferson reserves the right to reject any and all bids and to waive any and all informalities in such bids. Likewise, the City of Jefferson reserves the right to select the lowest and best bid which is in the best interest of the City. No bid may be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days subsequent to the specified time for receipt of bids. Equal Opportunity Employer NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS 0033 NTC - 1 1 'k'. h ,1 �.•.. ' ,. .. ✓.y r;;• �..,...r.:,,h q, ..,t. r' .:�•JS N ,•_. ',!rM4A ys ,r` 11'' ..+. t. .�4.L. .�� J ' tJ• t �.s 4� f 1 .+, J} I' ��.n{{�� r r t%�r }• to I.,j ' t) YX(D .. , tit 1 x %"•- r �� �tlfi.!'•r� � tif f1A Y p,�.`". J�4W, �f�y } "t f• kr�,j 13jj7nti7C tY �1.f I.T r C: f 7.l. e �,. r {. M 7 ,{��T.�". `.j,+�er•f 4� ff��++,, ����tr�jj�il�Y�f�+ :.j,��t���+ .•� �'•�✓..l':r7: I�r ti:. �< nr P �rl, •e,b;.� �rj���y�,���Yyyt.� t -X r t7, } �6 ) .1� { .�n tYt r 1 '�rk•:'.•t `7^.�1�.�•! ��• �` b 1 "�Y, r4! �U">{�tk s�}} �. �,`:" Jf's�.�5 �7'j•Jy.r,�t���{ f��j#r:X, J�a: t rt� � ,'f•• r{, ' ..,tr. �1• rflrtLtfY:.�75 fi ;(1�j4JY�1 , {{�{� t C'.7G1',��.�r";•i'� ,r y '�� n,, �- r' Yr.r�1+`tt ..;•tf �{ s�''��lr;} ,.,1'I r Y4 e .+'�, y } .,r,1'^5d Str J i �� .Y +,r � fN': �' .rt t r' L t F''1 '/ ,. {S •1 J', ' (w a}{,:y Y {, a,r ;.lt�qi./. }., , 1 .J S J z �.rr tt�; r,,• J ,; n'•{�,t �r F, r C,. {{ lCti.'' it r y Z y(• 1°terp 5 ' r "•{X,na,,i ti '4.;.,,I �z' '�' �'' i ty tx,4 f ,1,, a l;',..S ( ',�f + �, ��'t�;�t'r•'. F��' `,�'r l� .� � '� , ��.v , .L.! trt �6; !`.:A. 4':t'it! P�.�� j"t�n�X{�, 1.,`%s4f,•{, • - -•,� ,��!Lir,tr,t f 1 }s•i L'� �} fF; rf, a } J 7,3 IJ rb � i t ! P�tOPO F 1: AL. ORM 1= ' ,, ; '` ,,{,ifs � � }• .y •(,P }l�'r `l,{=4} . r +{!' ,,) r. r t ,+ }' ,� .. ,•r .t >�i}1 1 '{{ 1S<'�, it( 9k rr, , .(REVISED 2J13102) t+.,�', , •�,{4, a r;; BID TIME: BID DATE: FROM: hereinafter called the Bidder TO: CITY OF JEFFERSON 320 East McCarty Jefferson City, Missouri 65101 hereinafter called the Owner FOR: INTERIOR LOWER LEVEL RENOVATIONS JOHN G. CHRISTY MUNICIPAL BUILDING 320 East McCarty Street Jefferson City, Missouri Architect's Project No.0033 hereinafter called the"Work" 1. The undersigned, having examined and being familiar with the local conditions affecting the Work and with the contract documents including the drawings, Notice to Contractors, Instruction to Bidders, City of Jefferson Construction Contract with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Division 1 General Requirements and the body of technical specifications, including addenda number through inclusive g _ , ' as issued by The Architects Alliance, Inc., 631 West Main Street, Jefferson City Missouri, hereby propose to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, services, etc., required for the performance and completion.of. the aforementioned Work as follows: Id BASE BID i f Vii, The sum of.. �^ 1't• t C t• t ,� 7` jf' �"']` ,1�•if FJ}[ .4S f.r�i �y. j f"ISSN r1 ,{ ' � r, r y ';+Z t1?tM� � . 1'( „ ,�L i� i'+5 �.. , .`•+�' 41'�f�r i}. ..{,".il+ �a�t�' l..I. i( t Rn ' i +E.: � ;� ,!y'r tq ,Lr Jb•, + Sr; ,irr ���r• �r.'''Stl i 'M 'i� 7rc. �;.R , � ��c��;)J afar Mi pro eci is ssou NOTE. kThis exempffrorrt ri$aies`arid J (yMf$ i ' y�'.ay ��dJe 2 �'J+y}, � Ij 4 . f r'• � V' Y}°��r�� � Si yl �� S'`' `� � �` C ' �• T '"dif�hi.'".s;t.f.r ,.• :a} • ,•; �,4' y � " ;C,r�- ,.��'�,/,',�•K s' , ,♦.nt.r 7ir� �J�F,�� IS •f�.a�•1:{y.�,,��+;.;, ..5:�� 1.,1,1.�i�t(( S,��Q'•j(�. � ?'{rt��,(�,J/el`•"' .Z-f:;n'_;+u"{��,t, � OP0��aa �, n ��sl• Srl, ,,�� )!S+r`f7F•w ',1/yyy�y� l�. �•: r'/ :�'1', i;...\'.�t 1 �7 J 1SC Jib c�r^ h.. °�.+!`h �e�+��.d ;,Strt. 1A , � S Y,�, A 1. j7 ' K.,• {7�� �' }ilk�';rn�t ,w���l� f�. �' �,x �XIJ t t`dF:ii � ��"j�,! t, H, 1 �tfri jy � tl„ " •f� l t•� . i"a �r r. y 'b.Fi}`Cf�` ;„J(,';!4 f�r���F,L••�` f �i t} R�y , il'i�7.,t.=r+ }•,'.Y4 +, ,p 4• }' t .r} ..r;•,r y ti I.0 {` tiJ � >',} '•"1t t) +en .J•',4'•� ,����. 7SS �•, 1 �}r av� N3�� t�Y'� 4•� 1 '"� �l'' ' f`1,3r '° r r' l:, i' "�r { �� Ii b�t r t•;i• 1! ;' t'� ' .. r. }' .. �'r• .i i. r. all�, ,ri}.t ... .iAt1 �� ,• r s F r .�i�', ��MS4i Y•!,S�•,I�� '� 21 , 1FtC�IAT>E=S;(ReferonCO Section'01230�-Aitomates.l�or`�furtfier tloscriptiott�r$S la�iin Aounto ©. d R ' dddjc6V1fr6,ni", Sasa SId,if tiie Ownar accepts any or�rll.6 1 following�Aiierna' +��fitho�Owriar,�oseivos- o , right to rbjoct any or,III,of the Altcmates and to select alternates in any order.` "" ,,•s'•,"`}` ``ram 1 t :;t. ALTERNATE NO. 1: DELETE PHASING OI:THE PROJECT. DEDUCT from Contract, the sum of The Contractor agrees to Substantially Complete the Work under a single phase project, if the deduct alternate is accepted, within _ ( ) calendar days, or allow liquidated damage as specified. 3. UNIT PRICES aUNIT PRICE NO. A-Replacenirnt of l:_xisiing Me(;N..rnical FIVAC Terrninal Unit, 300 CFM UNIT SIZE: dollars ($ _) per each unit. UNIT PRICE NO. B-Replacement of Exi:,Gng Mechnnict`al HVAC Terminal Unit, 500 CFM UNIT SiZE: ($ ) per each unit. UNIT PRICE NO. C-Replacement of Existing Mechanical HVAC Terminal Unit, 750 CFM UNIT SIZE: dollars ($ ) per each unit. UNIT PRICE NO. D-Replacement of Existing Mechanical HVAC Terminal Unit, 1000 CFM UNIT SIZE: _—dollars($___ ) per each unit. UNIT PRICE NO. E-Replacement of Existing Mechanical I-IVAC T emiinal Unit, 1500 CFM UNIT SIZE: ^� dollars($ _) per each unit. UNIT PRICE NO. F- Replacement of Existing Mechanical HVAC Terrninal Unit, THERMOSTAT, including all wiring for complete operation: __dollars($ ) per each thermostat. 4. PREVAILING WAGE LAW: Tlae Bidder agrees to pay riot less than the hourly rate of wages as determined by the Department of Labor and Industrial Relations, State of Missouri, in accordance with Section 290.210 to 290.340 as amended RSMo. 1978. 5. PROGRESS AND COMPLEi'ION: The Contractor :.agrees to Substantially Complete all the Work within Two Hundred Sixty-Four(264)calendar days and further agrees to pay to, or allow the City of Jefferson, as liquidated damages, and not as a penalty or forfeiture, the sum of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) for.each Calendar day occurring thereafter that the entire work or each Phase of Work Is not substantially complete'per the construction schedule included under section 01100-SUMMARY. 6, Accompanying this bid is a Certified Check or Cashier's Check in the amount of dollars %r t � •?,r'4/rl Y� , t �i t SpL.i�,'� it rtr�;K.y`f r ,, °lr 7� !S h �2 r•�7 t1.y ir„ ).!ar}�t .1.: t' r;r..,, y:} ).t:�y S' 6 4 t•�,'j�P.rJ t` ,' TNY,IJ .•{• �� J +} yGkY R�'� 7 rvR /yl7j .1•t•,.�r. 1, f r I l f.r i u da edt 1 �gbr,,a'w/o bjd tior�d,payable,without condition to.City of Jeffclrson,which it is agreed,shall tieire ,es' Q } i •. �{5y t,�k{ 'y..,,! •(yu N ,>�, x't.'d•fF �,.. .... ... !:, rr, ., r,� ttr, �.r. •r.'.Y.}X ��� ni, 1 �. ly 'itamagestforge delaysr�d.extia expense caused the O,wherrfftile undensigned�6`1§#o'execute a �rBCt~an S$' 'fit z. �t►S vt;5::..t`:t?•.'. t ,t. !t t i ' f.:•'•:h•, t'.i P i'i x'{r d 4;� tri l •fum(s the onci '"u""irrei'b the contract docu ents y{ m �,. +7, 1 J ,.�lu � �Xih c'�5 i � 7• r.?. ��y� t t,1' wtrl r t }�� ' 1F [ r : r rr*`'"r•s�1. '� OP OS FQ 1 J r ',1i1J33 �t R 1 7 r 7''k' r' r""'�' '�'+'' 'V• �i'�i�r ! ' r �'' lv ti v.� v �S � � �`t��'ir ��� 't � ,t "r �'�'x'` � �t1 �� F ,� if .r 4: y �` G }�'•.}�ry ;#i7i A to �k V ,t1� a� , .�, � ,1 f { �qqt r ft , ,!; 1 i � l('.4`ry.�Y t•9'rK S��` `"'�r �L 1!� ((i• 1� r` i r, .,.1 S�;. �!• L S , !411+.J.ri[• , wn1,,. x�rr`t 3' � + :rF:1: K• ''• .')..!y• � � 01�1 .,*� Pt�j' .ryx� a Y, f�y A��.E'.�`''J.iS Y� .r'a r t.1 E.t{1.'N •t If 4 } ,�y�'1.''•r yll 'I; rY ('!?�t , ..:1i {tt. .(• I r h J A:++�r•.S,f :yv+rl'�,i a� +aj,�t" S`f"i nY�'•'.f}r, 1' ': t.K,,t-•vi5�'� iF �i. tr: ta,••'! � ^. 'y.... i ,`Y•.}I.�,r! f�� 4);� 1pr i `^ tt r( t^ 4.5 1•r4,' j'� fi 4♦ .k, �i `i;�f� .t a f��t�J�: p3i� , tr YJt r�`'.i.J ,'rrrrilor• .yJJ; f ,� 7��;r'J�.�y.lt'�iL' 4 �, t, a•�i:' `t�`r `;i���� '� ,. + .f .�f i•t;a. 1•'Mi '1 ;�. "1f'( a i �t ? ) .:r i y r, � } r' r� 1 r tr 1, y, ,� �•:W�+S Z:t�'���W�,r,Y..liv'''.rf• r�1 t'4i�'%i ',,A^1{t � I r.i�.,.. r'r��,�':a Yt r,f 1 1• 4 .:7�a t;�.'��. ,.�. . S .i � �,.'� 4�Ay i• �;r`S.;Ss�, J�{?(l.�i,k�•.i�� if,; i` L t.;1:* 't'1',. ,�- ��t,r r," �r. ti4,, f•�;>,' i r: e � ff f s�... �;,�•, i''•� l 4'�11�y<�'.s�',,�tir`�.l PL+L.¢t� Y 1,r 1, "� 1 frt P f"°{. f.i { r �1.4�St+ jr S lrt { `1•'1f:' 'Fi � 5. xrr +{!,"kt;t _f a, �.1 �'.� ._ . p,., : •'E_,. •, ��., k 1;1 f. +�3't'.}y , t. � �iti. u,7.�'SUBCONTRACTOR AND"SUPPLIERS Tho�Blddor horoby cortitios'.that lho tellowing subcontractor i��an ' ,4,;isu liels will do used i pp n the performance'of the Work: Name and Address of Subcontractor or Supplier: Work to be Performed: Gypsum Drywall Acoustical Ceilings Painting - Carnet and f:usilient Flooring Ceramic Tile Flooring Architectural Woodwork(Casework) Mechanical HVAC _ Electrical 8. In submitting this bid, it is understood that the right is reserved by the Owner to reject any and all bids and it is agreed that the bids may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty days from the specified time for receiving bids. 9. THE BIDDER HEREBY CERTIFIES: That this Proposal is genuine and is not made in the interest of or behalf of any undisclosed person,firm or corporation and is not submitted in conformity with any agreement or rules of any - • group, association or corporation; That he has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham proposal;. That he has(lot solicited or induced any person, firm or corporation to refrain from bidding;and,, That he has not sought b collusion or otherwise to obtain for himself an advantage over an other bidder. 9 Y Y 9 Y or over the Owner. That tic not discriminate against any employee,or applicant for employment because of race, creed,-color or' national origin In connection with the performance of work. Dated this day of ,20� t � r f / � yi.,�.�'4c+yy�C}E�t�•T•1.7j�e 1'� iiiy Ft1..,. • +.J� ,!a ♦(. r 't ; 11� ,�Yt 6 4, r + Ia lf�y tA.,iy,+if"'1�'>7i �Y� f �t-4, ''�'(r cSA�,�t. a rya tf i r f1 ` 'r } tf.i "')� . �? 1 r;`4 '7'.Y � vr� 4 a�l, ^,� (iP�• r/�' +1•. r k<1 l ;�L� + ( f',:�•'`r'� 1t.41�n y w�111 ' ! 1 (atlr s' J S,i 7•..�,4 + U;;i!'i.t{+Y:�m,f jl.f,'� �� ,�.,,J I ;r.h S�.�i r;;"I ti• 1,Luj�t1�7:{':,.#tkrY.ri. is �.',. 1v�� "}i. y „� '��s�15i (vp 5 xMll {7l r � f•• i at .f%1�a > �,?. , t tk 1' ►' }4 y �.t /rJ l ,,,w4 of S 4 y n �1 t J IP? Yi r•r;sl,, i ki �flei.Ff , s 4.IA „✓•': 1�: ra ri3r ,t ?a.JI.*,r I h. tr(c,i;4,�� Y't� 't•'L�L'r1..1�.1�t •i vtH r r..'*r��,a .�. �;;,�•�J��7 r ti' ,. �.i'�4i4.�';:t��ft, !� �?rV�y jii it7�� `}i �j';Y.� Av�F� FOl 4YI?a ( h' , t{•Pvl"6�'v �•7ry'4 n 0033 r 3i➢•!K� ,,ril r t)'�°tit”5c J j 1 s1 t ,E , 't�'iS..f.�',1x1. !. i.i��,i �A�i.S 14, .., •r... ,..•.4+ .f't�,r•ry�.���.la .��'rf 7.J• . . {. ,.r., ?1<p,'�„F'^.��;I�j{ L�'; tYt.. , ,4';�:,� 1 .. tt. �,�. a.b "r'lt+• r�{. fGy j[.t '' � ir•'j,f,('Y� �,rt ���h �.�. ,t � r t I, y a• •i r 4 V. A INDIVID ] GIi *, '•r t,,t r t jt t.'1,, ., �'�f' � '.'7,/'" f.YY A'•�, �`'1j t. t t ,'�. ? " .} J t :' "t t• j. (i�y �+'�{A,l Yr t �y t ,J��'I .f tt �'AI'`��Sd .I,1r.�fi';..` r �i �r . r r r) t I�rtS �J< ITArSi�tt •1 � Rr Y4 $ r (> J 1 tt� ` ,i r > ,x � �;�.; !` i ,• N' �alirJ k f t y t l f r , .i4 ' .} �•Y ` Y ! :�, + `Z tqp, 1 •1 ( i d, •o t !t ,,+t�v'"rt 1,-;;,.� 1�++ l t Y wq. ,�7 kJ, i {r r. � J �� �� r. 1 1 ,�•.1t,�Yt � � � tp pl,��.�1 fi:, S 1`511 'i art Yl , iy�li�l�l�p` fF .7°t 11' t,�i!�`r< f`SV ,t? I. rv, ' tt '�;� i�lk t'�("7'' (1�!< �1'`i{t,i;;.�� �' h(J.3 � f{ tr ?' r � .i"4�,, .�t �r �r milt i. •�Y,•i�`�jj kk}, p�,i! }tt �r� •�' '{�tfi '.rfr'+�S' 5��� lrr L� It�t�4� tr{ >< ,. f t!,r�r rtxt',11, + s!`< 7 �r Ltft 7 ,. p f .+� tt t f�fr`,1' x�C,�e LPL' x s r'�y:xl Fr i( i ��r#try?}:_ ��Ir'.'��� "{i 4 �,� r'7c; .�t Xri Ri`(i ,,.7�. .tt!„n�`kCr. 7 °, `,J�6'�.,. �.k'�;rit� i, • Name of Individual Telephone Number ' Fins name(if any) Address for Communications Signature IF A PARTNERSHIP (State Names and Residence Address of all Partners) Name of Partnership Partner Residence Address Partner Residence Address Address for Communication _ Federal Tax I.D. Number Telephone Number Signature of Either Partner t tR r�Jr+� 1't 1 r .i '• f r J � tti 4 [:+.rrt,r tt, `"t'��1��.1 yS{r.•<rSf,�.d it },'. � ' t 1 , t' . . " '4'�tl}�A J3t?,9 �� 5 L 4 �1si,}. t' � t • (5'r'ks t S' +fJ: + it j tSS,fr,�.y't .r1t 5 t t r .r' i.S :•'1 r. 5 J i.. �r �' �: , , t F i rft t. r `t l',ris ,�Ct•.;1..,k' .Y,','" :}'t�'�t�f�+�`,{ t t 2 i 4 � 1 �'1•x"�t',J��i:• � v 1:.' ' •i F. w. i ?�{;�l.k r ti v{ ��7� �,��ft(/y;�,1r�cyy)�t•:Y.* X1 �*•tii[i• Z`1 2�j.� x:1,;,1•,v � s; (,. .�i 1 ,t 'ti. r r'Y t t r` 5.{ ! r fit.. s! "r4t ,�'{j� �� };friCL^�`� f. 9� �A'ii.-r .�' ,• "�1 1 � y w Iv � a '�f, Y nF r 1 � 1tl1 ty S�r'x.,r.r�,•tP �r rr•"• j r lt)Gy4} � / 7>!'S'r � v t 4''r , tr r , act RS{ , �, i 'S�r �3�•:pit tS.,l , {', tn.r�s t,. l ttih+r�S. �t sr..! a,�.:b y. t 'r�'�°��t�F�'i$• �':F.,rt'! :-,. er .t,',"ii. J4y •'14,y �< R t S[J 1 if n f'j CT4p,C.?t IVIII iMi '' 9; t P r r ry`r(+>i�'tl}`•�'klt�i�• + i S .63i". !'J�}}77.1.;•a+•sy' ''.l:k�. .il�f� �`•'H ,►M„ r'}��'.7�M t•x,'J� �x,..�uy/r�ll... 7. •��Pt�i r7.t:jd�2•;1 r t I / �� r r tJ st i}:ir..+� !=�r',ySIdCS•�;•ta��' �ti:5> tit ;' k�J: r,,� �i ,�, >; ..f"'ti r/ t :bA ,.o 01033,;1, }j'��f,H:%�T ♦pelf',s''f, e'��: � IRA 9 rb 7.•Ilu .tl'r..,"`,,d'It�.A. .,".,:.JJ.'i � Cr,r�''k, '"ri 5�•A;r .� .v"? ,ytix t j.�.e'"'{tX � ,.��i� .,15.'+vt ,•x ,rlf� l.,, r i y r� y•s � 'i•�"' ,yr�.sE�.1{���t, �f 1;ii�,Y't.�'> t :.t.. .., '�lit: xtr m ] r -�. ..F,!.`�. .. . N>,�+{.�:, x s . . , ,..,xr+gAl.,4i 4. '4' ,t.. •J X1'6 5 .. y�taj• ±'i-`" r• i f>�'.cbK�t'+''} +r ji '• Te Y +. a' ���, �tj•$ .3,-=� �`j'v iRaf"�i��a�b 2 si:/ah1ty,r�/f••���tt,,. "r+�., .t r;�W.. •a.,��nyT`Y^ ,.tr� V.f`; °'t'rr.��•t ,tf k'S i ,�'s++' > r i / 1� � ryry � r 't� (t :3,e {;, �•1� .� �i r f Wr t, j § fr j' '.r- (ins �,�r'��5�•�'Fx�',i'•�`'rrt,� 7v' +='s.b"'a'`d�'l:jv >' +�N ,a: ,+, »f f t !:+jl;�?.�� 'Sit'1'fti(t,r •6t�i1 b + ytw4�!;$%".fa '#t•i,"iM:'h•'�''��'��1�^'+�L.�{�.i�''t'•�' +t;�.r�i����• s'S ��I �� � ;,�•eF ai t. M;r<, t7 ,'i n, t�t..i•t '„ t'I�dt� +,� ti��~ 4'. tr' rf •� u+,.,�'�t,'�r. >x..i� r`;i,r��t'�:�3:'t��:x�;s�.;�? 4 + ±it'. t,i•.,r. . t} fi ,``' , �°1. �''��' �•� .�:�,�''':`. r3 ;''y:���e��'�!�• � � iE �`, Y�``' ' tf{,:!'�,y•g �;iii�:�.hy�.t y�.n. t.�j�I,'t1��4'i,S '1 �,'trt�a° 4 1 �Ey., ,t ',� a'l ."� tEt + �'7f��"�itt4�t�'t+i�''�i� '!,-}�f" ai,5y.1• itr ' � � 1t�'S' `� �.�`.' p�^t••; F A !�. rr.. l.± J �}y.t,, ,t .�. .la �r ,r' 1 �•� (�� .g , ..y�w(C xh (4���d<p�iFh4a.�{r ``t �'�'r?i I•�ty •j ,rM , t ,t ia. � 1 J. �11.''t. i. f �' t Y 'f'<• .�•.;,ct c �k} 'c fv'tt �11tO��eta r is•.h 'CORPbRATlON Incorporated under the laws of the State of: Name of Corporation _ Corporate license No. Name and Title of Officer (If a corporation organized in a state other than Missouri, attach Certificate of Authority to do business in the State of Missouri) Signature of Officer Address for Communication Telephone Number Federal Tax I.D. Number (Attest) (Seal) Secretary t (Each bidder must complete the Proposal Form by signing in the proper signature line above and by supplying'-the required information called foe in connection with the signature. M, t. . t .11 h + y''Fraj�rF t't':� � +! i'.J ; � to�� } 5� {. 5 t',i h!!:,•,:,�..N, J'� � w •N'. ,,},t � tt=�'�t11r'''�*t<t t�`((!< t. � rrf ` ; +� •s,�.k{5's`a t ! r.,i j t � i } 4 '.i i F + ��3ttGt�•�h�{�,�-�1 k= cl• rt !w+ S t'+ C.l "tW fiftyt5,�•.$ite '.t. ,�.1 t..aX �f�i o t i�.t a,. ', r. t 1 !�� it(, r.ttr! / ,t• )1 {�'+ •'" 'i''��'v iyx 4 t� •�� 'r(iA�!`fr iS + �.k t+. ' ,.� + t =f.t�y ti.s+t `+v i .t + it y�i�}7 tr�.c 1� ,.' ��. 4 .r ','� f rY ,L� +�ht yp';�.���`}, t,.9r�4:: •:1•%' ,J .N :%e ,?,.. .,,,,. tl-. 5 ly .•}.� 1.��' rdt �'9,5't•7� 3 3.}E.IS ;' 1' t4 �k:•r i;.y'gty�;i„fc r t�,t'`^y t f +��qi'^3•`J'•:1'.rf ' 'W.µt('L`�lt ).;Y (_{ „}.y S a«,x •;i`�1�'?Yt a ��I i l-5rj��.�',i t'���1�� r Ftr� �.��1��i`�}e'i f i.k:�'. ;�rlti,{.+4.,�r,�• �I�hl}yXy.s i!%+g'',1;% .i Srt s•�.yj�,�. ,� .t .•� •! •i. 1 k- i .1 .!tr, ai.:, Ntl=r. x{' StW t i. y ayf .a ' .t,PROF�QSALFORM rr :ay, ?:'cs�,ct ` yyf..,:t7033 : lJt t ,TT PF �.� ,S. S .141 ''� t N ll[ll[ .1 ') 1 lIFF jJt' •11 III- }+ ri,;{,3�,. �'a;�riwt} "ry{' .,+:L ;r•,; 3 rrt`:'v ,fa •7='�R 5t�<�'';!. cars ��f7 r:. '�'ryF �,i�' :Y.i��`t5` •1 1iAr4"{''.'rrtlr�ir�'V�:R, r {,r.% �h �l hy.1tt1 2gt!(t><� ' '•t�,F��'fbn 1., } Jr'ta ifitl y f a� tyr .Z +�t.A rr y.rct��f�._4. ��r:7;;,�r' iK;t7 {L�,, .t� �`. .. „ . c 4.' ;.my"-�,,�:,;•',rb^,; .. , ^�t .'�,.r. Sr,.,.�+ . ,•t`4 t� q 1 SECTION 01100—SUMMARY(REVISED) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project identification: Project consists of interior lower Level Renovations of the John G. Christy Municipal Building. 1. Project Location: John G. Christy Municipal Building, 320 E. McCarty Street, Jefferson City, Missouri 65101. 2. Owner: City of Jefferson, 320 E. McCarty Street, Jefferson City, Missouri 65101. B. Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, dated January 11, 2002, were prepared for the Project by The Architects Alliance, Inc., 631 West Main Street, Jefferson City, Missouri 65101-1531. C. The Work consists of interior renovation of the existing lower floor level, office & access areas of the John G. Christy Municipal Building (City Hall Building) containing approximately 12,000 sq. ft., in several phases. The work includes removal of existing office partitions & finishes, modifications to existing mechanical hvac & electrical systems and installation of new office areas, all new finishes, all new lighting fixtures, new electrical panel, wiring & circuiting, mechanical, etc. ' 1. The Work includes, but not limited to, temporary partitions to separate construction activity and dust from occupied areas of the building, temporary modifications to mechanical and electrical systems to keep occupied areas active and dust free during construction, cutting and patching, selective demolition, some minimal masonry, rough carpentry, interior architectural woodwork (casework), joint sealants, steel doors & frames, wood doors, overhead coiling grilles, door hardware, interior glazing, gypsum board assemblies, ceramic tile, acoustical panel ceilings, resilient flooring, carpeting, painting, visual display boards, mechanical heating ventilating & air conditioning, electrical, lighting, final cleaning before occupancy, etc. ' 1.3 CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract issued by the City of Jefferson. 1.4 WORK SEQUENCE & PHASES A. The Work shall be conducted in several separate phases, as described below and shown on the Phasing Plan of the drawings. ' SUMMARY 0033 01100 - 1 B. Each phase of work shall be substantially complete and.allow for installation and moving of furnishings and personnel by the Owners before proceeding with the next phase of work. The phases shown are a general concept of the proposed phases, to accommodate the Owner, however may require; some slight modification after review and coordination with the Contractor. A firm and final schedule/sequence of phases of the Work, within the contract completion tune, will be required by the Contractor at time of award; in order to schedule final furniture delivery and moving dates. (Tentative calendar dates below assume final Council approval March 18, 2002 and Notice to Proceed March 27, 2002.) Temporary partitions separating construction areas from occupied areas will be required before starting each phase of work. 1. Phase 1: The work in this phase shall include work at the existing private offices, along the exterior South wall, and two rooms at the North of the lower floor level, as shown on construction phase plan in the contract drawings. The Work in these areas mostly requires new finishes to the existing rooms. Work of this phase shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy within forty- two (42) calendar days of Contract Notice to Proceed and seventeen (17) calendar days from start of construction at the site (April 22, 2002). (Tentative completion date is May 8, 2002.) 2. Phase 2: The work in this phase shall include work at the northeast corner of the lower floor level, which is partially unoccupied at this time, as shown of construction phase plan in the contract drawings. . The construction work at the site for this phase shall start at the same time as phase 1 (April 22, 2002). Work of this phase shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy within ninety-three (93) calendar days of notice to proceed and sixty-nine (69) calendar days from start of construction (April 22, 2002) on this phase. (Tentative completion date is June 28, 2002). 3. Phase 3: The work in this phase shall include work at the southwest corner of the lower floor level, as shown of construction phase plan in the contract drawings. Upon substantial completion of Phase 2, furnishings and personnel will be relocated out of this area, allowing start of construction work in the phase 3 area. Work of this phase shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy within one hundred seventy (170) calendar days of notice to proceed and sixty-eight (68) calendar days from start of construction (July 8, 2002) on this phase; after the Owner moves out of this area. ('Tentative completion date is September 13, 2002). 4. Phase 4: The work in this phase shall include work at the southeast corner of the lower floor level, as shown on construction phase plan in the contract drawings. Upon substantial completion of Phase 3, furnishings and personnel will be relocated out of this area, allowing start of construction work in this area. ' Work of this phase shall be. substantially complete and ready for occupancy within two hundred forty-seven (247) calendar days of notice to proceed and sixty-eight (68) calendar days from start of construction (September 23, 2002) on this phase; after the Owner moves out of this area. (Tentative completion date is November 29, 2002). 5. Phase 5: The work in this phase shall include work at the central Lobby and east entrance corridor of the lower floor level, not already completed in previous phases of work, as shown on construction phase plan in the contract drawings. This phase area of work may require more public access during construction, than the other phases. Any work in this phase that can be completed as part of a previous phase, would be beneficial to the contractor. SUMMARY 0033 01100 -2 1 Work of this phase and the entire project shall be substantially complete and ready for occupancy within two hundred sixty-four (264) calendar days of notice to proceed. (Tentative completion date for this and the entire project is December 16, 2002.) ' 1.5 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. Separate Contract: Owner will award a separate contract to provide office modules and furniture work to be performed at the site, within each Work area, upon Substantial Complction of each Phase. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of preparatory work under this Contract. 1. Work under this Contract will need to be coordinated closely with the work of the separate contract for office modular and furniture, including location and connections of electrical power, data, wiring, voice wiring, etc. 2. Work under the separate contract will require installation at the end of each phase of the work under this contract. Some installation under the separate contract may require starting installation before full completion of each phase of this contract, in order to expedite completion of the entire project. 1.6 WORK BY OWNER OR SEPARATE CONTRACTS A. Owner Contract: Owner will be installing themselves or under a separate contract, data and voice wiring to offices and office modules and furniture. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of work under this Contract. 1. Therefore, work under this Contract will need to be coordinated closely with the work of the Owner or separate contract for installation of electrical data & voice wiring, devices, equipment, etc. 1.7 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the ' 16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering systern. 1. Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help cross- referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract Documents. ' B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: e1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. 1 Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. SUMMARY 0033 01100- 3 Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a, The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context,are Implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase: PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3- EXECUTION END OF SECTION 01100 SUMMARY 0033 01100 4: Z Q U W O Z U ti O W U) W C7 1 w s Q U ' co Ot V Z Z Z � U a ' Q w O z O h- 0 U 4 z m w LU a p EJ Z U >W > Q 0 J z LL U O u' o° m c c c c 9 J x w cr o m .cv, h z W V n 0)F7 app N pp R N ^ C N O C IL T i. G guy O Wu — ro Q — g �� t`L �? m 6�Ltq Z W 'O N V ry N N / m m N , m ry N N m .`�- h N m c) h Q b C m l0 T N C m l9 °p ld t+� W •- Z Q! Oro O ro `ro C ` ro t c t , a a O c.) c� � u� � a $ CL 0 ' a v, a v, z M z F- SECTION 01230 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL . 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. ' 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION ' ALTERNATES 0033 01230- 1 3,i SCHEDULC.OF ALTERNATES A. ALTERNATE NO. 1; DELETE PHASING OF THE PROJECT: State amount to be deducted from the Base Bid to complete all the Work included within the project scope under a single phase in lieu of five phases as specified and scheduled, Also state the number of calendar days the contractor agrees to complete the Work under a single phase, if the alternate is accepted; and further agrees to pay to, or allow the City of Jefferson, as liquidated damages, and not as penalty or forfeiture, the sum of Five-Hundred Dollars ($500.00) for cacti cai^ndar day occurring thereafter that the entire work is not substantially complete. If this alternate Is accepted the Owner would vacate the office and public areas of the Lower Floor Level while the construction is In progress. The contractor would need to construct a temporary partition or barrier to separate the Lower Level from the upper floor level during the construction period. Include all costs related to materials, labor, profit and overhead associated with this alternate. END OF SECTION 01230 ' ALTERNATES 0033 01230-2 r„ s SECTION 1. `x100 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SECTION 153.00 - 1*14STALLATION OF PIPING 100 . 1 GL-;NERAI., A. Provision.,, of Division I. , GEVEF�1\1, RE'QUIREMENTS, and Section ] !:)000, MECHANICAL A.111) ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS aro a part of this Section of Hiese specification" . 100 . 2 DESCRT-IDJ,'I0N OF WORK A. Furni.sh all labor, inaterial, and related items necessary to completely furnish and install the piping systems ind.icated on the plans and/or specified herein . B. This section of these specifications is applicable to all. piping systems installed by this contractor . 100 . 3 INSTALLATION OF PIPING A. All pipe shall be run parallel to or at right angles to walls, beams or columns . Pipe shall. be run as direct as possible, avoiding unnecessary offsets, and maintaining maximum headroom. Shortcut diagonal. methods will not be allowed. B. Piping drawings are to be considered scliematic and are not intended to indicate all. changes in direction and necessary fittings to be furnished and installed. Pipe and fittings shall be installed so that all pipe and/or insulation completely clears all nearby structures and piping. C . All piping shall. he supported from the building structures by means of approved hangers and supports . Piping shall be supported to maintain required grading and pitching of lines, to prevent vibration and excessive deflections, and to secure piping in place . D. Piping shall 1--)(r aLFWIgOd to allow for expansion and contraction . Provide expansion loop:,, guides and anchors where shown or requited to prevent damage to piping due to expansion. E . Branch take-offs shall be made with swing connections as required to avoid stress at these points . 15100-1 1 SECTION 15100 INSTALLATION OF PIPING F. At swing connections, offsets, expansion Loops, etc . , pipes shall be cold sprung into place before welding to compensate for fifty percent (50%) of the expansion . G . Pipes shall not be hung from other. I:)iping or from equipment of other trades . Hanger rods and piping shall not pierce ductwork . H . Pipe supports shall be structurally capable of carrying the pipe or pipes supported by them and shall be capable_ of: vertical adjustment: after installation of piping . I . Piping at all equipment, coils, control valves, etc . , shall be supported to prevent: any of the weight of the piping system from being supported by the equipment, coils, control valves, etc . J. Piping shall be installed and supported to allow for ' removal of equipment, valves and accessories with minimum dismantling and without requiring additional supports after these items are removed. K. Unions. shall be installed at the connection to all equipment and at valves, strainers, traps, etc . , not of the flanged type . Unions shall not be installed in refrigerant systems . L . Dissimilar metals in the piping system shall be separated with dielectric unions or insulating flange sets . Where pipes are in contact with hangers, brackets, or other metal items, and are of dissimilar metals they shall be separated with a dielectric material . For cold services, dielectric material shall be sections of plastic pipe secured in place . For hot service, use wood insulation saddles similar to Grinnell figure 159 . M. Provide plugged tees at: all low points, except where drain valves are called for to allow for system drainage . ' N . Unless noted otherwise, all pipe lines shall, be properly pitched down in the direction of flow to equipment traps and/or outlets . Unless noted otherwise, all horizontal mains should be graded to have a pitch of at least 1" in 40' -011 . Eccentric reducers or concentric increases shall be installed 15100-2 SECTION 15100 INSTALLATION OF PIPING where necessary to eliminate pockets . 0. Provide manual. air vents at all high points to allow bleeding of air from the system. Where gauge cocks are shown at coils, etc . , these gauge cocks may serve as the air vent at that Location. P. In lieu of factciry manufactured tees for branch lines up to and including 411, factory fabricated fittings, similar to Bonney Forge Weldolet, Threadolet, or Sockolet, may be used for branch connections to mains where branch size is less than main ' s siur-� . Q. Welding shall be performed by individuals who are currently qualified in accordance with ASME B31, Code for Pressure Piping . Individuals must be prepared to provide current qualification certificates upon request . All work shall be done in accordance with the latest revised edition of the ASME B31 Code for Pressure Piping Requirements . R. Pipes shall be anchored to prevent movement or vibration. S . Hangers and supports shall be provided as required to eliminate vibration and excessive deflection, bit in no case over the following centers, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the drawings . Rod sizes for individual pipe lines shall not be less than the following schedule : 1 ) PIPE MAXIMUM MINIMUM ' SIZE HANGER SPACING ROD SIZE (INCHES) (FEET) (INCHES) 1/2 G 3/8 3/4 7 3/8 1 7 3/8 1-1/4 8 3/8 ' 1-1/2 9 3/8 2 10 3/8 2-1/2 11 1/2 ' 3 12 1/2 4 14 5/8 2) Rod sizes and spacing for trapeze hangers shall be based on supported weight and load carrying capacity of attachment device . 15100-3 SECTION 15100 INSTALLATION OF PIPING 3) An additional hanger shall. be installed at every change in direction of piping, and at each valve, strainer, or similar fitting . 4) The spacing for all copper piping shall not exceed 8 ' . 5) Pipe hanger spacing for PVC pipe shall. not exceed the following : SIZE 1/2" 3/411 111 1-1/4 " ].-1/?." ?" 3" 4" SPACING 31 31 31 41 41 41 51 61 T. Saddles and hangers for insulated piping with vapor barrier: 1) The hangers or supports for piping with vapor barriers shall. be located outside the insulation and the vapor barrier must be left: undisturbed. 2) Insulation protection shields shall be used to distribute the loading on the bearing area of the insulation in accordance with the following minimum dimensions covering 180 ' of arc: PIPE GALVANIZED IRON SIZE SADDLE LENGTH GAUGE (INCHES) (INCHES) THICKNESS 1/2 to 4 12 16 6 18 16 8 24 14 ' 10 and larger 24 14 U. When trapeze type hangers are used to support two or more pipes, rods shall be used for vertical hanger ' members and angles, channels, B Line channels, or tee sections shall be used for horizontal hanger members . The material used shall be sized to support the load without excessive deflection. Spacing of trapeze hangers shall_ be based on the smallest pipe supported on the trapeze hanger. ' V. Horizontal. piping at walls shall be supported with wall brackets : Vertical pies shall be supported with riser clamps . W . Steam, condensate, heating hot water, and condensate pump discharge piping shall be mounted on roller 15100-4 . 1 SECTION 15100 INSTALLATION OF PIPING supports . Where required for achieving pitch, etc . , roller supports sliall be vertically adjustable . Chilled water piping on trapeze hangers shall also be mounted on rollers . X . Pipe supports shall be equal to B-Line model numbers hereinafter listed. Equal products by Grinnell also ' acceptable . 1) Clevi.s Hanger Fig . B 3100 2) Adjustable Swivel Ring Fig . B 3170 3) Adjustable Swimc.l. Roller Fig. B 3111 4) Adjustable Roller Support Fig. B 3121. or Fig. B 3122 5) Riser Clamp (Standard Duty) Fig. B 3373 6) Riser Clamp (Heavy Duty) Fig . B 3131 7) Offset Clamp Fig. B 3148 8) Wall Bracket: (Light Duty) Fig. B 3068 9) Wall Bracket (Medium Duty) Fig. B 3065 10) U-Bolts Fig. B 3188 Y. All supports for copper piping shall be copper coated hangers conforming in general to the above specification. Where copper pipes are separated from hangers by pipe insulation, hangers do not need to be copper coated. Z . Underground piping shall be installed with adequate bedding to prevent settling or lateral movement . See ' "Backfill and Bedding", Section 15010 . 100 . 4 STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS ' A. Furnish and install structural attachments as required. Space attachments within maximum pipe hanger spacing specified. B . Furnish and install additional structural attachments where support is required for concentrated loads, ' including valves, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. ' C . In new concrete structure, install concrete inserts before concrete is placed. Secure inserts to forms . Install reinforcing rods through openings at top of ' inserts . D. Attachments to concrete structures shall be equal to B-Line model : 15100-5 I ' SECTION 153.00 INSTALLATION OI'' PIPING Concrete Inserts - 132505 through 132508 or B3014 Male Ceiling Mount. Bolts - 13301.7 E. AttachIllent: to exi.sti.ng concrete structures shall. be made with drilled i.tnser. ts, 1"hillips, Red-head, wedge type anchors . F. Attachment to steel structure shall he equal. to B- Line model : Beams - Beam Clamps -- B3031, B3033, B3034 , B3050, B3045 Angle Iron Beam Clamp - B3046 Bar Joists - B3059 100 . 5 SUPPORT LOAD VERIFICATION A. This contractor shall verify the loading on all hangers, rods, and attachments . Static and live loads shall not exceed 75% of manufacturer' s recommended rating for any component of the assembly. If loading does exceed the 75%, the support spacing shall be reduced, or additional attachments installed as required . 100 . 6 SYSTEMS MARKERS A. All piping shall. be identified with color coded banding . This color banding shall. be applied at the ' following locations : 1 ) Adjacent to each valve . 2) At each branch or riser take-off . 3) Where piping goes through floors, walls or ceilings . 4 ) On horizontal pipe runs at 80 foot intervals, but not less than one per room. B. All color coding shall comply with ANSI A13 . 1 1975 . C . Pipe banding shall consist of 1" wide single tape wrapped completely around the circumference of the ' pipe or insulation. D. Pipe marking shall also include printed markers indicating the service and flow arrows indicating 15100-6 SECTION 15100 INSTALLATION Or PIPING direction of flow. E . All valves shall be tagged, T". Markers shall be Brady. or equal . F 1500-7�� i a SECTION 15110 HVAC WATER SYSTEMS PIPING SECTION 15110 - HVAC WA`T'ER SYSTEMS PIPING 110 . 1 GENI..RAI., A. Provi-sions (31 Di.vi.s i.on 1. , GENERAL REQ1JIREME1q'PS and SecL.i.ora .1`i000, ME.CHANICAL AND ELFCTIZIC:AI, GENERAL COND1,1111ON S are part. of this Section of t::1'ies(.-I specification Q) . 110 . 2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Ftirni sh all. lalaor. , mater. i.a.l., ervi ce;..� arncl related items necessary to furnish and install the FIVAC water systems shown on the plans and/or specified herein . These system., shall include : 1. ) Heating Hot Water. 110 . 3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop draw.i.ng shall be submitted on all valves and hydroni.c devices except pipe and pipe fittings . B. Shop drawings ;shall be clearly marked indicating the intended service . 110 . 9 COMPLIANCE A. All materials and the completed installation of each piping system snal.l be in compliance with: 1) 1996 I.nternatioanl. Mechanical. Co .1e 2) ASME/ANSI B31 . 1. 110 . 5 MATERIALS ' 'A. All piping system components shall be suitable for a continuous operating pressure of riot less than 1.25 PSIG. B. All valves, fittings, or other hydronic devices of the same type shall be by the same manufacturer . C. The basis of the piping system design is threaded steel pipe 2" and smaller and welded. This Contractor may, at his option, weld smaller sizes . D. Schedule of pipe system materials for above ground piping. 15110 - 1 SECTION 151.10 TIVAC WATER SYSTP!,MS PIPING 2" AND UNDER ITEM __1111-CREWE11) P j.P e Type (1 ) Fittings Type ( 1 ) Unions and F1 all Cle's Type ( 1.) Stop Valves ' T y 1)o ( 6) Check Valves T Y))e ( 1 ) Joint Type ( J. ) Strainers T y T)C" ( 1 ) Air Vents Type ( 1) Flexible Connector 'Typo ( 1 ) Manual Flow '.Type ( 1 ) Measurement: Manual Balancing Type (3) Valves Automatic: Flow T y p e (3) Control Dielectric Unions Type (8) E . For pipe sizes 2" and smaller, this contractor may, at his option, use hard drawn Type L copper [Type (7) ] with wrought or cast bronze fittings [Type (7) ] . If used, valves shall comply with valve specifications, but shall be solder type in lieu of threaded. F. Pipe 1) Type (1) - Carbon steel. pipe ASTM-A53 or A1.06 electric resistance weld or. seamless Schedule 40, ASME B31 . 1 . 2) Type (2) - Carbon steel pipe ASTM-A53 Grade B, AS TM A106 Grade B, seamless, Schedule 40, ASME B- 31 . 1, suitable for flanging . 3) Type (7) - Type L hard drawn copper, ASTM B-88 . 4 ) Type ( 8) - Type M hard drawn copper, ASTM B-88 . G . Fittings 1) Type ( 1) - Malleable iron, screwed 150 lb. (300 lb. ) Standards : ANSI B16 . 3, threads Ansi 13 . 1 . 20; material ASTM A-197 , 2) Type (2) - Seamless carbon Steel Grade B standard weight butt-weld fittings, Standards : ASME 1316 . 9; material AST14 A234 . 15110 - 2 SECTION 15110 HVAC WATER SYSTEMS PIPING 3) Type (3) -• Forged steel. socket weld or threaded. 4 ) Type (7) - Wrought or cast bronze solder hype fittings, ASMI., 816 . 22 . ' Fitting manufacturers : Tube Turns Grinnell Husky Taylor-Forge Wal.worth Stockham Youngstown 14 . Unions and F l.anges 1 ) Type (1. ) - Mal l.eab.le iron unions, Class 1.50 lbs . (Class 300) Standards : Threads ansi B. 1 . 20,, Material ASTM A-1.97, ANSI B16 . 3, Ground joint bronze-to-iron or bronze-to-bronze . 2) Type (2 ) - Forged. carbon steel flange weld mech bored to match Schedule 40, Class 125 (Class 250) ANSI B16 . 1., raised face, materials ASTM A126 . 3) Type (7) - All bronze: or .brass, suitable for 1.50 psi working pressure . 4) Type (8) - Dielectric union, malleable iron ASTM. A197 or brass and bronze ASTM B-16 and ASTM B-844, or 250 psi ANSI B16 . 39, threaded ANSI B . 1 . 20 . 1 . Watts 3000 Series . 5) Type (9) - Dielectric flanges, iron rated for 125 psi ANSI B16. 42, Watts 2200 series (iron pipe ' thread to iron pipe thread) , or 3100 series (iron pipe thread to copper solder joint) . I . Valves 1.) Butterfly valves shall conform to MSS-SP-67 . ' Liners and discs shall be suitable for. the intended service . 2) Each valve shall be shell and seat tested by the manufacturer and shall carry a permanently affixed indication that tests have been successfully completed . 15110 - 3 SECTION 15110 HVAC WA'T'ER SYS'T'EMS PIPING 3) Model numbers used for each type of valve shall establish the desired type, quality and mater.ia.Ui of construction . Products equal to the valve specified and meeting these specifications, by r the, following manul:actur.ets are equally acceptable : a) Jenkins r b) Crane C) 1,1111l:enheinaer d) Nibco e) Stockham. f) Demro g) Centerline h) Mission i) Walworth r 4 ) On insulated pipes furnish valve handle extensions . J. Stop Valves 1 ) Type (4) - Nibco Fig . LD-2000-3 (8 " and up LD- 2000-5 gear operator) lug type, bronze disc, EPT liner, iron body butterfly valve . 200 psi WP - 20 to 200 ' x. 50 to 275 ' 1 . r2) Code (5) - Nibco Fig . S-595-Y, bronze ball valve, teflon seat and seals, brass ball and stem, solder ends . 600 psi WOG . r 3) Code ( G) •- Nibco Fig . 'T'-595-Y, bronze ball valve, r t:eflon seats and seals, brass ball and stem, threaded ends . 1.50 psi steam, 600 WOG . K. Manual Balancing Valves 1) Type (3) - Nibco Fig . `T'-595-Y-14, bronze ball valve with tefl.on seats and seals, memory stop, threaded ends, brass hall and stem, 150 psi. WP to 200 ' F. r 2 ) Type (4) - Nibco Fig . LD-2 000-3 (8" and up LD- 2000-5 gear operator:) .lug type, iron body butterfly valve with b.r-onze disc and EPT liner . With "Memory-Stop" handle and slotted index plate . 200 psi WP to 200 ' F. L. Check Valves 1511.0 - 4 r 1 SECTION 15110 HVAC WATER SYSTEMS PIPING 1) Type (1) - Nibco Fig . T--433, bronze swing check valve regrinding disc and seat, threaded ands, 125 psi steam, 250 psi WOG. 2) Code ( G) - Nibco Fig . W-910 with EPT seat iron body, cadmium plated ductile iron plates, suitable for continuous duty at 175 psi. and 250 ' F, stainless steel hinge pins, stop pins and spring . M. Strainers 1) Type (1 ) - Screwed end, iron body, 250 psi steam at 425 ' F, 400 psi water at 100 ' F, with blowoff outlet, stainless steel. screen or Monel . Screen shall have 1/32" holes for water servic(--, . Muessco 111.1 . 2) Type (2) - Flanged, 120 lb. ASA flanged, iron body, 125 psi steam, 175 psi W .O. G . with blowoff outlet, reinforced brass screen with 1/1.6" perforations for water. Muessco 1751 . 3) Type (3) - Flanged, 250 1b . ASA flanged, iron body, 250 psi steam, 400 psi W.O. G. with blowoff outlet, reinforced brass screen with 1/1611 perforation for water . Muessco 11752 . Strainer shall be as manufactured by Muessco, Illinois, Armstrong, or Keckley. N. Joint Material or Gaskets ' 1) Type (1) - Thread sealing compound compatible with water, or teflon tape . 2) Type (2) - Flanged joints, water, Garlock red rubber style 22, Manville or equal . ' 0. Joints 1) Threaded joints and fittings shall have ANSI ' 5. 1 . 20 threads . Use thread compound suitable for service . 2) Joints in copper piping system shall be soldered with 95/5 solder, ASTM 832, using a suitable flux . 15110 - 5 SECTION 15110 HVAC WATER SYSTEMS PIPING 3 ) Bolts for steel flanges sliall comply with ASME/ANSI 1316 . 5 . 4 ) Welded joints sliall. be butt Weld type, bevels prepared per A.13M1.i'./A1qS1 B16 . 25 . P. Air. Vents 1) Type ( 1 ) - Air vents sliall be mani-ial type equal to Dole, screw driver type for pipe sizes through 111 . For pipe sires 1-1/4" and larger, air vents shall be 1.12" Type' 96) stop valve witli a tl)r(:,,adc--,d plug in t1le discharge. Q. Flexible Pipe Connectors 1 ) Type (1) a) Bronze metal braided, bellows type, screwed or flanged, 150 psi working pressure at the maximum service temperature (up to 250 ' F) Length shall allow for 1/2" misalignment . b) Flexonics, Anaconda, Metalflex, or approved equal . 2) Type (2) a) Resistoflex Model R6904 with bellows molded from DuPont T. F.E. teflon . Connectors shall be equipped with monel reinforcing rings, ductile iron flanges and integral. limit bolts . Each unit shall be supplied with disposable spacer blocks to facilitate correct installation. All. units shall permit pipe movement of 1/41' from pipe axis with flanges parallel and axial compression of 1/4" from the installed length . Published working pressure at operating temperature (up to 250 * F) shall be based on 4 to 1 safety factor and shall be no less than the sum of the system relief valve set pressure and the circulating pump specified operating head. b) Connectors, complying with these specifications, by Thermo-Tech, Metraflex, or Garlock equally acceptable . R. Flow Control and Measurement 15110 - 6 1 1 SEXTION J-5110 HVAC WATER SYSTEMS PIPING l ) 'Type ( 1) a) Valves shall be cali-brated bronze balance valve:; with provi.si.on.; for connecting a portable di.l:ferentia.l pressure meter as shown O11 the Ial.dT7:: . la) Meter connections to have built-iii check va1.ve.-; An i.ntecll:al pointea shall register clegree ot. valve opellind . E' ach balance valve shall. be coiist:ruc.t:eci with internal seals to pl.evenL ].Qakrage around ratat::ing element, suitable f:or 7.00'(', SIILIL-gaff . c:) Each valve shall be constructed for 150 pounds working pressure @ 250 ' F, and shall be supplied with preformed polyurethane insulation assembl.y . d) Valves shall be as manufactured by Illinois or Armstrong . If thecae valves are used, they may also be used as the stop valve . e) Circuit Setter Plus as manufactured by Bell and Gossett is equally acceptable . ' f) For larger sizes, use Bell and Gossett circuit sensor flow meter, Type A and 'Type (4 ) manual balance valve. 2) Type (2 ) ' a) L'urnish and install, where shown or called for, an annular element Ellison Instrument Div. , Di.eterich Standard Corp. , Boulder, Colorado . ID) This system shall consist of an annular primary element flow station . Each annular measuring station shall be complete with shutoff valves and a permanent: metal tag showing designed flow rates, meter readings ' for designed flow rates, metered fluid, line size and tag, station or location number . Annular measuring element shall be made of stainless steel . Stations shall be either nipple section or weld insert type and be rated to 275 psi at 400' F. Permanent pressure loss to the system shall not exceed 15110 - 7 .. . . . - .. ,. .. .. s ... .. : . . .. 'r31 I F'' ..y A.}. ... .. .. .... _ b:;11 Y:' ..:.z 1.": ..t. t .0..: ,,'� r R r •j . ,: ,, t . ,t ' 11 I .. - .!.' '�' t. . , i�'. .rr' ,'. ; 0,� i I . � ,I I ,� . ,, , I . , � I � �I � � , I I � � . � I I � � I � ���� ��.. ;.l r ., .. : • .. '' . ':, .. .:. .. .. �`' i 5 t. I (t .. .. + t .. t: y r t 3 .f f.11 ;'-- f + t s - F i ('6 - !;wi�f Y �..- tt•11 tb#.i { r .t t.' t it 1 Si t 11 fpd q'z^ ;! t C i 3I ° 2 t t ,.I j Fa. t ., Y 't5 j.� 1}t..11 .{ 4 J 1 11 b4 y.. t r i t, b ,:.p �' f �,. Fg}k� y� Ii ,t F t t'; rr .S.iv Kj r' t r'2' ykt�' yr±. T.p t '..t I< .IxAe'. i 4 F'3 t I '..57 t h yt { l :h t. 3E.. �! t.I t i,�t tw ?g✓,r i { ty t y ;� N A 11 r4,:A ,.t{. ,i .S •1. Il r,.jissn�"�.SF`}{t'+.,Yi P'�51%erca kwi SECTION 1.5110 HVAC WATER SYSTEMS PIPING 5"I120 (0 . 92 ft . ) of head on sizes over 1-1/2" . Accuracy of the flow measuring elements shall be + . 55 to 2 . 3% as verified by independent laboratory reports . c) Meters shall, be "Eagle rye", by Ellison instrument division . Meters shall be accurate to within + 1 . H of full. scale for pipes to 5" in size, and to within + 2 . 2% for pipes over 5" . Meters shall include zero adjustment, pulsation dampening and internal equalizing system. Wetted metal components shall be 31G stainless steel . One meter capable of reading all flow elements shall be furnished to the Owner. Meter shall be portable and shall include carrying case and flexible hoses for connecting to the flow 1 elements . 3) Type (3) a) Furnish and install, where shown or called for, automatic flow control valves . Valves shall be as manufactured by Griswold. b) Valves shall be individually factory ' calibrated for the service intended. Valves shall. automatically limit the rate of flow to the design flow rate .regardless of system ' fluctuations . Valves shall be factory tagged and shall regulate flow within 5 percent of their tag rating. Valve shall have full flow at no more than a 2 psi differential, and shall be capable of maintaining constant flow, as described above, up to a 32 psi differential . c) Valves shall be of the self-cleaning, cartridge-piston type with stainless steel variable area orifices . d) Valves shall be suitable for a working ' pressure of 125 psi or 150 ; of system operating pressure, whichever is greater . Valve codes shall have flanged or threaded ' connections as required for pipe fittings . e) Valves shall have fittings suitable for connecting instruments for verifying flow. 15110 - 8 SECTION 15110 HVA.0 WATER SYSTEMS PIPING f) The manufacturer shall check the installation and certify that the systems are hydronically balanced. Where replacement of cartridge piston or spring units is necessary to obtain a balanced operating system, they shall he replaced by this contractor at no cost to the Owner . g) Griswold model. Ultra L shall be used where indicated and shall. include pressure 1 measurement taps, strainer, union, and ball type shut off . S . Thermometers 1) Thermometers shall be Palmer, Trerice, Weiss, Jay, Marsh, Weksler or approved equal . Thermometers shall be equal to Trerice A405, A406 or A407 adjustable angle . Red Reading Mercury Industrial Thermometers with cast of extruded brass or aluminum closed cases, stainless steel or brass tapered bulbs with bulbs in direct contact with metal, individually calibrated tubes and engraved scales . Each thermometer shall have adjustable angle for convenient reading and shall be installed in a matching brass separable socket with a 3/4" NPT . The thermometer sockets shall be installed in tees, or in extra heavy nipples welded to the pipe . Stem .length of socket shall be 3-1/2" except on lines where the insulation thickness exceeds 3" the stem length shall be 6" with an extension neck socket . 2) Thermal wells in liquid lines shall be of same manufacturer as thermometers with 3/4" NPT, cap and chain, and shall have Government Standard tapered walls to provide for future installation of industrial thermometers . Sockets shall be installed vertically in tees or in extra heavy nipples welded to the piping . Socket length shall. be 3-1/2" under hex, except on lines where the insulation thickness exceeds 3" the length ' shall be 6" including .2-1/2" extension neck. 3) All thermometers and thermal wells shall be by ' one manufacturer and shall be interchangeable . 4) Graduation of thermometers shall be as follows : 15110 - 9 SECTION 15110 HVAC WATER SYSTEMS PIPING RANG, ( ' F DIVISIONS a) Heating Hot Water 30 to 240 2 ' r- 5) Submit: shop drawings on thermometers and thermal_ wells . T . Pressure Gauges 1 ) Provide pressure gauges where indicated on the drawings or in the specifications . Gauges shall be equal to Trerice 11600 . Equal products by Marsh, Ashcroft, U. S . Gauge, Weksler, Trerice are equally acceptable . . 2) Gauges shall include the following. a) 4-1/2" diameter b) Closed type ring with clear glass c) Bronze tube, Bourdon Type d) Brass movement e) 1/4" NPT bottom connection. f) Use pressure "snubbers" at locations where gauge needle pulsation might occur. 3) Submit shop drawings on gauges . 4) Graduation of pressure gauges shall be: MINIMUM RANGE DIVISIONS DIVISIONS a) Heating Hot Water 0 - 160 psi 20 psi 2 5 Gauge cocks shall be brass, equal to Trerice No . g q 865 or 880, and shall be provided at all gauges . ' 1/4" ball. threaded valve is also acceptable for gauge cock . ' 6) Pressure gauges at pumps and other locations shown on the drawings shall be Flow Conditioning Corp . Hydronic Indicator Systems or equal . ' These systems shall consist of Hydronic Indicators and Manifold Valves to provide pressure indications accurate to 1/2 of 1% . ' Gauges shall be as hereinbefore specified with a quick set dial for pressure comparison. Manifold valve shall be spring return pushbutton manifold with ports for connection to system at indicated 15110 - 10 SECTION 15110 HVAC WATER SYSTEMS PIPING points . System shall be a four port system at pumps, and multiple ports at other locations as shown . Gauges shall be connected to sensing ports with copper tubing. U. Test Plugs 1 ) Test plugs shall be arranged to allow attachment of either a thermometer or a pressure gauge . Test- plugs shall have a valve core of neoprene or other material suitable for use with hot water, chilled water and condenser water . Valve core material shall also be suitable for ethylene glycol and water solutions . Test plugs shall be brass, with cap to cover opening when not in use . 2) Test plugs shall be as manufactured by Universal Lancaster, Lancaster, Ohio, or Pete ' s Plug by Peterson Equipment Company, Inc . S) Furnish four (4) pressure gauges and four (4 ) thermometers to the Owner for his use . V. Dielectric unions shall be provided at the following locations : 1) At the connection of copper and steel piping. 2) At the connection of steel piping to copper coils . W. Grooved Pipe Joining Methods ' 1) This contractor may, at his option, use grooved pipe joining methods as hereinafter described for ' the following services : 1 ) Heating Hot Water Couplings, gaskets, and piping components have been based on Victaulic, Zero-Flex, Style 07 to establish the desired type, quality, and ' performance. Equal system, complying with these specifications, by Gustin-Bacon is also acceptable. 2) This contractor may, at his option, use grooved pipe, couplings, fittings, butterfly valves, and mechanical tee stub-ins in lieu of welded, 15110 - 11 M SECTION 15110 HVAC WATER SYSTEMS PIPING flanged or threaded methods of pipe joining. If used, .joining methods and components shall be BOCA approved for services up to and including 230 ' F. All methods procedures, and components shall be in compliance with the manufacturer' s recommendations . System shall be suitable for 150 psi normal working pressure . 3) Coupling Housings a) Coupling segments shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A.-536 . b) The coupling shall be of the grooved, mechanical type which engages grooved or shouldered pipe ends, encasing an elastomeric gasket which bridges the pipe ends to create the seal . The coupling shall be cast in two or more parts secured together during assembly by nuts and bolts as specified. The coupling shall permit a degree of angular pipe deflection, contraction and expansion. 4 ) Gaskets a) Elastomers shall have properties as ' designated by ASTM D-2000 . b) Gasket shall be of the mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure responsive so that internal pressure serves to increase the seal ' s tightness . ' c) Gasket supplied shall be EPDM Grade "E", with green color code identification, conforming to ASTM D-2000 for water services up to 230 ' F. 5) Bolts and Nuts ' a) Bolts and nuts shall be heat treated carbon steel conforming to ASTM A183, minimum ' tensile 110, 000 psi . b) The coupling segments shall be assembled with ' two or more oval neck track bolts . The nuts shall be tightened to assure firm metal-to-metal contact of the coupling bolt pads . 15110 - 12 SECTION 15110 HVAC WATER SYSTEMS PIPING c) Couplings installed in exposed locations and easily accessible locations shall be installed with tamper resistant: nuts requiring pre-torque with special three-point grip socket . 6) Branch Stub-ins . Branch stub-in connections may be made with Victaulic Mechanical-T in lieu of welded fittings .. If used, tees shall comply with the following: ' a) Mechanical-T shall be cast of malleable iron conforming to ASTM A-47 or ductile from conforming to ASTM A-536 . b) Mechanical-T shall consist of an upper housing with full locating collar for rigid positioning which engages a machine-cut hole in the pipe, encasing an elastomeric gasket which conforms to the pipe outside diameter around the hole and a lower housing with positioning lugs, secured together during assembly by nuts and bolts as specified, pretorqued to 50 lb. ft . c) Gasket shall be the same as paragraph 5) . ' d) Bolts and nuts shall be the same as paragraph 6) above . 7) Fittings . Fittings shall be of grooved or shouldered end design to accept grooved mechanical couplings without field preparation. a) Malleable Iron - ASTM A-47 . b) Ductile Iron - ASTM A-536 . c) Fabricated Steel - ASTM A-53, 3/4" Type F, 2-20", Type E or S, Grade B. d) Steel - ASTM A-234, (A-106, Gr. B) (14-2411 , 45 " and 90 ' elbows) . 8) Flanges. Flanges for connecting flanged components into the grooved system shall be Victaulic Vic-Flanges . Flanges shall conform to 1251# cast-iron and 150)( steel bolt hole alignment . a) Steel Pipe - Vic-Flange for steel pipe shall be Style 741 in sizes 2-12" and Style 742 in 15110 - 13 SECTION 15110 HVAC WATER SYSTEMS PIPING sizes 14" and 16" . b) Materials ' (1) Malleable Iron - ASTM A-47 . (2) Ductile Iron - ASTM 11--536 . 9) Valves . Valves may be of grooved end design in sizes 1" through 12" All butterfly valves 61' and smaller shall. be Victaulic Series 700 butterfly valves with standard handle, Grade "E" or Grade "H" linings and standard trim. All butterfly valves 8" through 12" shall be Victaulic Series 701 butterfly valves with manual. gear operator, Grade "E" linings and standard trim. Valves shall. be suitable for up to 230' F. service. 10) Pipe shall be supplied grooved in accordance with coupling manufacturer ' s specifications . For ' grooving on-site, pipe shall be prepared in accordance with the same specifications using specially designed tools . 11) Pipe shall be black carbon steel conforming to A1TM Specification A-53, Grade B, and of standard weight wall. thickness . 12) The joints shall be assembled in compliance with ethe coupling manufacturer' s recommendations . 13) The requirements of MSS-SP-69, "Pipe Hangers and Supports-Selection and Application" shall in general, govern the installation of hangers and supports, in accordance with the following recommendations . a) Horizontal Piping. No pipe shall be left unsupported between any two couplings nor shall any pipe be left unsupported whenever a change in direction of line flow takes place . Supports shall meet the requirements stated above but in no case shall the distance between supports exceed the following : Pipe Size Between Hangers 3/4 - 1." 8 ' 1-1/4 - 2" 10 ' 15110 - 1.4 ....a SECTION 1.5110 HVAC WATER SYSTEMS PIPING 2-1/2 - 9r. 12 5 . - 811 14 10 12' 16 • 14 16!' 18 • 18 29" 20 r b) Vertical Piping. Vertical piping sha11 be supported at every other floor or every other pipe length, whichever is most frequent . The base of the riser or base fitting shall be set on a pedestal or foundation. C' 1' 15110 15 ; f w. ' 1 SECTION 15200 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION SECTION 15200 - PIPE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION 200 . 1 GENERAL A. Provisions of Division J., GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, and Section 15000, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL, GENERAL CONDITIONS are a part of this Section of these specifications . B . Refer to Section 15000, AIR DISTRIBUTION, for ductwork insulation furnished and installed under that Section . 200 . 2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, services, material and related items necessary to complete the thermal insulation work indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein. 200 . 3 PIPING INSULATION MATERIAL A. The piping insulation material for each Type is specified to establish the desired quality and performance. Equal products, complying with the requirements of these specifications, by the following manufacturers are acceptable : 1) Owens-Corning 2) Certain-Teed 3) Armacell 4 ) Manville 5) Knauf ' 6) IMCOA 7) Halstead B. Type (1 ) - Owens-Corning Fiberglass, Fiberglass ASJ/SSI-II all service jacket, double self-sealing lap joints, vapor- barrier in jacket . Thermal conductivity of 0 . 26 BTU/HR/FT2/ 'F @ 100 ' F mean ' temperature, 0 . 3 @ 200 ' F, 0 . 35 @ 300 ' F. C. Type (2) - Calcium silica with field applied jacket . ' Thermal conductivity shall be 0 . 4 BTU/HR/FT2 ' F @ 200 ' F, 0 . 5 @ 400 ' F, 0. 7 @ 700 ' F. Product shall be equal to Owens-Corning Fiberglass Kaylo 10 for temperatures up to 1200 'F, ASTM C533 Type I . Jacket shall be 28 gauge aluminum securely clamped in place. D. Type (3) - Unicellular flexible foamed rubber 15200 - 1 I SECTION 15200 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION flexible tubing insulation . Thermal conductivity of 0 . 28 BTU/I•iR/FT2-- ' F/IN @ 90 ' F mean temperature, ASTM C534 Type I . Armaflex Type AP . E . Type ( 4 ) - Field insulated equipment: shall be insulated with fiberglass of 6 pounds per cubic foot: density, moisture absorption of less than 0 . 2`; by volume, shall be resistant to bacteri.al .and fungus growths, shall not crumble or f:l.ake due to cycling, and shall be inert with copper_ , steel, aluminum or other materials of the equipment . Thermal. conductivity of 0 . 21 BTU/1-1R/FT2 of 1 IN @ 75 ' F mean temperature, 0 . 28 @ 200 ' F, and 0 . 33 @ 300 ' F. Product shall be equal to Owens-Corning Type 705 with ASJ jacket . F. Type (5) - Unicellular flexible foamed rubber sheet and roll insulation moisture absorption 6% by weight, thermal conductivity of . 27 BTU/HR/FT2- ' F/IN. at 75 ' F mean temperature . Armaflex Type AP. 200 . 4 INSTALLATION A. The installed insulating system shall comply with the requirements of the National Fire Protection Association. Insulation, including finishes and adhesives, on the exterior surfaces of pipes and equipment shall have a flame spread of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less as determined by an independent laboratory in accordance with ASTM E89 . B . Installation of the material shall comply with the ' manufacturer ' s recommendations . C . Prior to application of insulation, piping and equipment- shall have been tested. All surfaces to be insulated shall. be clean and dry. Special solvents are not required for use in cleaning, but any oil, grease, dirt or foreign material. will be wiped or ' scraped from the pipe or equipment surface . Insulation shall not be applied on clamp or frosty surfaces . ' D. All pipe lines with hangers, saddles, etc. , shall, be set in their permanent location before insulation is applied. Should it be necessary to block or shore up pipe to install insulation, or should it be necessary to displace or remove hangers, the pipe and hangers shall be restored to their original location and 15200 - 2 t SECTION 15200 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION alignment: when the insulation is complete . E . Equipment tags, nameplates, Insurance Company' s inspection stamps or identification tags shall. not be covered with insulation . F. All unions, flanges, valves and similar fittings shall. be insulated with molded or mitered insulation ,shall. built-up insulation to a thickness equal to that of the insulation of the adjoining pipe, securely adhered and wired in place and covered with a vapor barrier. mastic. G. Fittings shall be covered with Zeston or Snap Form preformed fitting covers . Aluminum fitting covers by Gasco are equally acceptable . H. Insulation shall be continuous through pipe hangers . Hangers shall be outside of the insulation . At pipe hangers, furnish and install wooden inserts the same thickness as the insulation, similar to Grinnell Figure 159 . Blocks are intended to prevent the crushing of the insulation . Blocks shall be sealed to provide continuity of the vapor barrier . I . Foamed rubber insulation shall be installed in a compressed condition, that is a G foot length of insulation shall measure 5 feet G inches when installed. Molded insulation shall be slipped over the piping and all joints sealed. All fittings shall t be fabricated from the foamed plastic insulation and sealed at all. metered joints with manufacturer ' s recommended adhesive for pipe insulation . J. All adhesives, sealers, staples, bands and cement shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer for the application . K. Any insulation, vapor barrier, or fitting insulation which is damaged shall be removed and shall be replaced with new. L. When insulation is complete, all surfaces of piping, fittings, and equipment shall be insulated in such a manner to prevent heat loss or heat gain, and to prevent condensation. 14. All insulation shall be rat, vermin, germ, fungus and rot resistant . 15200 - 3 SECTION 15200 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION N . At pipe hangers, furnish and install wooden blocks the same thickness as the insulation. Blocks are intended to prevent the crushing of the insulation . Blocks shall be installed by cutting and removing the fiberglass without interrupting the vapor barrier . r0. In lieu of the wooden blocks at pipe hangers, this contractor may, at his option, furnish and install rigid insulation saddle, consisting of calcium silicate insulation with vapor barrier jacket . Thermal conductivity of 0. 13 BTU/HR/FT2/ ' F/IN @ 75 ' F. Insulation saddle lengths shall be 6" for pipes 6" and smaller . Insulation thickness shall be the same as pipe insulation. 200 . 5 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Thickness shall. comply with the following schedule based on nominal inside pipe or tubing size. SURFACE OPERA'T'ING TEMPERATURE 35 ' 120 ' PIPE to to SIZE 119' F 200 ' F 1/2 1 1-1/2 3/4 1 1-1/2 1 1 1-1/2 1-1/4 1 1-1/2 1-1/2 1. 1-1/2 B. The following piping requires field applied insulation : 1) Heating hot water supply and return Code (1) piping (120-200' F) 200 . 6 REFRIGERANT PIPING INSULATION ' PIPE SIZE THICKNESS MATERIAL All sizes ' Suction 1/2" Code (3) Hot gas 1/2" Code (3) 200 . 7 WORK EXCLUDED A. Work not included in this Section as specified in other Divisions or Sections of these project 15200 - 4 1 SECTION 15200 PINE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION specifications consist of, but shall not be limited to the following items : 1) Factory internal insulation of air handling units . - Section 15620. 1 2) Internal. thermal and acoustical duct liner.: Section 15900 . 3) Insulation saddles for the piping system - Section 1.5100. ' 4) Building insulation Division 7 . s 4 i i•. i 15200 - 5 T' �sf t � SECTION 15612 AIR FILTERS SECTION 15612 - AIR. FILTERS 612 . 1 Air. Filters A) Air filter selection has been based on Camfil Farr Co. to establish the de-.sired style, quality, and type . Equal. products, complying with these specifications, by the following manufacturers are acceptable : ' 1) American Air. Filter. 2) Continental Air Filter 3) Eco-Air B) Filters shall comply with the following : 1) Efficiencies shall be as scheduled or as hereinafter listed . Efficiencies shall be based on average atmospheric dustspot efficiencies tested in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52 . 1- 1992 . 2) Cartridges shall be UL tested as Class 2 filters . 3) Cartridge shall consist of a rigid frame to which the filter media is attached. Filter media and frame shall be factory sealed against leakage . 4) Air handling unit filters shall consist of multiple, pleated type, 30% efficient, with an initial resistance of 0 . 15" w. c . , and a final resistance of 0 . 3 " w. c. , Farr 30/30 . ' S) Filter shall fit into existing filter mounting tracks with factory installed gaskets which shall prevent leakage between the filter and track. Provide gaskets on each filter to prevent air ' leakage between the filters . 6) The contractor shall. furnish and install new filters as noted above at the end of Phase II , Phase III and Phase IV of the construction schedule . This work shall include all (5) air handlers. 1.5612 1 CI C2 -- , C2 C2 CI I? 9 tYP tYP } CI C2 G?.RPET DE516N R1 N.T.S. ROOM 114 (RM 114 RM 144 SIM) INTERIOR LOWER LEVEL RENOVATION SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWING JOHN 0. CHROSTV MUMCIPAL BUlDING A101-R1 320 EAST MCCAM ST. Inc. JEFFERSON CITY, MISSOURI PROD: 0033 DATE: 2-13-02 J�11•ru. OIfY. Mluaurl I p W000 TRIM,PAINTED AT ALL PJQV—'W PAM rt�rt �PLYWom.PAINTED 2 (TYl') X4 WOOD 5TLIDS -_._.._._..._ .. c I�� G/hSEWURK ELE��P�TION 51M, GASEWORK SECTION :3) 2xG WOOD 5TUD ITYI7 l I/2'PLYW1000,PNNTED� I/2'PLYWOOD.P IMI) 314'PLYWOOD 5tt41. (rm - - - - rAmm �,I. I 2x4 WOOD PRAMING ���"i�`� ---DO WOOD GRIM, XT BC I x WWO TRIM,PNNTLD--`1 --- gUPPORT AT GLtt BlJ4A L^l\\ ,,• j=��•••rt• -DOUSIt 2XG SUPPORT tIED (Ix W "�--- J51MMON ANUX)R5 AT ENa, W��Tp_ 2XC51 GrRlaiOR5rAM5 cr WTR1 SIM1 ANCt10R9 AT tNO3 /2'PLYr�C)00,PNNtT7D> I •----IJl'�.-- -- — — — SHELF '—SECTION NOTE: Izl — - PAINT ALL EXPO5ED PLYWOOD AND FRAMING (COLOR BY ARCHITECT) NT5 PLYWOOD GRADE: race Grade A/Back Grade C - where one 51de of plywood 15 exposed INTERIOR LOWER LEVEL RENOVATION SUPPLEMENTAL_ DRAWING JOHN 0I. OHMSTV PN9UMICIPAL BM®ONS A602-R1 320 EAST McCARTY ST. Inc. JEFFERSON CITY, MISSOURI PROJ: 0033 DATE: 2-13-02 ' .l.�r.•..n airy. ►ii...�ri I cri IZ rA. !2 cr Ir 2 tu cs 1 - (4 r'4 �W\ORK st, 5 PHA W r__ L — ------ --- ---- p_;Z _ 0011_ AREA- 9 X_ F I J c L J 4 2" X_ - -I z L AIJU- _j LAIRLA — ID p WORK,_* �Y, X-52"XI6" HASEI 5r tX1 0 _j a z (X-AfIU-3) X-2"CW 0 LM > 0 F_Q 1 X--50"x16" __50 X1 X--72 x16" Y--7c X16" X_ z < o (X-Aliti--3) -J (X--A JU-A) (X--Al U--4) - (X_ w 0- co ric U) S2 2" CAPPE i U ------------ X­ M — 2 0 Z FOR FUlU 1 (X- 9 :) -EXISTING AHU-1 LL 2 0 'IIIRU 5 CONTROI 2-1/2" D )UBI.E CHECK, cc I- z PANELS (HON[YKII) DOUDL� GhlE BACKFLOW 13:w CD 0 cl) PREVEO'llf ([3f(13[P--1). 0 6, co w _j E z NORTH MAW m 0033 MECHANICAL RENOVATION F) [_ AN --- [DIPI-N SCALE: 1/8" V-0" ADDINDUM #1 02-13-02 SHM OF IZ[,NOV AJ10N_A01.I-S: 1 l the contractor shall furnish and install a new air cooled condensing unit (CU-4) as shown, scheduled, arid specified. Furnish and install sited per monuloc(urers I ecorninendo I ions. Phase 5 Work". Iu The contrKtOr shall f0iniSh and ilIM011 0 new IlIrl'ITIOSIOliC WrI1101 W, valve at the existing ho.,,choord. Volvo shall be a Donfoss model IRA 2000. The contractor shall furnish and install new 3/4" hot water supply piping from the main above the ceiling down at the wall to the existing baseboard piping. Furnish and install new shut-off valve, and ti fliermostalic control valve with wall mounted thermostat (Donfos; S model IRA 2.000 with 013G5068), requires 26 foot capillary tube for control. the contractor shall furnish and install new 3/4" hot water return piping from the main above the ceiling down at the wall to the existing baseboard piping. Furnish and install a new balancing valve and shut-off valve. The contractor shall cut and install a section of the existing baseboard cover, removed and saved under demolition note 9, to provide a continuous cover wall to wall. The contractor shall furnish and install new 3/4" hot water supply piping from the main above the ceiling down at the wall to the existing baseboard. Furnish and install a new thermostatic control valve at the existing baseboard, valve shall be a Donfoss model RA . 2000. - - The contractor shall furnish and install a new section of finned tube radiation (5'-0" in length). Furnish and install now 3/4" piping (supply and return) to the finned tube, new balance valve on the return pipe, and new thermostatic control valve, Donfoss model no. z _j 02 RA 2000 on the supply pipe at the baseboard cover. c: m P:7M Im 8] The contractor shall reinstall the existing 111'•-0" section of finned 0 _J tube baseboard radiation at the location shown. Reconnect to the z < 0 existing return piping arid connect new supply piping to unit. W CL 0 0 191 The contractor shall disconnect and remove the existing cooling coil in the .xt5finq­oirJ)p'ndler (X-.AliU--4) and associated refrigerant lines. � Phosc! 5 work.) 0 IL-01 The contractor shall furnish and install a new DX-COOLING COIL into O co rr the existing air handler (X-AHU--4), see schedule. The contructor R 8 shall furnish and install new refrigerant line sets from new coil to 3: m (.) new air cooled condensing unit. Reffli 1 ntAkms,-c1kqI1 be sized (is per manufacturers recommendations.�1�1'110se 5 work. Z The contractor shall route new IIWS and HWR piping from existing 3: pipe mains to now hot water coils on the new fan turminal units 0 (FTU). See Mail for piping of new coils. n MY* __77 2 M 4. 2 ADDENDUM #1 02-13--02 8HEU OF as w TO NEW AIR COOLED CONDENSATE UNIT � c s . FREON SUCTION FREON LIQUID FREON SUCTION FREON LIQUID REFRIGERANT DRYER ``�-- SIGHT GLASS J J 72-1 - EXPANSION VALVE.OIL TRAP \ ¢ ro o •. > .J LTC Z Q Ly O ,1- w CL NEW COIL o z w � U) 0 o � N x R __ o s /1IfR HANDLING UNI ► _Jd , Pl-I?I:N.G� NO SCALE T r�lin5r: i wo l 1 Z Pf4M=wa aoa DATM 01 n" 5. 11 ADDENDUM #1 02-13-02, SHEET °F V) 01 52 ir V) 11 fill Ln I,J w (A cl, 111 C) > IX) c)C�-) Ll j V;I L, .J M rn C) A-i m U UJ C..) M L,Jtj t,)tj I U- Ld CY i- Cl. C) C-) C) In C:) gn- w 0 t-::i - < Ww Cl- u n- w LL- CO (0 z C.D 23 U. z cli tri LLI CL x u C3 (Ji.Z.: C'4 Ch UL 0 c-) -ri, cj U- 11) Wi cc w ----------- 0 [A cc o co Ul Qj A >< VI Ln < z< -V- < T Or n. —j < " PROM="M Do" n DAM 0%ft ADDENDUM #1 02OHM OF -13-02 1 AC-06P. CER`fiFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE OP IMIMM01YY) "aC1IEP-2 03 21 0x THIS IS ISSUED AS A MArrER OF WILLIAMS & ASSOCIATES ONLY AND CERTIFICATE CONFERS NOR RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICA E?ION SURANCE AGENCY INC HOLDER.THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR BOX 707' ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. INCY IL 62306-0707 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE 888-7'10-7700 I�AX:�17-228-13348 OVAI111:11A Cincinnati Ins. Co._._. -._.__.__.___---.._--------M_..__.._ ua:•'n+CNN Cincinnati Casunl-ty Co. Roy A. Sche erle ConsL. & __....._-__..__...._....__......________..-- G. II. Builgers, Inc. N.^•uuFl:i ____. ._..._._.............__...._...._......_.. -_._-----__..----_...___-_-__....,___.____....«_ P.O. Box 995 Jeefft_-L bUIL C i Cy 1-10 155101 ..._...._.__. COVERAGES THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELIDW HAV(_BFFLN Ii;5L11•D 1'0 Tilt: ir)SORf_U NAMCD AW)VE FON TI IF POLICY PFRIOD INDICATED NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REOUIREMENT TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONt FtAC f OF1 OT'HEiR DOCUMENT WITH I(kS{°F.::1 TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY 81'ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN THE INSURANCE AFFOUDED BY 1HE POLICIES DFSCRIHEU i4FREiIN IS';UUJEC'-T TO AE.1. 'IHE G;cCI U:IONS AFJD CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES,AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWtJ MAY HAVE ❑EE(l ItL'DUCFU BY PAID CLAIM:; INi.H T I P E Or IN•it)RAN C t: POLICY NUMDLN I r'nllC�l'fFCC IIVC 'Pt)LICY L•MP111AlIUlI LIMITS UAIF L.IMIUUI I YI,--- DA I F.1MMIDDIY Y1-- —, .- OCIY'NAL LIARILII r I i ILA;,,;1((1 I+1+L1JC( t 1000000 V..., l q �,'ONM(r.(`AI ..1.11 r.Al LAI",IT. PENDi NG ; 0: /1.7/02 i O5./1 /03 UI-c;.A�nclw�,rr,,�i'�.�.....- t 100000 - 7 I I _. ( i MI Uf r1"A+r, v.r;rr,lru�1 S 5000 LADY It KITTY t 1000000 - _ -�__ n(r,l uA, A(Ild+l(.A I1- t 2000000 ( Il A(,(rlll.:r1•il'.Il.llf A)'{'_il:•,1't;(• i i f'1+' •i rf ',..((,1.11'/1 11•A(i,: 1 s2000000 , . 1 . .. .. 1 (.. , I I .. _._.._.. ...... ........_.. _. AII1OMOU1Lh LIA•IIU I !,(11.111,:C):iI46Lf.11lAlt �— =�AJ:V AI11(1 PE ND ING i 02/1'7/02 02/17 S 1000000/03 ILIA A(.I11A1�N .__----_-_-- A1.L Of,NCD A.1-,IT , I (•C(Ll.v�.nur C r'I:(I,%A:L•r A.l?(?: � 11-.-r I,,- Z rINFO (!1)011,1 NJ 11 I:1 t x Nr,IA(,.�,+(:(:A11•�. IiNSURAN R EWED 110E LIAA1L 111 _. r r!'.f?•a.1.(:A At(IOLNI S AT"Af4l.117(11 Date: (/ L I I ..___.ILA A(;(•.- _S_.__.--_.............._ .___ Geeeec uA4u1rY En(-II noel nnLNC¢ t 5000000 Z�nccllr, <IAnA•;MAnr 1?f:;NDINC 02/17/02 ( 02/17/03 Acnt+eaATr `�— t 5000000 DEDUCTILILE s Z RETENnON S O WORMERS COMPENSATION AND _X IORV LIMIT::- EO _ EMPLOYEHS'LIABILITY -- B PENDING 02/17/02 02/3.7/03 f L U-ACr1AC(aDEta S1000000 6c.-p+s(:u_t�LACIAP:. YEE t 1.000000 11. 061A.-;e-1101,IV LIMIT t 1000000 Builders' Risk PENDTTIG 02/17/02 02/17/03 I Builders 300000 _ _ L__. _---- i_ I__ 1U.s k ICRIPTION OF OPUF/ATIONS/LOCAT(ONS/VEHICLESICACLUGIOtJ:AUOrD LIT fifJU Oh[.CMGNII!:1•CL'IIL P11DVIAONS � Limits shown are those at policy inception. 'Phis 1S with rr_gcu-d to PT:a.jeCt 033 - JOhn G. Christy Municipal Building - Tntf!rlor. Lower 'level novations. RTIFICATE HOLDER N i ADDITIONAL INSURED.u1sL,NEnLETTER ^- CANCELLATION .717, 'F ER4 SHOULD ANY OF TiIC Auovc DLSCRIncD POLICIES UE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE TIIERrnr.TeIE ISSUING INSUR 30,CR WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL _.DAYS WRITTEN ' City of Jef.fer sort city, MO NOTICU TO THE CCR71F ICATE 1101.130I NAMCO TO THE LEFT,BUT FAILURE TO 00 SO SKALL Patrick E. Sullivan PE 320 E. McCarty Street IMPOSE NO(OBLIGATION OR I.LAIIILITY nr ANY HINO UPON THE INSUIIER.ITS AGENTS OR Jefferson City Edo 65101 NEPRVbENTATIna. AUTHORVU0 11EPHESENTATIVE W113.1ncns & Atisoc.Ins.A Inc. � 03RD 25.S(7107) 0 ACORD CORPORATION 1088 AC INSURANCE BINDER CSR A T111A Fuwnrn IF ArpmpnpAoy w.qtjpAmcF:cnpjTRACT,SUBJECT TO THE CONDITIONS SHOWN ON T14E REVERSE SIDE OF THIS FORM. W1 1LIAMS & ASSOCIATES COMPANY BINDER 1 2400 SURANCE AGENCY INC Cincinnati Ins Co. BOX 707 OATG---------- TIMU QUINCY IL 62306-0707 1-i 03/20/02 1 •,,j 04/.- WIG?, 888-720-7700 FAX:217-228-8348 'T x FILQ I.-Ailirm IG POLWY a, OCPS473702 coaq. 12-213 1.1un I1110.11i. 710—FINETY- WIT011,41111 ILI i: INSURSO City of Jefferson Cj.ty, 1,10 Lowur. L(!Vel Renovations OCP Vrotective. John G. Christy c/o GBI1 B%xi-Lda-r:-,, Inc, Munici.pal Bldg 320 E. I•IcCarty P.O. Box 945 51.xeet, 'Teffer.,;011 City, 1,10 Jefferson City 1,10 65 1.02 COVERAGES UmiTs 01 TYPE OF 11`491,44AIMI; COVEI.Aucip Oflm-i .....CEOLICIIIII.r. PROP 6RTY C I GENERAL UAf111.ITr (1 � !A( s2000000 CLAM; zli It- W(A4,y Olt,III(Vt1l) Owner k Contractor: I-rot. I'l-WMILAI,A N.)V INA)PY -(;[N(-RAI.AOGRL(GATE 12000000 011 t1g)01-1 ),)It NILIDL PPODUCIS-COMP/01"AGG EAUTOMOOILE LIAWLITY _C-21AHINEA)SINIGI-It LIMIT 17 Hor)lk,e Ip1A)rY(plor pe,m) S ALL CA%?1f'1)At,'0S EMIUL v IMI)ry(P,,a,rld-l) C11COt ILEO A.tr(;': PIMPEPTY DAMAGE ED Atli 0,; INIONYPPOT 104flzik,9W MOTOR11ir WLITO PHYllICAL DAMAGE W-01 K,TItIff At L A 111''I,I, ACTIAL Ckq,l VALLIE lipCOI L.111111 UTATEn AMOUNT It 0THvF1 1vwj(,("I. 0714un SARAGE LIABILITY At 17 It ONLY ZUNI -Y AtilTI, 01HU'lit IIWJALrTO ONLY EACH ACCIDENT ArMnCr.ATI: AWiR(.6AW _Nv .IN.)tj STATUTORY LIMITS WORKER'S COMPENSATION E L EACH ACCIDENT AN D CPAPLOYEWS LIABILITY V-L_LNSEASE•EA EMPLOYEE EL D(SEASE•POLICY UMrr S This binder is in Itru of t.hn policy pnOciing. The poltvy number is 113vold ITUI* $ CONDITIOHNI above, OTHER COVITRACCIC -- F.MMATEE)T:)TAt.PREMIUM NAME&ADDRESS U(1141(001.-I' AnOITIONAL INSUnIED PAYE.I. (.0A)4 v ALIIII(MMED PrPFIFNENTATIVE William-, & A-suoa Inn � ECORD 75-S(108) NOTE:IMPORTANT STATE INFORMATION ON REVERSE SIDE QD ACORD CORPORATION 1903